
The Forever Man,
by Gordon R. Dickson

[Online version, v1.5, remaining errors marked ~]

Chapter 1.

The phone was ringing. He came up out of a sleep as dark as death,
fumbled at the glowing button in the phone's base with numb fingers and
punched it. The ringing ceased.

"Wander here," he mumbled. An officer he did not recognize showed on the
screen.

"Major, this is Assignment. Lieutenant Van Lee. Laagi showing upward of
thirty ships facing our sector of the Frontier. Scramble, sir."

"Right," he muttered.

There was no reason for the Laagi to start putting extra ships into that
part of their territory that faced the North American Sector, and
necessitate an all-personnel call-out of the ship-handling
crews-including people like himself who had just come back in off patrol
out there six hours ago.

But then, attacking or running, the Laagi made no sense. They never had.

"You're to show in Conference Room K at four hundred hours. Bring your
personals."

"Right." Groggily he rolled over on his stomach and squinted at his watch
in the glow from the button on the phone. In the pale light, the figures
on his wrist-com stood at twelve minutes after three-three hundred twelve
hours. Enough time.

"Understood, sir?"

"Understood, Lieutenant," he said.

"Very good, sir. Out."

The phone went dead. For a moment the desire for sleep sucked at Jim
Wander like some great black bog; then with a convulsive jerk he threw it
and the covers off him in one motion and sat up on the edge of his bed in
the darkness, scrubbing at his face with an awkward hand.

After a second, he turned the light on, got up, showered and dressed. As
he shaved, he watched his face in the mirror. It was still made up of the
same roughly squarish, large-boned features he remembered, but the lines
about the mouth and between the eyebrows seemed deepened with the sleep,
under the tousled black hair, coarsely curling up from his forehead. It
could not be drink, he thought. He never drank except on leave, nowadays.
Alcohol at other times did nothing for him anymore. It was just that now
he slept like a log, like a log watersoaked and drowning in some
bottomless lake.

He had not gone stale. Out on the Frontier he was as good as ever. But he
needed something - what, he could not specify. He felt the lack of it,
like the emptiness of a long-empty stomach inside him. But it was not
hunger, because he was fed regularly; and it was not women, as his
friends suggested, because he had no trouble finding women on his leaves
from duty. What he wanted was to come to grips with something. That was
it, to have a wall behind him he could set his back against and a job to
do in front of him, where he could see himself getting it done, instead of
fighting an endless war and getting nowhere, surrounded by those who
found simply being in the war enough to justify their existence.

He needed to accomplish something and find someone who understood what it
was like to have that need.

He got up and started getting himself ready for duty.

When he was finally dressed, he strapped on last of all his "personals,"
his sidearm, the painkiller kit, the little green thumbnailsquare box
holding the x-capsule. Then he left his room, went down the long,
sleeping corridor of the officers' quarters and out a side door into the
darkness of predawn and the rain.

He could have gone around by the interior corridors to the Operations
building, but it was a short cut across the quadrangle and the rain and
chill would wake him, drive the last longing for sleep from his bones. As
he stepped out of the door the invisible rain, driven by a light wind,
hit him in the face. Beyond were the blurred lights of the Operations
building across the quadrangle.

Far off to his left thunder rolled. Tinny thunder, the kind heard at high
altitudes, in the mountains. Beyond the rain and darkness were the
Rockies. Above the Rockies, the clouds. And beyond the clouds, space,
stretching light-years of distance to the Frontier.

-To where he would doubtless be before the dawn rose, above this
quadrangle, above these buildings, these mountains, and this Earth.

He entered the Operations building, showed his identification to the
Officer of the Day, and took the lift tube up to the fourth floor. The
frosted pane of the door to Conference Room F glowed with a brisk,
interior light. He knocked on the door and went in without waiting for an
answer. Inside, the room was half-full of pilots like himself and their
gunners.

"Oh, Jim!" said the colonel behind the briefing desk. "Not here. They
want you in Conference Room K, this time."

Jim grunted. He had forgotten. He went out. One floor down and halfway
down the corridor to the right was Conference K. Jim went in this time
without even knocking-and stopped. Like all conference rooms in
Operations, it had one desk and many chairs. This room also had two
people, one of whom was General Louis Mollen, Sub-Chief of Operations,
and the other was a woman Jim did not know.

Mollen, round and hard-bodied as a medicine ball, with a head to match,
sat behind the desk; and in a chair half-facing him was a woman in
military flight clothes, in her midtwenties,lean and highforeheaded, with
the fresh skin and clear eyes of someone who has spent most of her years
inside walls, sheltered from the weather. Under reddish blond hair her
eyes were blue-green, in a face that was rectangular, with the jawlines
sloping straight down to a small, square chin. It was not a remarkable
face. Nor was it unremarkable. It was a strong, determined face.

"Sorry, sir. I should have knocked," said Jim.

"Not important," said Mollen. "Come in."

Jim came in and both the other two stood up as he approached the desk.
They watched him closely, and Jim found himself examining the woman. The
flight coveralls she wore had been fitted to her, which meant she was not
just a civilian fitted out by the supply depot for this occasion. At the
same time something about her did not belong in the Operations building;
and Jim, out of the dullness of the fatigue that was still on him and the
emptiness in him, found himself twinged by a sudden and reasonless
resentment at her presence here, at the moment of a scramble. She looked
unnaturally wideawake and competent for this dark hour of the morning. Of
course, so did Mollen; but that was different.

Jim stopped in front of the desk.

"Jim," said the general, deep-voiced, his round, snubnosed, pugnacious
face unsmiling. "I want you to meet Dr. Mary Gallegher. She's from the
Geriatrics Bureau."

She would be, thought Jim sourly, reaching out to shake hands with her.
Mary Gallegher was almost as tall as Jim himself, who at five feet ten
was near the upper limit in height for the cramped quarters of the
pilot's com seat of a fighter ship, and her handshake was not weak. But
still...here she was, thought Jim, still resenting her for being someone
as young as Jim himself, full of the juices of living, and with all her
attention focused on the gray and tottering endyears of life. A
bodysnatcher - a snatcher of old bodies from the brink of the grave for a
few months or a few years.

"Pleased to meet you, Mary," he said.

"Good to meet you, Jim."

"Sit down," said the general. Jim pulled up a chair and they all sat down
once more around the desk.

"What's up, sir?" asked Jim. "They told me it was a gmeral callout."

"The call-out's a fake. Just an excuse to put extra ships on the Frontier
for something special," answered Mollen. "The something special's why
Mary's here. And you. What do you remember about the Sixty Ships Battle?"

"It was right after we found we had a frontier in common with the Laagi,
wasn't it?" said Jim, slightly puzzled. "Over one hundred years ago or
so. Back before we found out logistics made mass spaceship battles
unworkable. Sixty of ours met forty-some of theirs beyond the Frontier,
as it is now, and theirs were better. What about it?"

"Do you remember how the battle came out?" It was the civilian, Mary
Gallegher, leaning forward with an intensity that puzzled him.

Jim shrugged.

"They were better, as I say. Our ships were slower then. We hadn't
started to design them for guarding a frontier, instead of fighting
pitched battles. They cut us up and suckered what was left into staying
clumped together while they set off a nova explosion," he said. He looked
into her eyes and spoke deliberately. "The ships on the edge of the
explosion were burned up like paper cutouts. The ones in the center just
disappeared."

"Disappeared," said Mary Gallegher. She did not seem disturbed by Jim's
description of the explosion. "That's the right word. How long ago did
you say this was?"

"Over a hundred years ago," said Jim. He turned and looked at General
Mollen, with a glance that said plainly, 'What is this, sir?'

"Look here, Jim," said the general. "We've got something to show you."

He pushed aside the few papers on the surface of the table in front of
him and touched some studs on the control console near the edge of the
top. The overhead lights dimmed. The surface of the table became
transparent and gave way to a scene of stars. To the three seated around
the desk top it was as if they looked down and out into an area of space
a thousand light-years across. To the civilian, Jim was thinking, the
stars would be only a maze. To Jim himself, the image was long familiar.

Mollen's hands did things with the studs. Two hazy spheres of dim light,
each about a hundred and fifty lightyears in diameter along its longest
axis, sprang into view, bright enough to establish their position and
volume, not so bright as to hide the stars they enclosed. The center of
one of the spheres was the ~surf of Earth, and the farthest extent of this
sphere in one direction intermixed with an edge of the other.

"Our area of space." said Mollen's voice, out of the dimness around the
table. "-And the Laagi's, Mary. They block our expansion in that
direction, and we block theirs in this. The distribution of the stars in
this view being what it is, it's not practical for either race to go
around the other. You see the Frontier area, Mary?"

"Where the two come together, yes," said Mary.

"Now Jim-" said Mollen. "Jim commands a Wing of our Frontier Guard ships,
and he knows that area well. Nothing but unmanned drones of ours have
ever gotten deep into Laagi territory beyond the Frontier and come back
out again. Agreed, Jim?"

"Agreed, sir," said Jim. "More than twenty, thirty lightyears deep is
suicide."

"Well, perhaps," said Mollen. "But let me go on. The Sixty Ships Battle
was fought a hundred and twelve years ago-here." A bright point of light
sprang into existence in the Frontier area. "One of the ships engaged in
it was a one-man vessel with a semianimate automatic control system,
named by its pilot La Chasse Gallerie, you said something, Jim?"

The exclamation had emerged from Jim's lips involuntarily. And at the
same time, foolishly, a slight shiver had run down his back. It had been
years since he had run across the old tale as a boy.

"It's a French-Canadian ghost legend, sir," he said. "The legend was that
voyageurs who had left their homes in Eastern Canada to go out on the fur
trade routes and who had died out there would be able to come back home
one night of the year. New Year's night. They'd come sailing in through
the storms and snow in ghost canoes, to join the people back home and
kiss the girls they now wouldn't ever be seeing again. That's what they
called the story, 'La Chasse Gallerie.' It means the hunting of a type of
butterfly that invades beehives to steal honey."

"The pilot of this ship was a Canadian," said Mollen. "Raoul Penard." He
coughed dryly. "He was greatly attached to his home. La Chasse Gallerie
was one of the ships near the center of the nova explosion, one of the
ones that disappeared. At that time we didn't realize that the nova
explosion was merely a destructive application of the principle used in
phase-shift drive. You've heard of the statistical chance that a ship
caught just right by a nova explosion could be transported instead of
destroyed, Jim?"

"I'd hate to count on it, sir," said Jim. "Anyway, what's the difference?
Modern ships can't be anticipated or held still long enough for any kind
of explosion to be effective. The Laagi haven't used the nova for eighty
years. Neither have we."

"True enough," said Mollen. "But we aren't talking about modern ships.
Look at the desk schema, Jim. Forty-three hours ago, one of our deep,
unmanned probes returned from far into Laagi territory with pictures of a
ship. Look."

Jim heard a stud click. The stars shifted and drew back. Floating against
a backdrop of unknown stars he saw the oldfashioned cone shape of a
one-man space battlecraft, of a type forgotten eighty years before. The
view moved in close and he saw a name, abraded by dust and dimmed, but
readable on the hull.

La Chasse Gallerie-The breath caught in his throat.

"It's been floating around in Laagi territory all this time?" Jim said.
"I can't believe-"

"More than that-" Mollen interrupted him, "that ship's under pilotage and
moving." A stud clicked. The original scene came back. A bright line
began at the extreme edge of the desk and began to creep toward the back
limits of Laagi territory. It entered the territory and began to pass
through.

"You see," said Mollen's voice out of the dimness, "it's coming back from
wherever the nova explosion kicked it to, over one hundred years ago.
It's headed back toward our own territory. It's headed back, toward
Earth."

Jim stared at the line in fascination.

"No," he heard himself saying. "It can't be. It's some sort of Laagi
trick. They've got a Laagi pilot aboard-"

"Listen," said Mollen. "The probe heard talking inside the ship. And it
recorded. Listen-"

Again, there was the faint snap of a stud. A voice, a human voice,
singing raggedly, almost absentmindedly to itself, entered the air of the
room and rang on Jim's ears.

...en roulant ma boule, roulant, roulant ma boule, roulant...

The singing broke off and the voice dropped into a mutter of a voice that
switched back and forth between French and English, speaking to itself.
Jim, who had all but forgotten the little French he had picked up as a
boy in Quebec, was barely able to make out that the owner of the voice
was carrying on a running commentary on the housekeeping duties he was
doing about the ship. Talking to himself after the fashion of hermits and
lonely men.

"All right," said Jim, even while he wondered why he was protesting such
strong evidence at all. "Didn't you say they had the early sernianimate
control systems then? They used brain tissue grown in a culture, didn't
they? It's just the control system, parroting what it's heard, following
out an early order to bring the ship back."

"Look again," said Mollen. The view changed once more to a close-up of La
Chasse Gallerie. Jim looked and saw wounds in the dust-scarred hull-the
slashing cuts of modern light weapons, refinements of the ancient laser
beam-guns.

"The ship's already had its first encounter with the Laagi on its way
home. It met three ships of a Laagi patrol-and fought them off."

"Fought them off? That old hulk?" Jim stared into the dimness where
Mollen's face should be. "Three modern Laagi ships?"

"That's right," said Mollen. "It killed two and escaped from the
third and by rights it ought to be dead itself, but it's still coming, on
ordinary drive, evidently. It's not phaseshifting. Now, a control system
might record a voice and head a ship home, but it can't fight off odds of
three to one. That takes a living mind."

A stud clicked. Dazzling overhead light sprang on again and the desk top
was only a desk top. Blinking in the illumination, Jim saw Mollen looking
across at him.

"Jim," said the general, "this is a volunteer mission. That ship is still
well in Laagi territory and it's going to be hit again before it reaches
the Frontier. Next time it'll be cut to ribbons, or captured. We can't
afford to have that happen. Its pilot, this Raoul Penard, has got too
much to tell us, even beginning with the fact of how he happens to be
alive in space at well over a hundred years of age." He watched Jim
closely. "Jim, I'm asking you to take a Section of four ships in to meet.
La Chasse Gallerie and bring her out."

Jim stared at him. He found himself involuntarily wetting his lips and
stopped the gesture.

"How deep?" he asked.

"At least eighty light-years in toward the heart of Laagi territory,"
said Mollen bluntly. "If you want to turn it down, Jim, say so now. The
man who pulls this off has got to go into it believing he can make it
back out again."

"Mat's me," said Jim. He laughed, the bare husk of a laugh. "That's the
way I operate, General. I volunteer."

"Good," said Mollen. He sat back in his chair. "There's just one more
thing, then. Raoul Penard is older than any human being has a right to be
and he's pretty certainly senile, if not out-and-out insane. We'll want a
trained observer along to get as much information out of contact with the
man as we can, in case you lose him and his ship, getting back. That
calls for someone with a unique background and experience in geriatrics
and all the knowledge of the aging process. So Mary, here, is going to be
that observer. She'll replace your regular gunner and ride in a two-man
ship with you."

It was like a hard punch in the belly. Jim sucked in air and found he had
jerked erect. Both of the others watched him. He waited a second, to get
his voice under control. He spoke first to the general.

"Sir, I'll need a gunner. If there was ever a job where I'd need
a gunner, it'd be this one."

"As a matter of fact," said Mollen slowly-and Jim could feel that this
answer had been ready and waiting for him- "Mary, here, is a gunner-a
good one. She's a captain in the Reserve, Forty-second Training Squadron.
With a ninety-two point six efficiency rating."

"But she's still a weekend warrior-" Jim swung about to face her. "Have
you even done a tour of duty? Real duty? On the Frontier?"

"I think you know I haven't, Major," said Mary evenly. "If I had you'd
have recognized me. We're about the same age and there aren't that many
on Frontier duty."

"Then do you know what it's like, Captain-what it can be like out there?"
raged Jim. He was trying to keep the edge out of his voice but he could
hear it there in spite of all he could do. "Do you know how the Laagi can
come out of nowhere? Do you know you can be hit before you know anyone's
anywhere near around? Or the ship next to you can be hit and the screens
have to stay open-that's regulation, in case of the one-in-a-million
chance that there's something can be done for whoever's in the hit ship?
Do you know what it's like to sit there and watch someone you've lived
with burning to death in a cabin he can't get out of? Or spilled out of
a ship cut wide open, and lost back there somewhere...alive but lost...
where you'll never be able to find him? Do you know what it might be like
to be spilled out and lost yourself, and faced with the choice of living
three weeks, a month, two months in your suit in the one-in-a-million
chance of being found after all, or of taking your x-capsule? Do you know
what that's like?"

"I know of it," said Mary. Her face had not changed. "The same way you
do, as a series of possibilities, for the most part. I've seen visual and
audible recordings of what you talk about. I know it as well as I can
without having been wounded or killed myself."

"I don't think you do!" snapped Jim raggedly. His voice was shaking. He
saw Mary turn to look at the general.

"Louis," she said, "perhaps we should ask for another volunteer?"

"Jim's our best man," said Mollen. He had not moved, or changed his
expression, watching them both from behind the desk. "If I had a better
Wing Cee-or an equal one who was fresher-I'd have called on him or her
instead. But what you're after is just about impossible; and only someone
who can do the impossible has a hope of bringing it off. That's Jim. It's
like athletic skills. Every so often a champion comes along, one in
billions of people, who isn't just one notch up from the next contenders,
but ten notches up from the nearest best. There's no point in sending you
and five ships into Laagi territory with anyone else in command. You
simply wouldn't come back. With Jim, you might."

"I see," said Mary. She looked at Jim. "Regardless, I'm going."

"And you're taking her, Jim," said Mollen, "or turning down the mission."

"And if I turn it down?" Jim darted a glance at the general.

"I'll answer that," said Mary. Jim looked back at her. "If necessary, my
Bureau will requisition a ship and I'll go alone."

Jim stared back at her for a long moment, and felt the rage drain slowly
away from him, to be replaced by a great weariness.

"All right," he said. "All right, Mary-General. I'll head the mission."
He breathed deeply and glanced over Mary's coveralls. "How long'll it
take you to get ready?"

"I'm ready now," said Mary. She reached down to the floor behind the desk
and came up with a package of personals: sidearm, med-kit and x-box. "The
sooner the better."

"All right. The five ships of the Section are manned and waiting for
you," said Mollen. He stood up behind the desk and the other two got to
their feet facing him. "I'll walk down to Transmission Section with you."


Chapter 2.

They went out together into the corridor and along it and down an
elevator tube to a tunnel with a moving floorway. They stepped onto the
gently rolling strip, which carried them forward onto a slightly faster
strip, and then to a faster, and so Fon until they were flashing down the
tunnel surrounded by air pumped at a hundred and twenty miles an hour in
the same direction they traveled, so that they would not he blown off
their feet. In a few minutes they came to the end, and air and strips
decelerated so that they slowed and stepped at last into what looked like
an ordinary office, but which was deep in the heart of a mountain. This,
the memory returned to Jim, in case the Transmission Section blew up on
one of its attempts to transmit. The statistical chance was always there.
Perhaps, this time...?

Mollen had cleared them with the officer of the duty guard and they were
moving on through other rooms to the suiting room, where Jim and Mary
climbed into the unbelievably barrel-bodied space suits that were
actually small spaceships in themselves, and in which, if they who wore
them were uninjured and still would not take their x-pills, they might
drift in space, living on recycled air and nourishments until they went
mad, or died of natural causes.

--Or were found and brought back. The one-in-a-million chance. Jim, now
fully inside his suit, locked it closed.

"All set?" It was Mollen's voice coming at him over the aud circuit of
the suit. Through the transparent window of the headpiece he saw the
older man watching him.

"All set, General." He looked over at Mary and saw her already suited and
waiting. For a moment it struck Jim that she might have been trying to
suit up fast to show she was something more than a weekend warrior, and
he felt a twinge of sympathy toward her. With the putting on of his own
suit, the old feeling of sureness had begun to flow back into him, and he
felt released. "Let's go, Captain."

~"Stick with -'Mary,"' she said, "and I'll stick with 'Jim.'" 

"Good luck," said Mollen. Together, Jim and Mary clumped across the room,
waited for the tons-heavy explosion door to swing open, then clumped
through.

On the floor of the vast cavern that was the takeoff area, five two-man
ships sat like gray-white darts, waiting. Red "manned" lights glowed by
each sealed pon on the first four they passed. Jim read their names as he
stumped on forward toward the open port of the lead ship, his ship, the
AndFriend. The other four ships were the Swallow, the Fair Maid. the Lela
and the Fourth Helen. He knew their pilots and gunners well. The Swallow
and the Fourth Helen were ships from his own command. They and the other
two were good ships handled by good people. The best.

Jim led the way aboard AndFriend and fitted himself into the forward seat
facing the controls. Through his suit's receptors, he heard Mary sliding
into the gunner's seat, behind and to the left of him. Already, in spite
of the efficiency of the suit, he thought he could smell the faint,
enclosed stink of his own sweat; and, responding to the habit of many
missions, his brain began to clear and come alive. He plugged his suit
into the controls. 

"Report," he said, One by one, in order, the Swallow, the Fair Maid, the
Lela and the Fourth Helen replied. "-Transmission Section," said Jim,
"this is Wander Section, ready and waiting for transmission."

"Acknowledged," replied the voice of the Transmission Section. There
followed a short wait, during which as always Jim was conscious, as if
through some extra sense, of the many tons weight of the collapsed
magnesium alloy of the ships' hulls bearing down on the specially
reinforced concrete of the takeoff area. "Ready to transmit."

"Acknowledged," said Jim.

"On the count of four, then," said Transmission Section's calm,
disembodied voice. "For Picket Nine, L Sector, Frontier Area,
transmission of Wander Section, five ships. Ready to phase-shift.
Counting now... three-" The unimaginable tension that always preceded
transmission from one established point to another began to build, a
gearing-up of nerves that affected all the men on all the ships alike.

"Two..." The voice of Transmission Section seemed to thunder at them
along their overwrought nerves. "One..."

"...Transmit!"

Abruptly, a wave of disorientation and nausea broke through them, and was
gone. They floated in dark and empty interstellar space, with the stars
of the Frontier area surrounding them, and a new voice spoke in their
ear.

"Identify yourself," it said. "Identify yourself. This is Formidable,
command ship for Picket Nine Sector, requesting identification."

"Wander Section. Five ships." Jim did not bother to look at his
instruments to find the space-floating sphere that was For midable. It
was out there somewhere, with twenty ships scat tered around, up to five
and a half light-years away, but all zeroed in on this reception point
where he and the other four ships had emerged. Had Jim been a Laagi Wing
or Picket Commander, he would not have transmitted into this area with
twenty ships-no, nor with twice that many. "Confirm transmission
notice from Earth, Five ship Section for deep probe Laagi territory.
Wander Section Leader, speaking."

"Transmission notice confirmed, Wander Section leader," crackled back the
voice from Picket Nine. "Mission confirmed. You will not deship.
Repeat, not deship. local Frontier area has been scouted for slipover,
and data prepared for flash transmission to you. You will accept data and
leave immediately. Please key to receive data."

"Major-" began the voice of Mary, behind him.

"Shut up," said Jim. He said it casually, without rancor, as if he was
speaking to his regular gunner, Leif Molloy. For a moment he had
forgotten that he was carrying a passenger instead of a proper gunman.
And there was no time to think about it now. "Acknowledge," he said to
Picket Nine. "Transmit data, please."

He pressed the data key and the light above it sprang into being and
glowed for nearly a full second before going dark again. That, thought
Jim, was a lot of data-at the high-speed transmission at which such
information was pumped into his ship's computing center. That was one of
the reasons the new mind-units were evolved out of solid-state physics
instead of following up the development of the older, semianimate brains
such as the one aboard the ancient La Chasse Gailerie. The semianimate
brains-living tissue in a nutrient solution-could not accept the modern
need for sudden high-speed packing of sixteen hours' worth of data into
the space of a second or so.

Also, such living tissue had to be specially protected against high
accelerations, needed to be fed and trimmed-and it died on you at the
wrong times.

All the time Jim was turning this over with one part of his mind, the
other and larger part of his thinking process was driving the gloved
fingers of his right hand. These moved over a bank of one hundred and
twenty small black buttons, ten across and twelve down, like the stops on
a piano-accordion, and with the unthinking speed and skill of the trained
operator, he punched them, requesting information out of the body of data
just pumped into his ship's computing center, building up from this a
picture of the situation, and constructing a pattern of action to be
taken as a result.

Evoked by the intricate code set up by combinations of the black buttons
under his fingers, the ghost voice of the mind-unit whispered in his ear
in a code of words and numbers hardly less intricate.

~"...transmit destination area one-eighty ElI Wye, Laagi Sector L 4~ at
point 12.5, 13.2, 64.5. Proceeding jumps 10 Eli Wyc, R inclination ~9
degrees Frontier midpoint. Optimum jumps twelve, 03 error correctable on
the first shift..."

He worked steadily. The picture began to emerge. It would not be hard
getting in. It was never hard to do that. They could reach La Chasse
Gallerie in twelve phase-shift transmissions or jumps across some
hundred and eighty light-years of distance, and locate her in the area
where she should then be, within an hour or so. Then they
could-theoretically at least-surround her, lock on, and try to improve on
the ten light-years of jump it seemed was the practical limit of her
pilot's or her control center's computing possibilities.

With modern phase-shift drive, the problem was not the ability to jump
any required distance, but the ability to compute correctly, in a
reasonable time. the direction and distance in which the move should be
made. Phase-shifting was an outgrowth of the Heisenberg Uncertainty
Principle of physics that had enunciated the fact that it was possible to
establish either the position of an electron, or its speed of movement,
but not both at the same time. When a ship activated a phase-shift it
did not move in the ordinary sense of that word. Effectively, for a
timeless moment its speed became zero and its position universal. It was
everywhere and no particular place. Then its position was established at
the destination point which had been calculated for it and its speed
became relative to its position at that point.

The problem with phase-shifting lay in that calculation. of necessity, it
had to take into account the position and current movement of the ship
about to make the jump and the position and movement of the destination
area-this in a galaxy where everything was in relative movement, and
only a mathematical fiction, the theoretical centerpoint of the galaxy
from which all distances were marked and measured, was fixed.

The greater the distance, the more involved and time-consuming the
calculations. The law of diminishing returns would set in, and the
process broke down of its own weight-it took a lifetime to calculate a
single jump to a destination it would not take quite a lifetime to reach
by smaller, more easily calcalculation time-factor that made it
impractical for the human and Laagi races to go around each others'
spatial territory. If we were all Raoul Penards, thought Jim grimly, with
two hundred and more years of life coming, it'd be different. 

-The thought chilled him; he did not know why. He put it out of his mind
and went back to the calculations.

The picture grew and completed. Re-keyed his voice to the other ships
floating in dark space around him.

"Wander Leader to Wander Section," he said. "Wander Leader to Wander
Section. Prepare to shift into Laagi territory. Key for calculations
pattern for first of twelve shifts. Acknowledge, all ships of Wander
Section."

The transmit section of his control board glowed briefly as the Swallow,
the Fair Maid, the Lela and the Fourth Helen pumped into their own
computing centers the situation and calculations he had worked out with
his. Their voices came back, acknowledging.

"Lock to destination," said Jim. "Dispersal pattern K at destination.
Repeat, pattern K, tight, hundred kilometer inter val. Hundred kilometer
interval." He glanced at the sweep second hand of the clock before him on
his control board. "Transmit in six seconds. Counting. Five. Four. Three.
Two. One. Transmit-"

Again, the disorientation, and the nausea.

Strange stars were around them. The mind-unit's lights glowed while it
verified their position and adjusted the figures for the precalculated
next jump. After a time it whispered in Jim's ear again, and-

"Check Ten," whispered Jim. It was the code for "make next jump
immediately."

"Three. Two. One. Transmit-"

Once again the wrench of dislocation. Nausea. Lights glowed in silence as
time passed again-

"Check Ten...

Ten more times they shifted, silent tension reflecting the waits for
calculations while they floated, only lights in the silent darkness. Then
they were there.

In darkness. They were alone amongst the enemy's stars. None of the other
ships registered on the instruments.

"Report," ordered Jim to the universe at large.

"Swallow." came a whisper in his earphones as from somewhere unseen a
tight beam touched the outside of the AndFriend, carrying its message to
his ears. "Fair Maid..., Lela." A slightly longer pause. "Fourth Helen."

Fourth Helen was always a laggard. Jim had warned her pilot about it a
dozen times. But now was not the hour for reprimands. They were deep in
Laagi territory, and the alien alert posts would have already picked up
the burst of energy not only from their initial transmit from Picket
Nine, which had been precalculated by the com-ship there over the hours
since La Chasse Gallerie had been discovered-and which consequently had
been able to send them with some accuracy half the distance to her-but
from the succeeding jumps that had brought them light-years deep into
Laagi territory. Communication between the ships of the Section must
be held to a minimum while the aliens were still trying to figure out
where the chain of shifts had landed the intruders.

Shortly, since they must know of the approximate position of La Chasse
Gallerie, and have ships on the way to try to kill her again, they would
put two and two together and expect to find the intruders in the same
area. But for the moment Wander Section, if it lay low and quiet, could
feel it was safely hidden in the immensities of enemy space.

Jim blocked off outside transmission, and spoke over the intercom to
Mary.

"All right, Mary," he said. "What was it you wanted to say Frontier?"

There was a slight pause before the other's voice came back.

"Major-"

"Nevermind that," said Jim. "You had it right before,' let's not go all
formal now we're in space. I apologize for the 'Captain,' earlier. What
was it you wanted, Mary?"

"All right, Jim," said the voice of Mary. "I won't bother about military
manners either, then." There was a slight grimness to the humor in her
voice. "I wanted to say I'd like to get in close enough to La Chasse
Galierie, so that we can keep a tight-beam connection with her hull at
all times and I can record everything Penard says from the time of
contact on. It'll be important."

"Don't worry," said Jim. "We're spread out and searching on instruments
for him now. If Picket Nine did a reasonable job of calculating his
progress, we should have him alongside in a few minutes. And I'll put you
right up next to him. We're going to surround him with our ships, lock
him in the middle of us with magnetics, and try to shift out as a unit,
since he doesn't seem capable of anything more than regular acceleration
on his own."

"You say he'll be along?" said Mary. "Why didn't we go directly to him?"

"And make it absolutely clear to the Laagi he's what we're after?"
answered Jim. "As long as they don't know for sure, they have to assume
we don't even know of his existence. So we stop ahead in his line of
travel-lucky he's just plugging straight ahead without trying any
dodges-and wait for him. We might even make it lock like an accidental
meeting to the Laagi-" Jim smiled inside the privacy of his suit's
headpiece without much humor. "-But don't bet on it."

"Do you think you can lock on to him without too much trouble-"

"Depends," answered Jim, "on how fast he starts shooting at us when he
sees us."

"Shooting at us?" There was incredulity in Mary's voice. "Why should
he-oh." Her voice dropped. "I see."

"That's right," said Jim. "We don't look like any human ship he ever knew
about, and he's in territory where he's going to be expecting aliens, not
friends."

"But what're you going to do, to stop him shooting?"

"They dug up the recognition signals of the Sixty Ships Battle," said
Jim. "Just pray he remembers them. And they've given me a voice signal
that my blinker lights can translate and flash at him in the code he was
working under at the time of the battle. Maybe it'll work, maybe it
won't."

"It will," said Mary calmly.

"Oh?" Jim felt harshness in his chest. "What makes you so sure?"

"It's my field, Jim. It's my business to know how the aged react. And one
of their common reactions is to forget recent events and remember the
events of long ago. Their childhood. High points of their early life-and
the Sixty Ships Battle will have been one of those."

"So you think Penard will remember?"

"I think so," said Mary.

Jim grinned again, mtrtnlessly, privately in his suit.

"You'd better be right," he said. "It's one order of impossibility to
pick him up and take him home. It's another to fight off the Laagi while
we're doing it. To fight Penard at the same time would be a third
order-and that's beyond ordinary mortals."

"Yes," said Mary. "You don't like to think of being mortal, do you,
Major-Jim?"

Jim opened his mouth to answer and shut it quickly. He sat rigid and
sweating in his suit. This-this professional-he thought, who doesn't know
what it's like to see men and women you know, die...! The shockingly
murderous reaction passed, after a moment, leaving him trembling and
spent. There was the sour taste of stomach acids in his mouth.

"Perhaps not," he said shakily over the intercom. "Perhaps not."

"Why put it in the future, Jim," said the voice of the other. "Why not
tell me plainly that you don't like people who work in geriatrics?"

"Nothing," said Jim. "It's nothing to do with me. Let them live as long
as they can."

"Something wrong with that?"

"I don't see the point of it," said Jim. "You've got the average age up
pushing a hundred. What good does it do?" His throat went a little dry. I
shouldn't talk so much, he thought. But he went on and said it anyway.
"What's the use of it?"

"People are pretty vigorous up through their nineties. If we can push it
further; here's Penard who's far over one hundred-"

"And what's the use of it? Vigorous!" said Jim, the words breaking out of
him. "Vigorous enough to totter around and sit in the sunlight! What do
you think's the retirement age from Frontier duty?"

"I know what it is," said Mary. "It's thirty-two."

"Thirty-two." Jim sneered. "So you've got all these extra vigorous years
of life for people, have you? If they're all that vigorous, why can't
they ride a Frontier ship after thirty-two? I'll tell you why. It's
because they're too old, too old physically, too old in the reflexes and
the nerves! Snatch all the ancient bodies back from the brink of the
grave, but you can't change that. So what good's your extra sixty-eight
years?"

"Maybe you ought to ask Raoul Penard that," said Mary softly.

A dark wave of pain and unhappiness rose inside Jim, so that he had to
clench his teeth to hold it back from coming out in words. 

"Nevermind him," Jim said huskily. For a second it was as if he had been
through it himself, all the endless years, refusing to die, beating his
ship back toward the Frontier, and the solar system, without being able
to phase-shift-on his long, long way home. I'll get him home, thought Jim
to himself-I'll get Penard to the home he's been after for more than a
hundred years, if I have to take him through every Laagi Picket area
between here and the Frontier. "Nevermind him," Jim said again to Mary.
"He was a fighter."

"He still is-" Mary was cut suddenly short by the ringing of the contact
alarm. Jim's fingers slapped by reflex down on his bank of buttons and
some moments later their ship swam up beside a dust-scarred cone shape
with the faded legend La Chasse Gallerie visible on its side.

     
Chapter 3.

In the same short moment, the other ships of Wander Section were
appearing around the ancient spaceship. Their magnetic beams licked out
and locked-and held-a fraction of a second before La Chasse Gallerie
bucked like a wild horse and tried to escape with a surge at many
gravities of acceleration.

Taken by surprise by a power kick that should have killed any human
aboard the long-lost vessel, the mass of the five other ships still
naanaged to hold her back.

"Hold-" Jim was whispering into the headpiece of his suit and circuits
were translating his old-fashioned phrases into blinking signal lights
beamed at the cone-shaped ship. "Hold, La Chasse Gallerie. This is a
Government Rescue Contingent, title Wander Section. Do not resist. We are
taking you in tow-" The unfitness of the ancient word jarred in Jim's
mouth as he said it. "We're taking you in tow to return you to your Base
Headquarters. Repeat..."

The flashing lights went on spelling the message out, over and over
again. La Chasse Gallerie ceased fighting and hung docilely in the net of
magnetic forces. Jim got a talk beam touching on the aged hull.

"-home," a voice was saying, the same voice he had heard recorded in
Mollen's office. "Chez....." It broke into a tangle of French that Jim
could not follow, and emerged in accented English with the cadence of
poetry...

~"Poleon, hees sojer never fight-more brave as dem poor habitants-
Chenier, he try for broke de rank~henier come dead immediatement..."

"La Chasse Gallerie. La Chasse Gallerie," Jim was saying over and over,
while the blinking lights on his hull transformed the words into a
ship's code over a century dead. "Can you understand me? Repeat, can you
understand me? If so, acknowledge. Acknowledge..."

There was no response from the dust-scarred hull, slashed by the Laagi
weapons. Only the voice, reciting what Jim now recognized as a poem by
William Henry Drummond, one of the early poets to write in the
French-accented English of the Canadian habitant in the nineteenth
century.

"....De gun dey rattle lak' tonnere-" muttered on the voice. "Just bang,
bang, bang! Dat's way she go-" Abruptly the voice of Raoul Penard shifted
to poetry; in the pure French of another poem by a medieval prisoner
looking out the tower window of his prison on the springtime, the shift
was in per fect cadence and rhyme with the earlier line.

~"Le temps a laissez ton manteau-de vent, froidure, et depluje..."

"It's no use," said Mary. "We'll have to get him back to Earth and
treatment before you'll be able to get through to him."

"All right," said Jim. "Then we'll head-"

The moan of an interior siren blasted through his suit.

"Laagi!" yelped the voice of Fourth Helen. "Five bandits, sector six-"

"Bandits. Two bandits, sector two, fifteen hundred kilometers-" broke in
the voice of Lela.

Jim swore and slapped his fingers down on the buttons. With all ships
locked together, his phase-shift impulse was sorted automatically through
the computer center of each one, so that they all shifted together in the
direction and distance he had programmed. There was the wrench of
shift-feeling-and sudden silence.

The siren had cut off. The voices were silent. Automatic dispersal had
taken place, and the other four ships were spreading out rapidly to
distances up to a thousand kilometers on all sides, their receptors
probing the empty space for half a light-year in each direction,
quivering, seeking, while AndFriend stayed locked to La Chasse
Gallerie.

"Looks like we got away." Mary's voice was eerie in its naturalness,
breaking the stillness in Jim's headpiece. "Looks like they lost us."

"The hell they did!" said Jim savagely. "They'll have unmanned detector
probes strung out all the way from here to the Frontier. They know we're
not going anyplace else."

"Then we better jump again-"

"Not yet! Shut up, will you!" Jim bit the words off hard at his lips.
"The more they collect to hit us with here, the more we leave behind when
we jump again. Sit still back there and keep your mouth shut. You're a
gunner now, not a talker."

"Yes sir." There was no mockery in Mary's voice. This time Jim did not
comment on the "sir."

The seconds moved slowly with the sweep hand of the clock in front of
Jim. The mind-unit had made its calculations and was ready to move. He
waited. Inside the headpiece, his face was dripping with perspiration.
The blood creaked in his ears-

Moan of siren!

"Laagi!" shouted Fair Maid. "Four bandits-"

"Bandits!"

"Bandits!"

Suddenly the helmet was full of warning cries from all the ships. The
telltale sphere in front of Jim came alive with the green dots of Laagi
ships, over and beyond the white dots of his own Section.

They came on, the green dots, with the illusion of seeming to spread
apart as they advanced. They came on and...

Suddenly they were gone. They had winked out, disappeared as if they
had never been there in the first place.

"Formation Charlie," said Jim tonelessly to the other four ships. They
shifted their relative positions. Jim sat silent, sweat dripping off his
chin inside his Suit. He could feel the growing tension in the woman
behind him.

"Jump!" It was a whisper torn from a raw throat in Mary. "Why don't you
jump?"

"Where to?" whispered back Jim. "They'll have planet-based computers
the size of small cities working on our probabilities of movement now.
Anywhere we jump now in a straight line for the Frontier, they'll be
waiting for us."

"Then jump to a side point. Evade them!"

"If we do that," whispered Jim, "we'll have to calculate." He suddenly
realized the other's whispering had brought him to lower his own voice to
a thread. Deliberately he spoke out loud, but with transmission of the
conversation to the other ships of the Section blocked off.
"Recalculation takes time. They'll be using that time to find us, and
they've got bigger and better equipment for it than the computing centers
aboard these little ships of ours.

"But what're we waiting for? Why'd they go away? Shouldn't we go now-"

"No!" snarled Jim. "They went away because they thought there weren't
enough of them."

"Not enough? There were twice our number-"

"Not enough," said Jirn. "They want to kill us all at one swat. They
don't want any of us to escape. It's not just La Chasse Gallerie. Enemy
ships can't be allowed to get this deep into their territory and live.
We'd do the same thing if Laagi ships came into our space. We'd have to
make an object lesson of them-so they wouldn't be tempted to try again."

"But-"

"Laagi! Laagi! Laaagi!-"

Suddenly the pilots of all the vessels were shouting at once. Jim's hand
slammed down on a button and four screens woke to life, showing the
interior of the other four ships. The sight and sound of the other pilots
and gunners were there before his eyes.

The spherical telltale was alive with green dots, closing in from all
sectors of the area, racing to englobe Wander Section. "Hector! Pattern
Hector!" Jim heard his own voice shouting to the other ships. "Hector!
Hit, break out, and Check Ten. Check Ten....

They were driving toward one group of the approaching green lights. La
Chasse Gallerie was driving with them. Over the shouting back and forth
of the Wander Section pilots came the voice of Raoul Penard, shouting,
singing-a strange, lugubrious tune but in the cadence and tone of a
battle song. As if through the winds of a nightmare, Jim heard him....

F'renchnsan, he don't lat to die in defall!
When de n'airsh she a'n sof'll of de game!
An de little bool-frog, he's roll veree fat.
An de leetle nsooshrat, he's jus' & same!

The feeble rimes of the old ship reached out toward the incoming Laagi
lights that were ships, pathetically wide of their mark. Something
winked up ahead and suddenly the soft, uncollapsed point of the
primitive, dust-scarred hull was no longer there. Then Wander Section had
closed with some eight of the enemy.

AndFriend suddenly bucked and screamed. Her internel temperature shot up
momentarily to nearly two hundred degrees as a glancing blow from the
light-weapon of one of the Laagi brushed her. There was a moment of
insanity. Flame flickered suddenly in the interior of Fair Maid,
obscuring the picture of it on the screen before Jim. Then they were all
past the enemy ships and Jim cried "Transmit!" at the same time that he
locked his own magnetic beams on the chopped hull of La Chasse Gallerie
and tried to take her through the jump alone.

It should not have been possible. But some sixth sense in the singing,
crazed mind of Raoul Penard seemed to understand what Jim was trying.
The two ships jumped together under AndFriend's control, and suddenly all
six ships floated within sight of each other amid the peace and darkness
of empty space and the alien stars.

Into this silence came a soft sob from one of the other vessels. Jim
looked and saw the charred interior of the Fair Maid. Her pilot was out
of his seat and half-crouched before the equally charred, barrel-suited
figure in the gunner's chalr.

"Fair Maid!" Jim had to repeat the call, more sharply. "Fair Maid!
Acknowledge!"

The pilot's headpiece lifted. The sobbing stopped.

"Fair Maid here." The voice was thick-tongued, drunk-sounding. "I had to
shoot my gunner, Wander Leader. She was bunning up inside her suit. I had
to shoot my gunner. She was burning up inside her-"

"Fair Maid!" snapped Jim. "Can you still compute and jump?"

"Yes..." said the drugged voice. "I can compute and jump, Wander Leader."

"All right, Fair Maid," said Jim. "You're to jump wide, angle off outside
Laagi territory and then make your own way back to our side of the
Frontier. We're close enough to outside both territories for that now.
Have you got it? Jump wide, and make your own way back. Jump far enough
so that it won't be worth the trouble to the Laagi to go after you."

"No!" The voice lost some of its druggedness. "I'm staying, Wander
Leader. I'm going to kill some-"

"Fair Maid!" Jim heard his own voice snarling into his headpiece. "This
Section has a mission-to bring back the ship we've just picked up in
Laagi territory! You're no good on that mission-you're no good to this
Section without a gunner. Jump wide and go home! Do you hear me? That's
an order. Jump wide and go home!"

There was a moments' silence, and then the pilot's figure moved and turned
slowly back to sit down before his controls.

"Acknowledge, Fair Maid!" snapped Jim.

"Acknowledge," came the lifeless voice of the pilot in the burned
interior of the ship. "Jumping wide and going home."

"Out then," said Jim in a calmer voice. "Good luck getting back. So long,
Jet'ry'."

"So long, Wander Leader," came the numb reply. The gloved hands moved on
the singed controls. Fair Maid vanished.

Jim sat back wearily in his pilot's chair. Hammering into his ears came
the voice of Raoul Penard, now crooning another verse of his battle
song....

... Come all you beeg Canada man.
Who want find work on Meeshegan,
Dere's beeg log drive all troo our Lan',
You sure fin' work on Meesh-

In a sudden reflex of rage, Jim's hand slapped down on a button, cutting
off in midword the song from La Chasse Gallerie.

"Jim!"

The word was like a whip cracking across his back. Jim started awake to
the fact of his passenger-gunner behind him.

"What?" he asked.

"I think I've got my second wind in this race," answered the even, cold
voice of Mary. "Meanwhile, how about turning Penard back on? My job's to
record everything I can get from him, and I can't do that with the talk
beam between his ship and ours shut off."

"The Fair Maid's gunner just died-"

"Turn the talk beam on!"

Jim reached out and turned it on, wondering a little at himself. I
should feel like shooting her at this moment, he thought. Why don't I?
Penard's voice sang at him once again.

"Look," Jim began. "When a woman dies and a ship may be lost-"

"Have you looked at Penard's ship, Major?" interrupted the voice of Mary.
"Take a look. Then maybe you'll understand why I want the talk beam on
just as long as there's any use."

Jim turned and looked at the screen that showed the cone-shaped vessel.

He stared.

If La Chasse Gauerie had been badly cut up before, she was a floating
chunk of scrap now. She had been slashed deep in half a dozen directions
by the light beams of the Laagi ships. And the old-fashioned ceramet
material of her hull, built before collapsed metals had been possible,
had been opened up like cardboard under the edge of red-hot knives. Jim
stared, hearing the voice of Penard singing in his ears, and an icy
trickle went down his perspiration-soaked spine.

"He can't be alive," Jim heard himself saying. If a hit that did not even
penetrate the collapsed metal hull of the Fair Maid could turn that
ship's interior into a charred, if workable, area-what must those
light-weapons of the enemy have done to the interior of the old ship he
looked at now? But Raoul still sang from there his song about lumbering
in Meeshegan.

"-Nobody could be alive in that," Jim said. "I was right. It must be just
his semianimate control system parroting him and running the ship. Even
at that, it's a miracle it's still working-"

"We don't know," Mary's voioe cut in on him. "And until we know we have
to assume it's Raoul himself, still alive. After all, his coming back at
all is an impossible miracle. If that could happen, it could happen he's
still alive in that ship now. Maybe he's picked up some kind of
protection we don't know about."

Jim shook his head, forgetting that probably Mary could not see this
silent negative. It was not possible that Penard was alive. But he roused
himself back to his duty. He had a job to do.

His fingers began to dance over the black buttons in their ranks before
him, working out the situation, planning his next move.

"K formation," he said automatically to the other ships, but did not even
glance at the telltale sphere to make sure they obeyed correctly. Slowly,
the situation took form. He was down one ship, from five to four of them,
and that reduced the number of practical fighting and maneuvering
formations by a factor of better than three. And there was something
else....

"Mary," he said slowly.

"Yes, Jim?"

"I want your opinion on something," said Jim. "When we jumped out of the
fight area just now, it was a jump off the direct route home and to the
side by nearly sixteen light-years; and of course we carried La Chasse
Gallerie with us, out of the direct route to home she's been on since we
first found her. Penard let me do that without fighting me with his own
controls. Now, what I want to know is-and it ought to be impossible
that he's got power on that hulk, anyway, but he obviously has-will he
let me move him from now on with out fighting me, once I slap a magnetic
on him? In other words, whether he's a man or a semianimate control, was
that a fluke last time, or can I count on it happening again?"

Mary did not answer imediately. Then...

"I think you can count on him trusting you," she said. "If Raoul Penard
is alive in there, the fact that he reacted sensibly once ought to be
some indication he'll do it again. And if you're right about it being
just a control center driving that ship, then it should react
consistenfly in the same pattern to the same stimulus."

"Yean said Jim softly. "But I wonder which it is-is Penard in there,
alive or dead? Is it a man we're trying to get out? Or a control center?"

"Does it matter?" said the level voice of Mary.

Jim looked bleakly into the vision screens fed by his instruments

"Not to you, does it?" he said. "But I'm the man that has to order men to
kill themselves to get that ship home." Something tightened in his
throat. "You know that's what hit me when I first saw you in Mollen's
office, but I didn't know what it was. You haven't got guts inside you,
you ve got statistical tables and a computer."

He could hear his own harsh breathing in the headpiece of his suit once
he had said it.

"You think so?" said Mary's voice grimly. "And how about you, Jim? The
accidents of birth and change while you were growing up gave you a
one-in-billions set of mind and reflexes. You grew up to be a white
knight and to slay dragons. Now you're in the dragon-slaying business and
something's gone wrong with it you can't quite figure out. Something's
gone sour, hasn't it?"

Jim did not answer. He was sweating again.

"You know," said Mary, "I think you've got a bad case of combat fatigue;
but you won't quit and you're so valuable that people like Mollen won't
make you quit."

"Play-patty psychiatrist, are you?" demanded Jim through gritted teeth.
Mary ignored him. 

"You think I didn't have a chance to look at your personal history before
I met you?" said Mary. "You ought to know better than to think that.
You're a Canadian yourself, and your background is Scotch and French.
That, plus the way you've been reacting to hearing Raoul Penard, ought to
be all anyone needs to know to read the signs-and the signs all read the
same way-"

"Shut up!" husked Jim, the words choking in his throat.

"The signs read dead, Major. All of them, including the fact it upsets
you that I'm in the business of trying to make people live longer. You
don't want to live a long time. Victory, or death, that's what you've
been after; and now that you've been forced to the conclusion that you
can't win that victory, you want death. But you're not built to
deliberately kill yourself-" Jim tried to speak, but the strained muscles
of his throat let out only a little, wordless rasp of sound.

"So death has to come and take you," said Mary's relentless voice.
There was a trace of something sad also in that voice. "And it's got to
come take you against the most of your strength, against all your
fighting will. He's got to take you in spite of yourself. And Death can't
do it! That's what's wrong with you, isn't it, Jim?" Mary paused. "That's
why you don't want to grow old and be forced to leave out here, where
Death lives."

Mary's voice broke off. Jim sat, fighting for breath, his gloved fingers
trembling on the access flap to the sidearm. After a little, his breath
grew deeper again; and he forced himself to turn back to his
computations. Aside from the habit-instructed section of his mind that
concerned itself with this problem, the rest of him was mindless.

I've got to do something, he thought. I've got to do something. But
nothing would come to mind. Gradually the careening vessel of his mind
righted itself, and he came back to a sense of duty-to Wander Section and
his mission. Then suddenly a thought woke in him.

"Raoul Penard's dead," he said quite calmly to Mary. "Somehow, what we've
been hearing and what we've been watching drive and fight that ship is
the semianimate control center. How it got to be another Raoul Penard
doesn't matter. The tissue they used kept growing, and no one ever
thought to keep one of them in contact with a man twenty-four hours a day
for his lifetime. So it's the alter ego, the control center we've got to
bring in. And there's a way to do that."

He paused and waited. There was a second of silence, and then Mary's
voice spoke.

"Go on. Maybe I underestimated you, Jim."

"Maybe you did," said Jim. "At any rate, here it is. In no more than
another half hour we're going to be discovered here. Those planet-based
big computers of theirs have been piling up data on our mission here and
on me as leader of the Section, and their picture gets more complete
every time we move and they can get new data. If we dodged away from here
to hide again, next time they'd find us even faster. And after two more
hides they'd hit us almost as soon as we got ~Ihid. So there's no choice
to it. We've got to go for the Frontier, now."

"Yes," said Mary. "I can see we do."

"You can," said Jim. "And the Laagi can. Everybody can. But they also
know I know that they've got most of the area from here to the Frontier
covered. Most anywhere we come out, they'll be ready to hit us within
seconds, with ships that are simply sitting there, ready to make jump to
wherever we emerge, their computations to the forty or fifty areas within
easy jump of them already computed for them by the big planet-based
machines. So, there's only one thing left for me to do, as they see it.
Go wide."

"Wide?" said Mary. She sounded a trifle startled.

"Sure," said Jim, grinning mirthlessly to himself in the privacy of his
suit. "Like I sent Fair Maid. But there's a difference between us and
Fair Maid. We've got La Chasse Gallerie. And the Laagi'll follow us. And
we'll have to keep running-running outward until their edge in data lets
them catch up with us. Then their edge in ship numbers'll finish us off.
The Laagi ships won't quit on our trail-even if it means they won't get
back themselves. As I said a little earlier, enemy ships can't be allowed
to get this deep into their territory and get home again."

"Then what's the use of going wide?" asked Mary. "It just puts off the
time-"

"I'm not going wide." Jim grinned privately and mirth lessly once more.
"That's what the Laagi think I'll do, hoping for a miracle to save us.
I'm going instead where no one with any sense would go-right under their
weapons. I've computed ten jumps to the Frontier which is the least we
can make it in. We'll lock on and carry La Chasse Gallerie; and when we
come out of the jump, we'll come out shooting. Blind. We'll blast our way
through whatever's there and jump again fast as we can. If one of us
survives, that'll be all that's necessary to lock on to La Chasse
Gallerie and jump her to the Frontier, if none of us does-well, we've
done our best."

Once more he paused. Mary said nothing.

"Now," said Jim, grinning like a death's head. "If that was a
two-hundred-year old man aboard that wreck of a ship there, and maybe
burned badly or broken up by what he's been through so far, that business
of jumping and coming out at fighting accelerations would kill him. But,"
said Jim, drawing a deep breath, "it's not a man. It's a control center.
And a control center ought to be able to take it. Have you got anything
to say, Mary?"

"Yes," said Mary quietly. "Officially I protest your assumption that
Raoul Penard is dead, and your choice of an action which might be fatal
to him as a result."

Jim felt a kind of awe stir in him.

~"By-" He broke off. "Mary, you really expect us to come out of this all
right, don't you?"

"Yes," said Mary calmly. "I'm not disappointed with life the way you
are. You don't know it, Jim, but there's a lot of people like you back
home, and I meet them all the time. Ever since we started working toward
a longer life for people, they've turned their back on us. They say
there's no sense in living a longer time-but the truth is they're afraid
of it. Afraid a long life will show them up as failures, that they won't
have death for an excuse for not making a go of life."

"Nevermind that!" Jim's throat had gone dry again. "Stand to your guns.
We're jumping now-and we'll be coming out shooting." He turned swiftly to
punch the data key and inform his three remaining other ships...
Transmitting in five Seconds. Five. Four. Three. Two. One. Transmit-"

 
Chapter 4.

Disorientation, nausea...

The stars were different for the fifth time. Acceleration hit like a tree
trunk ramming into Jim's chest. His fingers danced on the sub-light
conltrol buttons. The voice of Raoul Penard was howling his battle song
again-

When you come drive de beeg saw log,
You got to jump jus' lak de frog!
De forenian come, he say go sak!
You got in de watair all over your.......

Time passed....

"Check Ten!" shouted Jim once again. "All ships Check Ten. Transmit in
three seconds. Three. Two-"

No Laagi ships in the telltale sphere again this time. And the next. And
the next-

Suddenly AndFriend bucked and slammed. Flame flickered for a fraction of
a second through the cabin. The telltale was alive with green lights,
closing fast.

Fifteen of them or more...Directly ahead of AndFriend were three of them
in formation, closing on her alone. In Jim's ears rang the wild voice of
Penard..

P'ras's you work on drive, tree four day-
You find dat drive dat she don' pay..

"Gunner!" cried Jim, seeing the peen lights almost on top of him. It was
a desperate cry for help. In a moment-

Two of the green lights flared suddenly and disappeared. The third
flashed and veered off.

"Mary!" yelped Jim, suddenly drunk on battle adrenaline.

"You're a gunner! A real gunner!"

"More to the left and up, sector ten-" said a thin, calm voice, a voice he
could hardly recognize as Mary's, in his ear. He veered, saw two more
green lights. Saw one flare and vanish-saw suddenly one of his own white
lights flare and vanish as the scream of torn metal sounded from one of
the screens before him. Glancing at the screens, he saw for the moment
the one picturing Fourth Helen's cabin, showing the cabin split open,
emptied and flattened for a second before the screen went dark and blank.

Grief tore at him. And rage.

"Transmit now!" he howled at the other ships. "Check Ten! Check Ten-"

He slapped a magnetic on the battered cone shape that fled by a miracle
still beside him and punched for the jump-

Disorientation. Nausea. And-

The stars of the Frontier were ahead of them. Jim stared into his
screens. They floated in empty space, three gray-white dart shapes and
the ravaged shape of La Chasse Gallerie. Lela rode level with Jim's ship,
but Swallow was slowly turning sideways like a dying fish drifting in the
ocean currents. Jim stared into the small screen showing the Swallow's
interior. The two suited figures sat in a blackened cabin, unmoving.

"Swallow!" said Jim hoarsely. "Are you all right? Acknowledge.
Acknowledge!"

But there was no answer from the two figures, and the Swallow continued
to drift, turning, as if she was sliding off some invisible slope into
the endless depths of the universe. Jim shook with a cold, inner sickness
like a chill. They're just unconscious, he thought. They have to be just
unconscious. Otherwise they wouldn't have been able to make the jump to
here.

"-Brigadier!" the voice of Penard was singing with strange softness-

~Repondit Pandore
Brigadier! Vous avez raison.
Brigadier! repondit Pandore
Brigadier! Vous avez raison!

Jim turned slowly to look into the screen showing La Chasse Gallerie. He
stared at what he saw. If the old ship had been badly slashed before, she
was a ruin now. Nothing could be alive in such a wreck. Nothing. But the
voice of Penard sang on.

"No." muttered Jim out loud, unbelievingly. "Not even a semianimate
control center could come through that. It couldn't-" He stirred himself
and shifted once more, push- ing for speed by settling for any location
in the general direction of the Frontier's other side....

"Identify yourself!" crackled a voice suddenly on Jim's ears. "Identify
yourself! This is Picket Six, B Sector, Frontier area."

"Wander Section-" muttered Jim, still staring at the tattered form of
La Chasse Gallerie. He remembered the original legend about the return of
the dead voyageurs in their ghost canoes, and a shiver went down his
back. "Wander Section, returning from deep probe and rescue mission into
Laagi territory. Five ships with two lost and one sent wide and home,
separately. Wander Leader, speaking."

"Wander Leader!" crackled the voice fiom Picket Six. "Alert has been
passed all along the Frontier for you and your ships and orders issued
for your return. Congratulations, Wander Section, and welcome back."

"Thanks, Picket Six," said Jim wearily. "It's good to be back, safe on
this side of the Frontier. We had half the Laagi forces breathing down
our-"

A siren howled from the control board, cuuting him off. Unbelieving, Jim
jerked his head about to stare at the telltale sphere. It was tilted with
the white lights of the ships of Picket Six in formation spread out over
a half light-year of distance. But, as he watched, green lights began to
wink into existence all about his own battered Section. By sixes, by
dozens, they were jumping into the area of Picket Six on the human side
of the Frontier.

"Formation B! Formation B!" Jim found himself shouting at the Lela and
the Swallow. But he'd forgotten that Swallow had fallen away on the other
side of the Frontier, and only the Lela was here to respond. The Swallow,
he knew, was still on its long, drowning fall into nothingness. "Cancel
that. Lela, follow me. Help me carry La Chasse-"

His voice was all but drowned out by transmissions fiom Picket Six.

"Alert General! Alert General! All Pickets, all Sectors!" Picket Six was
calling. "Full fleet Laagi attack. Three Wings enemy forces already in
this area. We are overmatched! Repeat. We are overmatched! Alert
General-"

At maximum normal acceleration, AndFriend and Lela, with La Chasse
Gallerie caught in a magnetic grip between them, were running from the
enemy ships, while Jim computed frantically for a jump to any safe
area, his fingers dancing on the black buttons.

"Alert General! All ships Picket Six hold until relieved. All ships hold!
Under fire here at Picket Six. We are under-" The voice of Picket Six
went dead. There was a moment's silence and then a new voice broke in.

"-This is Picket Five. Acknowledge, Picket Six. Acknowledge!" Another
moment of silence, then the new voice went on. "All ships Picket Six.
This is Picket Five taking over. Picket Five taking over. Our ships are
on the way to you now, and the ships from other Sectors. Hold until
relieved! Hold until relieved-"

Jim fought the black buttons, too busy even to swear.
   
"Wander Section! Wander Section!" shouted the voice of Picket Five.
"Acknowledge!"

"Wander Section. Acknowledging!" grunted Jim.
   
"Wander Section! Jump for home. Wander Leader, key for data. Key to
receive data, and Check Ten. Check Ten."

"Acknowledge!" snapped Jim, dropping his own slow computing. He keyed for
data, saw the data light flash and knew he had received into his
computing center the information for the jump back to Earth. "Hang on
Lela!" he shouted. "Here we go-"

He punched for jump.

Disorientation. Nausea...

Peace.

AndFriend lay without moving under the landing lights of a concrete pad
in the open, under the nighttime sky and the stars Earth. The daylight
hours had passed while Wander Section had been gone. Next to AndFriend
lay the dark, torn shape of La Chasse Gallerie, and beyond the ancient
ship lay Lela. A hundred light-years away the Frontier battle would still
be raging. Laagi and men were out there dying, and they would go on
dying until the Laagi realized that Wander Section had finally made good
its escape. Then the Laagi ships would withdraw from an assault against a
Frontier line that well over a hundred years of fighting had taught was
permanently un breachable by either side. But how many, thought Jim with
a dry and bitter soul, would die before the withdrawal was made?

He punched the button to open the port of AndFriend and got clumsily to
his feet in the bulky suit. During the hours just past, he had forgotten
he was wearing it. Now, it was like being swaddled in a mattress. He was
as thoroughly soaked with sweat as if he had been in swimming with his
clothes on.

There was no sound coming from La Chasse Gallerie. Had the voice of Raoul
Penard finally been silenced? Sodden with weariness, Jim could not
summon up the energy even to wonder about it. He turned clumsily around
and stumbled back tirrough the ship four steps and out the open port,
vaguely hearing Mary Gallegher rising and following behind him.

He stumped heavy-footed across the concrete toward the lights of the
Receiving Section, lifting like an ocean liner out of a sea of night. It
seemed to him that he was a long time reaching the door of the Section,
but he kept on stolidly, and at last he passed through and into a
desuiting room. Then attendants were helping him off with his suit.

In a sort of dream he stripped off his soaked clothing and showered, and
put on a fresh jumper suit. The cloth felt strange and harsh against his
arms and legs as if his body, as well as what was inside him, had been
rubbed raw by what he had just been through. He walked heavily on into
the debriefing room, and dropped heavily into one of the lounge
chairs.

A debriefing officer came up to him and sat down in a chair opposite,
turning on the little black recorder pickup he wore at his belt. The
debriefing officer began asking questions in the safe, quiet monotone
that had been found least likely to trigger off emotional outbursts in
the returned pilots. Jim answered slowly, too drained for emotion.

"...No," he said at last. "I didn't see Swallow again. She didn't
acknowledge when I called for Formation B, and I had to go on without
her. No, she never answered after we reached the Frontier."

"Thank you, Major." The debriefing officer got to his feet, clicking off
his recorder pickup, and went off. An enlisted man came around with a
tray of glasses half-filled with brown whisky. He offered it first to the
pilot and the gunner of the Lela, who were standing together on the other
side of the room with a debriefing officer. The two men took their
glasses absentmindedly and drank from them without reaction, as if the
straight liquor was water. The enlisted man brought his tray over to
where Jim sat.

Jim shook his head. The enlisted man hesitated.

"You're supposed to drink it, sir," he said. "Surgeon's orders."

Jim shook his head again. The enlisted man went away. A moment later he
came back followed by a major with the caduceus of the Medical Corps on
his jacket lapel.

"Here, Major," he said to Jim, taking a glass from the tray and holding
it out to Jim. "Down the hatch."

Jim shook his head, rolling the back of it against the top of the chair
he sat in.

"It's no good," he said. "It doesn't do any good."

The Medical Corps major put the glass back on the tray and leaned
forward. He put his thumb gently under Jim's right eye and lifted the lid
with his forefinger. He looked for a second, then let go and turned to
the enlisted man.

"That's all right," he said. "You can go on."

The enlisted man took his tray of glasses away. The doctor reached into
the inside pocket of his uniform jacket and took out a small silver tube
with a button on its side. He rolled up Jim's right sleeve, put the end
of the tube against it and pressed the button.

Jim felt what seemed like a cooling spray against the skin of his arm.
And something woke in him after all.

"What're you doing?" he shouted, struggling to his feet. "You can't knock
me out now! I've got two ships not in yet. The Fair Maid and the
Swallow-" The room began to tilt around him. "You can't-" His tongue
thickened into unintelligibility. The room swung grandly around him and
he felt the medical major's arms catching him. And unconsciousness closed
upon him like a trap of darkness.

He slept, evidently for a long time, and when he woke he was not in the
bed of his own quarters but in the bed of a hospital room. Nor did they
let him leave it for the better part of a week. He had had time, lying
there in the peaceful, uneventful hospital bed, to come to an
understanding with himself. When he got out he went looking for Mary
Gallegher.

He located the geriatrics woman finally on the secret site where La
Chasse Gallerie was being probed and examined by the Geriatrics Bureau.
Mary was at work with the crew that was doing this, and for some little
time word could not be gotten to her; and without her authorization, Jim
could not be let in to see her.

Jim waited patiently in a shiny, unlit lounge until a young man came to
guide him into the interior of a vast building where La Chasse Gallerie
lay dwarfed by her surroundings and surrounded by complicated items of
equipment. It was apparently a break period for most of the people
working on the old ship, for only one or two figures were to be seen
doing things with this equipment outside the ship. The young man shouted
in through the open port of La Chasse Galierie, and left. Mary came out
and shook hands with Jim.

There were dark circles under Mary's eyes and she seemed thinner under
the loose shirt and slacks she wore.

"Sorry to hear about Swallow," she said.

"Yes," said Jim, a little bleakly. "They think she must have drifted back
farther into Laagi territoty. The unmanned probes couldn't locate her,
and the Laagi may have taken her in."

Mary looked steadily at him.

"That's what chews on you, isn't it?" she said. "Not knowing if her pilot
and gunner were dead or not. If they were, then there's nothing to think
about. But if they weren't... we never know what becomes of them-"

He shook his head at her in a silent plea and she broke off.

"Fair Maid made it in, safely," he said hoarsely. "Anyway, it wasn't
about the Section. I came to see you.

"No." Mary looked at him with a gentleness he had not seen in her before.
"It was about Raoul Penard you came, wasn't it?"

"I couldn't find out anything. Is it-is he alive?"

"Yes," said Mary. "He's alive."

"Can you get through to him?-What came to me," said Jim quickly, "while I
was resting up in the hospital, was that I finally began to understand
the reason behind all his poetry-quoting, and such. It struck me he must
have started all that deliberately. To remind himself of where he was
trying to get back to. To make it sharp and clear in his mind so he
couldn't forget it."

"Yes," said Mary nodding. "You're right. He wanted insurance against
quitting, against giving up."

"I thought so. You were right." Jim grinned with a slight grimness at
her. "I'd been trying to quit myself. Go find something that could
quit me. You were right all the way down the line. I'm a dragon-slayer. I
was born that way, I'm stuck with it and I can't change it. I want to go
through the Laagi, or around them and end this damn murderous stalemate.
But I can't live long enough. None of us can. And so I wanted to give
up."

"And you don't now?"

"No," said Jim slowly. "It's still no use, but I'm going to keep
hoping for a miracle."

"Miracles are a matter of time," said Mary. "To make yourself a
millionaire in two minutes is just about impossible. To make it in two
hundred years is practically a certainty. That's what people like me are
after. If we could all live as long as Penard, all sorts of things could
be possible."

"And he's alive!" said Jim, shaking his head slowly. "He's really alive!
I didn't even want to believe it, it was so farfetched." Jim broke off.
"Is he-"

"Sane? No," said Maiy. "And I don't think we'll ever be able to make him
so. But maybe I'm wrong. As I say, with time, most near-impossibilities
become practicabilities." She stepped back from me open port of La Chasse
Gallerie, and gestured to the interior. "Want to come in?" Jim hesitated.

"I don't have a secret clearance for this project-" he began.

"Don't worry about it," interrupted Mary. "That's just to keep the news
people off our necks until we decide how to handle this. Come on."

She led the way inside. Jim followed her. Within, the ancient metal
corridor leading to the pilot's compartment seemed swept clean and dusted
shiny, like some exhibit in a museum. The interior had been hung with
magnetic lights, but the gaps and tears made by Laagi weapons let almost
as much light in. pilot's compartment was a shambles that had been tidied
and cleaned. The instruments and control panel were all but obliterated
and the pilot's com-chair half gone. A black box stood in the center of
the floor, an incongruous piece of modern equipment, connected by a
thick, gray cable to a bulkhead behind it.

"I wasn't wrong, then," said Jim, looking around him. "No human body
could have lived through this. It was the semianimate control center that
was running the ship as Penard's alter ego, then, wasn't it? The man
isn't really alive?"

"Yes," said Mary, "and no. You were right about the control center
somehow absorbing the living personality of Penard. But look again.
Could a control center like that, centered in living tissue floating and
growing in a nutrient solution with no human hands to care for it-could
something like that have survived this, either?"

Jim looked around at the slashed and rained interior. A coldness crept
into him and he thought once more of the legend of a great ghost cargo
canoe sailing through the snow-filled skies with its dead crew, home to
the New Year's feast of the living.

"No." he said slowly, through stiff lips. "Then, where is he?"

"Here!" said Mary, reaching out with her fist to strike the metal
bulkhead to which me gray cable was attached. The dull boom of the
struck metal reverberated in Jim's ears. Mary looked penetratingly at
Jim.

"You were right," said Mary, "when you said that the control center
had become Penard-that it was Penard, after the man died. Not just a
record full of memories, but something holding the vital, decision-making
spark of the living man himself. But that was only half the miracle.
Because the tissue living in the heart of the control center had to die,
too, and just as the original Penard knew he would die, long before he
could get home, the tissue Penard knew it, too. But their determination,
Penard's determination, to do something, solved the problem."

She stopped and stood staring at Jim, as if waiting for some sign that
she had been understood.

"Go on," said Jim.

"The control system," said Mary, "was connected to the controls of the
ship itself through an intermediate solid-state element which was the
grandfather of the wholly inanimate solid-state computing centers in the
ships you drive nowadays. The link was from living tissue through the
area of solid-state physics to gross electronic and mechanical controls."

"I know that," said Jim. "Part of our training-"

"The living spark of Raoul Penard, driven by his absolute determination
to get home, passed from him into the living tissue of the semianimate
controls system," went on Mary, as if Jim had not spoken. "From there it
bridged the gap by a sort of neurobiotaxis into the flow of impulse
taking place in the solid-state elements Once there, below all gross
levels, there was nothing to stop it infusing every connected solid part
of the ship."

Mary swept her hand around the ruined pilot's compartment.

"This," she said, "is Raoul Penard. And this!" Once more she struck the
bulkhead above the black box. "The human body died. The tissue activating
the control center died. But Raoul came home just as he had been
determined to do!"

Mary stopped talking. Her voice seemed to echo away into the silence of
the compariment.

"And doing it," said Mary more quietly, "he brought home the key we've
been hunting for in the Bureau all this time. We pulled the plug on a dam
behind which there's been piling up a flood of theory and research. What
we needed to know was that the living human essence could exist
independently of the normal human biochemical machinery. Now, we know it.
It'll take time, but someday it won't he necessary for the vital element
of anyone to admit extinction, unless whoever it is wants to."

But Jim was only half-listening. Something else had occurred to him,
something so poignant it contracted his throat painfully.

"Does he know?" Jim asked. "You said he's insane. But does he know he
finally got here? Does he know he made it home?"

"Yes," said Mary. "We're sure he does. Listen..."

She turned a little away from Jim and spoke out loud, as if Raoul was
right around a corner, hiding there in the ship's interior.

"Raoul?" she said.

And softly the voice of Raoul Penard spoke from the ship's hull all
around them, as if the man was talking to himself. But it was a
quieter, happier talking to himself than Jim had heard before. Raoul was
quoting one of the poems of William Henry Drummond again. But this time
it was a poem entirely in English and there was no trace of accent in the
words at~

O, Spirit of the mountain that speaks to us to-night,
Your voice is sad, yet still recalls past visions of delight,
When 'mid the grand old Laurentides, old when the Earth was new,
With flying feet we followed the moose and caribou.
And backward rush sweet memories, like fragments of a dream,
We hear the dip of paddles...

Raoul's voice went on, almost whispering, contentedly to itself. Jim
looked up from listening, and saw Mary's eyes fixed on him with a
strange, hard look he had not seen before.

"You didn't seem to follow me, just now," said Mary. "You didn't seem to
understand what I meant. You're one of our most valuable lives, the true
white knight that all of us dream of being at one time or another, but
only one in billions actually succeeds in being born to be."

Jim stared back at her.

"I told you," he said, "I can't help it."

"That's not what I'm talking about," said Mary. "You wanted to go out and
fight the dragons, but life was too short. But what about now?"

"Now?" echoed Jim, staring at her. "You mean me?"

"Yes," said Mary. Her face was strange and intense, and her voice seemed
to float on the soft river of words flowing from the black box. "I mean
you. What are you going to be doing, a thousand years from today?"


Chapter 5.

Jim had more than a month of accumulated leave time coming and he took
it. He wanted to go someplace with the feel of hot sand under his bare
feet and the smell of sea in the breeze. He wanted to forget about space
and about Raoul Pen ard and La Chasse Gallerie; he wanted to forget about
the old Canadian poems and songs, and about Mary Gallegher. Above all, he
wanted to forget what she had said the last time they had talked. Instead
he wanted to fill his mind with wine, women and song. But he lied to
himself.

So he went off, relying on sand, salt-smelling breezes and the touch of
women to burn all he wanted to forget out of his mind. He went to a place
in Baja California called Barres de Hijo and signed in at a resort there.
It had everything he was looking for, including charterboat fishing for
sailfish and tarpon. It also-or rather the resort hotel he stayed
at-had a swimming pool at which he met a fellow vacationer named Barbie
Novak, who did fit his ideas of beauty and liked him even better when she
found out he was one of the Frontier Guard pilots, on leave.

The days and nights, consequently, were a pleasant blur with Barbie for a
companion, until she had to go home; and following that there was a girl
named Joan Takari. But morning after she had left he found himself lying
alone on the beach, hoping she had gotten home all right; and he could
not remember her face.

So instead of looking around for more women to companion him, he took
to sitting and walking by hinself, lying on the beach and listening to
the waves or seated up on the rocks ovedooking a part of the shore that
had no beach, watching the surf crash on the blue-black boulders below in
white foam.

It was not, he concluded, that he wanted to live forever. But nonetheless
Mary's words from their last meeting stuck in his mind. In a way they had
taken the place of the emptiness inside him-which was still there, but
was now like a dark cavern into which a small aperture had broken,
letting in a single ray of light.

He had dreamed of space and wanted it from the first time he had realized
it was out there-which was earlier than he could remember. All his life
had pointed him at it. It was his arena in which he could do something...
something of lasting effect. What he would do and how he would do it, he
had no idea. But he was like someone who dreams of a much-wanted place,
in a mountain so far off it was like a blue cloud on the horizon of his
babyhood, but always there, day after day. And one day he had started to
walk toward that mountain.

He had had no idea what roads led to it, what waited for him along the
way, or how he would find his path and keep from going astray. But he had
been determined to keep heading toward it until he reached it; and then
he was determined to find on it the place of which he dreamed. It was a
case of just always going forward. That way he could never go wrong
because all roads led there eventually. All roads, in fact, were one road
as long as he kept searching-the Forever Road, he had named it in his
mind.

So, he left the resort one morning and went back to the Base, to his duty
station, in the mountains outside Denver. When he checked into the
Bachelor Officers' Ouarters, he found a phone message waiting for him
from General Mollen.

"As soon as you get in, call me," the message read.
   
He did so, and, after a ceitain length of time got put through to the
general.

"Well," said Mollen, "and how was the fishing?"
   
"Good, sir," said Jim. "I meant to stay longer, but I found I got filled
up sooner than I thought, on time off. I want to get back to work."

"Glad to hear it," said Mollen. "And I want to talk to you about that. So
why don't we have dinner at the Officers' Club tonight?"

What does a major say when a general invites him to dinner?

"Thank you, sir. I'd appreciate that. When, sir?"
   
"Nineteen hundred hours. Meet you in the bar."
   
"Yes sir. Thank you."
   
Jim had bet himself that the general would be at least fifteen minutes,
and perhaps as much as an hour, late. But he, himself, was at the
Officers' Club fifteen minutes ahead of the time set, just to be on the
safe side. It was a busy part of the day for the bar, and the lounge
which held it was full. Jim was lucky enough to get a stool on the curve
of the horseshoe-shaped bar that was farthest from the lounge entrance,
from which he faced not only that entrance, but beyond it the front door
of the Club.

"Good to see you again, Major," said the sergeant on duty behind the bar.

"You, too, Lee," answered Jim. They knew each other; but that particular
verbal exchange was routine between the barman and anyone who flew the
Frontier, since none of the pilots who did that ever knew for sure that
they would see the Club again.

"Ginger ale," said Jim. "On the rocks."
   
"Coming right up, sir."
   
Jim sat, sipping the ginger ale, and watching the entrances to the Club
and the lounge, for Mollen. Jeremy Tickler, who also captained a Wing on
the Frontier and had gone through final training with Jim, came by. They
fell into shoptalk.

But it was at exactly 1900 hours that the entrance door opened and Mollen
came through.

"-Excuse me, Tick," said Jim, interrupting the other. "Here he is now.
I'll see you again, soon."

"We shall wish," said Tickler, who was a little drunk, but who had been
told by Jim about the latter's dinner with the general. Tickler lifted
his glass to Jim as Jim departed to intercept Mollen.

He caught the general just outside the door of the lounge.
   
"Oh, you're already here. Good," said Mollen, changing direction. "In
that case, let's go right into the dining room."

He led the way to the dining room entrance, where the mess attendant on
duty took them to the quiet table in a corner that was of course waiting
for the general and his guest.

"I'll have a bourbon. A single-mash bourbon, no ice, no water, no soda,
no anything," said the general.

"Yes sir," said the mess attendant and went off, to return with the drink
himself in a few minutes. A waiter was at his heels.

"We don't want dinner just yet," Mollen said. He looked over the
attendant's shoulder at the waiter. "Come back in about twenty minutes."

Attendant and waiter departed.
   
"Well, here's to the hope the fishing was good," said Mollen, lifting
his glass. Jim drank with him, politely.

They talked fishing until they were halfway through the general's second
bourbon; and by the time the first one had been finished, Jim was
beginning to be pretty sure that for some reason Mollen was stalling.
However, there was nothing much he could do about that but wait for his
superior to get to the point.

"-There's Mary Gallegher," the general interrupted himself midway
through the second drink. He nodded across the dance floor, which the
dining area surrounded.

Jim looked and saw her, just as Mollen had said. She was with some major
Jim did not know who was wearing the ~aiguillette, or dress shoulder
cord looped through one epaulet, that marked him as an aide to some
high-ranking officer; and the two of them were just sitting down at a
table at the dance floor's edge, in plain view.

"She's got a working area of her own on Base here, with La Chasse
Gallerie and a staff of her own," said Mollen.

"Yes sir," said Jim. They looked away from Mary and her companion and
back across the table at each other.

"There's a lot of politics involved in it," said Mollen. He drank from
his glass. "Ever have much to do with politicians, Jim?"

"Happily, sir, they're above my range," said Jim.
   
"Don't be so sure," said Mollen. Below the still-dark halr on his round
head, his bulldog face was somber. "Dealing with them's supposed to be
above my range, too. But the fact is every one of us is affected by what
they do to the Service, generally. In this case, the fact we've got Mary
and her lab, as it's called, here on Base is all a matter of politics."

"Is that so, sir?" He had not known anything about Mary and a lab. He was
being more polite than anything. It seemed to him the general was still
just making conversation.

"Yes, that's so. And it's something that concerns you and me,
particularly," said Mollen. "They raised hell with me when they
discovered I'd let you go off on leave. Luckily, they were ready to
listen when I said that it might attract more attention to call you back,
suddenly, than it would be to let you come back in your own time. I
didn't think you'd stay much longer than you did, anyway, knowing you."

"Yes sir," said Jim, not understanding this at all.

"Well, I was right. You're back safely and now you're here, I'm afraid
you're going to stay here. If you go off Base from now on, it'll be with
a couple of Secret Service types riding shotgun on you."

Jim stared.

"Can I ask the general why?"

"I told you. Politics. It just happened that the Chasse Gallerie came
home through the North American Sector of the Frontier. That makes Raoul
Penard and all the potentially valuable scientific possibilities of his
existence in the metal of his ship a piece of property belonging to this
continent. It also makes him, it, Mary Gallegher-and you-items of
considerable potential value to our partners who guard the other Sections
of the Frontier. That is, if they know about him yet-but the general
feeling is that if any of them don't by now, they will shortly. Also,
the general feeling among those few who know about this is that there's
too much at stake to take any chances at all. There's the possibility of
immortality which Mary may have mentioned to you-or at least a lifetime
that isn't dependent on a body that can wear out. But beyond that,
there's unlimited possibilities of having ships and other things that
don't have to take into account the necessity of being designed to
protect the life of a breakable human inside them, white they maneuver at
high accelerations."

He took a swallow from his glass. "The war with the Laagi," he said, "may
have brought all the nations of Earth into alliance, but the national
rivalries are still there, and the business of looking forward to a day
in which they'll find themselves competing, once again. So you're all
under special guard from now on."
 
"But all I did was listen to Penard when we escorted him back."

"And saw his ship. And heard him again after he got here. And had Mary
Gallegher riding with you, in which case some of her educated
understanding of the nature and possibilities of Penard may have iubbed
off on you. No, Jim, the people up top, the politicians up where
decisions like this are made, have decided you're under wraps from now
on; and under wraps you're going to be."

"But I can go off Base, if I want to, as long as some Secret Service
people go with me?"

"I didn't say that," Mollen answered. "In fact, I'm not so sure you'll be
allowed off under any circumstances, unless it's for something like going
to Washington and reporting to the higher-ups; or something of that
nature."

"I see, sir," said Jim gluraly.

"Brace yourself," said Mollen. "So far I've only shown you the tip of the
iceberg. Not only are you going to be restricted in the matter of
leaving the Base, your movements and contacts are going to be restricted
here on the Base, too. From now on you live in special quarters in that
lab of Mary's I was talking about, just as she and her staff does; and
during your waking hours I'll be keeping you under my eye, since I'm
personally responsible for you.

"But you can't ride with me when I take the Wing out to the Frontier,
sir," protested Jim. "It'd be ridiculous, having a general riding as
gunner. These people up top you talk about can't expect anything like
that."

"They don't," grunted Mollen. "I'm not going to join you; you're going to
join me."

It took a long moment for the implications of this remark to sink into
Jim's mind. When it did, he stared at the older man.

"Sir? You mean-you can't mean I'm grounded!"

"That's the size of it," said Mollen. "Beginning tomorrow morning you
move into an office at my headquarters and behind a desk as Chief of
Section."

"But sir," said Jim, "there has to be some other way of working this. I'm
a ship man. I don't know anything about a deskjob. Can't I-"

But Mollen was not listening. His gaze was roving the room as if in
search of a waiter. There was no waiter to be seen, but in a minute the
mess attendant had abandoned his customary post by the entrance to the
room and come hurrying over.

"Oh, Sven," said Mollen. "I'm sorry to bother you with this, but would
you just step across to Mary Gallegher-you know who she is? Good. Ask her
if she'll join us for a few minutes. We won't keep her long. Tell her
that."

"Yes, General."

The mess attendant went off. They could see him talking to Mary
Gallegher, and a second after, both she and her escort pushed their
chairs back and got to their feet.

"Damn it, I don't want her hound dog, too!" said Mollen.

But the major with the aiguillette was simply being polite. As Mary
started across the empty dance floor toward them, the major sat down
again. Jim and Mollen got to their feet in turn. Mary came up and they
all sat down.

"Jim, here, just got back from leave," said Mollen to Mary. "I've been
telling him he's going to be housed with you people from now on and
ride a desk as Chief of Section. Of course, Jim, we'll be making you a
colonel while we're about it."

"If you don't mind, sir, I'd rather stay a major," said Jim.

"Still dreaming of getting back with your Wing?" said Mollen. "Don't
worry, if the chance comes, we'll send you back as you are, even if
you're the only lieutenant colonel-led, five-ship Wing on the Frontier."

"Thank you, sir," said Jim. But his mind was really not on what the
general had just said. He was looking at Mary, who was wearing a light
blue cocktail frock with irregularly shaped chunks of aquamarine-like
earrings under her reddish blond hair.

The combination became her. She had a good body and Jim found himself
once again up against the fact that she was simply not his type of woman.
It was just that rectangular face of hers, with its straight bones and
her blue-green eyes seemed always to be challenging the world, including
him-even when there was no apperent reason.

She was looking tired, though.

"I take it you've been busy," he said to her, for something to say.
Mollen had caught a waiter at last and was sending him off for a
duplicate of the glass of white wine Mary had been drinking with her
major.

"We have," said Mary. "But we're set up now and things are moving. I
won't be bothering you too often, but from time to time there'll be parts
of the work we'll want to bring you in on, if that's all right?"

"It'll be all right," said Mollen. "More than that, he'll be glad to get
away from that desk."

"How's Raoul?" asked Jim.

"Still happy to be back, I think," said Mary. "He doesn't talk as often,
anymore, but that's because I think what's left of him in that ship
spends most of its time dreaming. You see, we don't have the whole man-I
should say we don't have the mind of the whole man, but just the part
that wanted so badly to get home. That's one of the things our work's
turned up. It isn't necessarily a matter of the whole mind being
transferred to something inanimate-"

She broke off. The waiter had just come up with her glass of white wine.

"Thank you."

"A pleasure, ma'am."

"...You see," she went on, "what we seem to be coming to is the
beginning of a theory that could explain a lot that's been part of
folklore for centuries, but generally put down to superstition. The
poltergeist phenomenon, for example, and haunted houses... that sort of
thing."

"Tell him why," said Mollen.

She glanced around.

"It's a little public..."

"Don't worry. This corner's clean and it's in a scrambler zone. Anyone
even three feet from us would hear our voices, but not be able to make
out what we're talking about. Also notice the empty tables around us, and
the ones beyond that with just one or two officers at each of them,
sitting with drinks instead of food. Believe me, we're covered; and I
want him to learn this before he steps into that Aladdin's cave of yours.

"If that's what you want-sir."

The "sir" was a slight afterthought. Clearly, Mary had not yet acquired
an automatic use of military manners. "You see, Jim, we established one
thing just by Penard's existence in that ship-the fact that the mind can
have an existence away from anything material; though its instinct is to
find something material as a vehicle if it can."

Jim nodded.

"But our discovery since then's a blockbuster. It's that the mind,
existing separately, doesn't have to be the complete mind. The mind'll go
to almost any extremes normally rather than leave the body it first grew
in, from the first spark of consciousness in the womb to a full-fledged,
unique human or animal individual. In fact, it'll go right up to the
point of dying with the body, ordinarily, rather than leaving it. But
under certain overwhelming, particular stresses, it or a part of it will
leave an intolerable situation. Is what I'm saying making sense to
you?"

"You mean do I follow you?" said Jim. "I do."

She made a little grimace of discomfort.

"Please...?" she said.

"Goddamn right!" said Mollen. "Cut out the prickly business, Jim. We've
no time or place for that anymore.

"Yes sir, I'm sorry," said Jim to Mary. "I really am. I don't know what
gets into me sometimes. Go ahead. I'm interested, as well as ready to
listen."

"It's most important you understand," Mary said. "I was using the
poltergeist phenomenon as an example. Most poltergism has been tied to
young females. It's been checked in a number of cases and pretty well
taken for granted in the others that the girl causing such phenomena was
unhappy. No one I know of ever found a way of measuring how unhappy."

"I'd heard or read something like that," said Jim.

"Well," she said, "Raoul's case gives us a new slant on what might be
happening in the case of poltergeist activity if it actually is caused by
unhappy, pre-adolescent girls. According to what we've found with Raoul,
one possibility is to assume that it's not the whole mind, but just a
portion of it, that breaks loose from the rest under the strain of what,
to the person involved, is an intolerable situation. This part that
breaks loose, not being a full mind, is-effectively-crippled. It reacts
like a mindless animal, or like an insane person, simply reacting to
whatever triggers it. That's only a guess and it may be completely wrong.

"But it'd make sense," said Jim.

"The same theory could even be pushed to help explain certain types of
insanity in general," said Mary. "But that's way out on a limb, and not
what we're concerned with first and foremost, which is duplicating the
Penard phenomenon. The problem with Raoul is that there's absolutely
nothing in the way of previous work or speculation to build on. The most
we can find to stand on is the fact that, as his case proves, the human
mind's not only able to exist apart from the body; but it can bond to and
control material objects. Whether it controls them directly or by means
of their own machinery, is a pure guess."

"You mean, whether Raoul's dead mind drove his engines, or he just pushed
it through interstellar space by mind-power alone?"

"Maybe he was able to do both," said Mary. "Actually, in Raoul's case,
there seems to be some evidence he used his mind alone to move the ship
where he wanted. Particularly on the last stages of the trip home, that
ship had no ability left to drive itself mechanically. By the way, I wish
you wouldn't talk about Raoul as if he was dead. To me, he certainly
isn't; or to anyone working with me.

"All right," said Jim.

"You mean, it's not all right at all," said Mary, on what sounded very
close to a note of exasperation "When you set your jaw like that and look
nobly at the ceiling, I know exactly what you're thinking. I tell you
it's important that those of us working with him-and you're going to be
one of those from time to time, though we'll try to disturb you as little
as possible-don't think of him as dead, at all; any more than we go
around thinking of ourselves as particularly alive We're just in one
state. He's in another."

"He's not a whole mind, I thought, according to what you said," murmured
Jim. Nonetheless he was embarrassed. "Sorry again, though. I'll make a
point of thinking of him as a living person, all the time, from now on."

"Good," she said. "We'll all appreciate that."

"What exactly," asked Jim, "are you likely to want me to do? I was saying
to General Mollen that I didn't know what use I could be."

"We don't know-yet," she said. "What we're going to be doing is flying
blind, trying out first this theory, then that one. On some of the
theories we may need your help to test them. For example, one of the
things that seems to be deeply involved with what happened is Raoul's
literal love for his ship. Would you say you loved your AndFriend. Jim?"

The question was asked in a tone that was almost too serious.

"Like a sailor loves his ship. You bet," said Jim. "Possibly even a
little more, since AndFriend's practically an extension of my own body
when we're out in space together. Maybe it's almost like loving your own
dog. Haven't you ever done anything like that, Mary? Loved the first
bike you ever owned or some pet you once had."

"No," said Mary. "Loving a piece of machinery sounds almost a little
abnormal; and I never was much for having a pet, let alone loving one."

"You said you need me to test these theories?" Jim asked.

"Yes."

"On Raoul?"

"On Raoul. Possibly on you, too, as a sort of control subject since you
seem to respond to your ship very much the way he did to his. We can
compare reactions and hopefully discover something."

"I thought you said he doesn't talk as much nowadays. Will he answer when
you speak to him?"

"We think so, sometimes," Mary said. "It seems to depend on whether what
we ask ties in to what he's thinking-or dreaming-about at the time.
Sometimes we can recreate a sort of ship-on-the-Frontier situation for
him, and that helps us to get through to him and get his cooperation. You
may be able to help us in that area."

"I'll do what I can, of course."

"Well, you're due to have dinner; and we haven't had ours yet, either,"
said Mary. "What about if when you finish, you come over and get me and
I'll take you through the lab we've set up?"

"Fine," said Jim.

"Very fine," said Mollen, "because if no one else is, I'm starving to
death. We'll be ordering right away, Mary. Why don't you come over when
you're through with your own meal, because my hunch is we'll be finished
first."

"All right, if you think that'd be better."

She rose, and they got up with her. She went back across the dance floor
and they sat down. The waiter, who seemed to be hovering in the wings,
was with them almost as soon as they were reseated.

After Jim and Mollen had eaten, they talked for about half an hour, while
Mary and her escort finished their own meal across the dance floor.
Happily, it was a weekday night and no band was playing, so that the
floor stayed empty and the view clear-though Jim suspected that something
would have been organized to let them know how dinner was going at the
other table if the dance floor had been full of dancers.

At any rate, after a hit. Mary sat back from her plate, said a few words
to the major across from her and got up. She came across and got Jim, and
together they walked down the lit streets of the Base and over a few
blocks into its older section.

She stopped at one of the older office buildings, a four-story structure
of wood, rowed with tall windows, with only a few of them lighted, and
one equally tall wooden door, which Mary now unlocked.

Here, they were away from most of the street lights, and it was possible
for Jim, when he looked up for a moment before going in, to see the stars
over the mountain peaks on this cloudless night. For a second the thought
of space tugged at him with a poignancy that was a stabbing pain. Then he
followed Mary into the lighted interior, and the door closed behind
them.

The room they stepped into was tiny and brilliantly lit. No, it was two
rooms; for even its small space was divided, front to back, from beside
the entrance to beside a door in the back wall by a floor-to-ceihng
transparency behind which was a single desk, a single chair and a single
sergeant with holstered sidearm. The feeling of closeness was increased
by the bright light, the lowness of the ceiling and a faint smell of
varnish.

"Credentials, ma'am? Sir?"

The voice of the sergeant came at them through some speaker system in the
roof overhead. Mary fished in the large tan handbag slung by a strap from
her left shoulder and produced two silver-colored identification-type
cards complete with pictures.

"Thank you, ma'am. Sir."

The door in the farther wall swung open. Mary handed one of the cards to
Jim before leading the way farther into the building.

"Here, you'd probably better keep that with you from now on."

Jim took it. The picture on it was the same as that on his regular Base
ID. He tucked it in his wallet as he went after her through the door,
which closed behind them.

They stepped into an area which to Jim, at first glance, seemed enormous.
To his surprise, the wooden front wall of the building, and presumably
the side walls also, had been backed by a four-feet thickness of concrete
blocks solidly cemented together, so that the effect was like being in
some enormous cavern. Lights at some distance from each other were
burning thee stories overhead, reinforcing the illusion of vast, empty
space.

To Jim's left was a chunk of the building still divided into rooms and
offices, so that it looked like a tower built inside the cave and going
up the full four stories of the original structure. Inside here, all of
these enclosed spaces had lights on within them but no sign of people.
Mary reached out to the wall beside her and touched it. The existing
illumination was suddenly reinforced by a blaze of lights in the open
cavern area, not only at the third story level of those now burinng, but
also now at ceiling level, a story higher up.

The increase in brightness was so intense that for a mornent Jim's eyes
were dazzled and he saw nothing. Then, looking up, he became aware that
in the fourth story of space of the open area hung all sorts of cranes
and heavy slings; and the reason for reinforcing the walls became
obvious. Support would be needed if instruments like these were going to
lift the sort of loads they had been designed to lift.

But it was when he looked down again, at the vast open space of the
floor, that he rtacted. Because there sat not only La Chasse Gallerie,
the ship that literally now was Raoul Penard, but beside it another ship
that he recognized at first glance.

"You've got AndFriend here!"

It came out of him as an exclamation that was magnified by the echoes of
the large open space into a shout.

"Of course," said Mary. "Your ship's also part of everything that's
concerned with our rescue of Raoul. In a situation where we don't know
anything, we work with anything that could possibly help give us a key."

Jim went unthinkingly toward AndFnend and laid a hand flat on the
polished curve of her nose.

"Is she taking good care of you, baby?" he whispered, too low for even
the echoes here to make it audible to Mary Gallegher's ears. He thought
he felt reassurance from the metal he touched.

He turned to look at La Chasse Gallerie. In contrast with her interior,
nothing had been done to repair or even clean her up, outside.

"I suppose," he said over his shoulder to Mary, his voice sounding loud
in the stillness in spite of his conversational tones, "you didn't want
to risk touching Penard's ship any more than you had to. It looks the way
it looked when we first saw it, out beyond the Frontier."

"Yes," said Mary. She had drawn close until she stood only a step from
him and his ship and only half a dozen steps from Raoul's. "We had to
take some very small lab samples so we'd have something to work on.
Otherwise it hasn't been touched."

An intense longing suddenly gripped him to sit once more in AndFriend's
command chair. He had not seen his ship from the moment of landing with
Penard's vessel alongside here at Base. He had tried to get to her half a
dozen times, and been turned back with the excuse that AndFriend, like La
Chasse Galierie, was off-limits until it had been thoroughly checked out
by all those departments from Intelligence on down who felt they might
have something there to check.

In the same moment he thought he caught a glimpse of something, there and
almost instantly gone again, in Mary's eyes as she watched him. What it
could have been, if in fact it had not been something he had imagined, he
could not tell. It might almost have been a look of pity, except that
there was no reason for Mary to look at him that way, and in fact he was
not sure she was capable of feeling that particular emotion. But the
longing to sit in the pilot's com-chair again had put hin in movement
even as he was noticing this. He swung about, walked three steps down
AndFriend's side and laid his hand on the operating button of her entry
port.

"I'll have a look inside while I'm here-"

"No!" said Mary, so sharply that he stopped in spite of himself.

He swung around to face her. 

"It's my ship."

"I'm sorry," said Mary. "But it's part of the red tape-you know how these
things are. It hasn't been released for entry by anyone but me and my
staff."

She smiled a little sadly at him.

"I'm sorry," she said-and she really sounded as if she meant it. "You
know. Orders."

But the Frontier pilots were not book people. if they had been, most of
those who had lived would have died before this.

"Orders may be orders," he said lightly, turning back to the button,
"still-"

"Still, you'll obey them!" said the voioe of Mollen harshly, and Jim
swung around again to see that not only the general, but also either the
sergeant at the entrance or his double, had together come around the nose
of La Chasse Gallerie.

Jim's hand fell helplessly at his side.

"I came by to see if you could use a ride back to the BOQ," Mollen went
on to him. "You'll be moving into the resident wing in this building
tomorrow, but tonight you might as well be in a bed you're used to."

"Thank you, sir," said Jim. He looked at Mary. "If Mary's finished
showing me around...? We'd just got in here...."

"I'm afraid there's not much more I can show you, anyway," Mary said.
"All the labs are locked and most of the people out of them at this hour.
I just thought you'd like to see where your own ship and Raoul's are
being kept."

"I appreciate it," said Jim to her. He turned to the general.

"Thank you again, sir. I'll come right along."

"Good," said Mollen.

He turned and led the way to the entrance and into the street outside. It
was so dark by contrast that for a moment Jim could hardly make out
Mollen's limousine, floating just above the pavement, a step from the
door. Mary had not followed them out. Mollen gestured and Jim followed
him into the back seat.

"Bachelor Officers' Quarters, Building Kl47," Mollen told his driver.
They moved off.

"For God's sake," the general said after a bit, breaking the silence as
they drove toward the part of the Bane where the unmarried officers were
quartered, "don't look like you're going to be shot. I promise, I'll get
you back into space, eventually."

Jim looked up, hope waking in him after all.

"It actually is a promise, sir?" he said, and held his breath:

"It's a promise," grunted Mollen. "The only one who'll stop you from
getting hack into space will be you. But you'll have to stick it out,
meanwhile."

"I'll stick," said Jim.


CHAPTER 6

So began waiting it out.

They gave him a first lieutenant and a sergeant who knew everything that
was needed to know to keep his office running. There were about fifteen
minutes' worth of decisions he had to make daily; after that there was
nothing for him to do. He was in Procurement and Supplies, and very
junior in that, as far as he decisions went, anyway. The paperwork he put
his signature to was either for things that obviously had to be ordered,
or for things that, if they represented a bad decision, it was a bad
decision that would not prove itself to be so for months or even years.
He listened to the advice of his lieutenant and his sergeant, especially
that of the sergeant, and in consequence he could have done the job in
his sleep.

Like all Frontier pilots, he was used to playing hard, fast and furious
during his time off. But now, for all practical purposes, almost all his
time was time off. He could run, swim, play tennis or golf, go to the
gym and work out, or go and camp in the Officers' Club night and day, if
that was what he wanted.

He did it all. The Officers' Club was not empty in the daylight hours of
the ordinary work week, because there were always people working night
and off-shifts of various kinds, and people coming and going from the
Base. But by comparison to the ~S.P.M. to closing hours, it was deserted.
Of course, there were likely to be Frontier pilots in there at almost any
time of the night or day; and when he ran into those he had instant
companionship.

But his pleasure in even this grew thin. As the weeks went by, and he
became more and more removed from his own time of being out on the
Frontier, he became less and less one of them. Also, they were out for
the same reasons he had been out, to play, to find women and raise hell
generally, as a relief from a tension he no longer shared; and he found
that what once had been rare and precious, became dull and tasteless when
it was available all the time.

He could not go off Base with the other pilots, which cancelled him out
of most of their adventures and the chance of finding female playmates,
anyway. He learned that Mollen had been only too correct in forecasting
that only a need to report to someone in Washington or an equal occasion
of duty was considered sufficiently important a reason to allow him past
the gates of the Base. And he also found, gradually, that he did not
really enjoy being with half-drunk friends before noon, even with his
Frontier sidekicks, that he did not enjoy being with them before dinner
time, that, indeed, he no longer enjoyed being in the usual sort of
Earthside celebration of survival at any time at all. He, at least, had
nothing to celebrate.

He became more and more solitary. The physical activities remained open
to him, and he found himself retreating more and more into them. He had
set himself a solid program of activity to make sure he stayed in
physical shape to be let back into space. But with time on his hands,
this program expanded. He ran fifteen miles instead of five. Swam five
miles instead of one. Worked out on the exercise equipment for two
hours instead of half an hour.

At the same time he began to discover an indifference in him to food. He
was active enough to want to eat, but from being the satisfaction of a
keen appetite, his eating became simply another duty that had to be
performed. On paper he stayed in excellent physical shape, but visibly,
he began to grow lean and stringy, solitary and withdrawn.

His fellow pilots, led by those who had been in his Wing, worried about
him and tried to come up with ways to lighten his mood. They diagnosed
his trouble as being primarily due to a lack of women. Being what they
were, with a Frontier pilot's attitude toward rules and regulations, they
concocted elaborate schemes to circumvent regulations; and, first, to get
him off Base so they could get him to bed with some attractive female;
and, second-when he proved to be too tightly under observation for
that-to smuggle some likely lady on Base for him and provide the proper
quarters and privacy for them.

His lack of enthusiasm for this and their other schemes for him worried
them even more. In any case, they were unsuccessful, for he was truly
guarded like a national treasure-to which, perhaps, In some minds he was.
He had been made lieutenant colonel, as Mollen had promised, shortly
after his return with La Chasse Gallerie. After a little more than half a
year he was promoted to full bird colonel-interestingly, Mollen had
become a two-star general just a few months before-and his pilot
friends seized the opportunity to put on an elaborate celebration for him
at the Officers' Club and in the Bachelor Officers' Quarters.

At this celebration he presided like a ghost at a banquet. In vain they
kept trying to spike his ginger ale with vodka and trick him into empty
rooms with attractive females who had been given the mission of seducing
him.

After that, they pretty well gave up and left him alone. On his part, he
increased his solitary exercising and became stringier and more somber
than ever.

In fact, they had been using the wrong bait.

His first month after he had moved into the building that held the
residence quarters that were part of Mary Gallegher's lab-but completely
apart from the lab and served by an en tirely separate entrance from
outside-he had heard nothing more from her in spite of her suggestion
that she might need him from time to time for experimental purposes. At
the end of the first month he had felt relieved rather than otherwise. He
did not relish the role of laboratory rat.

But when the second month began to trickle away without a summons from
her, he began to wait and watch for one. It was not, he told himself,
that he had a particular interest in her us mg him, but that his being
called into the laboratory proper where she worked might give him a
chance to get to AndFriend once again. Finally, toward the end of the
second month, a call came, and he reported happily, only to find himself
hustled directly up into one of the lab rooms in the inner tower of the
building.

He had only a glimpse from a second-story balcony walk way, down into the
main open area of the building where he had seen the two ships on his
previous visit. To his disappointment, what seemed to be a large tent of
opaque plastic fabric had been erected over the section of the floor
where they lay, so that he could see nothing of either one of them.

It turned out he had only been wanted to wear his space suit while a
couple of Mary's staff made some tests of either him or it-the two women
doing it were not informative and he had no idea what they were up to.
Being once more enclosed in the suit with its familiar, ancient smells
brought on him a nostalgia almost too strong to bear.

After that he was called in about once a week for different tests, but
the plastic tent was always in place and he was unable to learn for
certain even whether the two ships were let alone in the same positions
and conditions in which he had last seen them.

The back of his head began to evolve wild dreams in which he somehow got
into the lab, stole AndFriend and took off into space. Eventually he
literally began to dream such dreams, when sleeping. Meanwhile, he was
working himself physically to the bone, to pass the days and bring about
sleep of any kind-which had been harder and harder to come by, in the
same measure as his disinterest in food grew.

He could and did hide from his friends that it was not wine, women and
song he needed, but AndFriend and space. He was certain he had also hidden
it successfully from Mollen, and from Mary-whom, in any case, he had not
seen in person since that first night in the lab. What concerned him
more was whether he was being successful in keeping the depth of his need
hidden from the physician to whom he had to report almost daily.

It was evidently part of the whole package of surveillance, control and
so forth set up around him, that his state of health he monitored and
recorded on what was effectively a twenty-four hour a day basis. The
Medical Officer, also a full colonel, who examined him three times a
week or more, was probably the one person to whom Jim talked at all
openly.

Part of this was because there was no one else Jim felt safe talking to
about himself. The other part was that whatever the physician's actual
specialty was-and he had told Jim once, when the visits had first
started, but Jim had since forgotten. Jim gradually came to feel that
there was something about the other that hinted at a touch of the
psychiatrist in him. Not that Jim had any experience with psychiatrists;
but there was a way the other man had of listening to him that seemed
different from the listening of other doctors to whom Jim had gone.

He told himself he had an unduly suspicious mind. Nonetheless, he found
himself saying more than he had intended, so that he was surprised to
hear the words coming from his own mouth.

The procedures daring Jim's visits were ordinarily route. Unless there
were lab samples to be taken from him, it was merely a matter of Jim's
being scanned by a number of esoteric instruments, after which he sat
down for a few words with the physician before being turned loose once
more.

"You're losing weight again," said the physician, checking through the
papers that were the hard copy of Jim's file and lay on the desk before
him. He was a tall, gangling man in his early fifties with a high
forehead, a straight nose and a surprisingly gentle, small smile that
came at unexpected moments.

"All right, Doc," said Jim. "I'll eat more."

The doctor glanced up at him from the papers.

"You could try exercising less," he said.

"And then what'd I do with my time?"

"There's always your job," said the doctor.

"What job?"

The doctor smiled his small smile.

"I don't know what to do with you," he said, sitting back with a sigh.
"The first person I've ever treated who tried to kill himself with good
health. But, you know, I'm serious about your cutting back on the
physical activity."

"For God's sake, Doc," said Jim. "Don't ask me to do that. The only tirne
I can forget about things is when I'm running or swimming or sweating it
out to the point where I haven't got any energy left over to think with.
I'll get more food down me. I don't mind eating; it's just that it's kind
of a chore these days."

The doctor scribbled on a prescription pad, tore off the sheet he had
written on and handed it to Jim.

"Take these, two a day, when you get up and when you go to bed," he said.
"They ought to increase your appetite."

Jim looked at the piece of paper in his hand, dubiously. He was not a
pill-taker by preference.

"It won't make me dopey, will it, Doc?" he asked. "I mean, it isn't some
sort of tranquilizer?"

"I guarantee it won't inake you dopey. let's just hope it makes you more
interested in food," said the physician. "Well, that's it, then. See you
Thursday."

"Right," said Jim, getting up.

He left.

At first it did seem that the pills gave him a little more appetite. At
any rate, he made a point of getting more food inside him whether his
body craved it or not, and his weight came back up a few pounds. But then
he leveled off and stayed where he was on the scale in the doctor's
office each time he came in. He suggested once to the doc-since the pills
had given him no feeling from taking them at all-that he was willing to
up the dosage, if that would do any good.

"I think not," said the physician. "You're taking about what you should
of that, right now."

So, he kept forcing the food. It was a problem, because he did not sleep
better. Sometime about this period, also, his hours of slumber began to
be occupied not so much by dreams of his stealing AndFriend and escaping
into space, as with nightmares in which the lab suddenly burnt down and
people would not let him go in and help keep the fire away from
AndFriend-which bothered him even though he knew an ordinary fire would
not harm the ship. Or he would dream that there had been a sudden
earthquake that opened a fissure right under Mary's lab. All that was
needed was someone to go in and hook a cable around AndFriend to keep her
from being dropped into the lava-hot interior of the earth, but they held
him back from doing so because it was "too dangerous."

Meanwhile, Mary's staff-he still had not seen her in person since that
first visit to the lab-began to call him in more and more fiequendy. They
were on a new kick now, as he entered the ninth month of his captivity on
the Base. This one had him still wearing his space suit while listening,
over and over again, to the voice recordings of himself, Mary and Raoul
Penard when they had taken his Wing out to meet La Chasse Gallerie in
Laagi territory, and convoy her home hete to the Base. When he had
listened to it all the way through, they would ask him questions about
who had said what to who It was like being on the witness stand in an
endless court trial.

When they got him to the point where he knew the recordings by heart,
they switched to having him work with recordings in which one of the
voices was edited out, and he spoke the words of that speaker; and it
finally ended with him playing, over and over again, the part of Raoul.

They kept it up until, among his other dreams, he began to dream that he
actually was Raoul; or rather what was left of Raoul as a mind, locked in
the sliced and broken metal that was La Chasse Gallerie. Curiously, these
dreams were not unpleasant. But finally his appetite gave up for good. He
would get to sleep, sleep for about two or three hours, dreaming
nightmares, and then wake. Only getting out under the night sky in his
running gear and covering four or five miles would rub out the memories
of those dreams and let him get to solid sleep for a few hours. He even
tried the desperate measure of getting drunk to make himself sleep, but
that did not work either.

"Alcohol may help put you out," his doctor told him, 'but after a few
hours, it turns around and makes you wakeful again."

"I've got to do something. Can't you just give me a sleeping pill, Doc?"

"That's only a temporary solution and this is a continuing problem," said
the doctor. "Maybe that medication I gave you for your appetite is
working against you now, instead of for you. Let's try taking you off
it."

So Jim went off the pills. The first night he slept marvelously, the
next night not so well. By the end of a week he was back with the dreams
and the starlit runs again. He could feel himself beginning to lose his
grip; and he found himself taking it out on the physician in a way he
would never have considered doing, a year previously.

"It's this goddamned bird-in-a-gilded-cage life they've got me living!"
he said. "I could take it if I could only get a taste, just a taste of
space, once in a while. If they'd only let me take AndFriend out once a
week-once a month, even! If they'd only let me see her!"

"You might be right," said the doctor. "But I don't have any say about
that. Have you tried putting in a formal request to visit your former
ship?"

"Ever since this thing started. Ten months now!" said Jim. "I put in a
written request through channels two and three times a week. All they do
is come back disapproved."

"Bring the next one to me. I'll add a letter and sign it," said the
doctor.

Jim did.

It came back disapproved.

He called Mollen and was told that the general could not be reached right
now, but that his request to talk to the general would be passed on to
the general.

Mollen did not call back that day or the next.

Jim called again.

That day Mollen did not call back, either.

Jim called again. Still, there was no call-back from Mollen's office,
and Mollen had made no other effort to contact him.

That night, after one more of the innumerable sessions in Mary's lab in
which Jim was made again to play through the conversation of Raoul's
rescue, saying what Raoul had been heard to say while this was going on,
he had a new nightmare.

This time when he was Raoul, however, on becoming aware of AndFriend and
the rest of the Wander Wing that was convoying him back to Base, he broke
off his litany of poetry and recitation.

"No, you don't!" he howled out the earphones of all their suits, swung
La Chasse Gallerie in a hundred and eighty degree turn and headed away
from Earth, back into enemy territory.

The dream changed, without reason but without surprising Jim, as dreams
have a habit of doing. He found himself still in his space suit, standing
on the observation platform of one of the big command ships on the
Frontier, watching in a screen as AndFriend drove across into Laagi
territory.

"What're you doing?" Jim shouted at the gunnery command officer,
standing next to him and also watching. "There's a whole flight of Laagi
ships coming up on her!"

"Oh, I thought they told you," the gunnery command officer answered
cheerfully. "They were through with her in the lab, so they decided to
get some use out of her as an unmanned drone to draw Laagi fire, so we
can make a study of how the aliens attack. Look at them now, will you?
They're moving in, now. Now they're really starting to slice her up."

"Unmanned? No!" cried Jim. His gaze was back on the screen, which now
showed AndFriend being killed and destroyed. "Baby, don't just run
straight like that. Cut! Cut and run! Fire back.."

In his mind's eye he saw his own empty command chair, with the buttons he
could have touched if he was there, the controls he could have used, if
he was in the seat. Sweat sprang out all over him; and meanwhile, beside
him, the gunnery command officer continued his cheerful chatter about
how badly AndFriend was being destroyed, as if it was a game, an
entertainment....

Jim woke, throwing off the bedcovers in one wild move ment. The underwear
which years of ship's duty had conditioned him to use as nightwear was
glued to him by the perspiration that soaked it. Still caught up in the
emotions of seeing AndFriend destroyed while he ached to save her, he
stripped off the sodden T shirt and shorts and stumbled into the shower
to pour gallons of water on his shaking body. After which he dressed in
his running clothes and went out under the unchanging stars to run the
streets through the Base until he was limp with exhaustion.

The next day he went in person to Mollen's offices.

The general was out, he was told.

He said he would wait.

He was told politely that he was not allowed to wait.

"Then send for the Military Police," he told them, taking a chair,
"because I'm waiting!"

He waited. There was a good deal of excitement with officers of various
ranks up to and including a one-star general who came and told him he
could not stay. He did not answer, merely sat.

Eventually they left him as he was. The day wore on. No one came out or
went in through the door to Mollen's inner, private office. Clearly he
was not there. He did not come in from the corridor door, either. The
afternoon passed. Jim was not conscious of the hours passing either
slowly or fast. It was simply time to be put in. He did not read. He did
not think. He simply sat and waited. At last, with the afternoon far
advanced, the captain on at the desk in the outer office got up and went
out briefly.

When he returned, he was accompanied by two tall MPs with holstered
sidearms and the flaps buttoned down. No nightsticks. The captain cleaned
up his desk. He went out and the door closed behind him. The two MPs took
positions, standing one on each side of the closed door. Jim hardly paid
them any attention.

Together the three of them spent the night. On the rare occasions when
Jim got up to go to the men's room down the corridor, one of the MPs went
with him and came back with him. Toward morning, Jim may have dozed in
his chair. But he was not conscious of having slept, and if he had, he
had not dreamed while he was asleep.

At dawn two other MPs replaced the Military Police who had been there all
night. One of them brought a plastic cup of coffee and put it on the
chair next to Jim's. Jim looked at it and realized he was thirsty. He
drank it; but he could not have said, a second after finishing it,
whether it had been black, or whether it had had cream and sugar in it.

A little before 7 A.M., the corridor outside began to sound with the feet
of incoming workers. At a little after seven, the corridor door opened
between the two MPs and Mollen strode in, followed by the same captain who
had sat at the outer desk yesterday.

Mollen jerked his head at Jim.

Jim got to his feet, awkwardly. He was dully aurprised to find how stiff
his body was after his long sitting. He followed the general into the
private office. This office had padded armchairs before its one large
desk. Mollen took the chair behind the desk and gestured Jim to one of
the facing, padded ones.

They looked at each other.

"Well?" said Mollen. "You ready to go back into space again?"

Jim stared at him dumbly and the silence lengthened out between them,
until Jim realized that the question had been for the record. And for the
record, which was undoubtedly a voice and picture recording going on at
the moment, he would have to give an answer.

"Yes sir," 

Mollen opened the he croaked. wide drawer in the middle of his desk,
fished around and came up with a document that seemed to consist of half
a dozen or so sheets of paper, heat-stapled together. He passed it across
to Jim

"Sign this."

Jim took it and blinked at it. He tried to read through it, but his brain
was almost as numb as his body. It read something like the document he
had been required to sign upon getting his commission, about the Official
Secrets Act and penalties for his disregarding it. Essentially these
papers before him, once signed, put him completely at his government's
disposal-which seemed like doing the thing twice-over, since as a
Frontier pilot he was already the government's, to use or throw away.

In any case, it did not matter. AndFriend and space were all that
mattered. He signed it with a pen the general handed him and passed both
pen and document back. Mollen waved it for a second in the air.

"You can have another look at the file storing this any time you want
to," the general said, "unless you ever become a civilian again or you're
put on a different status. Then that file'll be closed to you.
Understand?"

"I understand, sir."

"Good." Mollen's voice became more genial "From now on you report every
morning to the lab proper-Mary's work area For now, for God's sake get
back to your quarters and get some sleep."


Chapter 7.

Jim did go back to his quarters and he did sleep - for about seven hours.
At the end of which time he woke up feeling terrible generally, but very
happy for reasons he could not, in the first minute or two, remember.
Then he recalled the long wait in Mollen's office and what had happened
after the general had showed up; and his sensations of feeling terrible
settled down to the recognition that he was merely very hungry, ready to
eat anything digestible-in large quantities.

He checked his wrist-com. It was midafternoon. He got up, showered,
dressed and went to the Officers' Club, where he found the menu available
at that hour to consist only of sandwiches. He proceeded to eat perhaps a
dozen of these and wash them down with several bottles of ginger ale, no
great amount, but the food and drink together in his stomach acted on him
like knockout pills. He made his way heavily back to his quarters,
undressed and fell asleep again... and this time he slept until after
five-thirty the following morning.	

His body had become used to running. It wanted to get out and move, but
he was once again as hungry as a bear in spring. He had breakfast, put
aside the desire to run and went directly to Mary's lab.

"Credentials, sir?,

It was a different face beyond the transparency, but the uniform and the
routine were as usual. Except that this time, for the first time in
months, there were no lab workers waiting to take him off for their
eternal tests. He showed his credentials.

"You'll have to wait for the Head of Lab, sir. If you'll take a seat, she
ought to be here in the next ten or fifteen minutes," said the guard.

He found a hard seat on a bench built into the wall across from the
transparency. He grinned. From cooling his heels in Mollen's outer office
to cooling his heels in Mary's surveillance entrance. That was progress.

It was, however, nearly three-quarters of an hour before

Mary showed up. Jim did not care. He was this far and he did not intend
to move unless they carried him out. When at last

Mary did come in from the street, she had Mollen with her.

"Told you he'd be here at the crack of dawn!" said Mollen. If Jim had not
been feeling so happy, he might have allowed himself a small sense of
injury. Dawn had been a good three hours earlier.

"I'm sorry I haven't had more time to talk to you myself all these past
months," Mary said directly to Jim. She looked at him, he thought,
sympathetically. "You've lost weight."

"Nonsense!" said Mollen. "He's in top shape. Aren't you, Jim?"

"Yes sir. Top shape," said Jim. He grinned at Mary. Today he even loved
her.

"Come along." Mary and Mollen showed their credentials to the guard in
movements that betrayed an infinity of repetitions. 

"Please go on in, ma'am, sirs."

Mary led them through the inner door, and for the second time Jim stepped
into the enormous room that he had looked down into only from galleries
for nearly twelve months. It was the same as it had been, the last time
he had seen it. The plastic tent was still in place. But Mary led them to
it, pulled back a flap of the plastic and let them into the enclosed
interior which was lit by its own lamps hanging just under the fabric of
its roof.

By that light, the two ships Jim had seen on his first trip	here still
lay, side by side. La Chasse Gallerie was still a slashed and broken
wreck. AndFriend was also exactly as she had been when he had last seen
her. Or was she? She looked the same but there was an air about her as if
she had just been washed or, at least, dusted.

All Jim's emotions called on him to head for her closed entry port at a
run. But he was almost superstitiously afraid of something going wrong
with his new right of access to her if he even showed his eagerness to be
back inside her.

"She looks good," he commented, stopping because Mary and Mollen had both
stopped, a good ten paces from either ship.

"She's been updated," said Mollen. "You're going to have to learn a lot
of new things about her. And no, you can't go aboard her now."

Jim had half-expected it, but the disappointment nonetheless was like a
fist, hard, in the face.

"Oh?" he said, "When can I, then, sir?"

He looked at Mollen and then at Mary.

"You'll need some retraining first. We've got a special job for you to
do," Mary answered. "That's one of the reasons AndFriend's been improved
the way she has. I'm afraid it could be a few weeks or more yet-"

"A few weeks!" In spite of his good intentions, the words, in just the
tone he had told himself he would avoid, popped out of Jim's mouth.

"I'm afraid so." Mary turned. "Come along to my office, where we can
talk."

They went out through a flap in another side of the tent and crossed the
open floor to the bottom level of offices in the tower. Mary entered one
of these, which had a trim, whitehaired lady behind a desk, and chairs
set up plainly for visitors, chairs which were presently empty.

"There've been a number of phone calls," said the lady.

"No calls for a little while yet," said Mary. "Tell anyone with urgencies
it'll be an hour or so before I can start making calls back. Come on,
Jim, General."

She led them to an inner office which was spacious, with a desk even
larger than Mollen's and padded chairs even more comfortable and spacious
than those in the general's office But every available surface in the
office except the floor itself was stacked with papers, and the chairs
did not face the desk as they had in Mollen's private office, but were in
a rough circle facing each other.

Mary took one of these, the general slipped into the one next to her, and
Jim took one across from the two of them.

"Do you want to talk to him first, Louis?" said Mary to the general. "Or
shall I?"

"I'll say a few words first," Mollen answered. He looked hard at Jim.
"Jim, we've got plans to send you into space farther, faster, and for a
longer time than anyone human-except Raoul-ever went. But it's not going
to be easy."

"I didn't sign up for the Frontier thinking any part of it'd be easy,
sir," said Jim. "Where's this you want me to go?"

"That, you won't be told until just before you're ready to leave," said
Mollen. "But I'll tell you this much. You're going out around Laagi
territory, and your ship's been adapted accordingly. For one thing we've
gone back to fusion engines for her."

"Fusion?" said Jim.

Fusion engines had been discarded newly forty years before when an
improved fission engine design made them no longer necessary. The
drawback to fusion engines was that there was no possible way to shield
them completely in something as small as a fighter ship; they had caused
some bad physical effects in the pilots that flew ships with them, the
least of which had been guaranteed sterility after a relatively few
number of missions.

"You're going to make a-Raoul Penard out of me, then, are you, sir?" said
Jim, grinning.

"I wish we could," answered Mollen somberly. "Believe me, if it was
possible for me to snap my fingers and turn you into something like
Raoul, I'd do it. But we still don't know how his mind got into the
actual nonliving body of that ship of his, and maybe we'll never know."

Jim himself sobered. He had automatically assumed that they would not be
sending him out in a fusion ship unless they could do so safely, without
the harmful effects the older ships of that type had had on their pilots.
For the first time it occurred to him that the mission might be important
enough so that they would expect him to put up with the effects. He
thought of the paper he had signed in Mollen's office.

"It's not as bad as you may be thinking, Jim," said Mary.

"We haven't found out how Raoul Penard became part of a ship, and I don't
know when we will. I'm sure some people will someday-that is, provided
Raoul stays around long enough. But while we haven't answered that
question, we've found out a number of valuable things we didn't know
before. Things that'll make your mission possible."

"What things?"

"I'm sorry," Mary answered. "I'm going to have to answer you pretty much
the way Louis just did, when you asked where you'd be going. You'll get
answers to most questions like that only when you've reached the point of
needing to know. Everything about this is as secret as it's possible to
make it. Specifically, in answer to what you just asked, you'll be
finding out about these things as we work with you to get you ready for
the mission."

"I can tell you a little more," said Mollen. "Most of the past year's
been spent trying to find out what happened to Raoul from the last time
the other pilots in his Wing saw him to the time we picked up his signals
coming back through Laagi territory. But we know now he found something,
in that time. Wherever he went, he ended up by finding something very
interesting there; and our guesses about what it is are secret as hell.
But we're pretty sure it's beyond the far side of Laagi space
territory-in the other direction. Down-galaxy."

"And I'm to go see what it was and come back to tell you?" Jim said.

"That's about the size of it," said Mollen. "Something else. We can't be
sure, but we think he was, that is, La Chasse Gallerie, with him being
part of it, was actually in Laagi hands for a while."

"They had him?" Jim stared. "What makes you think that?"

Mollen looked at Mary, who nodded. A procedure that jarred on Jim,
slightly, since it seemed to him it should be the other way around.

"We've found a route of communication, so to speak, with him, with
Raoul," Mollen said. "Or rather, with what there is of him, which is
mainly memories. The problem's been that he suppressed the bad memories
and remembered only the good ones. But Mary's people did finally find a
way to stimulate him to remember some of the things he'd rather forget
and one of those was of being on the surface of a planet, and examined by
Laagi."

Mollen stopped, and looked at Mary again. She took over the conversation,
briskly. "Possibly they had him on show there, in a sense. At any rate,
we finally got him to reminisce about it, but what we could learn was
limited. The trouble is, as you know, the part of his mind that came back
isn't capable of direct communication. The best we can do is stimulate
him to talk out loud to himself. So the most we achieved that way was to
prod his memory about this, and listen while he relived it, in his own
mind."

"But that could be quite a bit," said Jim.

"It was. But with parts missing. Tantalizing parts," Mary said.

The arch of her eyebrows straightened out as the inner ends of them came
together in a small frown when she concentrated. Jim had had a third
grade teacher who had done the same thing.

"He was talking to himself, so he only referred to things that happened.
He didn't describe them or spell them out in any way. We can be fairly
sure that for a while at least, he was essentially a Laagi prisoner.
They'd be as fascinated as we are with the question of how a ship could
absorb the mind of its pilot. They're probably the ones who removed his
dead body for examination. Which means that now, if they didn't before,
they're one up on us by knowing what we're like physically; and, since
Laagi ships always destroy themselves if it looks like they're going to
be captured, we still don't have any idea of their physical make-up."

"But you said he got away from them," prodded Jim, more interested in
what Raoul had done than in what the Laagi might have found out about
him.

"Well, probably," said Mary, "they didn't realize he could move the ship
with his mind alone-and that's something else we also haven't yet found
out; how he could do that. But his engines had almost certainly been
destroyed before the Laagi got him; and so it undoubtedly took them by
surprise when he suddenly simply decided to go home, lifted off from
wherever he was, and headed back."

Jim shook his head.

"This..." he began and ran out of words. "How does this all tie in with
me?"

"As I say," said Mary, "we've found a way to stimulate his memory..."

She touched one of the keys on her desk top console and they heard sounds
of bird songs, leaves rustling in the wind, branches creaking against
each other and, under all, the chuckling of running water.

"What we did was record noises from up around the part of Canada where he
grew up as a boy," she said. "It was a sort of sonic, or if you like the
word better, electronic way of medicating him, so he'd tell us what he
remembered. From what we heard, we isolated more and more sound-cues
until at last we were able to trigger off memories like the one that we
think refers to his being in Laagi hands."

Jim nodded, still unsure about what this might have to do with him.

"We'll be using a developed version of the same techniques to put your
mind as much in touch with his as possible," Mary went on.

"We want you to be able to think like Penard, think as if you were him,"
said Mollen.

"At the same time," said Mary, "we're going to use a variant of the same
techniques to put your mind and mine as much in touch as possible. Now,
with living human bodies like the two of us have, we can be given
chemical medication by already established means-"

She broke off, pressed a button of her desk console and spoke into the
communications grill beside the console.

"Ola," she said, "has Dr. Neiss come in yet?"

The voice of the white-haired lady said something unintelligible from the
grille.

"Dr. Neiss?" said Mary sharply. "He's not there yet?"

More unintelligible response from the grille.

"Well, call me when Dr. Neiss gets here." Once more the emphasis on the
title of "doctor" could be heard in Mary's voice. "Thanks, Ola. Yes. No,
that's all right. Just remember to announce him as I said."

She looked from the grille back at Jim and Mollen.

"Dr. Neiss is someone you'll meet in a moment, Jim. He'll be taking care
of you from now on. You go to him for any thing medical, even if it's just
a finger you cut on a piece of paper opening an envelope."

"You hear that, Jim?" said Mollen. "That's an order. Come to think of it,
you'd better remember that anything Mary tells you to do from now on has
the effect of a military order from me."

"Yes sir," said Jim. "But-"

He broke off, went back and tried again.

"Forgive me," he said to Mary, "but I don't understand why you and I need
to have our minds put together, or however you say it?"

"Simply so I can monitor your contact with Penard as fully as possible-"
She broke off as the speaker grille on her console made noises again.

"Yes?" Mary said. "Well, send him in, then."

The door from the outer office opened and a short, thin man in his late
twenties or early thirties, with straight black hair and a sharp face,
walked into the office. He leaned a little forward with his upper body as
he walked, as if he would pugnaciously make the most of his height.

"This is Dr. Amos Neiss," said Mary. Jim got to his feet, uncertain as to
how he should greet the newcomer. Neiss came up to him and they shook
hands. Neiss's grip was firm and energetic to the point of nervousness,
like the rest of his appearance.

"So you're Jim Wander," Neiss said. His voice had a slight upper East
Coast edge to it.

"That's right," said Jim.

They sat down, Neiss in the chair at Jim's right.

"I take it we're ready to go, then?" Neiss asked Mary.

"Ready, yes," said Mary.

"That doesn't mean we can start in the next five minutes-" The speaker
grille interrupted her again.

"Oh yes," said Mary to it. "I forgot to tell you I'd asked him to come in
this morning, too. Send him in."

The door opened once more. This time the man that came in was
large-framed and a little overweight, even for his size. His face was
square and blunt-nosed, under graying brown hair.

"Colin, take a seat, will you?" Mary said, with more warmth in her voice
than when she had introduced Neiss.

"This is Jim Wander. Jim, this is Colin Eastoi. He'll be sitting at my
desk here while I'm spending time working with you and the doctor."

Colin walked heavily over to shake hands with Jim and take the chair on
Jim's other side.

"So," he said. He had an unexpected bass voice that seemed at odds with
his easy-going face. "We're all ready to start?"

"That's what Amos was just asking," answered Mary. "So I'm glad you're
here. How soon can you pick up the reins for-"

"Right this moment, if you want," said Colin. "My department's been
running itself for the past few weeks. Oh, you'll have to bring me
up-to-date on the last twenty-four hours or so, I suppose, if there's
things there I've got a need to know."

"We can do that the rest of today," said Mary. "Tomorrow-"

She switched her gaze to Amos Neiss. "-we'll begin the lab work, Jim and
I, with you," she said.

"I could make some preliminary tests on Colonel Wander today," said
Neiss. "That way-"

"No, I don't think so," said Mary. "He's a human being and he needs a
little time, just like the rest of us, to make the transition. What you
can do is have lunch with him and lay out our work schedule for him, so
if he has any suggestions, he can make them. Jim, you've got to give this
work your wholehearted efforts. So if there's something about what Amos
has in mind you don't like, tell us; and if it's adjustable, we'll adjust
it. You remember that, Amos, we tailor around Jim, not around me, let
alone around you and your staff."

"Whatever you say," said Amos.

Jim was watching the other man out of the corner of his eyes. Amos
Neiss's general appearance and the tone of his voice did not promise as
easy an agreement as his words did. Then," said Mary, she looked at
Mollen, "as far as I'm concerned, we can break up this meeting. General?"

"Fine, far as I'm concerned," Mollen grunted, getting to his feet. He was
looking more tired than Jim had ever seen him look, and older.

So Jim spent the morning happily running and working out, topping it all
off with a game of handball. Then, feeling full of glowing good health,
he went off to the Club to lunch with Amos Neiss.

He was more than a little curious about the man, under whose auspices,
apparently, both he and Mary were to be put through a training period.
But when he actually came to the lunch he found Amos Neiss as sharp-faced
as ever and concerned with talking about only one topic-the things he
would require of Jim.

"You've got it all straight, then?" said Neiss after what amounted to a
monologue, and which had lasted through the main course of the meal to
the point where they had just ordered dessert.

"Right. There's only one problem," Jim said. "You'll have to make some
time for me each day, for exercising."

"Exercising? Well," said Neiss, "well, I suppose. We could give you an
hour before we begin in the morning."

"I'll need more like three hours," Jim said. He knew a bargainer when he
met one.

"We can't possibly let you play for that much time," said Neiss. "You
don't understand how crucial these tests and routines are. Oh, by the
way, speaking of tests, I talked to Mary this morning after you left. You
can come in after we leave here and we can use this afternoon to get some
of the tests done for your preliminary profile=

"Oh? Fine," said Jim. "Would you excuse me for a minute? I just
remembered I forgot to tell the switchboard operator at the front desk of
the Club that I'd be here in the dining room. I'm expecting a call. It
may have come, and there may be a message for me there. Be right back."

He got up and vanished before Neiss could object. Outside the dining
room, however, he headed for a row of phones, and put through a call to
Mary's office.

"I'm sorry, Colonel, she's at lunch," said the voice of the white-haired
lady.

"Look," said Jim, "just in case she's there and just not taking calls,
will you tell her it's vital I speak to her now? This is Jim Wander. She
knows I wouldn't call like this without good reason."

"Well... just a minute..."

Silence took over at the far end of the line. The screen that had lit up
to show the white-haired lady went suddenly back to a silvery-gray
opaqueness. Jim waited.

Abruptly the screen cleared to show the face of Mary.

"What is it, Jim?" She sounded annoyed.

"Amos Neiss just told me that you'd agreed with him he could start making
some tests on me this afternoon. I just thought I'd check and make sure
you actually did agree. He was careful not to say specifically that he'd
got your permission."

"Oh, he told you that, did he? Damn him!" said Mary. "This is one thing
he's going to get straight right from the beginning. Where are you now?"

"Still at lunch in the Officers' Club. At the phones. I left him at the
table and told him I had to go look for a message for me at the front
desk."

"Good. When you get back to the table, tell Amos they also told you there
was a message for him to call me."

"...I'll do that."

"Fine. And do what you want this afternoon. That's from me!"

"Thanks," said Jim.

Mary broke the connection and he went back to Neiss.

"Oh, by the way," he said, sitting down. "There was a message there for
you, too. You're to call Mary at the lab, immediately."

"Oh my God!" said Neiss, jumping to his feet. "Something wrong with the
equipment? Did she say?"

"I don't know," said Jim innocently. "There was just the message to call
her."

Neiss went out of the dining room literally at a run. When he returned he
was not exactly scowling, but he was not happy.

"It looks like we'll have to pat off those tests on you this afternoon
after all," he said abruptly, sitting down again.

"Ah," said Jim.

Amos looked at him. It was not a friendly look, but the unfriendliness
was impersonal, the way a bear stung by a deer fly will turn and clout
the bear eating blueberries next to him.

They began in earnest the next day. Apparently, Neiss needed, or at least
wanted, a complete physical report made on Jim by his own staff. He was
not interested when Jim volunteered the information, as he did once, that
most of these scans and examination of physical samples from him merely
duplicated what the Medical Section of the Base kept on all Frontier
pilots, active or inactive. The first few days were given completely over
to simply testing Jim. If they tested Mary equally, they did it somewhere
else and with a different team. Neiss's staff seemed fully occupied with
Jim.

But once the testing was over, they got down to work. To Jim's surprise,
this turned out to be the same old business of rehearsing what had been
said by Penard, Mary and himself on the mission to convoy Penard home.
Only this time, when Jim spoke his own words as they had been taped, Mary
was there and also spoke hers. The only voice that was not live was that
of Raoul.

Jim had no great objection to this, now that he was close to being
reunited with AndFriend. But he did object-without success-when Amos
began a different stage of work in which he and his staff occupied
themselves with Jim alone, and used drugs. They were, apparently, now
that they had finished building a physical profile of him, engaged in
building a mental one.

This consisted of electrically probing his brain cells for reflexes and
memories, and of searching his unconscious, particularly his dream
patterns. Jim found himself hating the thought that someone like Amos had
access to his mind and could see the evidence of his love for AndFriend
and space. Also, the business of using the drugs was itself unpleasant.
Jim did not like pills, and being under their influence. He liked
injectable chemicals even less; and many of the unnamed substances Amos's
staff put into his bloodstream or flesh had side effects that clouded his
mind or disorganized his body for up to twenty-four hours-and on rare
occasions, even longer.

He had been allowed an hour and a half in the morning by Mary for his
physical conditioning, plus as much of his free time as he wanted to use
for it. The latter allowance was really the best, because Mary was
adamant, even in the face of disagreement by Mollen, against the idea of
working Jim any more than an ordinary eight hours a day. And evidently
she had the final say in such matters, for Jim found himself turned loose
at no later than five o'clock every evening.

He still could not leave the Base without special permission, which was
just as hard to come by. But he had, if he wanted, enough evening hours
to satisfy anyone, as he thought. The only drawbacks were the side
effects of the drugs, which sometimes made him unable or unwilling to
exercise in the evening hours as usual, plus something he had not
expected.

That was that it was he, now, who hated to waste the hours exercising. He
no longer wanted to kill time; he wanted to get a particular task done as
swiftly as possible, and that particular task was the business of
finishing the training that Mary, Mollen and the rest required of him.

The shape of the work was beginning to become apparent to him. He was,
indeed, beginning to feel closer to Penard every day. It was not so much
that he was establishing an identity with the mind of the man in La
Chasse Gallerie, to whose audible wanderings, received from a voice
transmitter that had been set up in place of the one that no longer
existed in the torn ruins of the fighter ship, they now let him listen
regularly. It was more as if it was beginning to be that he and Raoul
were alone together in a universe of other people who did not understand;
and it seemed to him, from time to time, that he comprehended things in
what Raoul said of which none of the others listening were aware and for
which there were no words.


Chapter 8.

She liked walnuts, sleeping late in the morning, almost any chicken dish,
horseback riding poetry, candlelight, Mozart and Prokofiev among
classical composers, Degas and Chagall among classical painters-also the
pointillist painters in general. She did not like green peppers, steak
(much), most abstract art, music playing while she worked, or any
distraction, however slight, from the task at hand, and any failure to
get things correct.

She also, Jim thought, was in love with Raoul but recognized the emotion
as a hopeless one. If she was in love, it was with the image of a man she
had largely fashioned for herself from the sound of his voice and the
choice of the poetry he quoted.All these understandings came to Jim
little by little as he and Mary worked together, or were worked together
under the direction and treatments of the staff of Amos. They came not as
something directly sought for by Mary, Amos, or even by himself, but as
inevitable bits of knowledge unavoidably attached to information about
her understanding of Penard and her own field of work, all of which it
was necessary that he come to know.
            
The result was that somewhere along in the process he found he had
completely ceased to dislike her. He still felt no great kinship for her,
but there was a sympathy for her in him that he would not have thought
possible before he staged the sit-in in Mollen's outer office.

What she had deduced about him he had no idea and felt that he would
rather not know. At least, he felt he could trust her to keep the
information to herself, as he would keep the information he had gained
about her to himself.

It was a silent pact that both recognized and which drew them closer
together. Another cause for a bond between them grew from their habit of
having lunch together-just the two of them. The announced reason for
this, by Mary, was so she could continue briefing Jim on some of the
matters that were secret even from Amos and his staff. The unofficial
reason, clearly understood by Jim, was to give them both a break from the
company of Neiss, who, though he probably could not help it seemed to
have an irritating effect on anyone with whom he came in contact.

This personality quirk in Neiss was one of the topics they talked about,
one day in the third week of their lunching together in Mary's quarters,
which were spacious enough, and evidently designed to be able to, hold
official entertainment functions.

"...All he has to do," said Mary, "is stop pushing people around for five
minutes. Give them a chance to relax."

"He doesn't dare, I think," said Jim. "I'll bet he'd scare himself to
death if he didn't keep the pressure on himself, as well as on everybody
else, all the time. My guess is he doesn't feel safe unless he's being
aggressive."

"A little aggressiveness is all to the good in just about everyone," said
Mary. "A little more than a little, you can put up with. But he'll wear
you down, just defending yourself."

"Unless he wears himself down first," said Jim. "You're the one who gets
the brunt of it."

"Because I'm a woman," said Mary moodily.

"Because you're his superior," said Jim. "I think it's more than that,
than your being a woman."

"Because I'm a woman and his superior," said Mary. "One compounds the
other as far as he's concerned. But you seem to be able to disarm him,
almost. He picks on you, but only as if from a sense of duty."

"I let a lot of what he does bounce off. That robs him of the emotional
reward, and tires him out," said Jim. "You can exhaust yourself a lot
faster punching hard at thin air than you can punching something solid."

"And it doesn't take it out of you?" She looked keenly across the, small
table between them.

"A little," said Jim. They were getting uncomfortably close to the fact
that he would put up with anything to get back into space, even if the
anything consisted of a platoon of Amos Neisses taking turns working him
over. He suspected Mary knew this, just as he had come to know things
about her.

"When can I see AndFriend again?" he asked.

"Taking a page from Amos's book, are you?" Mary deliberately helped
herself from a dish on the table, offered it to him, then pulled it back.
"That's right, you don't like broccoli."

"When can I-"

"You can't, not now or for some time to come," said Mary flatly.
"There're reasons. I can't tell you why you can't. I'm sorry. If there
weren't reasons, you could see her this minute."

"What do you want from me?" Jim heard the weariness in his own voice. "I
know everything Raoul said forward and backward. I know everything you
said, and I said, after we picked up the Chasse Gallerie. I know as much
about what you'd want done with anything I might find as you do,
yourself. When does this stupid business of drug, drug, drug and
question, question, question, stop?"

"You love that ship," said Mary.

"You know that already," Jim answered.

"Would you die for her?"

The question caught Jim unprepared. He floundered in silence for a
moment.

"Die for her?" he echoed finally. "If you mean if some idiot was trying
to blow her up or some such thing, would I take a risk to try to stop
him? Sure, I would! But how do you die for a ship? There isn't any way to
do anything like that."

Mary nodded. Which, Jim thought, was no kind of answer at all.

"Well, tell me!" he said. "Is there some sort of danger to AndFriend?
What're you talking about?"

"No. And I won't talk about it anymore, either," she said. 

"I've got your answer, and for any more information, you're going to have
to wait."

And, true to her word, she refused to say any more on the subject.

That one question of hers, however, had the effect of unlocking the door
to the closet of Jim's anxieties all over again. For some time he had
been conscious of a growing, nagging discomfort. He had assumed when
Mollen had told him that he was to be given a chance to get back into
space that it would be only a matter of time before he was there. And he
had assumed after being let in to see AndFriend that first morning with
Mollen and Mary that from this point on he would no longer be refused
access to the ship.

But he had been. He had not been let inside the tent that hid her, since.
Gradually, in consequence, he had begun to slip back into the state of
mind he had been in before he sat down in Mollen's outer office and
refused to budge; only now the state was worse because the effects of the
drugs they were always pumping into him made him imagine and dream more
vividly than ever.

His nightmares began to return. His appetite went, then his sleep began
to suffer; and this time all his running, swimming and other activity
brought him no relief. A worry about AndFriend grew in the back of his
mind and stayed with him, awake and asleep.

He began to fumble his answers and forget things during the sessions with
Mary and Neiss's crew. A new fear awoke in him and grew. It was a fear
that somehow he had become unfit, or was in the process of becoming unfit
to take a ship like AndFriend into space, let alone beyond the Frontier.

He got into a blazing argument one lunchtime with Mary in her quarters,
as a result.

"Of course I'm not doing well!" he shouted at her. "I had about three
hours of real sleep last night. That was all. If you'd let me at
AndFriend, or at least give me some idea of what all this is about, maybe
I could sleep nights. You and Neiss, yes, and Mollen, too, are deliberately
wrecking me in the name of trying to build me into something. What? And
why? Goddamn it, tell me why! Tell me!"

He heard himself repeating the words like a ten-year-old in a tantrum
and with a great effort made himself stop. Mary was sitting across the
table looking at him.

"And don't look at me like that!" he broke out all over again. "What's
the use of looking at me as if you feel sorry for me, when you're the one
who's putting me through it? I went a year, almost a year, before you even
got me into this present crazy program. We've been at it three months,
and I'm worse off than ever, and I can't see where you've got a thing
from me to pay for it."

He was shaking, shaking all over.

"Either let me in on what's up or turn me loose," he said. "One way or
another."

"And what would you do if we turned you lame?' asked Mary softly.

Probably blow my brains out!" He slumped in his chair. "How do I know
what I'd do? I don't know anything anymore. I hardly know who I am, and
in a couple more weeks or months I won't even know that!"

He stopped talking. Mary said nothing; they eat in silence, while the
fury gradually drained out of him and the shaking slowed into stillness.

"I know what we're putting you through," said Mary at last, gently. "I
know it. Louis Mollen knows it, and we both hate it. Amos doesn't hate it,
of course. He's not capable of seeing you as anything but a lab animal.
But Louis and I-you may not believe this, but it's the truth-have been
suffering right along with you from the start. Believe me, we're doing
this because we've got no choice. Can you believe that?"

"Not really," he said Dully. "It's gone on too long."

"See if you believe this, then," she said, "and in telling it to you, I'm
breaking security, because I'm telling you more than you realize. It's
been necessary to bring you right up to the breaking point, and you
haven't broken easily. But the human mind can only take so much... and
now I think you've had it."

He stared at her. It was more nonsense.

"What I'm saying is, hang on a little longer. Hang on to your sanity. It
won't be long, now."

He did not know whether to believe her or not; but in fact, there was no
place else for him to go, nothing else for him to do but keep on with
her, with Neiss and the whole business. But it not only continued as if
she had never given him any promise of the fact they were nearing an end,
at all; it got worse.

The drugs they were using in the lab sessions now seemed to leave him
foggy-minded and at least a little disoriented all the time. So that the
very days themselves ceased to exist separately, but strung themselves
together in a long chain of links, each link exactly like and part of,
the link preceding and the one following.

As a result, he hardly reacted when the whole process transferred
location. He, Mary, Neiss and his staff were all loaded aboard one of the
big command ships scheduled to go on post and phase-shifted out to the
Frontier.

The last week's lack of sleep and drug-disorientation had been
particularly hard on him-or perhaps he was beginning to be weakened, Jim
thought, to the point where what would ordinarily not bother him,
bothered him noticeably. Whatever the reason, he who had never had
shift-sickness during all his time in space, was thrown into a paroxysm
of nausea by the shift out to the Frontier. The attack was bad enough so
that they had been on station at the Frontier for at least a couple of
hours before he was able to get up out of his bed and leave the cabin.
And Mary had told him to come to the bridge as soon as they were on
station.

He still felt a steady, low-level sickness in the pit of his stomach; and
both his vision and his balance were not normal. As a result, even under
the ship's artificial gravity that was less than nine-tenths of Earth's,
it took effort on his part to make the trip up five levels and along half
the length of the vessel to get to the bridge. His legs gave at the knees
with weakness and all his senses were distorted, so that even though he
knew it was not physically so, he felt as if the deck slanted to either
the right or left under his feet as he walked. Any attempt to adjust to a
slant to the right found him feeling as if the floor now tilted left; and
the ship-green walls on either side of him seemed to lean with their tops
either inward or outward from him.

But he made it, and the shipman on guard duty at the port giving entrance
to the bridge examined his credentials and then let him through. He
stepped unsteadily into a room less than five paces from back to front
but running the full width of the ship. Two multi-instrumented control
positions, both of them empty as the ship was now holding station and on
autodirection, were to his right and left, perhaps four full meters apart
and right up against the vision screen that ran the full length of the
forward wall.

This vision screen displayed a number of "windows." The full left half of
it was a single window that looked across the Frontier into the Sector
guarded by the fighter ships under this ship's command. The right half of
the screen was displaying a number of windows showing close-ups of the
fighter ships in the Wings under command here, some of them, Jim knew,
more than five light-years distant from where he stood.

A command officer of the ship stood before the large left segment of the
screen, watching. A hand-control in his right palm blinked with code
lights from the various instruments at the com-positions, and his
hand-control was now emitting a steady buzzing that warned of Laagi ships
coming out toward this sector, though they were evidently still too far
off to be shown in the screen.

The buzzing ground away irritatingly on Jim's eardrums, and the red
coveralls uniform of the command officer seemed unnaturally garish
against the green of the walls and the black of the screen with its thick
sprinkling of starlights. In fact, everything in the command room, seen
with his present distortion of vision, seemed to stand out in ugly
fashion from everything else there, as if an emphasized three-dimensional
space was in effect. There was an unnaturalness about all of it; and the
buzzing of the hand-control, irritatingly, sounded far louder than it
should have in Jim's ears.

He turned toward Mary and Mollen, on his right. They were both, it seemed
to his unnatural vision, looking at him oddly; but everything was so
distorted he could not trust himself to interpret fine details like the
expressions on faces. He started toward them.

He had barely taken his first step, however, when he saw their eyes leave
him and go to the left half of the screen in front of the command
officer. Jim stopped and turned back to look in that direction himself. A
new window had just been displayed in part of the left half of the
screen, directly in front of the officer; and something, he was not at
first sure what, drew Jim's gaze to the single ship displayed there on
close view.

He squinted at the ship, then stared.

Forgetting all about Mary and Mollen he tacked across the slanting floor
of the bridge at the closest approach to a nun that his unsteady balance
would permit, until he was beside the command officer and joining him in
staring at the ship shown in the new window-staring at it in utter
disbelief.

"That's my ship!" he said.

The command officer appeared not to hear him. The buzzing that
warned of the oncoming Laagi vessels seemed to roar in Jim's eats.

"I said-that's my ship!" he shouted over the buzzing in the officer's
ear.

A second, smaller window suddenly sprang into existence alongside the one
that showed AndFriend. The squat, dark shapes of oncoming Laagi ships
were now displayed in it, like potbellied, heavy salmon ready to spawn.

"It's just some old hulk they want to get rid of," the officer said
without taking his eyes off the screen. He seemed to have only half-heard
what Jim had said. "Don't worry. There's no one aboard her."

"No one aboard her!" cried Jim.

"No, they're just using her as a drone target. They want to find out what
parts of a ship the Laagi direct their fire on when it simply comes
straight on and doesn't defend itself-" Even as he spoke, there was
something, no more than a flicker on the screen showing AndFriend. It was
the strike of a weapon from one of the Laagi ships, which were still too
far away to be seen in the same screen as AndFriend. A slantingly
vertical gash opened the side of AndFriend. She rolled a quarter-turn to
port, like a wounded animal, then righted her self and continued onward
into the fire of the oncoming aliens.

"Turn her back! Bring her back here!" Jim grabbed the arm of the
officer. "Don't you understand? That's AndFriend, my ship, the one
they've been studying for a year now, the one that escorted back Raoul
Penard's ship. She's too valuable to lose, don't you understand me? Get
her back!"

"No, no," said the officer soothingly, pulling away from him. "You're
right about what ship it is, but they've got all~~ ~~reached upward with
both arms as if he could reach out across the thousands of miles to the
buttons before that empty comchair. He saw only the pilot room....

He was in the com-chair. He was invisible but he was there. His invisible
body was taking charge. His invisible fingers were finding the drive
buttons and the firing buttons. He saw them depressing before him and
felt AndFriend responding with movement and weapons. A strike by a Laagi
weapon came through and destroyed half the pilot room beside his chair.
He felt the fraction-of-a-moment's heat-blow through the invisible suit
protecting his nonexistent right shoulder. It was too late for him and
AndFriend to get away now; but at least they could fight. The Laagi would
not simply have her for nothing. He and she together would fight back.
They would fight. They would fight....


Chapter 9. 
 
He woke surrounded by silence and darkness. Unbroken silence and
unrelieved darkness, as if all the stars had been taken from the
universe, and it stretched away forever around him, limitless, lightless,
and at peace....

"Where am I?" he asked-and heard his own voice hollowly echoing.

"It's all right," said the voice of Mary. There was an anxious tone to
it. "You're back at Base. You and AndFriend. It's all right."

"Can you fix her?"

"She's not touched," said the voice of Mollen, "and never was. She never
left here-it was a mock-up, an imitation of her, you saw out on the
Frontier."

Jim pondered this.

"Sir, I don't believe you," he said at last. "I'd know her. It was
AndFriend."

"No," said the voice of Mollen. "That's why you were drugged,"

The older man's voice grew harsh.

"Do you think we didn't think of that? That's why we had you higher'n a
kite. Anyone could imitate your ship, but nobody but you could give it a
soul."

Jim remembered that Mollen had been a fighter pilot once, himself. The
time had to have come for him, too, when he had had to leave his ship.
Jim said nothing, considering this and what the other man had just said.
He felt clearheaded and natural now, except for the darkness all about
him. His slowness in answering was simply because now, for some reason,
there seemed all the time in the world to think.

"I'm in AndFriend now, like Raoul Penard's in La Chasse Gallerie, aren't
I?" he said at last.

"Yes," said the voice of Mary. "When you couldn't stand to watch what you
thought was AndFriend getting killed, you went to her, but you went to the
real ship, which was here all the time."

"Yes," said Jim.

"Can you see us?" said a new voice. For a second Jim could not place it;
and then he recognized it as the voice of the Base doc he had gone to
almost daily before he had finally broken and staged the sit-in at
Mollen's office.

"No," said Jim. "I think I'm going to sleep now. I'm very tired."

He must have slept for some time. When he woke the darkness was still
there. He stayed where he was in it, replaying in his mind the
conversation he had had just before going to sleep.

"Can you see us?" the doc had said. But he had not seen them, or anything
else. Could he see if he wanted to? If AndFriend was where she had been
all this time he must be under the plastic tent in Mary's lab. Surely he
could see that.

He could. There was no sudden awareness of light. In fact, he was not
really sure how he was seeing, what he was using for eyes or where they
might be on AndFriend's hull. He seemed simply to be able to see anything
he wanted in any direction, until his gaze was stopped by the dark
plastic of the enclosing tent. He told himself that the tent was not
there, and abruptly he was able to see the whole inside of the large lab
section that housed it, up to the cranes and slings, four stories
overhead.

Neither Mary nor Mollen were in sight, let alone the doc. But a thin
young man he recognized as one of Neiss's team sat in the tent itself,
reading in a folding chair to the right of the nose of his hull.

"I'm awake," said Jim.

The young man lost his book and nearly fell out of his chair.

"Wait, wait... " he said, scrambling to his feet. "I'll get them. Just
a minute. Wait. I'll be right back..."

He was talking and running backwards at the same time. He turned and kept
going, through a flap of the tent that Jim was now holding as invisible
in his mind, toward the bottom story of the laboratory tower at the far
end of the large open space. Jim followed his movements as he might have
followed them on a ship's screen, followed the man to an office and an
inner door, on which he pounded with his fist.

"He's awake!"

Jim withdrew his attention and considered himself. He had no idea how he
was hearing, speaking or seeing. He simply did these things. It was, he
thought, as if each smallest particle of AndFriend had ears, eyes, and a
voice. His thoughts wandered off into a feeling of happiness over the
fact that she had really not been hurt; and that he and she were together
again....

"Jim?" It was Mary's voice. He turned his attention to his immediate
vicinity again, and saw Mary-in that strange way of seeing he now
had-standing close, with Mollen and the doc.

"I could never remember your name," he said to the physician. "I just
called you doc. There's been another medical man looking after me lately,
but I never felt like calling him doc."

"And I'm sorry about that, Jim," said Mary-and, surprise of surprises,
there was a catch in her voice. "Neiss has two doctorates, one in
inorganic chemistry, the other in biology, but he's not a medical doctor.
We just wanted you to think he was. This is Aram Snyder, who really is a
physician and a psychiatrist."

"They sounded me out about working with you, here," said Aram, the doc.
"I didn't know what they had in mind then, but from a theoretical point
of view, what they were talking about sounded unethical to me, lacking
the subject's consent. So they didn't go any farther with me."

"I'm sorry, Jim. I'm sorry, son," said Mollen harshly. "Mary and I, both
of us, we didn't like doing this to you, blind. But we didn't have any
choice. If there'd been more than one of you, maybe we could have asked
for a volunteer. But there was only you; and we couldn't take a chance on
your saying no. It's my responsibility, not Mary's."

In the strange calmness in which he now resided, Jim thought about this,
turning it over in his mind, examining the words in an effort to
understand everything they represented. It occurred to him that if it
were not for the calmness-the feeling of being detached from much of what
they said, he would be feeling very outraged right now that they should
doubt his willingness to volunteer for what had been done to him. He was
so long at thinking this over that when his attention came back to the
others, he found they had fallen to talking among themselves in the
meantime.

"...But how is he, Doc?" Mollen was saying.

"How can I tell?" responded Aram, irritably. "He's had a major emotional
shock-how major I've no way of measuring. How do I know what it means to
find yourself out of your body and into a machine?"

"When Mary did it, she wasn't damaged by it," said Mollen.

"But I knew what I was getting into. I wanted to do it," said Mary. "So I
was prepared."

"Mary did this before?" asked Jim.

"She was in La Chasse Gallerie," said Mollen. "But she got there by a
different route than the one you took."

"We were working on a different premise, then-" Mary broke off, turning to
Aram. "Doctor, I'm afraid we're about to talk about things that-"

"I know, I know," said Aram. "Secrecy. You don't have to explain. Just
don't put any pressure on him."

He turned and went out through a flap of the tent. They heard his
footsteps moving away and the distant slam of a door.

"What different premise?" asked Jim.

"Our samples from La Chasse Gallerie showed that part of Raoul's
living... there's no proper word for it, call it living fabric, had been
absorbed by the inner surfaces of some of his ship's walls. We still
don't understand how it could work that way, so I can't explain it to
you, even if the words were there. But apparently when you get right down
to it, matter is matter; and any kind of matter can, under the right
conditions, be sensitized to become a vehicle to carry an already
developed personality-or soul, if you want to call it that."

"Soul," said Mollen softly. "'Soul' is the word. Mary offered herself as
a guinea pig."

"I also had a... feeling for Raoul Penard. We thought that might
help."

"What did they do, glue you to the inside wall of the pilot's room of La
Chasse Gallerie?" asked Jim.

The two stared at him.

"Jim," said Mary, "did you mean that as a joke? Or-"

"I didn't mean it literally," said Jim. "Why're you so shocked by that?"

Because it shows how-how good you are. I mean, how well you are!" said
Mary.

"She means," said Mollen bluntly, "how sane. Sane enough to have a sense
of humor left."

"Why shouldn't I?" said Jim. "I'm all here, even if I am wearing a ship
instead of a body."

To his surprise, the other two were unnaturally silent for a moment.

"Oh, I see," said Jim. "You mean I might have been insane the way Raoul's
insane."

"Not insane." Mary spoke with an effort. "Not, anyway, the way we think
of insane. That's what I found out when I used myself in that experiment
with Raoul and La Chasse Gallerie."

Her voice grew more businesslike.

"And to answer you, no, I wasn't glued to one of the inside walls of the
ship," she said. "What we did was take a very small amount of material
from the ship and implant it under my skin. I lived with it for several
months, hoping that this way I'd become sensitized to La Chasse Gallerie,
too. Then, with the use of hypnotic medications, I was urged to feel that
I'd become the ship, with Raoul."

"And it worked?" said Jim, wonderingly.

"It worked-oh, not on the first try or even the fifteenth. But we kept
trying different drugs and self-hypnosis instead of someone else
hypnotizing me, and so forth; and-we don't know specifically why then and
not before-but one day it just worked; and I was in the ship with Raoul."

Mary stopped talking. She looked down at the floor.

"In a sense, then," said Mollen, when it became clear Mary was not going
on, "she got the equivalent of a good look at Penard-"

"Yes," Mary interrupted. "That was when we-when I found out he wasn't
wholly there."

She paused briefly again, then went on.

"It was just one part of him, the part that remembered his childhood and
certain things," she said. "He didn't remember anything about being a
pilot. He didn't have any notion of how he'd made La Chasse Gallerie fly
after her engines were gone, or how he could talk, or anything like that.
He was just a sort of bundle of living memories, from his earliest
years."

Her voice softened.

"But he's happy with that. That's why we decided to give up trying to do
anything more with him. He deserves that happiness after a long century
of being lost and finally making it home again. He can stay as La Chasse
Gallerie as long as he wants to, and he'll always be taken care of."

"But how did I get into this?" Jim said.

"Because Mary found out she couldn't do anything but be there, in La
Chasse Gallerie," said Mollen. "And maybe you can't either. Try something
for me right now-"

"Aram said not to put any pressure on him," Mary interrupted swiftly.
"Maybe we should wait-"

"I'm all right," said Jim. "What were you going to say, General?"

"All right, Mary," said Mollen to her. He turned back to Jim. "Jim, I'll
leave it up to you. If you don't want to try this, just say so. I'd like
you to try to lift AndFriend-lift yourself-just off the floor, if you
can."

"I see," said Jim. There was a moment in which he considered it, and then
he lifted, off the concrete some six inches, the whole length and tons of
weight of AndFriend, as lightly and effortlessly as a dandelion seed
lifted from the ripe blossom by a breath of warm summer breeze. He poised
there.

"Fine... " said Mollen after a moment. His voice sounded slightly
strangled. "You can come down now."

Jim went back to rest on the floor, again gently, silently.

"How did you do that?" demanded Mary.

"I don't know," Jim said, puzzled. "How does someone bend his right arm
at the elbow? You want to, so you do."

None of them said anything for a moment.

"So," went on Jim finally, "that was why Mary's way of making herself a
part of La Chasse Gallerie didn't work for you. It wasn't any good to be
part of a ship if you couldn't move it."

"You really don't know how you do it?" demanded Mollen.

Jim shook his head. Then realized he had only thought of shaking his head
and that, of course, nothing about AndFriend had moved.

"I don't have the slightest idea," said Jim. "I see you, I hear you, I
can move. I am-right now, I really am-AndFriend. Maybe that's the
difference. The only one who could be La Chasse Gallerie was Raoul."

"Yes," said Mary somberly. "I think you're right. We finally decided it
was something like that, ourselves."

"But it worked with me," said Jim.

"No-" began Mollen.

"No," said Mary in the same moment; and Mollen stopped trying to answer.
"I decided the process hadn't worked for me because even when I thought I
was part of La Chasse Gallerie, I really wasn't. I was part of Raoul. The
bonding was based on some sort of emotional tie. Do you remember my
mentioning the matter of you loving your ship, when I talked to you at
the Officers' Club about this project, long ago?"

"I remember," said Jim.

"I think I also said something about how poltergeist phenomena might be
related to Raoul's ability to move a spaceship that no longer had any
engines to take off from a planet's surface and move itself through
space. I had the idea then that an intolerable situation was the trigger
for a parakinetic individual using such abilities. But it wasn't so much
the situation as the individual's response to it. A fury at the
intolerable situation-which meant some kind of frustrated love as the
obverse."

"Raoul's love for his ship-and his home?" said Jim.

"And my-my bond with Raoul."

"Why don't you want to say you loved him?" asked Jim, realizing.
strangely, the moment he had said it, that this was as unusual a thing
for him to say as Mary's avoidance of the word he had mentioned. "Most
women don't have any trouble saying the word 'love."'

"I'm not 'most women'-I'm me!" flared Mary. "Besides, how would you
know?"

"I guess I wouldn't," said Jim, out of the strange painless honesty that
was part of him in the place where he now lived.

"Then I'll go on," said Mary. "The point I'm making is that if the
joining between the mind of one person and another person or thing
requires a powerful love, then simply the mechanical means we'd used to
put me in with Raoul wouldn't work to produce a spaceship with only a
human mind flying it. A human mind that would not only be in, but be able
to control what it was in, had to have three qualifications. It had to
know that it was possible for it to be in a ship-and there were only you
and me who'd actually experienced Raoul's being in and flying La Chasse
Gallerie. It also had to be in an intolerable situation; and it had to
have the bond of an overpowering love with what it would become part of."

She stopped.

"Am I making sense to you?" she said.

"Yes," said Jim, "I understand."

"If I was right, the hypothesis offered an explanation, not only for
poltergeist activity, but for ghosts haunting houses or certain
locations, or of human spirits taking over other people, or things, and
operating through them."

Again she paused.

"Go on," said Jim.

"It was all we had to work with," she said, almost defensively. "So we
set out to try it out on you. We deliberately kept you from AndFriend;
and we wore you down with frustration. All the time, of course, we were
studying you. Under hypnosis, we found what we wanted. It was your dream
of AndFriend being used as a target drone to study the Laagi responses,
and when we thought we had you at the breaking point, we arranged to
reenact it for you."

She stopped once more. Jim did not say anything.

"Well, it worked," she said at last. "You're perfectly free to hate me
all you like for doing it. I thought it was something that had to be
done, and I did it."

"I authorized it," said Mollen. "I told you, Jim, it was my
responsibility."

"How did Mary get back into her own body?" asked Jim.

"When I faced the fact that there was no Raoul Penard there for me to
love," Mary used the last word emphatically, "I simply woke up in my own
body, where it'd been kept and cared for. They'd tried to bring me back
by hypnotic signal-I think you know what I mean. I was given an order
under hypnosis to come out of that hypnosis when a certain person told me
to. It was to be Louis, here, telling me to come back. They tried it.
When they found they couldn't communicate with me and Raoul was still
going on with his own talking, they had Louis call me back. But I didn't
come. Only when I faced the fact there was no real Raoul there-then I
came back, of my own accord."

"What you're telling me," said Jim, fascinated by his own calmness, "is
that you don't know how I'll ever get back into my own body."

The moment that went by without an answer was long enough so that the
truth became obvious.

"It's worse than that, isn't it?" he said. "You don't think I ever will
get back?"

"I'm sorry, boy," said Mollen. "It's my responsibility, as I keep saying.
But you're right."

"AndFriend isn't like Raoul," said Mary. "She's exactly what you knew she
was. You'd have to want to leave her... enough. And that may-"

"Be impossible," said Jim.

"Yes."

This time the silence was very long indeed. Jim was trying to live with
the idea of his situation, to gather in the full meaning of it. The other
two said nothing, as people say nothing, watching the critical moment of
a medical operation through the glass window of an observation booth.

"You did this all for a purpose," said Jim finally. "You did it because
you want me to do something. That reason you had for sending me back into
space, General-with the small difference that you didn't tell me you were
sending me back this way. No, wait-"

He stopped Mollen as the other was beginning to speak again.

"Don't tell me again it's your responsibility. I've heard that. I know
it's your responsibility. And I know you did it because the people who
tell you what to do made it your responsibility. It doesn't matter who's
responsible. The only thing that matters is why you did it-what's the
mission you had for me?"

"Have you looked at yourself? I mean, at AndFriend?" asked Mollen. "Can
you look at yourself?"

"Yes. You mean the new fusion engines and all the rest of it," answered
Jim. "I know it's there, just as you said it would be. But you know, I
don't need it, any of it. I can go wherever I need to go the same way
Raoul did, the same way I lifted off the floor, just now. Wait a minute,
though-I can't phase-shift without using the ship's equipment. But the
regular drive equipment you could have just as well left off."

"Perhaps," said Mollen, "but we weren't taking any chances. Also, if you
were captured..."

"By the Laagi."

"Yes," said the general with a small sigh, "by the Laagi. If they capture
you, we want you to look as if you needed a human being in you, to run
you; but the human being just happens to be missing."

"So, you want me to go deep into Laagi territory," Jim said, "deep enough
so I could be captured instead of just shot to pieces?"

"Not exactly," said Mollen.

"No?" Jim was surprised, and was startled to realize that it was the
first time since his waking as part of AndFriend that he had felt that
emotion.

"We want you to go out around Laagi territory, just as I said in my
office."

"Then why could I be captured?"

"Because we want you to go beyond Laagi territory, around the other side
of Laagi territory; and we've no way of knowing how far they've gone on
that far side. Since Raoul's already been there, they may be watching for
you there. We don't know. But there's that chance. But if you're
captured, maybe you'll have a better chance of escaping if they think you
need someone to fly you."

"You want me to find whatever it was Penard found," said Jim. "Don't you
think you better tell me now what you think it was?"

"We don't know. That's a fact, Jim. It seemed to be some sort of
paradise, from Raoul's point of view. The point is, there was this
paradise and then there was something else

there, too. It's that something else that's got us sending you out
there."

"What was it? Animal, vegetable or mineral?"

"That's what we don't know."

"I don't understand," said Jim. "Granted that Raoul thinks it's in a
paradise. If nothing more's known about it-"

"Sorry. Back up and start again," said Mollen. "I'm doing a bad job of
explaining. It's whatever else it is, and whether or not that's connected
with the paradise part, that really interests us. Because we think it
might also have something to do with how Raoul got to be part of La
Chasse Gallerie-and because he claims the Laagi don't know it's there."

"They don't?" said Jim. "Raoul claims they don't?"

"That's what we gather from what he says," replied Mollen.

"How can the Laagi not know it's there if it's right on their back
doorstep, if we're on their front doorstep, speaking in interstellar
space terms. They ought to be able to see it, ~tooor at least, I assume
the assumption is Raoul saw it."

"I don't know. The best people we've put on it can't guess," said Mollen.
"But can you imagine what it'd mean if there was someone or something we
could work with, that the Laagi couldn't even imagine, let alone see? It
might mean the end of this long war with them after all. It might mean we
could open the way we want to the inner parts of the galaxy."


Chapter 10.

Jim and AndFriend lay thinking. The human race had been at war with the
Laagi so long, over five generations, that the contest had become
something that was almost as taken for granted as the physical facts of
the universe itself. It seemed they had always been at war with the
Laagi. They would always be at war with them... these aliens, these
people no human had ever seen, whose worlds no human had ever seen; but
only the hulls of their heavy-bellied space warships. It was almost as if
Mollen had suggested altering all the continents of Earth into unfamiliar
shapes.

It was not just what he wanted, of course. It was what everyone wanted.
No more of this war which had drained Earth's resources and brought her
nothing in return-unless it was the feeling of being safely entrenched
behind a line of fighting spaceships. But with no more Laagi to fight,
what was next?

Hopefully, they could then go out to colonize livable worlds, wherever
these could be found, which had been what they had been engaged in when
they found that there were no ready-to-live-on planets within practical
phase-shifting distances, unless they were the worlds already occupied by
the

Laagi or in that area of space to which the Laagi barred the way.

No one even knew why the Laagi fought. They had attacked, on contact, the
first unarmed human spaceships that had encountered them. Clearly, they
would have followed this up by carrying their attacks against Earth,
itself, if the aroused world had not hastily combined to arm and man the
defensive line in space that was the Frontier. Clearly, the Laagi wanted
colonizable planet-space, too; and in spite of the fact no human had ever
seen one, Earth must be enough like their world or worlds to be usable.

In the early years after human and Laagi ships had first encountered each
other, their ships had come close enough to be observed just outside
Earth's atmosphere. But meanwhile Earth had been frantically building
ships fitted for space combat; and by the time the first of these went up
in effective numbers, hunting for the Laagi, they had to travel almost as
far as the present Frontier before encountering any of them.

But beyond the Frontier all the military strength of Earth had not been
able to push, in well over a hundred years. The larger a fleet of fighter
ships with which they tried to penetrate, the greater the number of Laagi
ships that came to oppose them. Were the Laagi from one world or many?
Were they paranoid or reasonable? What were they, physically and
mentally?

No Laagi ship ever surrendered. They fought or ran, but once engaged in
combat they kept fighting until they were destroyed, or destroyed
themselves. Continual efforts to find a way of capturing a Laagi ship had
been without success. There seemed to be the equivalent of a dead-man's
switch in each of their ships that triggered its destruction if it became
too badly crippled either to run or fight any more.

Now Mollen was suggesting that if Jim was lucky in finding what Mollen
and Mary seemed to hope was out there, the years of fighting the Laagi
might be over. The mountain was far off still on his horizon, but now a
road had appeared that might lead him to it.

"Jim?"

It was Mary's voice, speaking to him.

"Yes?" he answered.

"You haven't said a word for nearly an hour," said Mary.

"We thought we'd give you time to think over what Louis just said. But
it's been nearly an hour, as I say."

"Has it? I'm sorry," said Jim. "Time feels a little different to me now.
Did you say something to me that I didn't answer? What was it?"

"We didn't," said Mollen. "But we were just about to. Do you think you'd
have any trouble phase-shifting wide of the Frontier, whether you use
your fusion engines or not; and then coming in again, say, fifty
light-years farther on, to see if you're beyond Laagi territory?"

"I don't think so," said Jim. "It may take some time, but if time's not
important-by the way, where's my body? What's happening to it?"

"It's being cared for," said Mollen. "As long as you come back within an
ordinary lifetime, it'll be waiting for you. Actually a straight out,
down, in and out again and back shouldn't take you more than a matter of
weeks at the outside."

"Then I'm ready to go anytime," said Jim. "It's not as if I need to pack
a suitcase, is it? You're talking to a ship, General, not a pilot."

"Louis means, are you mentally ready to go?" Mary asked. "We've been
putting you under considerable strain for the last year. No one expects
you to just bounce back from that and take off."

"You know," said Jim, "it's strange, but there's nothing to bounce back
from. Even if it'd turned out you didn't have a good reason for putting
me here, there'd be nothing to bounce back from. I'm different now,
that's all, in some way I can't explain. You know, come to think of it,
it's almost as if I was thinking like a ship, instead of a man."

"Maybe we should have the doc give him some tests," said Mollen, very
nearly under his breath.

"To see if my mind's all here?" Jim said. "It's all here, I promise you.
It's just that-it's different, now."

"I don't know..." grumbled Mollen.

"Maybe I ought to say it's something like being perfectly free to think
without all the body-feelings that used to interfere with thoughts, like
static," said Jim. "Anyway, if you want me to leave this minute, I can."

And he once more lifted AndFriend a hand's breadth from the floor.

"No. Wait. Come down!" said Mollen.

Jim rested the weight of his ship-body back on the floor.

"There's more to it than you know just yet," Mollen said. "We've got
tapes of parts of what Raoul said that we've never let you hear
before-tapes about whatever it was he ran into that gave him that idea of
a paradise, and that the Laagi didn't know it was there. Are you ready to
hear those now?"

"Certainly," said Jim. "Now or anytime. You know, it's funny. Time
doesn't seem to mean the same thing to me now. Maybe I don't sleep
anymore, like this. No, wait a minute; I did sleep for a while, didn't I?
How long was I asleep?"

"Asleep?" said Mollen. "Maybe forty minutes. We thought you'd be out for
hours."

"Forty minutes!"

For the first time Jim paid close attention to the faces of Mary and
Mollen. They both looked strained and tired. Mollen, perhaps because of
his age, looked very tired indeed.

"Just a second," said Jim. "What time is it now?"

"Now? Early morning-" Mollen looked at his wrist-com. "Four hundred
thirty-seven."

"Four A.M.! You're the ones who're not up to tapes," said Jim. "Why don't
you both go and rest? You can show me the tapes after you've had some
sleep."

"And what'll you be doing meantime?" Mary asked.

"Me?" Jim was surprised by the question. He thought for a moment. "I'll
think, I guess. Anyway, minutes, hours, days... it doesn't make all
that much difference to me."

"Why not?" asked Mary. "Can you tell me why not?"

Jim thought about it.

"No," he said. "It just doesn't. It's like the business of my lifting
myself off the floor to show you I could do it, earlier. I don't know how
I do these things. I seem to be something like a stone-age savage. I know
what I can do with my body, but I can't tell you why or how."

"I'd still like to have you try to answer-"

"Mary," said Jim. "If you like, you can stay and we'll talk as long as
you want. It won't make any difference to me. You can go until you fall
over. But the general's going to fall before you do. And the truth is,
you probably need sleep as much as he does. Why don't you go get some,
and come back when you're rested. I'll still be here and just the same."

"You're not just trying to get rid of us so you can be alone?" growled
Mollen.

"Not particularly," said Jim. "In fact, I don't really know whether I'll
think at all while you're gone. I think I'll think, but I won't know
until I'm left alone. Did you ever find out whether Penard slept, or just
sat there and thought?"

Mollen grunted, wordlessly.

"No," said Mary, "there was no way to check."

"Well, there you are," said Jim. "It's up to you. But why don't you both
get some sleep?"

"All right. I'm going, anyway," said Mollen abruptly. "Mary?"

"I suppose"-she looked from Jim to the general and back to Jim "I really
am tired."

"Pleasant dreams," said Jim politely. "Just remember to speak to me when
you get back, in case I do sleep myself, or get lost in my own thoughts."

"Good night, then," said Mollen gruffly.

"Good night," said Mary; and it occurred to Jim for the first time in his
life how much sweeter the words sounded in a woman's voice than in a
man's.

"Good night," he said, and watched as they turned and left.

It turned out that he was never to be sure whether he thought all during
the period of hours that passed before he saw Mary and Mollen again, or
whether he slept part of it. He was conscious of remembering many things
from his own life, the way such things are remembered just before falling
asleep, with a particular clarity that almost amounted to reliving them.
If he speculated, if he engaged in logical mental attack on any question,
he was not conscious of it afterward. He had vaguely intended to try
something like that, just to see how his mind would work under these
conditions; but there seemed to be all the time in the universe and the
question and the experiment were not pressing.

But he understood now how Raoul could lose himself in his memories. He
had been so used to the ever-present feelings of his body, its efforts,
its weight under gravity or artificial gravity-perhaps even its circadian
rhythms-that he had considered his mind totally free for thoughts or
dreams when actually it was receiving and noting reports from all over
its physical vehicle. It was a pleasant situation to be mind alone. It
occurred to him that the condition of being contentedly alone like this
might turn out to be useful therapy for some kinds of mental
disturbances.

He had rarely felt more contented.

But the question of sleep remained a question. He was conscious neither
of falling asleep nor of waking-but without body signals to announce
them, these things could have happened without his noticing. He could,
for example, have slipped from remembering a past experience to dreaming
about it without noticing it. He did not, however, remember any of the
illogical happenings and transitions that seem to take place, to the
dreamer in the dream state. Also, he had been awake as he had watched
Mary and Mollen leave him; and he was awake when later they lifted the
flap of the tent and came back inside.

"How are you?" Mary asked as they came up to his hull.

"Same as ever," he answered. "There's been no reason for me to change.
How about you two? Are you rested?"

"Yes," said Mary.

"You, too, General?"

"Yes. Thanks. I did need some sleep," said Mollen gruffly.

Mary was carrying a small case in her hand. She uncoiled a lead from one
end of this and placed the free end against his hull, where it clung.

"These are parts of Raoul's recordings about the paradise and the Laagi,"
she said.

The sound of Raoul's voice began to resonate in his hull, audible to him
but to no one else unless someone had earlier attached a listening device
to his hull-and, feeling around himself now, he was sure there was no
such thing touching him.

But the recordings were not very informative beyond what he had been told
already by Mary and Mollen. Invariably they were fragments of sentences
in which mention of the Laagi, or the "paradise" was merely used as a
reference... the Laurentides. Paradise was wonderful, but there's no
place like home... ugly like those Laagi things. All right, maybe not
ugly; but nothing beautiful, just like the Laagi couldn't imagine
beautiful... they didn't even come to watch me. I kept waiting. Just
having me there was it, evidently. When I figured that out, I lifted and
headed for home.... There's no place like home... but they were all
stuck. Crazy Laagi, all stuck in space. Flies on flypaper. Not me...

Jim listened patiently through more than four hours of such excerpts, and
ended up not much more informed by these cryptic allusions than he had
been before. The sum total of it was what Mary and Mollen had already
told him. That some where beyond Laagi territory-somewhere reachable in a
fusion ship, which could only mean farther in toward the center of the
galaxy-there was something Raoul had considered a paradise-or
paradises-he seemed to be using the word sometimes to refer to singular
places, sometimes to multiple ones. 

That these were the Laagi worlds themselves seemed improbable, since
Raoul had evidently not found the Laagi home place or places attractive.
Also, since it was unmistakably clear that La Chasse Gallerie had been in
Laagi hands, it was a reasonable assumption that this had been after
Raoul had become a part of his ship. Otherwise the Laagi, it was natural
to assume, would have made the human pilot, rather than the vessel, their
main interest; particularly since their own ships were pretty much on a
par with the human ones, judging by how these were able to do in combat.

So, it was at least a reasonable assumption that Raoul had been captured
by the Laagi on his way back from wherever this paradise was.

That was all they knew or could guess at with reasonable certainty. The
tapes Jim heard now suggested nothing more to him than Mary, Mollen, or
anyone else who had been allowed to hear them had concluded and already
passed on to him.

Jim said as much, once the playing of the excerpts was over.

"I'll just have to go out there and see," he said.

"Yes," said the general.

"Are there any other reasons why I shouldn't start right away?" asked
Jim.

"As a matter of fact, yes," said Mollen. "You may not need to pack a
suitcase, or its equivalent. But Mary will; and Mary's going with you."

For the second time since he had found himself wearing a ship for a body,
emotion flooded Jim.

"Mary!" he echoed.

"Yes," Mary said. "There's a lot to be learned about the human mind when
it's in another vehicle, like this one. My work here's gone as far as I
can take it. It can only go on if I go on with you as my subject instead
of Raoul, and in space, where it all happened to him."

"But you couldn't come, even if you wanted to..." Jim's mind had
already been playing with the highly interesting possibility,
particularly with a fusion engine, once he got off by himself in space,
of trying some maneuvers of which fighter ships were mechanically capable
but which normally, if tried, would reduce their pilots to thin organic
smears on the inside of the hull. With no such frail human body to
consider, there would be things a fighter ship could do that any fighter
pilot would long to try doing. Put a passenger aboard, and such
experimentation became open to criticism-from the passenger at least.

"I mean," Jim said, "it's going to be a longer, more dangerous trip into
far space than anything that's ever been tried. I may have to try to
evade Laagi ships; and with a person on board, I'll be limited in what I
can do to get away-"

"You won't have a human on board," said Mary. "I'll be with you the same
way I was with Raoul. When we had you under sedation, we used the same
technique of implanting a specimen of your living body tissue in mine, of
course using immune-reaction suppressants to keep your body from killing
it off. It lived; and I'm ready to be with you at any time."

"We'll see about that-" began Jim, getting ready for a shift directly
from the floor of the lab to space.

"You couldn't leave me behind if you wanted to," interrupted Mary.

But now she spoke inside his mind. It was as if her words were a thought
that had popped spontaneously into his mind. A second later her voice was
sounding outside him, normally, once more.

"You see," said Mary, "I'm already with you. I've been with you for weeks
now. Or rather, I've had the capability to be with you for weeks now. I
can come whether you want me to or not. I know you don't want me; but
it'd make things easier if you reconciled yourself to my coming."

Jim said nothing. But his mind was adding one more point on which they
had taken no chances on his objecting, but set things up without asking.
Honesty forced him to face the fact that in this case he might very well
have objected. But he would not have sustained his objections if they had
told him Mary's going along was necessary; and they should have known it.

"I know you don't like me," said Mary a little bitterly. "But this is
more important than likes or dislikes. There's too much to be learned not
to send someone along to learn it."

"I don't dislike you," said Jim. He thought he growled the words as well
as Mollen could have done, but that may have been the self-flattery of
his imagination. "I didn't fall in love with you at first sight, that's
true. But I don't dislike you now. I like you."

"Oh?" Mary's voice was utterly disbelieving.

"I do. I don't say you're the person I'd pick as the one I'd most like to
share a desert island-or a fighter ship-with; because that wouldn't be
true. But there's plenty of people I'd put in line behind you as a
sidekick, nowadays."

Mary said nothing, but her expression did not change.

"It's the truth," said Jim. He had an inspiration. "Did you ever know a
spaceship to tell a lie?"

For a moment the expression on Mary's face held. Then she smiled.
Molten's hoarse chortle joined her.

"All right," said Mary at last. "I'll take your word I'm welcome aboard.
Now, we've been preparing for my leaving for weeks now, as soon as we
thought you were getting to the point where you'd be able to make the
shift into AndFriend. But even with all that, there're things still to be
done before I go. Figure a couple of days, anyway."

"Which brings up a point," said Mollen. He looked at AndFriend. "Jim,
what can we do for you to fill in that time? All the physical information
you'll need-or as much as we've got to give you up to and around Laagi
territory-is in the ship's memory units already, as well as everything
else we could think of that might be useful. Is there anything else you
can think of you might want?"

"Nothing offhand," said Jim. "I take it, as I sit here now, I can make
air connections with the Base and other, outside phone
systems-correction, I don't need to ask that. I see I can. No, General,
I'm fine. I don't even need a couple of good books to read."

"What'll you do with yourself?" Mary asked, watching him curiously.

"The same thing Raoul does all the time. Daydream," said Jim.


Chapter 11.

But he did not spend all that time daydreaming-to his own very great
surprise. He found himself caught up in other mental exercises.

He had expected no such thing to happen. If anything he was looking
forward to a couple of days exploring his more pleasant memories. There
was an active pleasure in calling up happy scenes out of his past, and he
had been amazed at the detail with which his unconscious recalled
them-far beyond what he was used to. Where his ordinary memory would have
given him the time, the place, the action and the emotion, this new
memory gave him far more. He could study a particular moment he had once
lived and simply by looking more closely at it, see the pattern of the
fabric on the upholstering of the furniture, the small items scattered
about the room, the quality of sunlight coming in the windows. Bit by
bit, he had become fascinated, not so much with remembering, as with the
capabilities of his memory; and, beyond this, the capabilities and
liabilities of his new self.

He had always considered himself in excellent physical shape; and as a
result he had simply taken his body so much for granted that most of the
time he had been used to forgetting that it had demands of its own. Now
that he was out of it, he was astonished to find what a busy and
signal-sending creature his body had been. It was not that his mind had
not always been getting a multitude of messages from it, from "I'm all in
order and working" signals to alarms ranging from fatigue to outright
pain. It was that his mind had accepted these as so much a part of the
normal process of living that it had, most of the time, handled but
ignored them.

Now he could feel what he had been missing, now that he no longer had the
static of the body's responses to interfere with his thinking. Now he was
not merely capable of day-dreaming with unusual clarity, he was capable
of thinking with unusual clarity.

He could switch from one topic of thought to another instantly, and,
having switched, devote all his attention to the new topic as if the
earlier one had not existed. At the same time he was not obsessed by his
current topic to the point where he lost awareness of his surroundings or
himself.

The liability was that there was now no more of that purely physical
pleasure that the body had been capable of giving him in small to large
measures as a reward for paying attention to it. Moreover he felt
strangely light-not like someone in a lesser gravity, but more like
someone with helium-filled balloons attached to his shoes, so that he was
being lifted, but from the soles of his feet only; and it required an
effort to balance himself when he took a step forward. It was a mental
feeling, not a physical one, but "lightness" was the only way he could
find of making some description of it.

One of the more curious effects he discovered with his new vision was
that he could change the attitudes with which he was normally used to
looking at an object, and see it in an entirely new and novel way.
Usually, the switch was from a habitual way of seeing something, one
which reflected his body's past responses to whatever it was; and the new
attitude was one that ignored any connection between it and his body's
use for it.

The best example of this turned out to be a reclining chair he had bought
for his two-room suite in the Bachelor Officers' Quarter. He had always
been very fond of that chair; but now, considering it carefully in memory
from a bodiless point of view, he found it one of the most ridiculously
engineered objects he had ever seen, and ended up laughing at it.

It was all knobs and angles. It was hard to imagine, just looking at it,
what odd-shaped sort of creature would have designed such a monstrosity
for its comfort. The seat, leg-support and back planes made sense after a
fashion as partial containers for whatever or whoever it was planned to
support. But those two strange, horizontal members projecting forward,
which had their bases attached halfway up the back portion at its outward
edges...

"You seem to be in a good humor," said Mollen's voice.

Jim realized suddenly that he had been laughing aloud. He looked outside
himself to see that the general was in the process of entering through a
flap in the tent. Behind him entered half a dozen men and women in
workmen's white coveralls, two of which at least Jim recognized as
maintenance workers from the Fighter Ships Unit.

"What's everybody here for?" Jim asked Mollen.

"To check you over before you leave, of course," the general said.

"Oh, no!" said Jim.

"No?" Mollen looked surprised and the maintenance people who were already
headed toward Jim's entry port came to a halt. "What do you mean, no?"

"I mean I don't need to be checked over, sir," Jim said. "I can tell you
right now that everything about me's all right."

"I see. When did you learn all about fusion engines?" Mollen's scraggly
brows pulled together.

"I don't need to learn about them," said Jim. "I can feel that
everything's all right inside me."

"So the pilots always say to the doc when they show up for their monthly
physical," said Mollen. "I think we better have the experts take a look
at you anyway."

He turned to the maintenance people and nodded.

"Go ahead," he said.

They went ahead. Jim made no more protests, although his human experience
intruded on his experience as a spaceship, so that-although there was no
pain, of course-he had an uncomfortable feeling that he was being
operated upon internally without the courtesy of a general anesthetic.

He found that with a little practice he could be aware of where in him
every one of the maintenance workers were, and what they were doing. This
was a relief, in a way, for it meant that he could be sure nothing could
be done to him in the future without his knowledge.

Mollen was still standing outside his hull, hands behind his back,
watching the movement of people in and out of Jim's entry port which at
the moment was standing wide. Jim became conscious that some of the small
cases they had brought aboard were evidently not merely devices for the
purpose of checking him out, since they were being stowed in places where
they would be prevented from sliding about and left behind when those who
brought them in left.

He tried to see inside them, but they were not an integral part of
himself and their cases were opaque to his perceptions.

"What're these things they're bringing aboard, sir?" he asked the
general.

"Supplemental information units and instruments for Mary," answered
Mollen. "She won't be able to read from them directly; but she can direct
you on how to go about finding what she wants in them, and once you see
what's there, she will, too. Also, there's provision for storage of new
information she may be able to collect on the trip."

"How much storage does she think she'll need?" said Jim. For the smallest
of the cases could have stored the contents of most public branch
libraries.

"I've no idea," said Mollen cheerfully. "That's her department."

And as if summoned like a genie by Mollen's invisible rubbing of a magic
lamp, Mary's voice spoke inside Jim's head.

"Are my things aboard?"

"Unless there's more to come," said Jim. "When are you going to be ready
to leave?"

"I'm ready now. Can't you tell? I'm in here with you," said Mary.

"I didn't know you were here to stay," he said.

He checked the ship's chronometer record. Sure enough, it had been two
days-well, a little over forty hours-since he had last spoken to her. He
had marked the time when she and Mollen had left him before just to make
sure that they were not pulling any tricks on him about the apparent
speed with which time sometimes seemed to pass when he was alone.

"Well, tell Louis I'm here, would you, please?" asked Mary. "You're the
only one who can hear me now."

"Mary's here," he told Mollen aloud, suddenly reminded that his verbal
exchange with her just now had been strictly on a mental level.

He was abruptly, vastly, relieved of a fear that had concerned him to the
point that he had hesitated even to ask about it. It had occurred to him
during the hours just past that Mary might be able to read his mind once
she was part of him and the ship. Now that fear was laid to rest. For one
thing, clearly, he could not read her mind-he had not even known of her
presence until she asked that question about her equipment just now. But,
secondly, he could now feel her mind, not so much as if it was part of
his mental machinery, but as if it was simply another part of the ship
which that mental machinery controlled.

Perhaps if he tried, he could control her mind in the same way as he
controlled the rest of the ship.... He backed away hastily from that
thought. It was ghoulish.

"Good to hear you're there, Mary," Mollen had answered when he had passed
the word along that she was with him. "The high-hats ought to be along at
any minute now; and as soon as they do you two can take off."

"What high-hats?" asked Jim. The term was roughly synonymous with "top
brass," except that it referred more specifically to civilian
authorities.

"Governmental people who've got the rank to watch you leave," said
Mollen. "Doesn't include the President. It was explained to her that it
would be too hard maintaining the type of secrecy we've held to this long
if she was one of the sendoff party."

"Why didn't you tell me people like that were coming?" Jim asked.

"Colonel," said Mollen. "You're a ship-jockey. The only one of your kind,
but still just a ship-jockey. You didn't need to know so you weren't
told. Nothing personal. If it'd been up to me, I'd have let you know not
only about that, but a lot of other things in past months. But the rules
were set up and I had to go with them, like everyone else."

"Sorry, sir," said Jim. "I understand."

"I know you do," said Mollen, a little more kindly. "You might bear in
mind while you're gone, though, that Mary like me-has been a person under
rules, and still is. She's been ground between a couple of millstones.
You, La Chasse Gallerie and Raoul on one hand; and a lot of powerful
people on the other. So be decent to her on the mission."

"He will-damn it!" said Mary. "I keep forgetting nobody but you can hear
me. Tell Louis for me I've got no doubt you'll be decent to me."

Jim did so. Privately, he spoke to Mary.

"Why didn't you rig up some speaking device so you could talk to someone
like him directly?" Jim asked. "Some sort of phone line to the hull that
would resonate outside-"

"Because I'm in you, not the ship!" said Mary. "Any phone line I could
use has to run through your brain cells and vocal chords, first!"

"Oh," said Jim.

"Yes," said Mary.

"Sorry," said Jim. "I didn't think that through."

He waited for her to tell him it was all right, and that she understood
how he could have made such a perfectly natural mistake; but she did not.

"I beg your pardon," said Jim finally. "But I just admitted my error and
apologized. It's usual to acknowledge an apology,,.

"Oh, Lord!" said Mary. "And we aren't even off the ground yet. I'm the
one who needs to apologize, Jim. I get wrapped up in what I'm doing and I
forget to treat people like people. I'm sorry."

"Honors are even," said Jim gravely.

To his pleased surprise, he got a silent, but actual, laugh from Mary.

"No," she said. "Because you can make me laugh. Nobody's done that for
years. I used to think it was because you were a featherbrained
flyboy-oh, courageous and daring and all the rest of it, but essentially
feather-brained, too. Now, after all these months of studying you, I know
you better. Forgive me, Jim; and I'll learn to get this ride-roughshod-
attitude of mine under control. And, since I've done everything else I
ever set out to do, that's a promise."

"To be truthful," said Jim, "you've got me on the defensive, now. I'm
not sure I've always been that easy to live with myself."

"Your excuses for that were better than mine. Anyway, we'll do better
from now on?"

"We shall indeed," said Jim solemnly.

"The guests are here."

They had been talking in the privacy of Jim's mind. Now, Jim looked
outside his hull and saw that the high-hats, as Mollen had called them,
were just now entering through a flap in the tent wall. There were about
a dozen of them, all civilians, roughly half of them men and half, women;
and every one at least in his or her forties.

"How come," said Jim in one last silent aside to Mary, "if you can't talk
unless I talk, you can see something before I see it?"

"You saw them come in. You see everything going on in this ship and
outside it all the time. And hear it all," answered Mary. "You know that.
You just weren't paying attention to that particular thing. I was."

"I see," said Jim.

He spoke out loud from his hull to Mollen and the newcomers.

"Welcome," he said.

With his back to those entering, Mollen frowned a warning at the hull.
Jim fell silent again, and Mollen turned around to personally greet those
coming in. When they were all assembled close to the hull and Mollen had
spoken and shaken hands with all of them, the general turned to
AndFriend,

"Colonel," he said. "On this occasion of your leaving with Dr. Gallegher
to explore beyond Laagi space, we're honored to have visitors from the
highest offices in the land. Mr. Vice President, this is Colonel Jim
Wander and Dr. Mary Gallegher."

He had half-turned as he spoke, back toward a tall, athletic looking man
in his fifties, in a gray business suit and dark blue weather-cape.

"Hello, Jim-Dr. Gallegher," said the tall man.

"Honored to meet you, sir," said Jim. "Dr. Gallegher joins me in saying
that."

"Actually, he makes a good show, but I wouldn't-and didn't-vote for him,"
commented Mary silently inside Jim. "Actually, of course, it's a
thankless sort of job."

"The best wishes of this nation go with you, Jim and Mary."

"Thank you, sir," said Jim. It was a strange ritual, this, Jim thought.
Rather ridiculous, in fact.

"Mr. Secretary, this is Jim Wander and Dr. Gallegher," said Mollen,
turning to the next closest figure. "Jim and Mary, this is Secretary of
State Jacob Preuss."

The secretary of state was a short, broad man in his sixties or older,
looking as if he had too much energy to stand still.

"Take care of yourselves out there," said Preuss. "You've no idea what
you're worth to us."

"Twice the man the other one is," was Mary's silent observation.

"We'll take every possible precaution, sir," Jim was saying. "But I
imagine you want getting the job done to come first."

"Of course," said Preuss. "Good luck, both of you."

"Thank you, sir."

"Senator, Jim Wander and Dr. Gallegher. Jim and Mary, this is Senator
Anita Wong..."

The introductions continued. So did Mary's unheard, internal comments on
each person introduced, and some of these were either so pungent or so
opposite that Jim had a hard time keeping the proper solemnity of tone in
his own audible replies. Finally the round of introductions came to an
end. The vice president made a short speech, praising them for going
where no humans had ever gone before. Then the visitors all backed up a
little, as if there might be something dangerously explosive about
AndFriend's departure.

"Good luck," said Mollen under his breath. "Now get out of here."

The whisper in which he spoke was too low-pitched for the dignitaries
behind him to hear it; but Jim picked it up with no trouble.

He turned his mind to the phase-shift equipment.

A moment later they were surrounded by space and stars.


Chapter 12.

"Why," said Mary, "we haven't gone any place at all.

We're still just a few hundred thousand kilometers from Earth,"

"Right," said Jim. "Just as the orders in my command memory specify."

Five other two-person fighter ships suddenly appeared in box formation
around them. There were no Wing and no Sector markings on the fighters.
They were completely anonymous.

"Our escort," said Jim to Mary. "What do you want to bet they've come in
from the Frontier, instead of lifting from someplace else on Earth?"

"AndFriend," said a voice over the ship-to-ship circuit. "This is Wing
Cee!, AndFriend escort. Are you ready to shift?"

"Hear you, Wing Cee," said Jim over the same circuit. "All ready to
shift, and thanks for the escort."

"Just following orders. To shift, then. On the count, according to the
coordinates in your program, one-two-three-shift!" '

They shifted.

A massive ~co and ship swam in space beside them.

"Leaving you, AndFriend," said the voice of the Leader of the escort that
had brought them here.

"Thanks again, Wing Cee and escort," said Jim.

"Our pleasure, AndFriend."

They were gone.

"Now what?" asked Mary.

"Now-I bet you, another escort," said Jim. "It doesn't take a genius to
figure it out. Mollen didn't want us to get to the edge of human-held
territory without being protected and observed all the way. But no single
ship's company is going to know which direction we go in, or be in a
position to make any kind of guess about our mission. Just in case."

"In case of what?" It was almost a grumble from Mary.

"In case of in case," said Jim. "Any avoidable ill chance should be
avoided. Rule number sixteen million zip-here's the next team."

Another box of five fighters had appeared around them.

"AndFriend, this is Wing Cee speaking, Leader of your escort up to the
Frontier in Brazil Sector. Are you ready to shift?"

"Hear you, Wing Cee," said Jim. "AndFriend ready to shift; and thanks for
the escort."

"Our job. Shift, then. On the count. And... two... three... shift!"

This time they came out in space with no command ship nearby. But their
escort left and a few minutes later a new one was with them.

"AndFriend," said a voice, speaking English with a noticeable accent,
"this is Wing Cee speaking, of the escort for you to next shift point.
Are you ready to shift?..."

And so it continued.

"What if the instruments of some Laagi patrol over the Frontier pick us
up hopping along behind the human line?" Mary asked.

"I'll bet you another bet-that there's a screen of our own ships out just
across the Frontier, looking for any Laagi activity and making sure any
alien ship is too far off to pick us up on instruments. If they see any
sign of aliens, we'll probably get word that our next shift destination
point has been changed."

She said nothing, but he suspected her silence of being a doubtful one.

"No, I wasn't told this by the general or anyone else," he said. "But
you've got your area of expertise and I've got mine. What I'm suggesting
is as elementary a precaution as holding your breath when you put your
head under water."

"I could have been told," said Mary.

"What was all that I used to hear so much-about the need to know? As far
as being told things-" Jim checked himself before he said too much.
People above Mollen and Mary had made the decisions to leave him no
options. There was no point in reacting against her.

There was a moment's silence between them.

"Maybe-" began Mary and was interrupted as Jim began to go through the
verbal exchange that accompanied another change of escorts.

"Maybe," she said, "I might have had reasons they didn't know about for
needing to know."

"Take it up with the general and whoever else was involved, then, when
you get back," said Jim.

There was silence from Mary in reply to this. Jim felt a twinge of guilt.
He had just told himself he would not take his resentments out on her,
and this last remark of his had almost been an invitation to a brannigan.
He made a mental note to think before he spoke from now on.

Eventually the last five-ship escort left them with a single ship, the
driver of which did not even speak, but flashed a shift signal and
countdown on his hull lights. It was like being escorted by a ghost. For
some reason Jim was reminded of the Charles Dickens story, A Christmas
Carol, in which the third ghost-the ghost of Christmas Yet To
Come-escorts Scrooge, the main character, into scenes of the future
without saying a word, even in answer to Scrooge's questioning.

They were led out beyond the end of the human-defended Frontier by this
one ship for four shifts, before their solitary escort finally flashed a
"good luck" on its hull lights and disappeared, no doubt on a shift back
to the safety of the human side of the Frontier.

"Where are we?" asked Mary, for the vision screens of the ship were
showing unfamiliar constellations all around them.

"Where no human has gone before."

"Would you be serious for once?" Mary said; but there was no angry edge
to the tone of that question.

"Sometimes it helps not to be serious," said Jim.

"Do you mean you don't know where we are?"

"I do-and I don't," said Jim. "Do you know anything about spatial
navigation?"

"No," she answered. "They didn't give us that at Reserve Gunnery School."

"Well, I can't very well explain where we are to you then, unless you
take my word for a lot of things," Jim said. "Basically, the earliest
navigation in space outside the solar system used our own Sun as a base
point for navigation. When we started to get farther out we began to run
into errors using that method. So a man named Zee Tai-lin came up with
the theoretical centerpoint of our own galaxy, as a base point."

"How did he find that?" Mary's voice was interested.

"Let's not go into that, please," said Jim. "Just take it from me he did
establish a theoretical, repeat, theoretical, center for the galaxy.
Someday we may come up with ships which can go in toward the center and
come back, and actually establish if he was right about where the
centerpoint is, like we finally established the position of the North
Pole of Earth-or the South Pole, for that matter."

"You mean we figure all our space-shifts by referencing a point so far
away that even a ten-light-year jump is a tiny fraction of our distance
to the reference point? Isn't the galaxy something like sixty thousand
light-years across? It seems like overdoing things to figure all your
spaceship travel-"

"It would be, if that's what we did," said Jim. "No, once a theoretical
centerpoint was established, a theoretical line was drawn through it-a
diameter of the galaxy-taken as close to Sol as practical. It's that
theoretical line we tie to for navigational purposes. That's to say, to
travel any real distance from Earth, we go down the line until we're
close enough to find on our instruments the star we're interested in.
Then we turn off at a sharp angle and go directly from the line to it."

"I remember this now," said Mary. "Yes, it all comes back to me. I had
the elements of it in secondary school. The Laagi, of course, are almost
right on that line of ours as it goes inward from us toward the
theoretical center. That's one reason why going around them's been such a
problem."

"That's it," said Jim. "And they evidently either use the same line or
one so close to it that we ought to be able to find their home base or
bases near or on it, somewhere farther down-galaxy."

"But-" began Mary, and stopped. "We're lost now then, aren't we? How can
we find the line again, now that that ship's just led us away out here?"

"The answer to that," said Jim, "is 'not easily.'"

"But--" And Mary got stuck again.

"The point is, it makes it pretty hard for the Laagi to find out where we
are, at the same time."

"So how did you plan to get around Laagi space? How did you plan to find
your way around to their other side and then back home again?"

"How did Raoul find his way home?"

"We don't know," said Mary.

"And it never occurred to you to ask how you and I were going to do it,"
said Jim.

"Will you stop that?" snapped Mary. "It may be giving you emotional
relief to make a joke out of what I don't know, but you're taking it out
of me to get that emotional relief. No, I didn't think to ask how we'd
get there and back. I had other things to think of and it wasn't part of
my field of expertise. I left it up to those whose field it was. Now
either explain yourself, or shut off the funny remarks!"

"Sorry," said Jim. "Though I might point out that being the one who's
got to get us out of this, I could be the one needing emotional relief
right at this moment, a little more maybe than you do. No, sorry again. I
seem to end up apologizing to you more than I have with anyone else I
ever met. No, it's not your fault you didn't ask. But it's somebody's
fault you were let come up here not realizing the risks you were running.
If and when we get back, I may even say a word to the general about
that."

"All right," said Mary. "I forgive you. You forgive me. Now, explain
things."

"All right." Jim took a deep breath. "How's your history? Do you remember
that before the navigator's sextant came along, there was the cross-staff
and the astrolabe and dead reckoning as means for sailors sailing out of
sight of land on Earth's oceans to find a particular destination?"

"Yes," she said.

"All right. Pre-sextant navigation, with compass, log, dead reckoning and
a ship's clock that might be less than accurate, still allowed people to
sail around the world. You just headed for someplace like Africa, say,
once upon a time, instead of to a particular town on its east coast; and
you sailed along the coast when you hit it until you found what you were
after, instead of going directly to it across open ocean from your
starting point. It's something like that early level of ocean navigation
we're at in galactic space now. So, that's what you and I have to work
with from where we sit now."

"You're going to have to be more specific than that," said Mary.

"All right, I will. Now, we've been taken out here and dropped off, out
of sight, so to speak, of our galaxy centerline. But we have what the
ancient seamen of Earth didn't have, which is a chronometer-in fact three
of them, not counting the one in my mind-which are accurate to such a
small fraction of a second that for ordinary practical purposes we can
ignore the inaccuracy. Also, we have a ship's memory which can recall
every phase-shift, how far and where to, and every turn and twist on
ordinary drive and calculate all these to tell us where we've gone since
we left Earth."

Mary sighed with relief. A mental sigh, observed Jim, was impossible to
describe. It was like a promissory note of what would, if there had been
a body to do it, have been an exhalation of breath.

"Then we do know where we are right now."

"Well-again, yes and no," said Jim. "Yes, we know where we are right now
because in addition to what I've just told you, my memory banks were
supplied with the point where that last guide ship dropped us off;
although I didn't know it, until his lights flashing farewell released
the lock on that section of memory. And, no, because all we know is where
we are in relation to Earth, the Frontier and the galactic centerline.
What we don't know is where what we're looking for is located."

"But all you have to do-" Mary broke off. "Oh, I see."

"Exactly," said Jim. "The proper course for us would be to head back
toward the galactic centerline and follow right down it to the Laagi
world or worlds. But if we do that, we'll run into large numbers of their
fighting spaceships long before we get to our destination-let alone,
beyond it into the unknown territory. Our only hope is to go forward out
here, essentially paralleling the centerline until it's safe to turn in
toward it again and find ourselves beyond the other side of Laagi
territory, in the unknown."

"And if we turn inward toward the line too soon, we run into Laagi
warships," said Mary.

"Right. And if we go too far and turn in too late, we'll end up at where
the centerline is, according to our calculations, but not knowing where
we are in relation to anything but it. Should we assume in that case that
we're still short of unknown territory and head on down-galaxy along the
line, or figure we've overshot it, and turn back along the centerline in
that case essentially guaranteeing that we'll run into Laagi if we're
wrong?"

"There's got to be some way around this," said Mary.

"Oh, I forgot one possibility. What if there's nothing to be found beyond
Laagi territory within any practical distance? Do we keep on? Do we turn
back-"

"There's a method they used to use for zeroing in artillery fire," began
Mary. "You deliberately fired your first shot to strike beyond the
target, the second shot short. Then you fired a little short of your long
shot or a little farther than your short shot and kept on increasing or
decreasing your range until you 'zeroed in,' as they used to say, on the
target-"

"Correct, first time out. My compliments. That's exactly the method we'll
be using. We deliberately jump for what we are as sure as can be is
beyond the Laagi home base-which we estimate to be about as far from the
Frontier in its direction as Earth is in its, on the other side of it. We
jump beyond the home base, or hope we have, but short of the farther
limits of Laagi territory. Then, taking advantage of the fact that we're
only one alien ship and in where they'd never expect to find us, we sneak
in toward the centerline and see if we can't spot evidence of Laagi space
travel or living centers, before whichever it is spots us."

He paused.

"Am I making sense to you so far?"

"Yes," she answered, "go on."

"Well then," he said, "if, by doing all this, we reach the centerline
without running into any such evidence and conclude we've overshot the
Laagi territory, we go out away from the line again, to what we think is
a 'safe distance, and head back parallel to it, in the direction of the
Laagi center, and then, in again. If we don't find any evidence, we
repeat and go back farther. If we do, we repeat and go outward again,
toward galaxy center but not as far as we went before, and nose in again.
Finally, this way we establish where Laagi territory ends on the
down-galaxy side; and we're ready to go hunting for Raoul's 'Paradise."'

"Raoul," said Mary almost wistfully, "didn't do all this inning and
outing."

"No, Raoul sailed straight through the heart of Laagi territory and let
them cut him to ribbons," said Jim. "The only reason they didn't blow La
Chasse Gallerie into cosmic dust was because somehow, even without
drives, he couldn't be stopped and held still long enough to be blown up.
You and I, we've got a ship to protect, to say nothing of ourselves. Come
to think of it, what does happen to two minds when a ship is destroyed
out from under them? Do they die, too, or are they left just drifting in
space-"

"Let's face that possibility when it comes," said Mary.

"We don't have any choice but to face it when it comes. I was hoping for
a little advance notice."

"Well, I don't have any answer for you. That's why there's no point in
facing it beforehand," replied Mary, almost tranquilly. "Shall we begin?"

"We've already begun," said Jim. "I've been setting up an automatic
pattern of jumps to take us forward, in and out, just in case for some
reason I shouldn't be able to command the ship. So hang on, here we go."

After those words, the actual going was anything but dramatic. They
shifted ten times-even though they were out of their bodies, the shifts
were perceptible as a sort of hiccup in attention-and at last swam in
what hardly looked any different than the point in galactic space where
their last guide ship had left them.

"Now we try going in... very carefully," said Jim.

He mentally ordered about the controls; and Mary was knowledgeable enough
about ship-handling to realize he was reorienting the hull prior to the
shift, so that they would come out facing in the direction they wanted,
which in this case would be toward the centerline. Then he began a series
of phase-shifts, shorter and shorter jumps, until he was down to a final
shift that was no farther than AndFriend's instruments could see.

"According to the calculations of the instruments-and mine," said Jim,
"we ought to be within three light-years' distance of the centerline. If
we're right in the assumption of everybody back home, and the Laagi use a
centerline very close to ours, then the area we're in ought to have
traffic of Laagi ships up and down the line. We'll just have to park
here, wait and see."

"And if nothing comes along by the time we get tired of waiting?" Mary
asked. "Do we go all the way out again, or do we just edge back up the
line?"

"The first way's safe but slow. The second ought to be faster, but
risky-assuming we're moving into a higher incidence of Laagi traffic."
Jim hesitated. "I know what I'd do. What would you do?"

"Inch back up the line at this distance from it," said Mary without
hesitation.

"I was afraid you'd say that."

"Because your choice was going back out again, was it?"

"No," said Jim glumly, "because I'd made the same choice. Now we don't
have any excuse for not doing it. And we could stub our toe on a Laagi
ship this way before we know it."

They began going up-galaxy. Jim estimated they were now more than half a
light-year out from the centerline; and he kept his phase-shifts to just
within the limit of the ability of his instruments to spot a Laagi ship.
He and Mary fell into a silence with which they both seemed to be
content, for it was only briefly and occasionally broken during a period
which their ship's chronometer measured as a little over fourteen hours.

The procedure was to make the shift, pause, scan all instrument-visible
area and, if anything shiplike was observed, to creep up on this with
tiny phase-shifts of no more than a few hundred kilometers until it
became clear that what they were seeing was not an alien vessel. Then
they would make another jump forward to the limit of their instruments'
scanning ability, and another close investigation of the new area if
there seemed to be reason for it.

At the end of the slightly more than fourteen hours, however, Jim
suddenly grunted and began coding for a shift of a full five light-years
more out from the centerline.

"What is it?"demanded Mary. "Did you see something?"

"No," said Jim. "Just back-of-the-head hunch. I can't explain it to you
any better than that."

"Come to think of it," said Mary, "you've mentioned several things-a
chronometer in your mind, and your own mental calculations as to where we
were, in addition to the calculations of the ship's instruments. Now
this. Is there something about you I ought to know?"

"Nothing miraculous," said Jim. "You remember my talking about the early
days of ocean navigation? Even with a sextant and a good chronometer, it
was quite a trick to cross the Atlantic and have the first land you
sighted turn out to be the point you were aiming at. But some navigators
then seemed to have a knack for it. Some of us space jockeys seem to have
a knack for interstellar navigation. That's all."

"That's quite a lot, it seems to me," said Mary. "In fact it's right on
the edge of being almost too much to believe."

"Ever hear of a homing instinct in animals-not merely birds but domestic
dogs or cats?" said Jim. "The Polynesian navigators watched the action of
waves to guide themselves in crossing great stretches of the Pacific in
small ships not much bigger than large canoes. The Aleuts up near the
North Pole, back home, had something like seventeen different names for
different kinds of snow in their language. Their children would play in
snowdrifts-but never in the ones that would fall in and bury them. When
you asked them why they picked one snowdrift over another, they
essentially said it was obvious. I'm one of the ones with a knack for
intragalactic navigation-that's one of the reasons it was my Wing that
went after Raoul. "

"All you're saying, really," said Mary, "is 'trust me.'"

"Right. Trust me. I trust my instinct," said Jim. "While you're at it,
remember that all the instruments in Raoul's ship had to have been long
gone by the time he started to come back to Earth. But he traveled in the
right direction. How do you suppose he knew his way?"

Mary said nothing for a long moment.

"I don't know," she said finally. "But-"

"Hold it!" Jim interrupted suddenly. "Bandit! Straight out!"

Sure enough, there it was on the long-distance screen. Just the barest
pinpoint of light at the moment, but with the halo around it that
identified it as something radiating as no natural object would.

"How can you tell it's a Laagi? Maybe there's something unknown out
here-" began Mary.

"It's Laagi. I can feel it."

"Going away from us? Or coming toward us?"

"That I don't know-yet. I've put the instruments on it. Indications right
now are it's traveling parallel to us and about half a light-year in from
us. But whether down-galaxy or upgalaxy, I've no way of knowing until
we're closer to it."

"Can it see us?"

"I don't know that either," said Jim. "I'd bet a month's pay it
hasn't-yet. A lot depends on which way it's going, whether it's facing
toward or away from us."

"With screens looking every which way, that shouldn't make any
difference," Mary said.

"It does, though. Human-I mean, Laagi nature. Our attention and theirs,
too, seems to be directed most of the time in a ship-forward direction,
one of the things that makes us assume they've got eyes looking forward,
like animal predators and humans, and not out to each side like birds and
prey animals. If it's headed this way, he's going to see us sooner or
later, unless we move. And if we move, we're bound to attract the
attention of his instruments."

They waited.

"He's traveling down-galaxy. Looking toward our direction," said Jim
finally.

They waited a little longer.

"He's seen us. He's turned in our direction. Stand by for him to jump
into battle range of us." Jim's mental voice had become remote,
businesslike. He felt as well as heard it in his own mind as he was used
to hearing it, talking to his Wing on the Frontier, just before contact
with an approaching gang of Laagi ships.

"Oh, God!" said Mary. "And we've hardly started."

"Don't worry, baby." Jim could feel that if his body had been with him,
it would be grinning, the same way the combat-recorder films always
showed him grinning as he went into battle; and not even he could tell if
it was to AndFriend, to Mary, or to both of them he spoke: "If he gets
close enough to hurt you, I'll kill him."


Chapter 13.

The Laagi ship made a phase-shift just as Jim said this, and suddenly it
was big enough to be pictured as something more than a dot on their
longest-looking screen.

"I'm wrong," said Jim. "It's not us he's aimed at. From this angle he'll
pass us but only at better than instrument midrange. Either he's got a
destination off to one side of the centerline, or..."

He fell silent.

"You mean we could be in among the star systems having Laagi-occupied
planets?" Mary asked.

"Your guess on that's as good as mine," said Jim slowly. "But it looks
like he's going to pass us by at a distance which could mean his
instruments don't see us."

"Don't Laagi instruments see as far as ours?"

"We don't know for sure-just the way we don't know so much about them,"
said Jim. "But it's a good angle. I mean, like I said, we've noticed that
when we're at an angle to them, they don't seem to see us as well as from
more head-on angles-or up close; distance helps, too. It's all guesswork
because on most things their ships can do as well, or better, and our own
ships are under orders to act on that premise. Actually, fighting them, I
get the impression there're weak spots in their observation. And that's
the way most combat pilots feel. If we're right, it could explain why
sometimes they turn and run-if you want to call it running-when you're
sure they're ready to joust."

"You're thinking of just letting him go by?" Mary said. "But aren't we a
sitting duck here, if he suddenly starts turning toward us?"

"If we move we might attract his attention, as I mentioned," said Jim.
"Remember, we're where no Laagi ship is going to expect to run into
something like us-particularly just a ship alone, the way we are. If he's
really not seen us, and if he's really headed by us, we can sit still and
he'll never know we were here. Or if he does, maybe he'll take us for an
experimental new design of Laagi ship. Or-oh, I don't know..."

"I've never known you to hesitate like this," Mary said. "Why're you
willing to take such a chance he'll go by without seeing us, or even
seeing us without attacking us?"

"Because," said Jim slowly, "I don't think he's armed."

There was a second or two of pause.

"Why? What makes you think that?" she said. "More to the point, what
makes you think it so strongly you're ready to gamble our whole mission
on it?"

"I can't tell you exactly why. It's the way he's acting. Look at him.
He's three-quarters on to us-his whole side's a target. Just a little
more on that same course and I could cut him wide open with a beam. Then
it'd take less than a minute to stand in beside him close enough to drop
a mine that'd blow him apart a second after we were out of range of it,
ourselves. Why's he taking a chance like that, unless he's unarmed and
doesn't see us?"

"You're still gambling," said Mary flatly.

"But with something at stake," muttered Jim. "Suppose he's expected
somewhere and they come out looking for him when he doesn't show up...
and scoop up some dust they can identify as part of his ship? Wouldn't
that mean killing him would be like a flag planted to tell them we've
been here?"

There was another pause.

"It could be. All right," Mary said. "You're the expert on alien ships.
It's up to you."

"We'll sit," said Jim.

They sat.

The Laagi ship went by in one phase-shift and vanished from their
instruments with a second.

"Of course," said Mary when it was gone, "you know it might just have
pretended to go innocently by because it was unarmed; and it's right now
reporting us to the nearest equivalent of military authorities the Laagi
have."

"In which case," said Jim, "the sooner we get out of here, the better."

He was setting up a phase-shift for AndFriend as he spoke.

"Down-galaxy, I think," he said, "now that we've found Laagi space
traffic this far up. As far as his reporting us goes, if you were a Laagi
military commander and you heard of a human ship where we just were-just
which way do you think that ship might have jumped after it was last
seen? And how far away from that point where it was seen could it be, by
the time you can get your own fighting ships out after it?"

Mary said nothing.

"So if you were such a military commander," said Jim as they shifted,
"wouldn't you find it a lot easier and safer just to file a report and
let it get tangled up in the bureaucratic wheels, rather than take a
chance on something that might possibly be the figment of a civilian
pilot's imagination?"

"You're really assuming they're like humanity," said Mary.

"Well, we've got nothing else to base assumptions on," said Jim. "And a
lot of what we've seen of them does parallel what we've got and what we
do. We use a theoretical centerline. They seem to, too. Our ships are
shaped differently from theirs, but they phase-shift to cover large
distances just as we do. They use cutting weapons that seem developed
from lasers, like we do. Their fighter ships are only big enough for a
crew of two individuals. They seem to think in terms of a Frontier in
space, just like we do..."

He got tired of thinking up comparisons and ran down.

"Et cetera," he said.

"All very fine," said Mary. "But you could be wrong because there're
things you don't know. And there've got to be things you don't know-that
we don't know."

"Right enough," said Jim. "How about it? Drop the subject?"

"Subject dropped."

"I like you, Mary."

There was a long pause.

"If you don't mind," said Mary in a distant voice, "I've got a few things
to mull over. Call me if you need me for anything. Otherwise, I'll be in
conference with myself, if you don't mind."

"I don't mind," said Jim.

There was no further word from Mary.

They crept down-galaxy, in shift-jumps no farther than their instruments
could safely read ahead. Twenty-four hours went by, and no more Laagi
ships were encountered. Then another twenty-four hours with the same
result. And another twenty-four.

"We must be beyond Laagi space, down-line, by this time, mustn't we?"
asked Mary. They had been back in conversation since about an hour
following Mary's withdrawal.

"Should be," said Jim. "There's some interesting star systems ahead. I
count at least eight GO-type stars within a ten light-year box no more
than twenty or thirty light-years down the line. If any of those have got
livable worlds, maybe we've found Raoul's Paradise. Maybe we should go
all the way in to the line and follow it down."

They had been slowly angling back in toward the centerline as time went
by and no more sign of Laagi ships was encountered.

"Any comment?" asked Jim.

"No," said Mary. "I think that's a good idea, Jim."

They had been on considerably warmer terms, lately, for no particular
reason Jim could understand. Following Mary's agreement, he made the
necessary adjustments in the ship's controls, and took them in a single
shift most of the lightyear-and-a-half distance that still separated them
from the centerline.

"We'll keep a watch, still, though," said Jim. "You watch up-galaxy, I'll
watch ahead, down-galaxy. Before I forget to mention it, by the way, I
still don't feel the least bit sleepy. How about you?"

They had made an agreement earlier that each of them would let the other
know if he or she noticed any sign of tiredness.

"I don't," said Mary. "But I spoke to you twice and caught you sleeping.
You had to ask me again what I wanted."

"I did?" said Jim. "I don't remember that. Are you sure?"

"I learned too much about your sleeping patterns in the lab to be
mistaken," said Mary.

"Well, that checks out with what I noticed when I first became part of
AndFriend, back at Base," said Jim. "It also explains how Penard could
keep coming steadily that way if he was consciously using his mind to
drive La Chasse Gallerie. Maybe we don't have to worry about needing
sleep for the rest of the trip if we can do it without knowing we do it,
and wake up at the first word from the other one of us-at any rate, back
to what I was saying. If there're any Laagi moving this far down the
line, we're much more likely to run into them from here on, this close to
the line."

"Where did you grow up?" Mary asked him unexpectedly.

"Actually, in country a lot like the Base is in," said Jim. "I was born
in a hospital in Denver; but my folks lived in Edmonton and that's where
I grew up. Every kid's a Frontier pilot when he's five years old. In my
case it stuck. I was able to pass the tests-and here I am."

"Have you got any brothers or sisters?"

"Not one," said Jim solemnly.

The solemnity was a fake, but he had forgotten his ability, now that he
was only a mind in a ship, of recall. He was suddenly young again,
suddenly back among the mountains. Suddenly wondering what it would be
like to have a brother or sister to play with. Somehow he always imagined
the brother or sister as younger than he was. He remembered now, with
painful clarity, being extremely young and telling his mother what very
good care he would take of a brother or sister if she would only get him
one-or two. It was not until years later that he came to understand that
medically what he wanted was not possible; that the circumstances of his
own birth had ended his mother's capability to have any more children.
All he recognized at the time of his asking was that by doing so, he had
made her unhappy.

"We lived outside of Edmonton, a way," he said to Mary now. "My father
was a metallurgist with a speciality in metal extraction from water. He
was a consultant and gone off somewhere around the world, most of the
time."

"Do they still live there?" asked Mary.

"They're both dead," he said. "My father had an accident on an underwater
inspection. The oxygen exchanger on his diving mask failed. My mother
died a year or two after that in a car accident. She went off the road
one night when she was driving home from Edmonton to our place by
herself. The officers thought there might have been a hit-and-run
accident, some other driver might have nudged her car off the road into a
fall down a slope; but they were never able to find anyone who might be
responsible. My uncle got me into the Cadet Corps."

"I had no idea," murmured Mary. "It must have been awfully hard for you.
Both my parents are still alive."

"Where do you come from?" he asked.

"Los Angeles Complex," she said. "We were actually in San Diego. My folks
still live there."

"Good," he said. "You can see them whenever you want."

"I don't, though," she said. "We were always pretty separate in my
family. In fact, I couldn't wait to win the scholarship that took me away
to Boston to college. One good thing-they let me go."

"Why shouldn't they have?" he said, surprised.

"Why? Oh, I was young," Mary said absently. "I was fifteen when I
graduated from high school. I was big for my age, though, and old for my
age. I don't just mean I acted old. I'd grown up with a pair of
independent adults; and I was an independent adult from the time I could
walk. Also, I was good at things. Show me something you can do and I'll
bet I can learn to do it better."

"Fly AndFriend without the engines, then," said Jim.

"Oh," she said, and laughed. "Of course. You're right and I'm being
ridiculous. I know I'm hard to live with. I'm just used to challenging
anyone and everything."

"You're not that hard to live with," said Jim-and almost added, "now,"
but stopped himself in time.

She said nothing for a second. Then she spoke.

"Thank you."

"For what?" said Jim. "I was only stating a fact. Hold it-the instruments
are showing something up ahead."

"I don't see... oh, there it is. Another Laagi ship?"

"Could be. Let's just sit tight at this range and see whether it moves.
We've got all the time we want to take."

They waited, but the pinprick of light with the faint halo around it did
not appear to move. Jim took sights on it with the instruments and set up
an instrument watch to alert them if it shifted in any direction.

When six hours had gone by with no report of movement by the instruments,
Jim took AndFriend outward from the centerline on a curve keeping the
object they watched just within sight of their instruments; then took a
second set of sights and set up a second watch.

When after another six hours, this, also, showed no movement, Jim
metaphorically scratched his nonexistent head.

"I don't understand this," he told Mary.

"Could whoever it is be simply planning to outwait us, and just sit there
until curiosity brings us close enough to shoot?"

"I've never known of, or heard of, the Laagi showing this kind of
patience-or reacting in this way at all. The only ways they've ever shown
us are either attack or run, with no hesitation about doing either one."

"Well, then," said Mary, "what's the chance that the instruments are
making a mistake and that isn't a Laagi ship at all, but something that
looks to them like it?"

"After nearly a hundred and fifty years of our having seen what Laagi
ships look like? That doesn't make sense, either."

"So I guess we go in and look," said Mary.

"I guess you guess right," said Jim. "Whatever it is, we'll take a closer
look at it."

They began by going even farther away from the centerline, clear out of
instrument sight of the object. Then Jim navigated their way back toward
it from what should have been the equivalent of a ninety-degree angle to
their original approach.

It came on the screen and stayed there. As far as their instruments could
tell them, it did not move as they approached. Finally, they were close
enough to get a recognizable picture of it on their screen; and it was a
typical two-individual Laagi fighter craft, for some unknown reason
simply hanging still in space-or hanging still in the sense that it was
holding a steady position with regard to the centerline, which-like the
galaxy it transversed-was in rotation about the galaxy's theoretical
center.

Jim checked AndFriend and held her still at that distance from the other
vessel.

"I do not-repeat, not-get this at all," he sue. "That ship's facing
down-galaxy. Unless it's expecting some kind of attack from farther down
the line, why should it be here at all? And if it's expecting an attack,
why isn't it patrolling whatever segment of whatever Frontier line this
is? Just sitting there, it can't watch anything beyond the viewing limit
of its instruments. If you wanted to hold a Frontier that way, you'd have
to have so many ships... "

His mind shook his missing head over the enormity of the thought.

"You'd need thousands of fighter ships like that-no, you'd need several
thousand times the total number we estimate they've got facing us on our
Frontier; and there can't be that many Laagi worlds, to handle that kind
of expense. If there is, they could just run right over our forces on our
Frontier without hardly noticing we were there; while actually they've
never hit us with more than a hundred or so ships at once-and that was
the biggest of the battles we ever had with them."

"It could be abandoned, for some reason," said Mary.

"What reason?"

"I don't know," said Mary. "But, again, we're dealing with nonhuman
minds. They may have a lot of things like we have, and act a lot like us,
but there could just as easily be a reason for them to abandon one of
their ships in space that we humans'd never think of. For example-a
religious reason. Or a superstitious reason. Maybe that ship is just a
mock-up of a ship, put there to mark the limits of their territory
down-galaxy, for example."

"Mary," said Jim, "you'd convince a stone lion. We'll go in and see."

He sent AndFriend toward the motionless Laagi vessel.

"Why a stone lion?" said Mary.

"Why? I don't know," answered Jim. "It was just the first thing I could
think of-now, don't say anything for just a few minutes, while we get in
close..."

"Why any animal, for that matter?"

Jim did not answer. He was concentrating on only two things. First,
getting as close as he could safely calculate-or that AndFriend's
calculators could safely calculate-to the Laagi ship in one jump, and
then taking them on a close pass by it on ordinary drive.

He did so, zipped past it and immediately phase-shifted out of shooting
range, then started studying the pictorial record of the other ship that
had been made as they passed it.

"No sign of a reaction," he said finally. "Just no sign at all. And
that's all wrong."

"Mock-up," said Mary.

"Can you see a technologically advanced society-one as advanced as
ours-setting up a mock-up way out here in space for religious or
scarecrow reasons?" demanded Jim. "I don't know what we should do now."

"Let's go right up to it, stop, and examine it at arm's length," said
Mary.

"Taking one hell of a chance."

"If you were alone, with no one to argue with, what would you do?" asked
Mary.

Jim said nothing for a moment.

"I'd go in, of course," he answered finally. "I'd have to."

"Then, may I ask--?'

"What we're waiting for?" said Jim. "You may not, because I'm already
going in."

In fact, he was.

Fifteen minutes later they were hanging in space, side by side with the
Laagi ship and barely fifty kilometers from it.

"Hello! Hey! Do you hear me? Respond if you do. This is AndFriend calling
Laagi ship... " Jim sent his voice out up and down the normal human
ship-to-ship communications band.

"Have your people ever contacted Laagi, or overheard them contacting each
other, ship-to-ship?" Mary asked.

"Never," said Jim. "As far as we can tell they don't talk to each other.
But if this one can hear my voice he may take the fact I'm talking as a
sign I'm not about to begin shooting. It's worth a try, anyway. They must
have some kind of communication system. When there's several of them
they all either attack or run at the same time."

"But you probably aren't going to get anywhere trying to talk to this
ship, are you."

"No. But I had to check out the possibility."

"Now what, then?"

"Now what?" Jim echoed. "I don't know. If I was simply piloting AndFriend
normally, with me in my body and you in yours, as a last resort, we'd put
on our space suits and then I'd open the lock and power myself across to
that other ship's hull. Then, if necessary, I'd cut my way in through the
hull or the entry port. There's the entry port right there, but how does
a spaceship like I am now-"

"Like we are now."

"-like we are now, get through it?"

Mary said nothing.

"If you actually touched its hull," she suggested finally, "do you
suppose you could see inside it, the way you can see everything inside of
AndFriend?"

"I don't know. It sounds crazy... you're more the expert on this
business of mind being in matter. What do you think?"

"I think we need to try it just to check out the possibility."

"You do, do you?" grumbled Jim. "Do you realize what it means to try to
move a mass this size up close enough to touch a mass the size of that
Laagi ship, without having them do serious damage to each other when they
do touch?"

"Of course I know. But what other way is there? Can you think of one?"

"Offhand, no-hang on!" Jim interrupted himself. "There's just a chance I
can make some kind of sensory connection across a line connected to that
other ship. Now, what do we have in the way of a line or cable to make
connection with?"

He fell into a self-examination of everything aboard And- There was, of
course, no such article as a line or cable simply aboard waiting to be
put to use. It would be a matter of his making one out of material
already belonging to the ship.

Theoretically, he thought, any connecting material that was part of the
ship would do. The difficulty was that nowhere about a vessel like
AndFriend was anything resembling such material. After puzzling over the
matter for some time, he had an inspiration. What he did have was a
repair robot that was independently mobile and could be sent anywhere to
do anything.

"What I'm going to do is make a connector out of the hull material," he
explained to Mary. "I'll have the repair robot go out the entry port and
literally peel off a sliver down the length of the hull. That should give
us a good twenty meters of sliver, like a long, very thin rod. The robot
can stand in the open entry port-or even on the outside of the hull with
the entry port closed, come to think of it, holding out the rod toward
the Laagi ship. Then I'll try to move, carefully, as close to the other
ship as I can. You watch the screen, in case I don't feel contact when
the rod touches the Laagi ship, or the robot fails to report the
touching-because I want to stop AndFriend moving the moment we touch. At
the worst, it'll give us some twenty meters of buffer zone."

So, that was what the robot did and Jim did. Jim found he was conscious
of the sliver being peeled off-not as something painful, but as something
happening to the general feel of the ship that was unordinary and vaguely
discomforting. But there turned out to be a problem when the robot tried
to hold the sliver out. It was long enough and thin enough to be
extremely flexible; and instead of projecting stiffly toward the other
ship, its far end whipped back and forth in extreme arcs, which had begun
with the fact that the sliver's farther end had originally lagged behind
as the end held by the robot was held out from AndFriend's hull; and once
the farther end started moving to catch up, its mass carried it beyond
the point of straightness into an arc, bent it the other way until it
reached a limit, and then began to oscillate back past the midpoint once
more.

Gradually, however, the oscillating slowed. Eventually, when it was down
to the point where it was oscillating in an arc of only three or four
meters, Jim began to creep And- toward the other vessel with both of them
lying side by side.

Eventually, the arcing tip of the sliver began to brush the side of the
Laagi ship. Jim felt the contact even before Mary announced it.

"It's all right!" he said. "I can feel it-I can feel the other ship. It
feels... it feels very, very strange..."

He thought he heard Mary saying something, but her voice was at once very
far away and muffled; and in any case he had already moved his point of
view inside the alien ship and was lost in fascination with what he saw.


Chapter 14. 
 
There was absolutely no light within the sealed interior of the alien
vessel, so Jim did not see, in the sense of using his eyes. Rather, he
felt everything within it so clearly that his mind was able to form a
picture of what was there as well as if the interior had been lighted.

It was immediately apparent why the Laagi ships had the pregnant look
that was so characteristic of them. The second member of the ship's crew
did not sit behind the first as in the human ships, but directly
underneath the first. There was nothing between the two positions and
they were close enough that even humans could have reached down, or up,
as the case might be, and clasped hands with a shipmate.

But whoever had been the pilot and gunner of this ship-if indeed that was
the way the Laagi divided up the duties of the two who operated the
vessel-they were now long dead, even though Jim felt that the interior of
the ship still held an oxygen-bearing but unearthlike atmosphere that his
body would have tolerated only with difficulty. It was a somewhat
sulphurous atmosphere, as far as his sensing of it could tell him, but
what less odorous gases it held beyond that he had no way of telling.

The two operating positions in the ship were up front before an open
space that was divided into open compartments which could have been bunks
or storage spaces. The operating positions consisted essentially of two
metallic-looking vertical rings encircling what looked like oversize golf
tees. These had their base on flooring behind the rings and angled
forward so that the cup of the teestructure sat in the center of the
ring, the cup itself tilted so that it sat horizontally-that is, parallel
to the floor below.

The inside of the ring was studded with what were easily recognizable as
controls, buttons and small levers. On the cup itself sat something
almost indescribable; what looked like a pile of hooplike rings of bone
or cartilage from a quarter to a half-meter in diameter, enclosed with
what might have been a dark, thin, leatherlike skin that was, however,
now dried and cracked open under its own weight to show hooplike bones
beneath. It was hardly possible to relate the remains of skin that rested
on and hung down from the two cup-ends with any imaginable shape of
living creature.

The instruments and controls also seemed nonfunctioning. Experimentally,
Jim willed some of the buttons and switches into movement, as he was used
to doing with those in AndFriend, but nothing happened. The ship was
dead-powerless. He was left with the enigma of what he had found, plus
something else he could not identify and which he was not entirely sure
he would have noticed if he had been there in the flesh.

It was a strangeness-a purely nonphysical feeling that compounded the
disgust he might have felt in a charnel house with the sadness of a
graveside and a feeling of despair. Now that he had noticed it, it grew
on him, mounting steadily from a whisper toward a scream in his mind; and
he literally fled, in his point of view, to a position on the outside
hull of the alien ship.

Back out there, he became conscious of the fact that Mary was still
calling him.

"Jim! Can you answer me, Jim? Try to answer me if you can-make any kind
of answer...."

There was no note of desperation to be heard in her voice, but he was
suddenly conscious of what it might be like for her to find herself alone
in a ship, nothing of which she could control, and cut off from contact
with the only other person she could possibly reach.

"I'm sorry, Mary!" he called back. "I'm fine. I'll be right back there.
Hold on..."

He moved his point of view back across the connecting sliver, through the
robot and back into the ship. Mary's presence seemed to him to be gaunt
with tension, for all the steadiness of the voice he had heard her using.

"Jim! What happened? What's over there? Why didn't you answer me-"

"I'm sorry," he said again. "I'm really sorry. I didn't realize you
weren't with me. Come to think of it, why weren't you with me?"

"I think I was, in a way," she answered. "I could feel something.
Something terrible. But I couldn't seem to get you to answer."

"There's what's left of two Laagi there," Jim said. "They and their ship
must have been dead a long time. I'll send Fingers over to break open the
entry port, go in and make pictorial records of everything there. Then
we'll get away from here and look the pictures over and see if we can
understand some things-"

He broke off suddenly.

"Now why didn't I think of sending the robot in there in the first
place?" he said. "That would've been the sensible thing to do, instead of
cutting off a sliver to connect us-"

He interrupted himself.

"No, come to think of it, I'm glad I went the way I did. There's
something, a feeling I could feel there that won't be in any pictures. I
think it was what those Laagi were feeling when they were there...
when they died. The record the robot'll make won't give us any of that
and we'd never have known it was there. Didn't you say you felt
something, too?"

"Yes," said Mary. "Just a touch. But something... I can't describe
it."

"I can't either," said Jim. "But I'm going to try and so we you. Let's
compare notes on it and see if we can't come up with some idea of what it
felt like in our human terms."

While he was talking, he was already dispatching the robot to the Laagi
ship. The robot, in fact, was effectively an all-tool, one of the most
useful bits of equipment aboard a fighter ship. It had been originally
designed merely as something that could repair damage to the ship at a
time when the pilot and the gunner might be either too occupied in
fighting for their lives, or wounded and incapable of making necessary
repairs themselves. It was a device with a squat little barrel of a body
and numerous flexible arms. The body held, in addition to its independent
motive system, the innumerable tools that could be attached by it to any
of the arms; it had evolved to the point where it had become the
potential solution to any need by pilot or gunner for anything from food
and drink to a wound needing emergency medical attention.

It was also used by crew members to find any small thing that might have
been accidentally dropped and which had rolled away out of sight into any
of the tiny nooks and crannies produced by the equipment tightly crammed
into the interior of the vessel.

But none of that was on Jim's mind now. What was concerning him at the
moment was a guilty conscience at having let Mary go unanswered and
unknowing while he marvelled at his discoveries aboard the Laagi ship.
The fact that she had not complained about it, or acknowledged it, except
by the momentary expression of the emotion in her mental voice when he
once more spoke to her from back aboard AndFriend, made it worse.

He found himself wanting her to complain, so he could excuse himself more
fully. But whether she understood his reasons or not, complaining seemed
to be the one thing she was absolutely refusing to do. It left Jim
uncomfortable with the feeling that he was now in debt to her, and he did
not see any way by which he might get out.

On the other hand, if she thought that having him in debt to her was
going to make him more likely to give in to her wishes...

He checked himself on that thought. They had just finally got on good
terms with each other and here he was starting to think in terms of an
argument. The robot came back aboard with its recording job accomplished
and Jim immediately phase-shifted a full light-year from the dead alien
ship.

"Look," he said, once they had made the shift. "I didn't mean to ignore
you when I was on the Laagi ship. It was just that I was hit so hard by
the differences aboard there. Also, I could hardly hear you when I was on
the outside of that ship; and inside, I don't think I was hearing you at
all."

"It doesn't matter," she said. "Could you move anything in the ship?"

"No," he said. "I didn't try anything but the controls; I could move
them-but nothing happened. No telling how long that ship's been sitting
there. You'll see what I mean when we look at the pictures Fingers took.
I'm sure that ship's engines and everything operable about her's been
dead for a long time. What was left of the two Laagi who'd crewed her
-well, as I say, you'll see the pictures for yourself. Maybe they've been
dead for centuries."

"And the other Laagi never came and got the ship, when we're this close
to their civilization centers?" she said.

"Maybe they couldn't find it? Finding just one ship, even if you know its
position within something like a couple of times instrument range, can be
pretty rough. If this vessel was as much as a light-year out of position,
their chances of finding it..."

His voice trailed off.

"We found it," said Mary. "In a matter of centuries, you'd think they
could do that well if they wanted to."

"We didn't really find it," said Jim. "We stumbled across it."

"Don't split hairs," said Mary. "We were looking for Laagi ships, and
it's right on the centerline. If we could stumble across it going right
down the centerline, you'd think they'd be bound to find it doing the
same thing. What did these Laagi look like? I know I'll be seeing the
pictures as soon as the robot gets them stored and on the screen, but
what I want to hear is your personal opinion."

"I don't know what they looked like," said Jim, a little irritably. "I
didn't see them, you know. I just felt them, along with everything else
about the ship. But they were sort of collapsed in on themselves, I'd
say. They don't seem to have a structured skeleton inside them, the way
we do. You'll have to look at the pictures and make up your own mind
about it. Fingers, where are those pictures you just took?"

The robot had been waiting for a specific command to show them. Its first
task had been to store what it had recorded from its own memory to the
ship's memory, relating it to anything already in the ship's memory to
which it seemed pertinent. Jim could merely have "remembered," therefore,
what the robot had seen. But Mary, of course, could not do that. She
would have to see the actual pictures on the screen.

As soon as Jim spoke, the screen lit up.

The robot had used his own exterior lights to illuminate what he was to
record. To Jim, who had felt what was in the alien ship before seeing it,
what he looked at now seemed garish under the bright white light in its
shapes and strange colors. It was as if some maker of commercial
entertainments had created a mock-up of what he had experienced directly.

Gone-he had hardly expected it to be otherwise-was the disgust, charnel
house-sadness that had seemed to touch him while he had been in the other
ship. But surprisingly also gone was the sense of something built and
used by aliens. Besides the impression that what he looked at was a
commercial mock-up of something alien was the sense that the film merely
showed the interior of a different model of fighter ship, one that could
as well have been designed and built by humans.

Because the effect of seeing it was so less than he had expected,
therefore, he was taken unprepared by the wave of excitement that reached
him from Mary.

"Jim! They're mummified. As if they've been there for centuries!"

He did not say, "That's what I just told you." Suddenly, he was very
aware of her reactions. They were a blend of fascination and a curiosity
that was so profound in her that it could almost be described as
ravenous.

"Jim," she said. "I've got to analyze all of this. You'll have to order
the controls for me. Tell your robot to give me, up on the screen, the
results of his gas samples of the interior atmosphere first, and after
that the results of the scrapings he made of every surface, and then
after that the measurements and interior views of those two Laagi
bodies-"

"Wait a minute!" Jim said. "What do you mean, gas samples, scrapings, all
this other stuff? A fighter ship robot-"

"Yours was updated so I could use him as a research tool. Just do what
I'm asking you to do, Jim. I'm sorry there wasn't time to tell you
everything we'd done to make my end of this trip productive. Now, first
the scrapings... "

Jim did as she said, ending up by running the ship's artificial
intelligence in calculations under her directions using values she had
somehow derived from what the robot had reported, on a number of
experiments Jim had never suspected it of making on the alien vessel.

"How did you know we'd run into a derelict Laagi ship?" he asked.

"We didn't. This was just general purpose facility built into AndFriend,
and so forth, so I could investigate anything we did run into. Would you
mind holding the questions for the moment, Jim? I'm up to my ears in
these calculations."

He gave up and simply waited her out, ordering the ship and its parts to
respond to her wishes as she expressed them through him. Eventually, she
came to an end of her labors.

"Well," she said in his mind, and he felt a note of satisfaction in her
mental voice, "this tells us a lot. Only it raises more questions than it
answers."

"Doesn't everything about the Laagi?" said Jim sourly. But his own
curiosity was getting the better of him. "What did you find out?"

"Mainly just enough to raise more questions, as I said," she answered.
"Call up the list of values I'll give you now, and I can show you a
mock-up on the screen of what I think those two Laagi looked like when
they were alive."

He did so, and stared with disbelief at what appeared in the tank of the
screen before his control chair.

"That?" he said.

"Well, not exactly that," she said. "It's anyone's guess whether they use
vision the way we do, or a sense of smell or hearing, or communicate with
sound waves. So I haven't tried to put in eyes, a nose or a mouth; but
the rest is what the calculations from evidence tell me."

What he saw on the screen looked, more than anything else, like a barrel
set up on end and covered with a gray, wrinkled skin like elephant hide.
The wrinkles indicated skin so excessive at two points near the top and
another two points at the bottom, that it looked as if the Laagi must
have at least double the outer covering it needed. There was a small,
domelike mound in the center of the top surface of the body that could be
imagined as something in the way of a head, unless it was just an unusual
bunching of the excess skin.

The whole shape sat like a barrel perched on its base in the cup of the
golf-teelike chair in the center of the ring of controls around it. There
was nothing about what Jim saw that indicated how the Laagi could even
reach the controls in the ring, let alone make use of them to operate a
spaceship capable of fighting it out with something like AndFriend.

"What bothers me more than anything else-" said Mary, and fell silent. He
could imagine her frowning at the screen, the arches of her eyebrows
flattening out. The flash of imagination brought up a memory of her whole
person, as he had seen her, back on Earth. Animation of her features
changed her completely, he thought. If she only realized this, she could
do both herself and everyone else a favor by letting her emotions show
more often in her expression. Animated, she was attractive. It was almost
as if she had developed the severe, unchanging cast of her features as an
armor at some time, and it had become habit. Here, where that look frozen
on her did not interfere with his perceptions of what she was thinking at
him, he was enjoying the sight of an inner Mary Gallegher that was much
more human and personal.

"What bothers you?" he asked.

"The neatness of it," she said. She gave him a different set of
instructions for the screen; and the gray, featureless, barrellike image
was replaced by one which was a great deal smaller, sitting in the cup of
the tee-shaped control seat. This smaller image consisted of a stack of
bodily support members -the bones or cartilage of the Laagi bodywhich
were all wheel-shaped with what must be strengthening, rodlike pieces
dividing the interior shape of each wheel into triangular sections. There
were larger wheellike members in the center of the stack, much smaller
wheellike members at the top and bottom of the stack and a sort of
skullcap of the same material sitting at the very top, the basis of that
mound which Jim had assumed had been the alien's head and which
undoubtedly was the equivalent of the human skull itself, as a protection
for the Laagi brain or its equivalent.

"I see what you mean," he said. "It looks almost as if those bones, or
whatever they were, were stacked up for inspection. But the skin was all
over the place."

"It couldn't very well be otherwise. There's twice as much of it, at an
estimate, as there was body to cover. But the alignment of those skeletal
elements almost has to mean those Laagi were placed in the position we
found them in. Or set themselves up. And if they set themselves up, why?"

"I don't know. But that brings me to an important question," said Jim.
"Does anything you found out give you any clue as to what killed them-or
why they died?"

"No," she said emphatically. "Nothing, whatsoever."

"That's what I was afraid of," said Jim.

At his command, the image they had been watching vanished from the screen
and a series of conical, three-dimensional diagrams began to appear. 

"What're you doing?" asked Mary.

"My turn to say shut up and don't bother me for the moment," answered
Jim. "I'm running a number of possibilities."

"Possibilities? Of what?" asked Mary.

He did not answer. His mind was too busy trying to remember and cover all
the variations of the problem he had begun to try out on the screen. Mary
did not speak to him again. After a while he blanked the screen.

"Ready to explain?" asked Mary.

"Oh, sure," he said. "Though actually there's not much to tell you. I've
been plotting possible approach routes to put that Laagi ship where we
found it, and nothing much makes sense except the fact that in that ship
these Laagi were traveling directly along the centerline, the way we've
been, headed for whatever's down-galaxy from here. If that's what they
were doing, why did they stop at just that point? Why did they die here?
Or were they killed and their ship stopped?"

"I don't follow you," said Mary. "Killed? By who?"

"That's the question," said Jim. "And you know the only answer I can come
up with? If they were killed, it was by somebody from down-galaxy doing
the equivalent of coming up the centerline-or firing whatever they fired
to stop the Laagi, up the centerline. If that's so, that paradise Raoul
kept talking about may have some real snakes in it. Because I don't know
of anything, and I can't imagine anything, that would stop a Laagi
fighter ship dead, kill its movement, kill its crew, and leave them all
looking as if nothing had touched them."

"The same situation could also be an argument that nobody from
down-galaxy killed the Laagi."

"Then why are they dead? Why is their ship still here, why didn't other
Laagi come and get it and the dead bodies of their own people? What it
all adds up to is a very uneasy feeling in me that somewhere beyond where
that dead ship floats there may be a civilization that could swat us the
way we'd get rid of a fly, and who don't like visitors. Accordingly, I've
been looking at ways we could explore around such a civilization's
territory without making the mistake of moving too far in on it; just so
we, too, don't end up as neat piles of skin and bones."

"We can't," said Mary. "Remember? Our skins and bones are back on Earth,
being kept alive as part of live bodies waiting for us to come back to
them."

"It was a figure of speech," said Jim. "In any case, AndFriend can be
killed, the way that Laagi ship was. I mean she can be reduced at least
to a gas cloud of her component atoms; and if she is, what happens to you
and me, the essential you and me? Do we disperse with the gas or do we
simply float forever in the interstellar void?"

"All right," said Mary, "what you're saying is, it may be dangerous
down-galaxy; and you want to go out from the centerline and probe for the
dimensions of any danger that might be there."

"Right. And we start by finding another derelict Laagi ship, if there are
any. In other words, we'll lay back from a position level with that dead
ship in relation to the centerline while moving outwards from the
centerline and carefully probing ahead with the instruments, to see what
we find."

"Great," said Mary.

"I'm serious!" he retorted.

"So am I," said Mary; and he realized there was indeed nothing sarcastic
or sardonic about the tone of voice he felt from her. "I think it's a
fine idea, Jim."

"Well... good then," he said, touched with embarrassment. "Here we
go."

He began to shift AndFriend out from the centerline, once more in
phase-jumps that were just within the limits of the distance at which her
instruments could recognize the presence of another ship. Time went by.

"Damn! Look!" he said suddenly. "Right out there at the instrument limit!
It looks like another ship."

It was another ship, exactly like the one they had examined before,
headed down-galaxy, and showing no sign of life aboard as they approached
it. When they came within a hundred meters, Jim sent the robot across.

The pictures it brought back showed no important difference from what
they had both seen in the pictorial record of the first derelict.

"It tells us one thing, though," commented Mary as they were looking at
the scene displayed in the tank of AndFriend's main screen. "What
happened to this one must have been close in time to what happened on the
other ship. The two Laagi aboard here are also decomposed to skin and
skeletons."

"Maybe they decompose faster than humans," said Jim. "How long does it
take the human body to turn into nothing but skin and bones?"

"I don't know. It'd depend on conditions, I suppose," answered Mary. "But
these bodies have been dead long enough for all internal soft
material-flesh, muscles, tendons, organs, to decay and end up as either
dust, or part of the captive atmosphere of the ship. That's got to be a
very long time, unless you're right and the Laagi decompose a lot faster
than we do. And I don't think that's so."

"Why?"

"Because the samples your robot brought back showed evidence of
oxidation, not only in the material left from the soft parts of the
bodies, but in the scrapings of metals and other materials from parts of
the ship. That means that their atmosphere, like ours, has to have some
oxygen in it-though how much is a question. Let's look farther out and
see if we can find a ship with bodies that haven't decayed so much."

Jim felt the emotional equivalent of a shudder.

"It's a ghoulish business," he said. Part of his mind was equating these
long-dead Laagi with human pilots he had known who had never come back.

They searched outward, and in the next hundred hours of ship's time, they
found seven more Laagi ships, all pointed down-galaxy, all with nothing
left of their crews but skin and rigid interior body parts.

"And they're all on a line," said Jim, "all level with each other,
pointing down-galaxy. What gets me is why they were all killed at this
distance from Center and why we can go up alongside them, this
way-theoretically as far into the unknown enemy's territory as they
did-and not even feel or see anything dangerous."

Maybe the enemy was here once, but now it's gone," said Mary.

He had found that little by little he had been building a mental image of
her from his memory of what she looked like. In the process his
imagination had made her look a good deal less severe. It also made their
mental conversations more pleasant. It was much easier, he found, not to
take offense from the image in his imagination than it had been from the
real Mary. Consequently, he answered this last suggestion more tolerantly
than he might have if the two of them had been inhabiting AndFriend in
their proper bodies.

"Then we're back against the question of why their own people haven't
come and collected them," he said.

"There could be good reasons from their point of view, that humans
wouldn't understand," Mary answered. 'There could even be reasons we
might. Maybe they left them here to commemorate something? A battle-"

"It was no battle these ships died in, or their crews," Jim said.

The sudden hoot of a proximity alarm came hard on the heels of his words.
He shifted the view in the screen suddenly to show the space up-galaxy
behind them.

"Oops," he said. But the lightness of the word did not match the emotion
coloring it.

The instruments showed five bright dots with halos, coming at AndFriend
from five different directions, marking out a half-globe of space
up-galaxy at the limit of the instruments' views. A half-globe with flat
and open side down-galaxy only.

"Laagi?" asked Mary.

"Who else could they be?" Jim considered the screen bleakly. "It crossed
my mind they might pick us up on instruments, when we started examining
these dead ships of theirs. If there's another, enemy civilization
down-galaxy, they'd not let their frontier with it go unmonitored. But,
idiot that I was, I didn't worry enough about Laagi observers. I actually
forgot about that danger-and that's what being all by yourself with a lot
of empty space around can do for your sense of alertness."

"What are you going to do?"

"Shift out of here-a long jump. A long, long jump; so far they'll need
ten years to look through all the space I could have gone into."

The Laagi vessels were closing fast, in ordinary drive at accelerations
that must be close to what their pilots could stand. They could reach
AndFriend in minutes now of her interior ship's time. Unexpectedly, he
heard words from Mary that made no sense at all.

"I'm sorry, Jim," he heard her saying. "I'm really very, very sorry..."


Chapter 15.

He was lying on a flat surface.

He was under gravity. He was landed.

Two great, flat hoops, edge-down, of metal, or at least of something that
shone like polished steel, were anchored in the hard surface on which
AndFriend lay and curved over her, at a third of her length in from each
end of her. The hoops were five meters wide and narrow, but with their
edges that faced down toward AndFriend narrowing to a few microns of
thickness, so that they were like enclosing, curved knives ready to slice
her open if she should try to lift.

In one wild reflex he flung his orders at the phase-drive engines,
ordering them to phase-shift immediately, shift a full five light-years
away, at once.

Nothing happened. The control studs that should have depressed themselves
on the com-section in front of his empty control chair did not stir.
AndFriend did not stir.

He threw all his will, all his longing to escape into a command for the
ship to phase-shift; and, when she continued to stay where she was, kept
pushing against nothingness, driving, willing AndFriend to shift to
safety.

And still nothing happened.

"No!" his mind cried

It was a long, drawn-out cry, like the howl of a trapped animal. Dimly he
was aware of Mary trying to speak to him.

"I can't move her!" he shouted voicelessly at Mary. "What's wrong? Where
are we? How'd the Laagi do this? How'd they get us here? What happened?
What's happened to me?"

"... Jim, don't," Mary was saying to him.. "Jim, don't fight like that.
Please. It won't help and you'll only hurt yourself more. There's nothing
you can do. You can't move AndFriend now. The Laagi think they have us
like they had Raoul-only they didn't try to anchor him down; and we've
just got to stay put, for a while at least."

Like a trapped animal crouching in the cage that held him prisoner, he
snarled at her.

"What happened? What did they do to me?"

"The Laagi didn't do anything, Jim. Only bring us in and try to lock us
down here with those arcs they've set up over AndFriend. I'm so sorry,
Jim, but I had to. It wasn't them who stopped you from getting away from
them, and it's not them that's keeping you from shifting clear now. It
was me."

"You?" He raged at her. "You? Have you gone crazy, letting them make
prisoners of us?"

"No, Jim. Please. Listen. This was something I had to do. It was planned
this way from the start, if it looked like the Laagi might capture us the
way they captured Raoul. It was something more important than anything
else, if we could find out more about them and then try to bring the
information back..."

"You just gave them AndFriend? You gave them me? Without warning? Without
asking? How did you knock me out? What's happened to me that I can't move
her?"

It was the third time he had been handled like someone untrustworthy, and
it was the limit.

"Oh, Jim!" It was as impossible as the situation they were in now that he
could feel from Mary Gallegher an emotion that was the equivalent of
tears. But it was so. "It wasn't even Louis who decided to do this; it
was the people who give him orders. The only way they agreed to this
expedition was if our primary mission was to bring back information about
the Laagi."

"What did you do to me?" He hated her now and knew she was feeling that
hate. "How could you come between me and AndFriend like this?"

"Jim, try to understand, please... " she said. "I haven't come
between you and AndFriend. It was just that, during one of the sessions
when we had you under hypnosis near the end, you were implanted with a
command that could make you unable to use your ability to do anything
with her. It was just as if we'd told you about a command that could make
one of your arms paralyzed and useless. We couldn't risk you doing what
we knew you'd do if we saw something like those Laagi ships coming at
us."

"I was going to save us, that's all!" he said fiercely.

"Yes, and that's what we didn't want happening. We needed to let
ourselves be captured so that we'd finally have a chance to see the Laagi
and understand their civilization, and how they work and why they fight
us so-"

"Nevermind that. I don't remember a thing after I said I was going to
shift out of danger. Was that command of yours supposed to knock me out,
too?"

"Yes," she said. "Oh, yes. Jim, it had to. It was the only safe way. Then
I had another command, the one I used just now, once we were safely
captured, to bring you back awake again, but still not able to move
AndFriend."

"Safely captured!" he said savagely. "That's a little bit of a
contradiction, isn't it?"

"But we can get away when we want-when we've learned what we came here to
learn," she said. "Once you're able to move AndFriend again, you can
shift right out from under those knives. The Laagi did just what we
expected. When they didn't find anybody aboard us, they thought we were a
derelict. Just as they thought La Chasse Gallerie was a derelict, except
that later on she took off under Raoul's power and escaped from them. But
they're only expecting that this ship has something automatic about it
that doesn't require it to have a pilot to use ordinary drive, and that's
what the arcs over us are there to stop happening. They don't realize
that we're here and a part of the ship, and that you can phase-shift
right out from under this kind of restraint once you're able to move."

"Once I'm able to move," he echoed grimly, mockingly. "Once you take my
handcuffs off... which'll be when you've seen enough of the Laagi,
which'll be when you're satisfied. I've got no say in the matter, have
I-for all your saying you're so sorry about doing this? You want to prove
you're really song? Turn me loose now and let me have a choice about
whether we stay or go!"

"I can't!" she said. "I can't, Jim!"

"You won't-that's what you mean. You don't trust me not to take off the
minute you let me go," he said. "You and the general didn't trust me
enough to tell me I'd be going into space as a ship rather than a man,
you didn't trust me enough to tell me you bought this trip from the
higher-ups by promising to let the Laagi capture us if the chance came
up. Now you won't trust me with control of the phase-shift equipment
aboard my own ship. Let me tell you something, lady. You're either going
to have to trust your partner, or you're never going to get back to Earth
with anything you learn about the Laagi. And furthermore, I'm going to
take back control of myself, the ship, you, and everything else, as soon
as I can."

"If we can find out what we need to learn about the Laagi," she said
unhappily, "it won't matter, then. But I can't turn you loose, Jim. You
just gave the reason yourself."

"That's right. But while you study the Laagi-and I leave that all to
you-as I say I'm going to be doing my damnedest to find some way around
this lock you've got on me. And what do you want to bet I don't find
one?"

"Even if you do," she said, "Jim, please, think before you take us away
from here. We've got a chance to learn something we've needed to know for
nearly two hundred years. It could save no one knows how many lives and
ships. It could even possibly save our whole race. There's no way of
telling how much it's worth to study the Laagi up close like this."

He said nothing. The anger in him was like something solid and hard-an
anvil upon which he was hammering out thoughts of escape and vengeance.

They were together in silence for a somewhat considerable stretch of
time, possibly a few hours, possibly much longer, during which Jim paid
attention to nothing beyond AndFriend's interior, and even that he was
conscious of only with the periphery of his mind. Events and actions had
become largely subjective to his attention as a bodiless mind. Just now
he was lost in himself, thinking furiously of everything he had ever read
or heard concerning hypnosis, hoping to recall something that would have
to do with someone freeing himself or herself from just such a command as
Mary had acknowledged putting upon him.

But nothing came out of his memory that was at all helpful. He was still
going around and around over what little he knew about the subject when
there was an unexpected interruption. The entry port swung outward as the
inner door of the airlock between port and door swung open. A breeze of
outside atmosphere came into the ship, which, last Jim remembered, had
lost its atmosphere with the coming and going of the ship's robot in
space. The air was accompanied by a creature a little more than a meter
in height and looking like a cross between a small, bent old man wearing
a shell bulging outward on his back, and a snail walking-not on a snail's
normal, single footpad, but on two very short, thick legs that ended not
in feet, but what looked like pads of heavy skin six or eight millimeters
in thickness.

The head was like the head of a turtle, with two very small but very
bright, black eyes that were closely side by side and facing forward.
They seemed, however, to be able to move about considerably as the skin
holding them moved; because the first thing the figure did on entering
was to pause and direct one eye forward in the ship, while the other eye
moved to look toward the back of AndFriend's interior. At the same time a
globe the size of a tennis ball that was floating in the air just above
the creature's head came alight with a brilliant, yellow illumination
that would have made the interior painfully bright if Jim and Mary had
been using human eyes to see it with.

The same light made it clear that the shell of the creature was a light
tan mottled with irregular black patches, the visible parts of the soft
body were dark brown, and the soles of the feet-it appeared from their
edges-were a bright red. A second later half a dozen tentacles of the
same red color whipped out from under the top edge of the shell, between
where the creature's shoulders would be if it had shoulders under there.
These tentacles probed the air as if testing the atmosphere.

"Now, what's this?" he said to Mary, startled for the moment into
forgetting his anger against her.

"One of the local species that seems to coexist with the Laagi," answered
Mary. "They're workers. This one comes about once a week to clean us up."

"Clean us up?"

"I know," said Mary. "There's nothing here that really needs cleaning.
But it comes anyway."

"What's it called?" asked Jim, observing in fascination as the creature
turned and began to explore the surface of the inner wall of the ship to
its right with its tentacles.

"I don't know what the Laagi call it," said Mary. "I call it Squonk,
after the janitor of an apartment building where I once lived."

"'It'?" echoed Jim. "If your janitor was a he, I'd think-"

"We won't guess," said Mary firmly. "There's no indication so far if it's
bisexual, unisexual, or what, let alone something else. As I say, I call
him Squonk because the janitor in our apartment building was named
Skwaconsky-and-we all called him Squonk. But it remains to be seen what,
if any, sex this creature is."

"Yeah," said Jim. He had remembered his anger toward her and was once
more being stirred by it. The tenor of his feelings must have been clear
to Mary, for she said nothing more.

For the first time, however, he realized he had not looked beyond the
walls of the ship, except for that first view from the center of a flat,
empty area of what looked like concrete, except that it was the light
brown color of sandy soil on Earth. It was an irregular area, and beyond
its borders were dark green strips that seemed to be pathways or roads.
Beyond these in turn were beehive-shaped buildings of sizes varying from
something the size of a single-family house to something that might have
covered the largest sports arena on Earth, all the color of honey. These
structures seemed to merge together in the distance, either because they
were actually connected or because his unaided vision could no longer see
the spaces between them. Overhead the sky had a light greenish cast.

Moving about on the dark green strips were more Squonks and other figures
that varied amazingly in size and length of limb but went on two legs and
were vaguely human-shaped.

Automatically Jim mentally ordered the main screen in front of his
command chair to show the outside scene with telescopic magnification, so
that he could get a closer look at the humanlike figures. But nothing
happened-and he was suddenly aware that this, too, must be part of what
he was blocked off from in his ability to control the ship.

For a second he was tempted to ask Mary to let him at least have control
of the screens, if she could without setting him completely free. But the
thought was followed almost immediately by a feeling of revulsion at the
thought of asking any favors.

Mentally, he forced himself to put his anger aside.

"Are those Laagi, those critters outside there that don't look like
Squonk?" he asked her.

"Yes," she said. "Would you like to watch them close up?"

"It doesn't make any difference to me," he said.

"It does to me," she said sadly. "I'd give a lot to be able to see them
up close, in the tank of the screen. I'd like to examine the whole city
around us that way. But I can't without turning you loose."

"That's right," he answered grimly. "What makes you so sure they're
Laagi, then?"

"It was some like that who came aboard us out in space, before they
locked AndFriend in the midst of them and shifted her here. Only two or
three of them have come and looked inside the ship since she's been here.
I don't know whether the ones who came and looked at her here were high
officials or scientists, or specialists of some kind, or just that the
general Laagi public's not interested in us. But those were all who
came."

"Specialists or people with rank," said Jim. "I'd bet on it. You don't
think we'd let the general public swarm over a Laagi ship we'd captured?
And our general public'd certainly be eager to do just that."

"There's always the danger of anthroporhorphizing," she answered. "We
don't really know them enough even to guess at a reason they'd do
anything."

"No reason not to, either," he said.

They went back into silence. Jim because he did not want to talk to her
any more than he had to; and she, he presumed, because she knew how he
was feeling and did not want to give him any unnecessary chances to tell
her what he thought of her-and the general and the people behind him. But
most of all of the general and her, who may have been under pressure to
do what they had done to him, but who had certainly agreed to betray him.

Squonk continued to go over the interior of the ship, and Jim found
himself becoming fascinated with the creature. He had never in his life
seen such a thorough search for whatever should not be there. Within the
captive atmosphere of the ship-even when that captive atmosphere was that
of an alien planet-there was no way for dirt to accumulate. But the
almost microscopic search of every surface in the ship by Squonk was as
thorough as if it was cleaning an operating theater in a hospital; and,
compact as a fighter ship had to be, there were endless niches and
crannies to be searched into.

Apparently, while dirt could not find its way onto the surfaces of the
ship's interior, tarnish resulting from contact with the unusual
atmosphere was possible. Jim saw Squonk several times fish back in under
its shell with the end of one tentacle and come out with a small
spongy-ended blue rod perhaps fifteen millimeters in length; and that
spongy end, rubbed over any metallic surface, made it brighter. Then the
blue rod was tucked away again.

Interesting as this was, even more interesting was a fact it took Jim a
little while to notice-and that was that Squonk's legs seemed to lengthen
or shorten to order, to make it easier for it to get into particular
crannies.

"Jim." The voice of Mary interrupted him as he was fascinatedly watching
this happen for perhaps the dozenth time.

"What?" he asked absently, his animosity for the moment forgotten.

"Wouldn't you like to know more about these Squonks, and the Laagi, and
everything on this world?"

He did not answer immediately, thinking it over. Of course he wanted to
know. But saying so would almost sound as if he regretted his words
earlier.

"I know, Jim." Mary's voice was sad, but also it was weary. "You're
absolutely right. We treated you terribly from the beginning. You don't
even know half of what we did to you. We deliberately put you under
mental stress; we held you back from the only thing you loved; all of it
done deliberately to break you down. We fogged your mind up with drugs,
and we finally sent you out under the illusion you were volunteering to
do something when actually you were sent to do something entirely
different."

He did not answer.
	
"If it helps-and I know it doesn't," she went on after a while, "I'd
never have done it that way, knowing you the way I do now, knowing how
much AndFriend means to you, how much space means to you. I couldn't do
it, if I was asked to do it over again, to anyone. It was the worst sort
of misuse of a human being. In a good cause-but misuse all the same."

He said, "All right. I feel the way I feel. But we won't talk about it
anymore. You want to study the Laagi and you need my help. I won't fight
you on the fact that it's a good thing to do. I won't run away from what
we can do here. You'll have to trust me that I mean that, meanwhile. You
can believe it or not, but if I'd been told the truth from the beginning
I'd probably have thought you all were crazy to suppose we could even get
to a Laagi world alive, but I'd have agreed to try. It's not that
different from what I signed up to do in the first place. It's just
sticking my neck way out in a different way."

He stopped. She did not answer immediately...

"Well?" he said. "Did that convince you? Do you trust me enough now to
turn me loose?"

"No," she said. The thought from her was like a sigh. "I do believe you,
Jim. But I've got my own duty, and I can't let you go just on your word
alone. You've got to do something first to prove it."

It took a few seconds for the import of her words to sink in on him.

"Prove it-" he echoed. "How can I do something like that, hogtied the way
you've got me?"

"By wanting enough to be a squonk to make something work."

"Wanting to be a squonk?"

"Yes."

His mind whirled.

"Why, for God's sake-even if I could be one, what makes you want me to?"

"So we can really study the Laagi, up close. So we can go into their
buildings-into their homes, if they have homes. So we can move around
here as invisible observers-"

"Hold on!" he said. Her words had been rising on a tide of enthusiasm
that he mistrusted. "I think I know what you've got in mind. You want me
to become part of this critter the same sort of way you made me part of
AndFriend, is that it? So I can travel with him when he leaves this place
and we can get a look at what's outside?"

"We, not just you," she said. "Where you go, I'll be going, too, of
course."

"All right. We. Just how do you figure to make me part of an alien animal
like that, even if I agree? It's not a piece of nonliving metal."

"I'm not sure it'll work, but I think it might if you'll do your part,"
she said patiently. "You see, we still really don't know how Raoul's
mind-what's left of it-became part of La Chasse Gallerie. All we ever had
was our guess that two things, his love for his ship and his physical
contact with it over a period of time, caused the two to blend. Even the
physical contact may not have been necessary. That, like the scrapings
from AndFriend we put under your skin, may be only a sort of black magic,
a symbolic sort of thing that helps the mind believe it can migrate to
what it's touching. But we do know that the mind has to want to go where
it goes-want it badly enough to make the change. Everything else may be
so much mumbo jumbo, but you wanted AndFriend more than you wanted life."

"That's true enough," he said soberly. For a second, he remembered his
exhaustion and his desperation just before he had left his human body
behind for what he now was.

"Also," Mary went on, "there could be other factors we can't even guess
at. The fact you and Raoul had spent time in interstellar space may have
something to do with the ability to move your mind. The fact both of you
and your ships had fought for your lives together could have something to
do with it. For all those reasons, there's not much more than a hope you
can shift your mind into this alien animal, as you call it. But I've got
a few things I haven't told you about. We knew I'd be helpless,
physically, once I inhibited your command of AndFriend. So, the command
that took your ability to control away was designed with exceptions-what
you could call holes in it; or perhaps "windows" would be a better word.
If I turn you loose to use a particular window-and I can with the proper
hypnotic command-you can give one, but only one, series of commands
through it; and one of those windows lets you use your ship's robot."

"The robot?"

"That's right. But don't get your hopes up," she said. "You'll only be
able to tell it to do certain things, none of which are going to help you
get back command of the ship as a whole, or do anything to help you to
phase-shift it. As it happens, most of what the robot needs to do to try
putting your mind into Squonk has already been done. Before we left Earth
it was equipped with scrapings from the interior of AndFriend, and
these've been stored in him all this time. What you'll be able to do if I
open one of those windows for you is use Fingers to inject some of that
scraping under the skin of Squonk."

"Inject? What makes you think, even if Fingers can do it, that Squonk
isn't going to feel the scrapings being injected and immediately head to
the Laagi equivalent of a veterinarian to have them taken out?"

"We don't, of course," said Mary. "But the scrapings are microscopic, and
the process of injection wouldn't be felt by a human. We just have to
hope it won't be felt by Squonk, either."

Jim sat thinking about it.

"Craziest thing I ever heard of," he grumbled. "If, if, and if... if
right is left and up is down, then maybe we'll all turn into orange trees
with the next word I speak."

"That's not the point," said Mary, still patiently. "The point is, will
you try it? Will you try, honestly try, to consciously move your mind
into Squonk?"

"You'll turn me loose if I do?"

"I didn't say that. I said I'd start to believe that you wanted to stay
and find out about the Laagi, if you try-really try. Remember, if you're
not trying, I'll know it. That's the advantage of my mind being in yours,
the way it is."

"I'll try, of course," said Jim. "I don't have much choice."

"Jim, of course you've got a choice! If you simply sit here refusing to
do anything, and I finally become convinced you never are going to help,
and so we'll never learn anything more about the Laagi and Squonk and the
rest of it than we do now, then I'll turn you loose and we'll go home
with that.

Maybe back there there's some other pilot who'll bring me out to be
captured again and-"

"That's a low blow," he said.

"Well," she answered, "if you're the one that doesn't want to stay, can
you complain if someone else does want to?"

"I told you I wanted to stay," said Jim. "It's just that-forget it. I'm
willing to try putting myself into this creature with the maniac
housekeeping tendencies. What do I do first?"

"Nothing," she answered. "First, I have to open up the window for you to
command Fingers to inject the scrapings. Which I will now do. Go-Cane!
Now, first you'll find you can give the robot the order to inject the
material. But it'll have to wait for a chance to do it when Squonk's
close but unsuspecting. Second, once the material's in Squonk you try to
make the connection. Ready to try it?"

"Ready," answered Jim.

The robot was standing motionless tucked into his storage niche at the
back end of AndFriend's interior, as it had been ever since it had last
been put to use. Squonk had started its cleaning down the side of the
ship from the entry port and would apparently be cleaning up the other
side in due course. Before that he would reach the robot and clean it.

Jim concentrated on the small scrapings from AndFriend that were to be
injected into Squonk. He must, he told himself, have been feeling them
there in the robot all the time, but paid no attention to them since
Fingers himself was part of AndFriend. But now that he knew they were
there...

With the ability to feel, rather than see the ship around him, he
searched the robot for something that was not part of Fingers' normal
working equipment. It would be very tiny, but different... ah, he had
located it. It was in a tiny drawer hidden under the end of one of the
multiple arms used by the robot, at the end of the lowest of the
extensions at the end of the arm extensions, capable of taking as
attachment any number of small tools.

The scrapings were from the control console in front of the pilot's seat;
and they were already loaded into a tiny, hollow, diamond-pointed needle
that should be able to penetrate any living substance, even horn or bone,
to a depth, if necessary, of fifteen millimeters.

Jim's point of view was now within the scrapings them selves, inside the
robot. Once he would have told Mary about this, but now there was a
barrier between them. If there were things she had seen fit not to tell
him, he thought, there could be things he saw fit not to tell her. From
the motionless, silent mechanical, Jim watched the alien cleaner getting
closer and closer. Even at the slow, careful, deliberate pace Squonk was
maintaining, it was now very near to the robot.

"All right," said the voice of Mary. "Prepare the robot to inject the
material. Tell it. Say 'on the words "Go in," inject the ship's material,
now in the second finger of your lowest right hand, into the living
creature before you. Inject to a depth of nine millimeters into the upper
part of one of the folds of living tissue on the creature's left leg,
just below the shell on its back. Do this as quickly as you can and if
possible without attracting the creature's attention. Then return to
"Still" position."'

"I can give the order with a lot less words than that," said Jim, still
holding his point of view inside Fingers.

"Just repeat the words I gave you, please," said Mary. "On the words 'Go
in,' inject... "

"I remember. You don't have to go through it again," said Jim.

"Good," said Mary. "Because unless you use the words I just gave you, the
window won't work and the robot won't act. So you've been warned. If your
memory does fail you, just pause, and I'll prompt you. I'll also tell you
when to start giving the command. So wait for my order."

"Yes, ma'am!" said Jim.

Mary ignored the emphasis on Jim's last word. Together they waited.
Squonk finally reached the robot and began to search its head for
anything needing cleaning.

"Ready now," Mary's voice sounded in Jim's mind. "All right-say 'Gone,
now!'"

"Gone, now!" repeated Jim.

Even though he was watching for it, Jim barely saw the movement of the
hand with the needle. It was out and in, the finger with the material
having seemed to barely approach the back of Squonk's leg-and then the
robot continued to stand in perfect stillness for the rest of the
grooming being given it by Squonk.

Squonk showed no sign of noticing what had been done to it. It continued
with its cleaning.

"Jim?" said Mary. "Jim, did it work? I'm blind, all of a sudden."

"It worked. But we're in a strange country," said Jim. "Now we've got to
find our way to the capital city."

"What?"

"Come on, now," said Jim. "A scientist and technologist like you ought to
be able to figure out that one. We're in Squonk all right, but its body
tissue's not human-it's unfamiliar territory. Now I've got to find my way
to wherever its mind lives and in its mind hook up with its vision. You
didn't think of this."

"We thought of it, but... " Mary's voice was oddly distant, without
being any harder to hear for that reason. "We thought it'd either work or
not work, since any part of AndFriend acts like eyes and ears for you,
like every part of La Chasse Gallerie does for Raoul. So once we got an
alien injected, we thought we'd either be able to get the input of its
senses right away, or the try'd be a failure."

"Well, it's not a failure. But I can't see, hear, smell or whatever yet,"
said Jim. "I'd say that's because I haven't got all the parts connected
together, the way I had with AndFriend. Here, I've got a little part of
myself buried in opaque, surrounding alien material. What I'm seeing is
that opaque, surrounding alien material. Anyway, I think that's it. Sit
back and let me work on this."

He was like a man imprisoned in darkness and pressure, caught in a
cavern, underground. How to start? He knew nothing about the alien body
around him. In fact, the truth was, there was no certainty that it was a
body and not some mechanical which had been much more cleverly
constructed by the Laagi than Fingers had been by human engineers. Or
Squonk could be a biological robot grown to order from cultures of alien
flesh belonging to the Laagi or some other species under their control

He checked himself suddenly. His mind was running wild. The thing to
concentrate on, he told himself, was how similar Squonk's body was to the
animal bodies of Earth, not let his imagination run to wild imaginings of
difference. Alien or not, if it was a body as he knew bodies, it lived
and died, it ingested fuel material and excreted wastes. It would need
the equivalent of a brain and a heart to circulate the fuel from the
ingested material to the living parts of its body needing that fuel. And
a liquid circulatory system would be more efficient than any solid manner
of delivery... which meant it had the equivalent of a blood system.
Which meant that if he could just reach that blood-call it the
circulatory-system, he could travel it until it led him to the brain.
Wherever the brain was, the mind ought to be available.

But first he had to find a conduit of the circulatory system. Like
someone lost in a vast continent, he needed to find a river and follow it
to the equivalent of the sea, and the sea to a particular place on the
shore of the sea. He tried moving the injected material the way he had
moved the AndFriend when his mind had been free to do so.

He moved, only a tiny distance, but he moved. However, a second later,
the material enclosing him moved suddenly, taking him with it; and in
panic, he recoiled.

He found himself back in the ship as a whole.

"I can see-oh," said Mary, her voice going from excitement to the
flatness of disappointment. "It didn't work."

"No, that's not what happened," he answered. "I panicked. I moved the
injected material and-look at Squonk. He's scratching himself. When I
felt the pressure of that, inside his skin, I automatically ran."

In fact, Squonk was rubbing the tip of one tentacle energetically at the
area on his left leg where the material had been injected.

"I think I can go back into him, all right... " he said, reaching
out once more with his mind for the AndFriend material lodged in the
little alien.

Suddenly it was dark again. He was back.

He tried moving once more, but this time more slowly and carefully.
Twice, he was shaken, as a cave-in victim might be shaken by earthquakes
in the earth or rock that held him, but he kept going. After a time that
he had no way of measuring, he poked the front end of his material into a
less solid space.

He explored it. He was all but certain it must be the equivalent of a
blood vessel, but it was very small. Still, his material was small enough
to fit even into this narrow passage. He slipped all the way in, and
tried to sense, by touching the surrounding walls, whether he was being
carried along with the fluid that must surround him now.

He was apparently, he decided, being carried backward. He reversed his
own point of view in the scrapings and thought of himself as going
forward. It was either a long time or a short-once more he had no way of
knowing-but he was eventually carried along and into a larger pipeline
with a stronger flow.

He had no way of knowing for certain where he was in Squonk's body, but
the same sort of feel that had helped him in dead reckoning gave him the
general feeling that he was in the body of Squonk, rather than still in
the leg where the scrapings had been injected. He oriented his material
now to touch the walls of the conduit along which he was being carried by
whatever fluid was Squonk's equivalent of a bloodstream. Within the
fluid, he was essentially weightless. He could only feel the pressure of
its current. If he could just feel the stresses on the solid wall
material, however, he ought to be able to tell in what direction gravity
was pulling upon them. He blamed himself for not trying to judge, when he
was first injected into Squonk's flesh, which way the stress of gravity
was pulling on that flesh.

This way would be more difficult.... Again he did not know how long he
tried to feel what he wanted to feel, but finally he became sure that the
stream he was in was flowing horizontally against the pull of gravity-

Without warning, he was tumbled and thrown in a dozen different
directions in quick succession. He had come to some intersection, or
maybe it was even the equivalent of Squonk's central pumping organ for
the circulatory system; Squonk's heart, in short...

In desperation he began to move his material in what he conceived to be
one steady direction. For a while more he was buffeted, not knowing if he
was making any progress or not, and then the maelstrom of forces upon him
settled down to a single powerful flow that was clearly against gravity.

He was on his way upward. If Squonk's brain was in his equivalent of a
head, as the skullcap-like piece of bone cartilage among the body parts
left of the long dead Laagi in their derelict ships had indicated the
Laagi brain was, then he was finally on the right track.

It was, perhaps, his lucky day. The flow took him up to a point where it
suddenly dispersed itself into innumerable smaller channels.

He nosed into the material surrounding the small conduit into which he
had been carried. Beyond the conduit wall, the solid body material was
different, softer.

"It could be brain," he said, speaking to Mary for the first time in a
long while.

"Then, if you could find an impulse-carrying fiber," Mary said, "you
might be able to read whatever message that fiber was carrying, and then
spread out your awareness from there."

Smart, thought Jim. But he did not say the complimentary word aloud for
her to hear.

"I'll see if I can tell the difference in textures," he said.

He probed the material close about himself.

He touched something, solid within solid. What it was, he did not know at
the time and later on it was too late to go back and reconstruct what it
was. But suddenly light flooded in around him. He saw the interior of
AndFriend through Squonk's eyes.

The cleaning was just being finished. As he watched, Squonk turned toward
the entry port, carrying the perceptions of Jim and Mary. The entry port
opened. They and Squonk went out.

"How do you like that?" he shouted mentally at Mary, his grudge toward
her for the moment completely drowned in triumph. "Here we go! Five
minutes more and we ought to be close enough to touch some of those
Laagi-like figures we saw from the ship!"

But he was wrong. Having left AndFriend behind it, and once more down
upon the concrete of the great stretch surrounding the ship, Squonk was
beginning-slowly, painstakingly and industriously, to clean his way
toward the distant buildings and the strips of dark green where other,
distant figures had been seen moving.


Chapter 16.

"This is terrible!" said Mary. "How can we see anything if Squonk won't
look at anything but what it's working on at the moment? Why didn't we
think of a simple problem like this?"

"Because you didn't know you'd be putting the material from AndFriend
into a creature that never looks at anything but what it's working at.
Though, come to think of it, during work hours, a lot of us humans do the
same thing," Jim answered.

"But what are we going to do about it?"

"I don't know," said Jim. "But I'm thinking. If you don't mind, I'd
rather do that than talk."

"And another thing-" Mary was beginning; but he shut his mind to her
mental voice, something that was easier to do because of the strange
effect that made it sound now as if it came from some distance.

He did indeed want to think. In fact his mind had been running along
certain lines since he had first started trying to find his way through
the body of Squonk to the physical organ that was the seat of its mind.

He had been very lucky, he thought-there was no other word for it-to find
the nerve, or conduit as Mary called it, to Squonk's vision. But the
prospect of carefully examining, millimeter by millimeter, some distance
of sandy-hued pavement as Squonk dusted it was no more attractive to him
than it was to Mary.

The first question, therefore, was what could be done about the
situation-Mary's question just now. The second, and more important
question, was what his own individual relationship was to Squonk in the
first place.

Probably the first question could not be answered until the answer to the
second question was found and understood. The second question had come to
mind when he had suddenly begun to wonder-and this was the sort of thing
he would have immediately begun to talk over with Mary under ordinary
circumstances, but not now-why, looking out through Squonk's eyes, which
were physically different in a large degree from his human eyes, he
should still see the interior of AndFriend and the pavement outside his
ship as a human would see them.

Which raised the interesting question: was he actually seeing what he was
seeing through Squonk's eyes, at all?

Now, with AndFriend, he had seemed to be able to use the outside surface
of its metal hull as eyes. And, come to think of it, not just as one eye
or a hundred thousand eyes, covering the ship's outer surface area, but
as a pair of human eyes might see. Not only that, hadn't he been able to
look right through the opaque plastic of the tent enclosing the ship and
La Chasse Gallerie when he first woke up as AndFriend, back at the Base?

Something was definitely not as he had originally assumed it to be.

Which brought him back to the question of whether he was actually seeing
what he thought he was seeing, through Squonk's eyes. How was he actually
seeing? Was it mechanical or physical seeing at all? Or was it, perhaps,
something entirely different?

Mary herself had said that she and those like her had no idea of how his
transfer to AndFriend had actually been accomplished. Had he really been
sensitized to his ship, or had that been part of what Mary had called
possible mumbo-jumbo, nonsense masquerading as an explanation for
something for which so far there was no known explanation?

Had he actually been in the scrapings that had been injected into Squonk,
or had the scrapings been merely an excuse for more of the unexplainable
magic that had allowed first Raoul, then him, to move their minds out of
their bodies into something else?

Suppose it was all magic-call it "magic" for want of a better word. Or
call it excorporal transport, to get away from the connotation that magic
was something that had no rational explanation.

If it had nothing to do with the injected material, then perhaps he could
do anything he wanted from the viewpoint of Squonk, generally. Look out
through Squonk's skin and shell with his own accustomed human vision, as
he had with AndFriend.

Why not?

It was worth a try.

The first thing to do, he told himself, was eradicate the illusion.

I am not seeing out through Squonk's eyes, he told himself firmly but
silently. I am not seeing through Squonk's eyes. I am not connected to
Squonk's eyes....

Abruptly, he could see nothing at all.

"Jim!"

It was a cry of alarm from Mary.

"Jim!" she shouted at him again. "What's happened? Jim, can you answer
me? Answer me!"

But he had no time to spare at the moment to answer anybody. On the verge
of panic he was telling himself-I'm Squonk. I am Squonk. Squonk and I are
one thing. I am Squonk. I am Squonk-he was trying very hard to feel like
Squonk-Squonk is me. I am Squonk, just like I'm AndFriend.
AndFriend-Squonk, no difference. I am Squonk-"

Equally suddenly and without warning, light flooded back in on him. But
now he was able to look around at whatever he wanted to see and see it.
With relief, he noticed that they were already a good third of the way to
the dark green pathways, on which there were others like Squonk and also
... his mind boggled. The bipeds he had briefly and distantly seen
before, and which he was looking at now, couldn't be Laagis. They simply
could not be the same race that had battled with humans so fiercely all
these years

"...Jim!" It was pure alarm in Mary's voice. "Oh, my God, Jim, are you
all right? Answer me. If you can answer at all, speak to me!"

"It's all right," he said soothingly. "I just found out how to use all of
Squonk's exterior surface as eyes, just as I do on AndFriend."

Mary was anything but soothed.

"Why didn't you answer me, if it's so all right?"

"Actually I could, but I was busy just at the moment-"

"Busy, and you let me go on calling and calling-and thinking-how was I to
know what'd happened to you? You just left me there imagining all kinds
of things had happened to you and never stopped to think how I might be
worrying... worrying what I was going to do if something had happened
to you? You just forgot about me. Did you ever stop to think what it
might be like for me, helpless here and calling, calling and still not
getting any answer from you? Well, did you?"

"As a matter of fact-"

"As a matter of fact, no. You didn't. All right, I know you've got no
reason to worry about me after what we did to you to get you here; but to
let me sit in the dark, without any answer, imagining no one knows what
had happened... you could have said a word, just a word..."

She stopped talking. There was a wave of emotion perceptible from her;
and Jim found himself feeling far more guilty than he would have
anticipated. Well, he had been busy..Of course, to her...

"I'm sorry," he said. "I didn't think--2'

"You certainly didn't!"

"But the reason I wasn't answering wasn't because of well, because of
what you and the rest did to get me here. It was because I had my hands
full. I didn't know if I'd get sight back, myself. I was putting all my
mind to doing that; and, to tell the truth, it never occurred to me you'd
be frightened."

"I wasn't frightened! I was-yes, I was frightened. Of course I was
frightened. You seem to keep forgetting I've got no control over
anything, by myself. I'm completely dependent on you. What was I supposed
to imagine when suddenly everything went dark and you wouldn't answer?
Not that you condescend to answer me half the time, anyway..."

She broke off suddenly. Her mental voice stopped. He tried desperately to
think of something to say which would mend matters and could think of
nothing.

"Oh, Jim," she said after a long moment, while he was still searching and
researching his mind for the proper words to make her feel better.
"Never, never do that again!"

"I won't," he said.

"It was a lousy thing to do," she said, but less emotionally.

"I won't do it again," he said, trying the magic words for a second time,
since they seemed to have had a good effect.

"If you do," she said coldly, in a totally different mental tone, "you
might remember that there are things I can do, too, that you might not
like. Don't push me too far, Jim. There's only the two of us and it's
best for both of us if we're considerate of each other. Now, let's forget
it. How did you manage to get this kind of seeing that doesn't use
Squonk's eyes?"

"It's... well, it's not easy to explain," said Jim cautiously. "I
don't know if I have the words. I guess I just exercised whatever it is
that lets me use the outer surface of the hull of AndFriend to see with,
as I said; but I don't know how I do that, so I really don't know how I
did this. But about not answering you. If I could just explain to you how
it was for me, switching over, just then-"

"I said, let's forget it."

"Well, all right then," he said, "if that's what you want."

"That's what I want," she said.

They fell into silence again. Surreptitiously, Jim tried urging Squonk to
abandon his cleaning of the surface and simply go directly to the nearest
green path. Nothing happened. He tried again, and still nothing happened.

He considered giving up and simply waiting it out until they got there.
He was refusing to look directly at the creatures he had suspected to be
Laagi. He wanted a closer view of them before he let his mind acknowledge
the unbelievable-that creatures like these were the enemies that he had
shaped his whole life to face in space conflict. He concentrated on the
minimal facts; that what was left in his mind from that first glimpse was
a vague, uncertain image of upright bipeds of various heights with waving
arms.

Mary, on her part, was also not saying anything-for which he was
grateful. He had the feeling, though he could not pin it down, that she
was studying what could be seen ahead of them and lost in that.

They reached the first green path eventually, and Squonk turned to its
left and headed off along it at an angle toward the nearest of the
beehive-shaped buildings-which, now that they were closer, Jim could see
had no windows. Or at least, those close enough for him to get a good
look at showed no sign of windows. The doorways into them were apertures
in the shape of a triangle with its vertical sides bulging outward, a
shape that echoed the shape of the buildings themselves. Squonks
and-well, call them Laagi for the moment, anyway, thought Jim-entered and
emerged from these doorways to move out along one of the green paths.
Between the buildings, he now saw, there was no space except that taken
up by the green paths, the surfaces of which seemed to be soft and
yielding under the red pads of hard flesh that passed for their own
Squonk's feet, like padded carpeting.

"They must really be the Laagi," said Mary's voice in his mind,
unexpectedly.

So she had been struggling with herself over believing that to be true,
also.

Jim finally let himself look squarely at the closest of the biped
figures.

"Yes," he agreed glumly. "But it doesn't make sense, does it?"

"It's certainly hard to believe," she said. "I suppose they could be
another tame underspecies like the Squonks, but they don't act like
Squonks. They act like this is their world. And look-those doors on the
buildings are sized just right for them. The Squonks wouldn't need
entrances that tall."

"Yes," said Jim. "But they look like gingerbread men in three
dimensions."

"More like big rubber dolls," said Mary.

They were both right, Jim thought. The Laagi either varied in size and
length of limb, or were able to vary, but outside of that, they seemed
identical, with no differences that would indicate two or more sexes.
They were gray-skinned, roundbodied and round-armed. To be more precise,
their bodies looked like tanks covered with gray skin, their legs and
arms were like thick sections of rubber hose attached two at the bottom
of the tank and two at the top; like human legs and arms, but unlike
human limbs in that they seemed to have no joints, but to bend like the
rubber hoses they resembled. Their legs ended in pads of muscle-but
merely a darker gray, not red-colored like those of the Squonks-and their
arms either seemed to end in stumps or stubby fingers, depending upon the
individual.

They were all in motion, whether they were traveling one way or another
on the green strips, or congregated in groups of two to half a dozen, in
which case their legs were still, but their arms were in constant motion,
waving up and down, stretching out or shrinking to a shorter length.
Occasionally, the legs of one of those walking or standing would also
lengthen or shorten, for no apparent reason.

Their heads were like small, absolutely round balls, covered by the same
colored flesh and half-sunk into the wrinkled skin at the top of the
tanklike body. They had, like the Squonks, two tiny but brilliant black
eyes side by side and buried in the flesh of what might be called their
faces; though they did not seem to move these eyes about individually, as
the Squonk's eyes had on its entering AndFriend. There were as well a
couple of vertical slits, slanting toward each other at the top, where a
human nose would be, and a horizontal slit where a human mouth would be.
This mouth opened slightly and shut itself again, from time to time, when
they were standing congregated together. But their arms in particular
were always in motion, waving up and down, bending, extending and
shortening. But mostly waving.

And with all this, they made no sound to each other.

It was unnatural by human standards. There were the small noises made by
Squonks and of Laagi walking along the paths; there was the sound of wind
among the buildings; even something very small that could have been the
alien equivalent of either a bird or insect whirred once across the path
at about average Laagi height. But the Laagi mouths produced no words,
nothing that could be considered sound at all.

"This is your department," said Jim. "I don't get it. Why do they bother
getting together that way if they aren't going to talk? How can they be a
civilized race in the first place if they don't communicate?"

"They're pretty clearly communicating," Mary's voice in his mind would
have sounded almost disinterested if it had not been for its undercurrent
of emotion, an almost feverish thread of excitement he could feel from
her. "There'd be no point in them getting together like that unless they
were communicating. But it's not with sound. My first guess is they're
signaling to each other."

"Signaling?" echoed Jim. He stared at the jerking and waving arms of the
grouped Laagi. "I suppose you could make a fairly complex language out of
body signals. But one good enough to discuss the technological and other
aspects of a civilization that could produce fighter ships as good as
ours-in some cases better?"

"Most of our own technology isn't really dealt with in verbal terms,"
said Mary. "We use mathematics, drawings, models-all sorts of means
besides our common, everyday spoken language-"

She broke off, for Squonk-their Squonk, THE Squonk, had suddenly turned
slightly and headed into the midst of one of the groups of Laagi and to
one in particular. It came to a halt before that Laagi and stretched its
neck out in an absurd gesture that looked as if it was asking to have its
head cut off.

The Laagi it had come to lowered one of its rubbery arms with a swiftness
that made it look as if it intended to deliver a blow. But instead of
landing heavily on the neck of Squonk, the skin of the descending arm
barely touched the neck skin of the smaller creature and vibrated, so
that through Squonk's nervous system, the feeling of touch that came to
Jim was like that of a feather being rapidly tapped very lightly against
the creature's neck.

"What in all the universe... ?" said Mary.

"I don't know. But it-Squonk-loves it," said Jim. "It must be-oops!"

The last ejaculation came from the fact that the Squonk had begun to
shudder in what seemed an ecstasy of joy. It shortened its legs until its
body was touching the ground and suddenly rolled over on its shell with
its red feet sticking up in the air. The Laagi vibrated the underside of
its arm against the soles of the Squonk's feet in turn, while the Squonk
shuddered happily. Then the Laagi gave one of the upturned legs a soft
shove, the Squonk rolled back, right side up, lengthened its legs and
left the group.

"I think it was just praised," said Jim, after a little silence between
himself and Mary.

"Or caressed, petted the way you might pet a dog."

"No, I really think praised is the word," said Jim. "Feel the way it's
feeling right now. It's satisfied, iike someone who's just done something
it felt good about doing."

There was the slightest pause.

"Jim," said Mary, and he got the definite feeling that she was not happy
saying it. "I can't feel any kind of emotion from Squonk. Are you sure
you can?"

"Of course I'm sure-you can't?" answered Jim, startled.

"I wouldn't say I couldn't if I didn't."

"No, of course not. But that's strange."

"Not so strange." Mary's mental voice was almost bitter. "I'm just a
passenger in you, after all. I don't have any direct connection with
Squonk."

"Do you with me? I mean, with the way I feel?"

"Some," she said. "Except when you shut yourself off from me."

"I don't do that!"

"You do it all the time!" She hesitated. "Actually, it's probably a good
thing we can shut each other out sometimes. You wouldn't want to know
what I'm feeling all the time, would you?"

There was something tentative about this last question, as if the
question had some hidden purpose.

"Well, no. Of course not," he said. "You're right, of course."

"Well." There was relief in her voice. "There you are. Now what were you
about to say when Squonk went to get petted, or praised, or whatever?"

"What was I going to say?" He frowned. "I don't think I can remember...
oh, yes, I was going to say that Squonk was perhaps going to that
particular Laagi for orders and we might learn something about how
Squonks and Laagi work together by what Squonk does now. But Squonk was
only there to get petted, after all."

"Wait a minute-maybe not," said Mary.

"Maybe not?"

"What the Laagi did with his arm in touching Squonk," said Mary. "The
Laagi could have been praising it, just as you said. But he could also
have been talking to it. In fact, he could have been giving it orders."

"You said you couldn't feel the Squonk's emotions," said Jim. "You should
have, then. That Squonk was awfully happy for something just getting
orders to do something. It was... ecstatic's a good word for what it
seemed to me to be feeling."

"Maybe it likes to work."

"That much?"

"How do we know how much Squonks like to work?" demanded Mary. "A
sheepdog likes to herd sheep. A sled dog likes to pull a sled with the
rest of the team. A Squonk may be like that, only more so. How do we
know?"

"We don't," said Jim. "But it's hard to believe."

"So we'll find out."

"Ask it, I suppose," said Jim.

"No. Just observe. What did you do when you were a boy?"

"Went to school. Played games," answered Jim. "What did you do when you
were a girl?"

"That's the difference," said Mary. "I began observing and studying from
as far back as I can remember. I think I told you I couldn't wait to get
away from home. My mother and father-"

She broke off suddenly.

"I talk too much about them," she said.

Jim found himself not knowing what to say.

"I think you only mentioned them to me once before," he told her at last.

"Is that all? Well, it doesn't matter, anyway. All I was going to say was
that they were completely useless people. What they did with their lives
could have been done by any of millions of other people in the world and
nobody would ever have known the difference. I decided as far back as I
can remember it wouldn't be that way with me. I'd be a student and a
worker; and I've been just that, ever since then. That's one of the
differences between me and other people."

"Like me," said Jim.

"Well, if you want the truth, yes. Like you. You just grew up, didn't
you? You let things happen?"

"Not exactly," said Jim. "All kids, as I might have said to you at one
time or another, want to be Frontier pilots. I stuck with it."

"That's commendable," said Mary, "that you stuck with it, I mean. There
are better things to do than be a fighter pilot. But it's not quite what
I'm talking about."

"What made you bring the subject up, then?"

"Because when I said we'll find out how much Squonk really likes working,
you made a joke about it, as if it was something that couldn't be done.
It can be done. By observation and deduction."

"I see. Sorry. I'll know better next time."

"And you don't need to be flip about it."

"Tell me," said Jim, "just what is it I've done lately to rub you the
wrong way?"

"I'm ready to go to work and you're playing!" blazed Mary. "Do you mind
shutting up and getting out of my way, if you can't be helpful?"

Jim thought of saying that he thought he had been, then decided saying so
would merely continue an argument he could probably not win. Probably, in
fact, there was no argument he could hope to win with Mary. So it would
be wisest not to get into any. Not that he had planned to get into this
one.

At any rate, he had his own plans, and his own work to think about.

"I wonder," said Mary, as if she had completely forgotten her emotion of
a moment before, "just where Squonk is taking us."

They did not have long to wait for an answer, because very shortly,
Squonk turned into the entrance of one of the larger, beehive-shaped
buildings.


Chapter 17.

Jim had expected anything but what he saw, which was, at one and the same
time, tidy but enormous. Just inside the entrance and stretching away
from it for a large distance, in fact for what must be right to the inner
surface of the building's main wall, all the way around it, were long
tables or desks perhaps a meter in width and three meters apart and as
long as the circular shape of the room permitted them to be, depending on
which chord of the circle they struck.

At these desks, on both sides, Laagi stood or sat in cupshaped seats like
those Mary and Jim had found in the derelict alien ships, like assembly
workers in a factory, except that their work was not done in part and
then passed on. Here, Laagi were building different small mechanisms from
a pile of component parts right up to the point of complete assembly. At
which time, a squonk, summoned by some means Jim could not make out,
would come scurrying over to take the finished work and carry it off.

Some of the workers were not working. These were neither standing nor
sitting in the cup-shaped chairs, but had pulled themselves into the
smallest possible compass, arms, legs and head retracted almost
completely into the body, so that they sat motionless on the base of
their trunks looking more like round, skin-covered barrels than anything
else.

Mary and Jim's Squonk went directly over to the farthest wall of the
room, where it took up a position partway down a long line of squonks who
appeared to be waiting there.

"Now what?" said Jim.

Mary did not answer. After a moment, one of the squonks farther down the
line suddenly darted out to the nearest bench, took a completed assembly
about the size of something that could be enclosed by Jim's -two human
hands, if he had had them handy, and went off toward the back of the
building.

They waited. Other squonks went to pick up completed assemblies from
Laagi. Apparently, there was either a specific Laagi that a specific
squonk carried for, or else there was a rotational system that took the
squonks to be messengers in some particular order.

Mary was silent. She was evidently busy observing and deducing. Jim
decided to get busy with his own work in that line, particularly with his
private thinking that had to do with his breaking loose of Mary's
hypnotic control over him.

He seemed to remember that no hypnotic command lasted forever, but
weakened over time. How much time was something he had no means of
guessing. In any case he did not intend to wait around for release, if
only for the fact that it would be more satisfying to break loose than to
wait tamely until he was released.

His mind had fastened on the fact that Mary had said she could not feel
the emotions of the squonk, She had also admitted not being able to feel
Jim's emotions, some of the time at least. Jim suspected that "some of
the time" was any time when they were not in direct mental contact,
talking together. It was this apparent inability of Mary's that his mind
had fastened on, like the mind of a chess player who has just spotted
what he believes to be a weakness on the part of his opponent.

The fact of the matter was, he admitted to himself, it was no longer
anger that was driving him, but something like a spirit of competition.
In essence he had been challenged by being put under hypnotic control and
there was something ancient and stubborn in him that had always risen to
a challenge. In fact, as he had discovered one day when he had managed to
get a surreptitious look at the results of some tests they had given him
while he was being trained to be a Frontier pilot, that response was
something that made him good at that particular job. In truth, he
operated best, the examiner had noted on them, when under challenge.

The months of mental and other misery Mary, Mollen and others had put him
through in the process of getting him to become one with AndFriend, he
dismissed without another thought. He had deliberately chosen a life that
involved hardship and pain, even on the training level. No, what had
sparked off the sudden fury in him was something entirely different. It
was his own conviction-in fact, he was proud of the fact-that he would
have freely volunteered to let himself be captured and held on a Laagi
world, so that the aliens could be observed; if all of them, from Mary on
up, had only given him the option. The fact that they had not, he read as
a fear that he might refuse. They had not trusted him to accept the
duty-and that was an insult.

And it was the insult that had made him angry.

But he had always been one of those people who take fire swiftly, only to
have trouble nursing the coals of an anger for any great length of time.
He simply got tired of being angry with anyone or anything after a while,
and forgot what had put a torch to his emotions in the first place. He
even had always been a little puzzled by people who could nurse a
grievance for years or a lifetime.

So, he was actually no longer angry with any of them least of all with
Mary, who was plainly the kind of person who became obsessed with
whatever they put their hands and mind to. But he was acutely conscious
now of being in a contest with Mary for control of himself; and he was
not in the habit of losing such contests.

He concentrated on the fact that Mary was blind to all of Squonk's
emotions and some of his. A part of his mind was insisting that in that
fact there was something he could use to set himself free.

What he wanted, he had already told himself, was some way he could
control Squonk without Mary knowing he was doing it. How that was to come
out of the fact that she could not sense the squonk's feelings, or his
under certain conditions, was still obscure. But if there was anything
there, it ought to give up its juices if he chewed it over in his head
enough.

He wondered if Squonk could be made to feel his own, human, feelings-

These thoughts were unexpectedly interrupted as they suddenly went into
motion at high speed. Squonk had almost leaped forward and was, judging
from what they had seen so far from it, doing its kind's equivalent of
running headlong toward the solid, vertical panel supporting the long
worktable just in front of them. Jim braced himself for an impact against
the support, which looked decidedly solid, but something very like a trap
door swung up out of Squonk's way a fraction of a second before its nose
touched it and Squonk hurtled through the aperture.

At the same pace, it went through trap doors in the supports of the next
four tables in order across the room; but after passing through the
fourth, it spun left and went down the aisle to a Laagi, who handed it an
assemblage of small parts about the size and shape of a loaf of bread.

Squonk's tentacles enclosed it tenderly and lovingly. This Laagi did not
touch Squonk in the way that the alien on the path had done, but Jim felt
a somewhat lower level of pleasure and pride warming the emotions of the
creature he and Mary now inhabited. Squonk turned and, in squonk terms,
ran for the back of the building.

The rear of the building turned out not to have tables taking up all
possible available space. A section had been reserved there at the very
back for two rooms, one being apparently an eating room and one a
waste-disposal room. Jim had only a glimpse of these through the portals
leading into them, however, for there was something else in the area to
which Squonk galloped at full speed, carefully carrying its burden.

It was a large screw-type elevator. An apparently endless, turning spiral
of something that might be metal that wound its way vertically up through
a hole in the floor to and through the ceiling overhead. Squonk ran up
onto this and stopped, letting himself be carried upward. Considering the
creature's energy during the last few seconds, Jim had half-expected it
to keep running up the turning and climbing platform of the elevator to
add its speed to the mechanical lift. But Squonk was evidently satisfied
to wait in this instance.

In fact, it let itself be carried through two upper levels of the
building before stepping off on the third. Here the available circular
expanse of floor held no tables, but groups of Laagi clustered around
larger assemblies of whatever it was they built here and of which what
Squonk carried was evidently a part, for the creature carried his burden
up to one of the groups and waited to have it taken, then turned to head
back downstairs once more.

"There ought to be some way we could stop it!" Mary's voice, sharp with
frustration, sounded in Jim's head. "I want to see what they're building
here, and maybe we could figure out the ultimate use of whatever it is.
If we could only get Squonk to stay, somehow!"

Oddly enough, Jim was thinking the same thing, for the same reasons, plus
a few of his own. He had long since been caught up in an eagerness like
Mary's to find out about the Laagi and everything to do with them. He
also would have liked time to examine more closely what was being built
on this floor. In addition, however, he was still concerned with the
problem of how to communicate with Squonk, with a view to controlling the
small alien.

"Did you hear me, Jim?" Mary was asking as Squonk boarded the
screw-elevator for the down ride. "If Squonk spends all its time doing
nothing but working here and cleaning AndFriend every so often, how are
we going to get a look at the Laagi civilization as a whole? Is there any
chance, do you think, that we could transfer to another Squonk, or even
to one of the Laagi?"

"I wouldn't think trying to transfer to one of the Laagi might be very
smart," said Jim slowly. "Squonk might not be aware of us being here in
its mind, but a Laagi might-particularly if we started talking to each
other. Come to think of it, he might even understand what we're saying."

"I don't see how," said Mary doubtfully. "Our mental concepts have got to
be so different from any alien's that they wouldn't make sense to him-or
it."

"Are you so certain about that?" asked Jim. "Remember, there's lots of
parallels between our civilization and this one. We've got ships, they
have ships. We've got buildings, they've got buildings. Just like us,
they go places, build things, and so forth. Wasn't it you who said they
were probably using something like a body language to communicate? So, we
communicate, they communicate. We may translate our thoughts into noises
and they translate them into arm jerks, but if the thought's the same-we
think of what's underfoot, and what's underfoot to them is what's
underfoot to us-wouldn't our thought about it, which we think of as a
sound, be seen in the mind we were occupying as an arm jerk that meant
'underfoot'?"

Mary did not answer immediately. Jim found himself feeling a little smug
about the success of his argument.

"You're still anthropomorphizing," she said though, when she did answer,
"still thinking of them in human terms. The thoughts behind our
respective symbols may compare, but we and the Laagi may look at things
so differently that our thoughts would be gibberish to them. For example,
suppose for the Laagi, there's no specific term for 'underfoot.' The
whole concept of something beneath the feet, upholding you, is thought of
in terms of who it upholds, or of why it was built, or what color it
is... or anything."

"Hmm," said Jim. He did not know what else to say. It was disconcerting
to make a masterful argument and immediately have someone find a hole in
it. Then inspiration came.

"But the point is," he said, "that we don't want to draw the Laagi's
attention to the fact we're in its mind at all. Talking gibberish could
sound that alarm just as loudly as saying something the Laagi could
understand."

"Unless they thought he was crazy."

"Do you want to take the chance?" demanded Jim.

"No," said Mary reluctantly. "I guess not. What's the chance we might be
able to transfer to another squonk?"

"I'm still trying to learn about this one," said Jim. "Maybe-but give me
some time yet. I understand from our point of view we've got lots of
time, so we might as well use it."

Mary did not dignify that final statement with a reply.

Squonk took them back to the waiting line. It was, Jim noticed, glowing
all over with satisfaction at what it had just done. Why it should be so
pleased with such a simple errand when it had not radiated any unusual
happiness over the very careful job it had done of cleaning AndFriend,
puzzled Jim. Tentatively, he concluded that the pleasure of a squonk
night have something to do with whether one or more of the Laagi was
involved in what the squonk did.

They were something like faithful dogs, these squonks. He considered that
idea. It was a far-fetched comparison, based only on the pleasure plainly
felt by their Squonk on only two instances. Perhaps he should try to go
about this more logically.

Item: he could feel strong emotion from Squonk.

Item: he did not know if Squonk could feel any emotion from him or Mary.

Item: he did not know if the Squonk knew they were in its mind. It could
be that it did not feel or hear their presence at all; or it could be
feeling or hearing them, but simply ignoring what seemed to have no
relation to its ordinary existence.

What he needed was some way of testing out whether Squonk could hear them
or not; and preferably it should be a test he could make without Mary
knowing he was trying it.

That brought up the question of what Mary could overhear from his mind.
He could hear her only when she thought directly at him. Plainly, she
could hear him when he thought directly to her. But she had not seemed to
hear him when he was simply working out some kind of mental problem, as
when he got together with AndFriend's calculating equipment to plot the
most promising search pattern to find the second Laagi derelict.

On second thought, it had been plain enough all along that Mary could not
hear his thoughts, or he hers, unless they deliberately broadcast them to
one another.

Back to squonks, which were a legitimate subject for investigation. Why
not try using the image-making part of his mind, imagine himself speaking
directly to Squonk as he would to Mary, and see how it would react?

He pictured himself as a Laagi, praising this particular squonk.

He was vibrating his right arm up and down with feather touches on
Squonk's outstretched neck. "Good squonk," he was transmitting to it with
his feather taps. "Good, good squonk! Hard-working, noble squonk. Fine,
industrious squonk..."

To his delighted surprise, he was beginning to feel a wave of answering
emotion from Squonk. It was responding exactly as if an actual Laagi was
praising it with the arm signals. Jim found himself getting into his role
as a Laagi, expanding his praise. Working off the feedback of Squonk's
emotions he thought he could almost feel, in muscles and tendons he did
not have and had never had, the effort behind the touchings that were
causing such pleasure in Squonk. He became aware, suddenly, that Squonk
was now attracting the attention of its fellow squonks in the waiting
line.

Squonk had already begun to extend its neck in delight at being so
praised. In a moment it would roll over on its back with both of its red
feet stiffly pointing upwards in the air. Hastily, Jim cancelled the
image and the thought.

Think about something else, he told himself hastily. But he did not have
to work very hard at doing so, because at that moment Mary herself
unknowingly lent a helping hand.

"Isn't our Squonk acting rather peculiarly?" she asked.

"Is it?" he said, for the Squonk, praise withdrawn, had already retracted
its neck, although its emotions still radiated a joyous feeling. "I
didn't notice."

"It was acting the same way it acted when that Laagi petted it, on our
way here. It stuck its neck out just the way it was sticking it out
before."

"Oh? I'm sorry I didn't notice that," said Jim. "I was thinking.'

"I wish you wouldn't go off into these thinking trances," said Mary. "Or
at least, tell me how I can rouse you, when you do. Something critical
might happen and you wouldn't notice; and I wouldn't be able to get your
attention in timejust the way it was now."

"Did you think it was critical? Squonk sticking his neck out?"

"I don't know. But he had the other squonks on both sides of us looking
at him as if he was doing something extraordinary."

"Maybe squonks do what he was doing just for exercise or practice,
sometimes even when no Laagi's around. Or he could just be remembering it
to the point where he acted it out. The other squonks could be staring at
him because they were jealous."

It sounded like a thin explanation, even to Jim.

"Perhaps... " said Mary doubtfully.

"You, yourself, said there could be any number of reasons for the things
they do that we'd never guess because their alien minds give them a
different understanding of the universe they perceive-or something like
that."

"I know," said Mary. "But all the same I'd like to know why Squonk did
it. The information might help us to understand the Laagi. Any
information could help."

"You're right, of course," said Jim. He hesitated for a second, but then
decided it would not be unadvisable to tell her of the possibility.

"I've been playing with our Squonk, with the back of my mind," he told
her. "I'm trying to find some way to get through to it so that I can
order it the way a Laagi would, to go places and do things. If it works,
we can direct him to take us around the citymaybe."

"Good!" said Mary. "That's very good."

"Glad to hear you agree."

"Jim, you do just marvelously, with or without my ideas," she said. "I've
been hard to live with, like this. I know it. I always am. I get the bit
in my teeth and I'm ready to trample anyone who gets in the way. I'm a
louse."

"What of it?" said Jim. "I'm a louse, myself."

You certainly are, said the back of his mind. Jim winced. Happily, winces
were one of the things Mary was not able to see.

"Not like me. I tell you, you don't know me," said Mary. "Anyway, I'm
ready to dance over the fact you think you might be able to direct Squonk
around the city. Will you let me know how it goes-your trying to do that,
I mean? Otherwise I'll only keep guessing but not wanting to keep asking
you for progress reports."

"I'll keep you up to date."

The conversation broke off, leaving Jim feeling a guilty sensation. He
tried to get rid of this by reminding himself of how Mary, General Mollen
and the rest had gotten him into this situation, but found little or no
help now in that fact. The insult had lost its force. What's wrong with
me, wondered Jim? One kind word from her and I roll over on my back like
a squonk.

However, it was a lot more pleasant being on friendly terms with her,
like this.

At this point Squonk suddenly retracted its legs until they were barely
showing above its red feet, pulled in its neck until its head had
disappeared, with the exception of its nose and mouth, closed its eyes
and once again rolled over on its back. This time, however, it rocked
back and forth a few times gently as its shell lost its momentum from the
movement, and was still.


Chapter 18.

"It's not dead, is it?" asked Mary.

"No," said Jim, "just sleeping. These squonks must go to sleep wherever
the mood strikes them. Come to think of it, I'll bet the Laagi do,
too-sometimes anyway. Remember the ones we saw near the entrance that had
their legs, arms and heads all pulled in and were just sitting there like
a cylinder on the floor?"

"But what makes you so certain it's sleep and not something else?"

"Because it's dreaming."

"Dreaming?" Mary hesitated. "You mean literally dreaming, the way you and
I dream?"

"That's right. I can catch parts of it. It's like looking at a crazy
recording made up of snippets from half a hundred different records."

"I wish I could reach the creature with my mind the way you do!" Mary
said. "What's it dreaming about? Can you see what its dreams are?"

"If I try," said Jim. "Look, why don't you not say anything for a while,
so I can concentrate on this? What it's dreaming about is clear enough;
it's just that I have to concentrate all my mind to really see it. Not
that any of it's so remarkable. All the dreams are about work."

"Work?"

"Work. Now, if you'll let me-"

"Sorry. Go ahead."

Mary fell silent.

Jim had been telling almost the complete truth. It was true that he had
to concentrate in order to experience at second hand what Squonk was
dreaming. But a deeper reason for his wanting Mary not to disturb him was
that he wanted time to evaluate anything to be learned from the dreams,
so that he could decide whether it might pay him to keep the knowledge to
himself or not. The insult might have lost its force, but he was still
determined to get away from the hold Mary had on him, if only to prove he
could.

Squonk's dreams had a quality as alien as the creature itself. It
occurred to Jim after some minutes that they might not be dreams in the
human sense so much as some sort of sorting or memorizing process. But
there was no doubt that they were, to say the least, pleasant to the
dreamer. There was an emotion of strong satisfaction emanating from
Squonk.

But the dreams were hardly more than flashes of episodes. Squonk cleaning
AndFriend. Squonk cleaning the outer walls of a building. Squonk cleaning
the pavement outside AndFriend, then carrying assemblages of parts from
this floor to upper floors of this building. Squonk running a machine
which cut segments from a living, green, flat creature; segments which
Squonk and other squonks took out and laid down between newly built
buildings to grow into pathways of the sort that it had traversed in
coming to this building. Squonk hunting for something a Laagi had
misplaced, a small part which was needed to fit in with other parts...

Interestingly, Squonk did not dream about being praised, either by the
Laagi he had encountered on his way to this job or Jim's praising. In the
dreams, however, there appeared at least three other Laagis who had put
it to work at various things at various times. Jim got the impression
Squonk would take orders from any Laagi. In fact, the relationship
between Squonk and Laagi might be a lot less like the canine-human
relationship Jim had been comparing it to.

But it was undeniable that Squonk existed here for the purpose of taking
orders from Laagi. In fact, it was eager to do so. The kind of work did
not seem to matter. It was the fact that there was work available that
was the attractive thing from Squonk's point of view.

"By God!" said Jim suddenly.

"What?" Mary's voice seemed to pounce upon him.

Out of nowhere, Jim had been struck by a startling suspicion; this was
that it was not the Laagi as individuals to which Squonk was attached,
but to those aliens as suppliers of work. Work, it seemed, was Squonk's
pleasure. Work that had been publicly acknowledged as having been done
was the greatest pleasure of all. But Jim hesitated to pass this
hypothesis on to Mary right now. For one thing, it might not be true. For
another, it might contain the germ' of something useful to him,
privately, in making his escape from the hypnotic control. He chose
instead something he had noticed about Squonk's dreams and which should
be more interesting to her, anyway.

"You know," he told Mary now, "nothing in any of these dreams of Squonk's
shows either Laagi or squonks doing anything but working. I mean, there
haven't been any glimpses of homes or sleeping places or recreation
areas."

Mary apparently thought about this for a minute.

"You mean that squonks may not be allowed into such areas?"

"That," said Jim slowly, "or maybe even the Laagi don't have them. They
might sleep on the job, too, and do nothing but work."

"That's unthinkable," said Mary. "Unless all the Laagi we've seen so far
are slaves, or something like that, tied to their work like galley slaves
used to be chained to their oar. A technological civilization at all
comparable to ours would have to have some reward for working that
constantly. Otherwise there'd be no reason to develop a technology. To
assume they do nothing but work doesn't make sense. The most primitive
humans had more work than they could handle. It was the need to get in
out of the rain and get free from having to be always gathering more wood
for the fire that gave rise to technology."

"In our case," said Jim.

"Any technological civilization has to have been built in response to a
need. All right, you imagine a reason for being built at all, otherwise."

Jim tried, and found he could not, at least on short notice like this.

"All right, a technological civilization has to have rewards," he said.
"Squonk sleeps, therefore the Laagi and other species here sleep. So
there should be sleeping places-unless they do sleep on the job, as I
said-and as our Squonk seems to be doing right now. And so there ought to
be recreation areas... or at least nonwork areas, reward areas. For
the moment, I'll agree."

"I don't know why we have to argue over everything," said Mary.

"Everyone's unique," said Jim. "I'm not you and you're not me. That means
you're not going to see and do things the way I'd see and do them, at
least part of the time. So there's always a difference of opinion."

"This much?" said Mary.

"...Maybe."

"I really don't deliberately start out to argue with everything you say,"
said Mary. "It's just that... "

"I'm wrong."

"Well, yes. Frequently you're wrong, particularly when you're in an area
I know something about. When you were driving AndFriend, I didn't argue
with you, because that was something you knew something about. But in the
areas of sociology and psychology, I know a lot more than you."

"Human psychology and sociology."

"The point is you don't know anything at all in those areas."

"The point is we're dealing with an alien culture where neither one of us
is an expert. Correct? Where your human knowledge applies, you could be
in a better position to make guesses than I am-maybe. But since we're
both in unknown territory, the only thing that's certain is the fact
neither one of us knows anything for sure. You could be right on the
basis of what you've learned. But unlearned as I am, I could be right on
the basis that I see things a little differently than you, being a
different person, and I might just see something you don't see. So am I
or am I not entitled to an opinion, in your opinion?" It was a moment
before she answered.

"You're entitled to your opinion," she said. "I'm entitled to tell you
when you're wrong."

"When you think I'm wrong."

"All right, when I think you're wrong."

There was another pause.

"Now we're arguing about arguing," said Mary.

Squonk opened its eyes, rolled over on its feet, elongated them and stuck
its head out once more. "Hello, world," it seemed to be saying.

"I'm sorry," said Jim. "I'll try to do better."

"Me too," said Mary. "Squonk's awake."

"It didn't sleep very long," said Jim. "Now what?"

For Squonk had just left the line of its fellows and was ambling back
toward the rear of the building. It entered the eating room there, which
was clearly divided into two areas, one for Laagi and one for squonks. In
both the squonk and Laagi areas there were what seemed to be buffets,
each against a wall at an opposite end of the room. In the Laagi area,
groups of two to eight or ten were standing around pedestals on which sat
what looked like large silver basins, eating to the accompaniment of a
large amount of arm waving and alterations in leg and body size. Every so
often one of the Laagi eating in a group would turn and leave and
eventually a new Laagi would join a group, evidently bringing with him,
her or it a double handful of materials from the buffet.

These, it dumped into the silver bowl and began, with the others, to eat
the new mixture. It was plainly the mixture of everything in the bowl
they were all eating, for occasionally a Laagi would reach in and stir
the contents of the bowl.

Squonk had meanwhile approached the buffet at the squonk end of the room
and was browsing along it, stopping to briefly intertwine tentacles as it
encountered other squonks engaged in the same activity. This touching
seemed more in the way of a perfunctory, if friendly, greeting or
self-identification than anything else, since it was very brief and the
two squonks, having touched tentacles, thereafter paid no attention to
each other.

The buffet on the squonk side was considerably longer and contained more
dishes-in this case, actually shallow pans about half a meter long and
half a meter wide. The reason for the difference became apparent
immediately, for instead of picking food from their buffet and carrying
it off to eat it at pedestals, of which there were none at their end of
the room, the squonks simply ate as they went along the line of the
buffet. There was not as much variety as Jim had assumed at first glance.
A number of trays of each item were set out in rotation. So that if
Squonk was browsing at one and another squonk came along and found the
contents of that pan interesting, it could simply move on to find one
from which the contents were not currently being taken.

Jim's reaction to Squonk's eating was a touch of nausea. For the first
pan the small, shelled alien approached had what appeared to be a mass of
wriggling worms sticking their heads up out of a layer of moist earth;
and Squonk immediately began to gather in tentacle-loads of worms and
earth indiscriminately and start stuffing them into its mouth. Jim felt
an echo of his nausea also through his mental contact with Mary.

"Watch the Laagi, ignore this," Jim said.

"Nonsense," said Mary. "I'll get used to it. I'm trying to watch both, to
tell you the truth."

Jim, challenged, felt bound to get used to Squonk's eating habits
himself. In addition, he reminded himself, he was at the moment more
interested in squonks than in the master race that directed them.
Watching Squonk feed through a variety of trays holding food, invariably
live, but existing sometimes in what appeared to be earth and in others
what appeared to be water or other liquids-unless the opaque ones were
just water clouded with suspended material-Jim came to the conclusion
that squonks were basically carnivores.

Unless what he was seeing were plant forms that had an animallike
mobility. Bit by bit, he became used to both Squonk's diet and its
methods of feeding. Privately, he bet himself that what was in the silver
bowls of the Laagi was equally live, or live-looking.

A strange contrast, if he was right. Here was a ruling race that looked
like adult, human-sized toys-almost as if they could be rather
silly-looking pets, themselves-who nourished themselves on small animals
that still had life in them when they were introduced to the mouths that
devoured them. Shouldn't throw the first stone, Jim reminded himself. It
was almost a foregone conclusion that a Laagi would be horrified by some
... some? By many of the things done by humans, if that Laagi should
ever find itself on Earth and watching humans act as they normally did.

Squonk finished eating and went off to the waste-disposal room. Jim made
himself remember how once in Italy he had encountered a restroom toilet
that was nothing but a hole in the floor with a tile edge on which one
squatted. So it should not be so surprising to find a room filled with
holes in the floor, here on the Laagi world. The holes were the same all
over the room, but Jim noticed that they were laid out in two separate
sections, with only a few squonks presently in the one part and a few
Laagi in the other.

Squonk was returning up the line of other squonks to his former place in
it, when Jim had an inspiration. Once more he developed an image in his
mind of a Laagi talking to Squonk.

"Good squonk," the image was saying, "hard-working squonk. The " Jim
envisioned AndFriend standing under its restraining, knife-edged arches.
"It needs a special cleaning for special visitors. Good squonk, clean it
up right away, will you? That's a fine, excellent squonk... "

He continued talking, giving out the same order while holding the image
in his mind... and Squonk continued up the line, past the place where
he had waited before, and went out of the building.

"Where's it going now, do you suppose?" Mary asked.

"I'm betting-I mean I'm hoping-" answered Jim, "that it's going back to
AndFriend. I'm trying an experiment to see if I can direct it."

"Jim! You think you can? If you can..."

"We'll know in a bit," said Jim.

After some distance down the green pathways had been covered it became
apparent Squonk was indeed headed back toward the ship;, said Mary. "If
you can make it go where we want to-how'd you do it?"

"It's a little hard to explain," said Jim. "I've been giving him mental
pictures of a Laagi giving him orders, in a sense."

"How did you know how the Laagi give squonks orders?"

"I didn't," Jim answered. "I'm not speaking to his mind as much as to his
emotions, I think. I just pictured a Laagi that spoke to Squonk the way
I'd speak to a dog back home. Pet animals on Earth don't understand human
words in the same sense we do, either, but they get the idea. So,
evidently, does Squonk."

"But it's so surprising he didn't even question you," said Mary. "I mean,
from Squonk's point of view you must have seemed like a ghost voice
coming out of nowhere to tell it what to do. But you say that didn't seem
to disturb it at all?"

"Yes," said Jim. "I really didn't have much hope it would work. But it
did. Maybe we'll find out why, later."

"Animals," said Mary, "and even humans for that matter, respond to
certain stimuli by reflex. There was that sad case just last year or so
of a wolf who'd been raised as a pet, and seemed so friendly and gentle,
just like a dog in every way. And then one day a very young child got
into the back yard where it was kept, and the wolf killed it. They
reconstructed the fact later that the child had unwittingly duplicated
the actions of a wounded prey animal, and the wolf attacked it out of
hunting reflex. It could be that work here is a sort of reflex for these
squonks and you somehow triggered that reflex by what you did to it."

"Anyway," Jim said, "it worked. Here we are at the ship."

So they were. Mary's happiness and excitement over the fact that Jim had
been able to send Squonk there, however, turned to dismay, when Squonk
entered the ship and actually began cleaning.

"But it'll take forever if it goes over the whole interior of the ship
again," said Mary. "Can't we stop it, somehow? This time could be used to
a lot better advantage getting an idea of the way the city's laid out."

"I'm afraid to give a counterorder right away," said Jim slowly. "Squonk
could decide that if he was told to do something, then told not to before
he'd done it completely, then what he was hearing couldn't be real
orders. We might lose whatever control I've got over him. Do you want to
take that chance?"

"No! No, of course not," said Mary. "All the same...

All the same, she was not happy about waiting. But they both decided that
it was better not to take chances. The opportunity to control Squonk was
too valuable to risk merely for the sake of saving a few hours.

They waited Squonk out, accordingly. As he was finishing up, Jim brought
up the question what to do next.

"Have him take us out around the city in general," said Mary.

"I don't know that can be done-just that way," said Jim. "He only travels
in order to get to some work or other. I think I'm going to have to give
him a specific job to do that'll require him to take us where you want to
go. And I don't know what kinds of work he might be asked to do. Let's
start at the beginning. Think of a particular place you want to go to.,,

"Tell him to take us to the place where the Laagi rest."

"Too general," objected Jim. "Rest could mean sleeping on the job the way
we saw those Laagi doing it."

"If they actually were sleeping," Mary said. "Maybe that was just
something they do when they want to think undisturbed."

"After what we went through with Squonk?" asked Jim. "Squonk was
certainly sleeping. I still say 'rest' is too general a command. Even
'the place where Laagi sleep' could be too general. Also we're assuming
there is such a place-"

"I've got it!" Mary broke in on him. "Tell him to find something.
Something that can't be found, so he'll have to hunt all over the city
for it. Tell him he's to find a... a key, a regular metal key to a
lock. Explain that the key is a part of this ship that belongs with it
and he's to get the key and bring it back here and we'll show him where
it fits into the ship."

"Umph!" said Jim-or would have said it if he had had a body with the
vocal apparatus to make the sound. As it was, he was simply silent for a
moment, in surprise.

"What's the matter?" asked Mary.

"Nothing," he said. "That's a very good solution you've come up with. I'm
not so sure I know how to go about putting the idea of it across to
Squonk, though."

"...Why?"

"Again, it's too general. I'd have to make it specific, somehow. Then,
there's the problem of how to picture something Squonk's never imagined
before, using the materials out of its own imagination."

"Just picture the key to the lock on the front door of your own
quarters," said Mary. "That's alien enough and simple enough."

"Yes, but the trouble is he doesn't seem to see what I'm thinking, he
just picks up whatever emotion I broadcast. For example, when I thought
of Squonk cleaning this ship, I came down heavy on disgust at having the
inside of the ship dirty and worry about someone important coming to see
it. I think that's what he picked up-those feelings. How do you get
across an emotion about something a squonk's never seen or imagined-wait
a minute. I think I've got the answer. We don't have to. I'll just
broadcast worry about something lost and a feeling that it may be in one
of the buildings of the city and imagine that if Squonk went into the
city, it could look for whatever it was. Then when Squonk goes and we see
a building you want to go into, I'll broadcast hope that the whatever may
be in it. I can even direct Squonk from place to place inside the
building, for that matter. When you want time to observe in one
particular place, I can broadcast a desire to search that place
millimeter by millimeter."

"You know," said Mary after a moment, "this is insane, talking to an
alien through emotions. The first assumption I'd have made about the
Laagi, or any creature from one of their worlds-if there are other worlds
where they live-was that our emotions would be so different from theirs
that that was one element where we'd never match in any particular. Now
you're saying we can feel so much the way they do that we can actually
make a language in common out of the fact. It's crazy."

"You were the one who brought up the business of parallel evolution."

"That was referring to their developing a technology. But this... "

"On the other hand, maybe it isn't a matter of emotions at all. Maybe I'm
communicating with Squonk in some completely other way. You know, when I
do communicate with it, I don't think of talking to a squonk. I think of
talking to a sort of dog-which is just a convenient way for my
imagination to handle it, nothing more. Maybe pure mental communication's
a universal language and it's only our bodies that make us not
understandable to each other. People without a language in common can get
their feelings across-"

"With sounds or facial expressions or body language," put in Mary.

"Well, the Laagi language seems to be just that-a body language. If it
grew out of similar emotional roots, it could have end products that were
like ours. After all, both we and the Laagi live in the same universe and
relate to the same physical laws of that universe."

"You're guessing," said Mary. "I'm... I don't know where to begin to
point out how many things could be wrong with ideas like that."

"Oh, hell!" said Jim. "Maybe it's all just black magic-my communicating
with Squonk. Anyway, it worked to get the critter here. Besides, come to
think of it, you've just given me a valid reason to interrupt the
ship-cleaning beast-we've just discovered something's missing. Here I
go."

Squonk had just begun his cleaning of the space suit locker. Jim pictured
himself once more in his mind as a Laagi, gesture-talking to the small
creature.

"Key? Where's the key?" he had the Laagi signaling. "The key's not here.
Where's the key? It must be lost. Oh my, the key's lost..."

"I thought you had all sorts of objections to using the idea of a key as
what was lost?" said Mary; and Jim realized that in his concentration he
had thought the words spoken by his emotional image out loud, as far as
Mary was concerned.

He made a mental note to avoid making that sort of slip from now on. He
had better get in the habit of delivering his orders to Squonk silently,
as far as she was concerned. Otherwise he could let slip information he
had intended to keep to himself.

"Well, I needed to picture something concrete for my own imaginational
purposes," he said now. "Actually, once I thought about it, it doesn't
matter what we send Squonk hunting for as long as he knows a Laagi-I mean
me-is going to recognize it when he finds it. It's just like saying
'Rabbit! Rabbit!' to a dog you're about to take rabbit hunting. He'll
perk up his ears and look around even though he hasn't heard or smelled a
thing--"

"Would you hunt rabbits with a dog?"

"Actually no," Jim said, "so you don't have to sound horrified. I'm as
squeamish as you are. I tend to identify with the rabbit. But it's not
the dog's fault he gets all excited at the idea of catching and killing a
rabbit-"

"Look! What's happened to Squonk?"

Interrupted, Jim looked. Squonk had come to a dead stop, just as it was,
head nose-deep into the space of the locker, tentacles extended and
poised. It looked like a toy the motor of which had just run down.

"What've you done to him, Jim?"

"You know as much as I do about what I've done to him!" said Jim,
irritated. "You heard what I was trying to tell him. I don't know why
he's suddenly gone paralyzed like that."

"He's been asked to do the impossible, that's what it is," said Mary.
"It's my fault! I shouldn't have suggested using something completely out
of his knowledge as the lost item. If I only hadn't said that-"

Squonk started to move again. Its head went completely in among the space
suits hanging in the locker and the tentacles immersed themselves to
their full lengths in the same space.

"There, you see," said Jim. "You were worried about nothing. He doesn't
have the foggiest notion what a key is, but he's hunting for something
loose in the locker-what did I tell you?"

Squonk had just backed out of the locker, with his tentacles holding a
spare space suit oxygen-recycling unit. Jim hastily envisioned a Laagi
being disappointed.

"No. Not key. Too bad. No key there. Where could that key have got to?
Not on the ship. Maybe in one of the build ings of the city. Maybe we
could go look in a building where it might be-"

Squonk carefully closed the door of the space suit locker and headed for
the entry port.

"Now we can start to do things!" Mary's voice in Jim's mind was jubilant.
"Jim, you're a wonder!"

"I am?" said Jim, startled, not so much by the concept as by Mary's
voicing it.

She did not seem to notice his reaction.

"What I want to do first," she said, "is find some place where the Laagi
are standing around doing nothing but talking..."


Chapter 19.

"No!  Wait!  Stop him!"  Mary interrupted herself as

Squonk headed toward the entry port.

Jim did.

"So," he said, "Squonk's been promoted from an 'it,' has he? Probably
high time. I've been getting him mixed up with other 'its' every time I
try to talk about him and things. Just remember it was you who renamed
him, not me."

"Don't be ridiculous," said Mary. "Now, bring him back here."

For Jim had imagined Squonk being signaled to halt and he (to give him
his new pronoun) had obeyed by going stone still.

"Tell him to move the temperature control all the way down to zero,"
added Mary.

"What?"

"Just do it, Jim."

"All right." Jim obeyed. He directed Squonk to the ship's interior
atmosphere controls on the console, then to the temperature control among
them, and finally to moving the temperature control to zero degrees
celsius.

"Now up to twenty-three degrees," ordered Mary. "Now, down to nine
degrees."

When the control knob brought the sharp point of the indicator back to
nine on the scale, the whole area of the climate controls, which were
mounted in the midst of the ship's controls vertically on the panel
directly before the pilot's command position, fell outwards, showing
themselves to be hinged at the bottom. Revealed was a dark recess, about
half a meter square and of invisible depth.

"Very clever," commented Jim. "Turning a temperature control into the
dial of a combination safe. Very clever indeed. Now what?"

"Now have Squonk reach in there and see if he finds anything."

Squonk, at Jim's orders, explored the aperture with the tip of one of his
tentacles. It appeared from what Jim could see to be a recess about as
deep as it was high or wide.

The tentacle came out holding nothing.

"Tell him too bad," said Mary, with satisfaction in her voice.
"Apparently the key wasn't there."

Jim passed the message on.

"But do you mind telling me," he asked, "just exactly what's going on?
Why all that trouble to set up a secret place and then have it empty?"

"It wasn't empty," said Mary, a little smugly. "Now that tentacle of
Squonk's been infiltrated by a microtransmitter that'll broadcast
anything seen or heard in his vicinity back to the ship's recorder."

"What recorder?"

"The same one that's been recording every noise and action aboard this
ship since we started."

"Our mind-to-mind conversations, too?"

"No," said Mary regretfully. "It couldn't pick up the mind-to-mind
talking. It's only recorded when you speak out loud through the ship's
internal and external communication system, the way you talked to Louis
Mollen and me when we were back at Base and you were first in AndFriend.
Now, when we get out in that city, I'm going to start making notes on
what I observe. We can't transmit those back to the ship via Squonk's
transmitter, so I'll dictate them to you and you do what you'd ordinarily
do to repeat them out loud over AndFriend's internal communications
system. Actually, you'll be repeating them out loud to the recorder."

For a moment Jim was silent.

"So," he said. "This was set up from the start, too, was it?"

"We only hoped, then, that we'd end up captured by the Laagi; but of
course every contingency was planned for as far as we could imagine it,"
said Mary briskly. "Now, we've got to get going with Squonk. Will you
tell him to head for the city buildings?"

Jim did. His mind was too full for words and Mary was evidently busy
making plans, because they did not talk again until they were well in
among the buildings on one of the green paths.

"Squonk's waiting to be told where to look," Jim said finally.

"I've been thinking about that," answered Mary. "We'll simply have to try
various buildings until we find what I want; but I've been deciding what
to look into first in this alien society. What we want, I think, is some
place where Laagi get together to talk. Enough pictures of them signaling
to each other ought to give the people back home enough information to
break down their gestures into a language we can understand."

"Maybe," said Jim. "But if the way they think is completely different
from the way we do, their language isn't going to make any sense,
anyway."

"As I've said before, this is a technological civilization. There have to
be parallels between its problems and their ways of handling them, and
our own problems and solutions. Some sort of understanding has to be
possible; and any sort of understanding, Jim, is a world of improvement
over what we've had so far where they're concerned."

"Hmm," said Jim.

"You don't agree?"

"Oh, I agree," said Jim. "Yes, any improvement's worth the cost."

She was right, of course, he told himself. He found himself admiring her
single-mindedness. Now that he was completely over his outrage at being
drafted into this situation instead of being asked, he had to face the
fact that he had had a chip on his shoulder where she was concerned from
the first moment he had met her in Mollen's office, before she had ridden
out in his gunner's seat in their successful effort to bring back La
Chasse Gallerie and what was left of the mind of Raoul.

All right, she had her own shoulder chip, too. Hopefully, she would put
it aside in time, as he was beginning to put his aside. A little
wistfully, he wondered what she would be like if she did. He had never
really let himself know her; and she, of course, had never really made
herself available to be known. He had got his back up about her from the
initial instant of meeting. First, because she was not a space fighter
-not what Frontier pilots like him considered a space fighter. Second,
because she was arrogant on the basis of her expertise in a field that he
knew next to nothing about and thought even less of, and that arrogance
rubbed him the wrong way. His own arrogance, he had to admit to himself,
now, had been completely invisible to him.

Somewhere in that childhood of hers, she must have been forced into
taking a turn toward toughness. He had always taken entirely for granted
his own cheerful childhood, with plenty of friends his own age all
through the growing-up years, with aunts, uncles, grandparents and
likeable cousins, not to mention, now that he stopped to consider them, a
remarkably happy set of loving parents. Loving to each other as well as
to him. He could see why she might assume he had had a careless and easy
ride through life, particularly since she had taken a thorough look at
his life's records, which of course she had done as a necessary
preliminary to using him as part of her project. About the only thing he
had had in common with her was that they had both been only children.

The one element she would not have found in his records would have been
his own private idealism, the determination to do at least one worthy and
memorable thing in his life... though some to think of it, she must
have sensed something of it, since there had been that moment just after
they had La Chasse Gallerie safely back home and she had told him that
his nature was that of a "white knight."

Which of course it wasn't. He might have white-knight-dreams, but he was
thoroughly practical, too. She would find out how practical when he broke
loose of this hypnotic control she was using to keep him on a tether. But
... even that really didn't matter, except as a principle, now that he
understood and liked her better.

He wondered if there were some magic words that would make her open up
about what had made her what she was.

From somewhere, he could not say exactly where, he had acquired a firm
conviction that if she would just put aside her prickly armor for a
moment. she would show him someone very good to know. He had become more
and more sure that her combativeness was a shield behind which she hid
her true self. Just like one of those people who go around warning the
world how stubborn he or she is, while really only setting up a defense
against the secret belief that anyone could talk him or her into
anything. Mary's toughness, he now firmly believed, was a shield for a
natural instinct toward a tenderness which she felt she must hide.

Again, he could not remember exactly how he had reached this decision. A
number of small straws in the wind of their mutual adventuring must have
pointed him to it.

It dawned on him suddenly then that somewhere along the way, she would
need evidence of his own strength and abilities before she could be open
with him. For her own reasons, some of which might be buried in that past
she evidently disliked, she had a need to cling to the illusion that he
was what was it she had called him once? A feather-brained flyboy. That
shielded inner self of her would need positive, undeniable evidence he
was no such thing before she would permit herself to deal with him on an
equal level. So one of the reasons for his breaking himself loose of her
hypnotic reins would be to establish that he was strong enough for her to
trust him and be relaxed with him.

On the other hand, of course, he could be dead wrong about all this. But,
what the hell, it was worth a try. He woke up suddenly to the fact that
Squonk was still coursing eagerly along the green pathway, waiting for
instructions. Mary seemed to have gone off into her thoughts just as Jim
had gone off into his.

"Squonk's still waiting," he said.

"I know that," she said. "I haven't been able to come up with any reason
to pick a particular building to try first. Have you?"

"No," he said.

"I suppose we'll just have to try them at random."

"Looks like it."

"Will you tell Squonk to go into the next entrance we come to, then?"

He did.

Squonk carried them only a small distance farther down the path,
therefore, before turning in through one of the typical doorways. This
time they found themselves in what might have been an office building, if
it had not looked so much like a honeycomb. Or perhaps it could be best
described as a honeycomb taken over and made into an office building.
There seemed to be innumerable floors, none of them higher in the ceiling
than would comfortably accommodate an adult Laagi, with each floor having
innumerable corridors and each corridor lined on both sides with openings
into cubicles. In each cubicle was a Laagi, working a bank of controls,
or simply standing motionless, staring at the bank of controls-and that
was all there was to it.

"None of them are communicating," said Mary.

"At least, not unless they're doing it through that console in front of
each one," said Jim. "Maybe it's some sort of information or control
center."

"Anyway," said Mary decisively, "it doesn't offer me anything I can work
with. If you'll just repeat the words after me for the sake of the ship's
recorder, I'll make a brief description of it by way of a report, so that
we can come back here, if what we learn elsewhere makes it worthwhile."

She did so, Jim parroting her words faithfully, a phrase at a time.

"On to the next building," said Mary.

But the next building was exactly like the one they just left. In fact,
the next three buildings they tried were exactly like the first.

"They have to be the Laagi equivalent of offices," said Jim.

"So many of them?"

"Aren't our cities loaded with office buildings? What would an alien say
if he could look into them and see people looking at screens and talking
into receptors?"

"It's pushing belief past the limit," Mary said firmly, "to hypothesize
that the Laagi have a business structure in their society that much like
ours."

"All right," said Jim as they left the fourth building. "How about this?
Each one of those Laagi you see there is controlling some piece of
automatic machinery somewhere else; and the controllers are all gathered
together so that their work can be coordinated better."

"That's... just possible," said Mary doubtfully. "Anyway, we can't do
anything but keep trying other buildings."

But the next building was different. The upper floors were honeycomb
offices, but the ground-level floor was divided into what seemed to be a
large number of lofty, dome-ceilinged auditoriums; and the likeness to an
auditorium in each case was increased by the fact that in each something
resembling an audience of Laagi were working at very small consoles of
controls on posts before them, while at the far end of the room an
actively gesticulating Laagi seemed to be having an argument, or
something like it, with the image of another Laagi blown up to many times
life-size in the tank of a screen filling the wall behind the living
gesticulator.

The floor was concave, from the entrance to the far end where the screen
was, giving all the Laagi in the "audience" a good view of both the
living and the screened individual. These two seemed to take turns, one
gesticulating for a while while the other stood motionless, then the
motionless one would become active and the recent speaker would cease all
movement. The stubby fingers of the Laagi in the crowd flew over their
consoles as this progressed.

"An instructor and his students?" said Jim. "Or a conductor leading a
silent symphony performance?"

"We'd better wait until it's finished, whatever it is," said Mary. "Tell
Squonk to start searching the room. It's big enough so that it ought to
take him hours."

Jim did. Squonk scurried off to the nearby wall and began a careful
tentacle search along its base.

"My guess would be-"

"Don't bother me now," Mary interrupted. "I don't want to
miss anything that goes on."'

Jim fell silent. He watched the crowd and the two Laagi up front, the
live and the imaged; but after a while his mind began to give up on any
attempt to make sense out of what was happening....

"Jim!" It was Mary calling him. He had lost a chunk of time in what
seemed to pass as sleep for him ever since he had become a bodiless
entity. He stared at the room. The two Laagi were still up front. The
mass of the rest were as busy with their consoles as ever.

"Sorry," he said. "How long was I out?"

"Nearly four hours," she said. "Jim, there's a limit. This may go on for
weeks, for all we know. The recorder must have a few hundred thousand
gesture-bits from those two lecturers or whatever they are. I want to go
and take a look at the rest of the city. Tell Squonk we're leaving."

"Want to look upstairs before we go out?"

"Just more offices. No, I want some place where there's a number of Laagi
talking to each other. Something like a... a club or a restaurant in
human terms. I don't suppose you can get the idea of a place like that
across to Squonk?"

"I can try," said Jim.

He tried envisioning a room, of unspecified dimensions, but plainly
larger than the cubicles they had come to call offices, and in that room
a number of Laagi standing or sitting in groups and talking body language
to each other. Squonk stopped still on the pathway. Jim read the
creature's emotions as interested and willing, but puzzled.

"No go," said Jim.

"Maybe he knows of a place like that, but doesn't connect it with hunting
for the key?"

"I didn't think of that," said Jim.

He introduced the image of the key to his mental image and added anxiety
over finding it to his emotional projection.

Squonk was plainly still puzzled. But he started to move again. They went
some distance and passed a number of buildings without the creature
turning into any of them.

"I figured he'd understood the sort of place we wanted to search for the
key next," said Jim. "But I didn't expect him to go this kind of
distance. Maybe he was thinking of a place that's not in this city at
all."

"All to the good if he is," said Mary. "We'll find out about their local
transportation system."

Their destination, however, turned out not to require transportation to
another city. After some distance along a complicated route through the
pathways, Squonk turned into one more entrance.

It was as close to what Jim had envisioned as made so difference. In an
area almost as large as one of the auditoriums-but under a less lofty
ceiling and upon a level floor, Laagi stood or sat in groups,
gesticulating at others in the same group. Squonks were moving about and
through the crowd. Those Laagi seated were perched on one of the
cupshaped seats, each on a slanted support, like those in the Laagi
spaceships and elsewhere. About the only difference seemed to be that
these particular seats were movable. Apparently at signals which Jim and
Mary could not separate from the other movements of their body languages,
a squonk would come scurrying up to the Laagi who wished to sit with one
of the seats, the lower end of which seemed to adhere to the floor the
moment it was set down. Abandoned seats were also picked up and carted
away to the wall of the room by squonks.

In fact, squonks were everywhere, and included a group that seemed to be
continuously at work doing nothing else but cleaning the floor and lower
walls of the room. Jim could see now why Squonk had doubted that this
would be a place to find the strange thing that the invisible Laagi
commanding him wanted to be found.

"This is more like it!" said Mary grimly.

"If conversations between Laagi are what you want, it certainly is," said
Jim. "It does look like some kind of club."

"Or political grouping."

"Or a think tank of some sort," said Jim.

"Well, whatever it really is remains to be found out," said Mary. "Why
don't you go back to sleep or something? I'll be busy. I can wake you
when I'm ready to dictate a report."

"Thank you," said Jim clearly and precisely, "but I'm not tired at the
moment. Thank you just the same, though."

Mary laughed. There was as much excitement as humor in her mental voice
at the moment.

"Bet you go to sleep anyway," she said.

Jim did not answer that. Mary evidently settled down to wordless
observing, and Squonk continued his diligent search along the base of the
wall.

Jim was left with leisure to take a better look at the place and its
occupants himself. Light seemed to flood the place from all angles, so
that there were no visible sources. It was the same deep yellow of the
sunlight outside, so that it might have been daylight somehow piped in or
introduced. The floor was a dap, rich red, much darker than the footpads
of the squonks. The chair seats were a dark green and the walls started
as dark brown at the base and changed gradually toward yellower and
lighter shades as they mounted toward the apex of the domed ceiling.

There was a sudden horrendous clatter, to which no one in the room seemed
to pay any attention except the unfortunate squonk which had been the
cause of it. Certainly, thought Jim, Laagi must be absolutely without a
sense of hearing; and probably the squonks were, too. What he had heard
had been the very noisy result of two of the chair-carrying squonks
colliding to send the chairs they had been carrying crashing to the
floor.

What had happened had clearly been an accident. The tentacles of a squonk
appeared extremely nimble, but there was obviously a limit to the amount
of strength they possessed. One squonk seemed able to carry one chair
comfortably by curling all its tentacles around the shaft that supported
the seat. One squonk was also all that was needed to set the chair
upright when it had been brought to the Laagi wanting it. The lower end
of the support rod fastened itself by some invisible means firmly and
automatically to the floor when the chair was set up. Apparently this
adhesive, or otherwise self-fastening end, of the shaft of the chair
being carried by one squonk had touched and fastened itself to the leg of
one carried by mother. Tripped up, or perhaps overbalanced by the
unexpected double weight, both chairs and the squonk that carried one had
tumbled to the floor.

One squonk hurried off, leaving things as they were. The other pushed
itself back to its feet, using its tentacles. It then tried to pick up
the chair it had originally been carrying and found it firmly attached to
the other chair. After a few seconds of futilely trying to lift the
awkward structure composed of the two joined chairs, the squonk put it
down and scurried over to another squonk headed away after having just
delivered another chair.

The second squonk stopped, the two entwined the ends of their tentacles
momentarily, and the second squonk hurried away, while the first returned
to the tangle of the joined chairs. After a few minutes, the second
squonk-at least Jim thought it was the second squonk, since the creatures
all looked so much alike that it was difficult to be sure-returned with
what looked like a small rod with a sort of pistol grip at one end, held
in one tentacle.

The second squonk touched the far tip of the rod to the point at which
the chairs joined, both squonks took hold of a chair apiece and pulled
with what seemed to be considerable effort; and the two chairs parted.
Taking a chair apiece they trotted off and were lost in the crowd from
the point of view afforded Jim by Squonk himself.

Jim watched them disappear, fascinated. It was the first time he had seen
anything resembling communication or teamwork among the squonks. He
continued to watch the room carefully, hoping for some further evidence
of squonk cooperation, but no reason for such activity evidently
occurred. He had seen, however, two squonks not only communicate, but
solve a problem on their own without specific orders from any of the
Laagi standing around; and that, he told himself, was food for thought.

 
Chapter 20.

"Jim!  Jim!"

"All right, all right," said Jim, "I heard you the first time. What is
it?"

"You were sleeping again."

"I was not. I was thinking. Nevermind... what do you want now?"

"I want you to stop Squonk," said Mary. "Make him stand still-or better
yet make him back up about two meters. There's a pair of Laagi I
particularly want to keep observing."

"I don't know if I can," said Jim.

"Why not?"

"Well, I mean, I probably can tell him to stop searching, but I'm trying
to think of a reason for it that'll make sense. The way we had to work
out a way of sending him hunting for something, that made sense to him.
Also, have you thought that if he suddenly just stops doing anything out
here where he is, he may attract attention to himself?"

"What if he does?"

"If he attracts the attention of the Laagi, one or more of them might
just come over to find out what he's doing here."

"We haven't seen any evidence that squonks can talk to Laagi," said Mary.

"No, but maybe there're other ways a Laagi could find out what Squonk's
doing here. The Laagi might be able to identify Squonk as the one of his
kind who's supposed to be cleaning AndFriend periodically and has a
part-carrying job elsewhere; and so might wonder what he's doing here,
instead. Even if the Laagi doesn't do any more than wonder, he might end
up ordering Squonk back to his parts-carrying and Squonk might well
listen to that Laagi and obey it, in spite of whatever I could say to
him. Do you want that?"

"No. No, of course not." Mary paused. "But I've absolutely got to keep
observing these two Laagi awhile longer. They're acting different from
any others we've seen so far."

"These two right next to us?"

"That's right."

"All right," said Jim. He pulled the now familiar trick of imagining
himself as a Laagi giving gesticulated orders to Squonk.

"Good Squonk," he thought. "Stop. Wait just where you are for the moment.
I may have new orders for you in just a little bit."

Agreeably, Squonk froze in position, which at the moment was the one best
adapted to minutely searching the open floor of the room along a line
that was carrying him away from the two Laagi Mary had indicated.

"There. See?" said Mary. "There's no problem in stopping him."

"Stopping him wasn't what I was worried about," Jim said. "What I was
worried about-"

"Will you please not talk for a few minutes?" said Mary. "These two are
definitely unusual. I want to be able to concentrate on them and I can't
do that with you jabbering."

On the verge of arguing, Jim suddenly realized what had really bothered
him about the peremptory order had been Mary making sure she had the last
word-as usual. He kept his silence accordingly and took a closer look at
the two Laagi himself. They were both seated and they were by themselves
-a group of two. Not only that, but the space around them was larger than
around any of the other groups, as if the other Laagi were politely
avoiding any intrusion on them.

The two also gave the impression of being very punctilious in their
communication. When one gesticulated, the other did not-of course that
was the way it was also more or less, but only more or less, among the
other Laagi. But what was unlike anything Jim had seen between these
aliens before was that each time one of the two stopped talking, there
was a moment of complete motionlessness on the part of both individuals
before the one who had not been gesticulating started to reply.

"Did you notice how they pause?" Jim asked Mary.

"Of course," said Mary. "But there's more than that going on here,
different from ordinary Laagi conversation. If you notice, the gestures
of these two are slower and more deliberate than those we've been
seeing."

"Maybe they're a couple of old Laagi," said Jim.

"Perhaps," murmured Mary quite seriously. "Also, their gestures are more
emphatic-look there!"

The one of the two who was currently gesticulating had suddenly pulled
his head down completely out of sight into the top skin-folds of his body
and ceased movement entirely. After a long moment his head slowly came
out once more.

Unexpectedly, Mary laughed; and Jim found himself with the sort of
feeling that in the flesh would have signaled a grin. At the same time he
was not exactly sure why what they had seen had struck them both as so
funny. He finally decided it was the jack-in-the-box effect of the head
pulling in that had triggered off the sense of ridiculousness in both
Mary and himself. It was as if two human heads of state had been
discussing a serious political matter with all the normal solemnity of
rhetoric; and one of them had suddenly stood on his head to underline the
point he had just made.

In any case, the one who had just pulled in his head-

"Call him 'A,'" said Jim thoughtfully.

"Call who 'A'?" demanded Mary.

"The one who just pulled his head in," said Jim, "and call the other one
'B.' Now, it looks as if A's made his point and is through arguing for
the moment."

"How do we know they're arguing?" said Mary. "You're right, though. Now,
B's starting to talk."

B was indeed beginning to gesticulate. But its movement were both slow
and large, involving much lengthening and shortening of its limbs and
body. After a relatively small number of gestures, B also swiftly and
definitely pulled his head down out of sight, kept it there for perhaps a
full minute, and then stuck it out again. Both Laagi rose from their
seats and went off in different directions.

"Some sort of conclusion achieved," said Mary.

"Or the breakup of a lifelong friendship over some matter of principle-"
began Jim. But he was interrupted.

A squonk had come up to Squonk and was running the tips of its tentacles
over Squonk's motionless body. Around them, it seemed that every other
squonk in view who was not burdened with a chair or otherwise obviously
occupied, was also headed in Squonk's direction.

"Squonk, go back to what you were doing!" said Jim hastily.

Squonk started to move. He lifted his head, exchanged a brief
tentacle-touch with the other squonk who had been feeling him over, and
went back to his careful search of the floor before him. The squonk who
had been examining him went away. Those others in the distance who had
been headed toward them also turned off in other directions.

"You see?" demanded Jim. "The minute a squonk, or a Laagi, stops doing
anything, it attracts attention."

"You're right," said Mary briskly. "However, it's all fixed. Now, I've
got a report to dictate. Are you ready?"

"Ready as I ever will be," said Jim.

Mary began dictating. There was some general data on the other Laagi she
had observed in communication, in the room they were now in; but the bulk
of her report, once she got into it, was to all effects almost a
gesture-by-gesture recounting of the exchange between the two Laagi they
had just been watching.

Mary's reports, Jim had noted, came out in short, declarative sentences.
The words she chose were simple and the meaning unmistakably clear. She
did not ramble. She must, thought Jim as he carefully repeated after her,
have had considerable experience dictating such reports. The thought, for
some unknown reason, reminded him of a question that had occurred to him
from time to time lately. He waited until Mary was done to ask it.

"Tell me," he said then, "when do you sleep?"

"When you do," answered Mary.

"Oh?" Jim thought this over. "And why don't I ever catch you doing it?"

"Because I don't sleep as much as you do," said Mary. "I never did sleep
much. I could get by on four or five hours a night indefinitely when I
was in my body; and I think I can do a lot better now, if I want to. So I
just wait until you're asleep before dropping off myself-and only then if
there's nothing going on I want to observe."

"That still doesn't explain why I've never woken up and caught you at
it."

"When you wake up, I wake up," said Mary. "I set myself to do that, and
it works. Also, it always takes you some few minutes to come to when you
do wake up, so you don't realize I've just woken up, too. Of course, most
of the time, even if I go to sleep after you do, I wake up long before
you wake up."

"Score another one for you," said Jim.

He had been joking, but the tone of Mary's answer was completely serious.

"If you say so," she answered absently. Jim was nettled in spite of his
earlier good intentions.

"Tell me," he said, "did it ever occur to you it might be to your benefit
to make friends with the people you work with?"

"Why?" said Mary, almost fiercely. "That's right, why? The job's the
thing. If the work gets done, who cares how the people doing it get on
together?"

Jim took a few seconds to absorb that.

"I think you really mean that," he said at last.

"I do," said Mary. Suddenly one of the changes in her that was as
astonishing as the sort of attitude Jim had just been questioning her
about seemed to take her over. "Sorry, Jim. I don't deliberately set out
to be hard to coexist with. It's just that what we're involved in here is
one of the most important things any members of the human race have ever
tied into; and something like that is so much more important than
friendship, or sleep, or anything else, that there's no comparing them."

"It's also true," said Jim slowly, "that it's a job as big as the Laagi
race itself. It's not the sort of thing that's going to be done by one
person, or two persons, alone."

"Whoever comes after us is going to build on what I do now," said Mary.
"I owe it to give them as much as I can. That's that. If you don't like
it, you can lump it!"

Mentally, Jim opened his mouth to answer her, then closed it again. It
was no use. He and she seemed to talk different languages.

But it started him on a new line of thought.

There had been something approaching a violence in the emotion he had
felt from Mary just now; a violence he had not felt from her before. It
was nearly as if she was reacting to him as a competitor, or even an
antagonist. He compared that emotion in her with his memory of her, when
he had first come out of his trance, to find himself in hypnotic shackles
with AndFriend, locked down on the surface of this alien world.

She had been entirely different then. She had seemed honestly regretful
at what she obviously felt she had had no choice but to do, and
apparently honestly concerned at what it had done to him. Now she was all
claws and teeth. Why? Unless-wild as it seemed-there was something about
studying the Laagi that had triggered off the change in her.

He tried to imagine what that might be. It could hardly be the example
set by the Laagi themselves. So far they had seen no sign of anything
even approaching violence of emotion in the Laagi, let alone any evidence
of brutality or worse; and even if they had, why having observed it
should cause Mary to change her attitude toward Jim was a mystery. Like
the squonks, all the Laagi did, apparently, was work. Work and keep
working.

The only connection between that unceasing activity and either Jim or
Mary was the fact that Mary was also a worker. But even she could not
work around the clock, seven days a week, for a lifetime; which was
what-so far-it looked like the Laagi did. Could she really get by on four
hours' sleep a night, indefinitely? Jim himself had occasionally found it
necessary as a Frontier pilot to go on five or six hours' sleep out of
each twenty-four for spells of up to several weeks; and the lack of sleep
had wrung him out. Of course, different people had different requirements
as far as sleep went....

More to the point, had she really been able to do her sleeping only when
he was sleeping, and wake before or at the moment he woke-

"Jim!" She was calling him now. "What're you doing with Squonk? I don't
want him to go back over there to the wall again; I want him to keep on
working through the crowd out here in the middle of the floor. Jim!"

"I didn't tell him to do anything," replied Jim. For Squonk had suddenly
turned and was headed as Mary said, toward the wall, the base of which he
had searched some hours past. "Squonk! Good Squonk, don't go that way.
Come back to where you were."

But Squonk had reached the wall by this time. He leaned up against it,
shortened his legs, fell over on his back and lay rocking gently on his
shell, with his two red feet facing upward toward the distant ceiling.

"Well," said Jim after a moment. "Apparently when it's time for him to
sleep, he sleeps."

"Can't you wake him up?"

"How?" asked Jim.

"I don't know. You're the one who runs him. Think of something. There
must be something-some sort of emergency signal that'd bring him to."

"Maybe there is," said Jim. "But don't you think you'd better just let
him sleep when he's used to sleeping, if you want to keep him in good
shape for your own use? How would we go about getting another squonk if
something happened to him, or he got so tired he stopped paying attention
to what I said to him? The way he didn't listen to me just now, when I
told him to stop going toward the wall."

She did not answer. He thought he again felt a deep anger in her, anger
at him as well as at Squonk. But he could not be sure. It was difficult
for him to do much more than guess at her emotional state unless she
spoke, and then her feelings came through loud and clear as an overriding
quality on the words she said. He told himself that he might have been
imagining it in this instance; but from then on he watched for a number
of things during the time that followed after Squonk came out of his
brief period of sleep and responded to Jim's commands in his old obedient
manner.

In the weeks and perhaps months of local time that followed-the day here
seemed to be somewhat longer than twenty-four of Earth's hours, although
without access to the ship's instruments, it was impossible to compare
the two until they got back to AndFriend-they saw, and Mary dictated,
reports on an astonishing amount of information about the Laagi.

They penetrated to the city's outskirts, and discovered that there, it
stopped abruptly with the last building and beyond this was a scrub-brush
type of open country with hard-packed sandy soil, bushes, or perhaps
small trees that seemed capable of pulling up their roots at will, moving
slowly to a new location and putting them down again. This open country
was also plentifully sprinkled with evidence of more primitive life
forms, from conical mounds that resembled large ant hills several meters
in height, to communities of smaller mounds no larger than a human fist,
from which in the daytime emerged a number of small trotting, flying or
hopping creatures, possibly insects, that apparently fed off the
vegetation or each other.

They ventured a short distance out into this countryside, until Squonk
became too upset to go farther. But once they were well out from the
buildings, a kilometer or more, both Mary and Jim had thought they caught
glimpses of moving forms as large as Squonk or larger, among the
vegetation in the distance.

"...it was impossible to be sure," Mary dictated after their return to
the city, "whether it was fear or a sense of having abandoned his proper
place or duty that made Squonk so eager to return to the city. It may
have been both..."

Within the city itself, they eventually found the equivalent of a
transportation terminal, with both atmosphere and spacegoing craft
resting there, taking off, and landing upon it.

"Strange they wouldn't keep AndFriend here, instead of someplace else in
the city," commented Jim.

"Questions like that can be speculated on later," said Mary.

Nonetheless, it was a question that continued to bother Jim. He wished he
knew whether Raoul's ship had been kept here at the field for regular
space and atmosphere traffic.

They also witnessed the Laagi equivalent of long-distance communications.
The Laagi they watched operated a set of controls that consisted of
buttons on a vertical rod, which, in addition to being pivotable about
its base in the floor, was capable of being pulled out to greater length
or pushed down to shorter, as larger sections slid backwards or forwards
over adjoining shorter sections. The stubby Laagi fingers meanwhile
played with studs set into the rod itself.

While the Laagi they watched was doing this, it watched the screen of a
three-dimensional tank in which the image of another Laagi moved and
gesticulated. It took only a little thinking to realize that the live
Laagi before them was operating the movements of an image seen by the
Laagi being communicated with; and that that other Laagi was controlling
the movements of the image that the live Laagi was watching.

"Call it phoning," suggested Jim. "You might as well; and it's less
confusing than to talk of it as a form of alien communication the way you
are."

Mary did not answer. But in her reports from then on she did use the
word.

But they found no recreational areas and nothing resembling separate
homes, dwelling places, or even dormitories- the exception of one place
that seemed pretty obviously the equivalent of a hospital.

They did discover a maternity area at the hospital, with evidence that at
least some of the Laagi-it was impossible to tell by looking at them-were
capable of bearing young. Although whether these were the result of
bisexual, asexual, or some other engendering process, they did not find
out. Certainly, they saw no Laagi in the act of sexual coupling. In fact,
Laagi almost never touched each other, except for the faint touches that
went along with the vibrating arm gestures such as Squonk had received
from the Laagi he had sought out and been praised by when they had first
left the ship. Laagi in conversation with each other sometimes used
similar arm vibrations. But this was the closest to touching that Jim and
Mary were able to observe.

The young Laagi were evidently carried to term within the adult Laagi,
just as a human child is within its mother; and the pregnant adults,
apparently, came to the hospital-equivalent for delivery. This took place
within minutes of the pregnant Laagi being admitted to a maternity ward,
which led to Mary's suspicion that those so admitted had at least some
conscious control over when the delivery was to occur.

The baby Laagi, however, which on delivery had all its limbs and head
tucked inside its peripheral flesh folds, was immediately taken away by
one of the hospital staff; and the formerly pregnant Laagi got up, left
the hospital immediately and went back to work.

Apparently, parent and offspring never had anything more to do with each
other after that. The young individual was taken to the equivalent of a
nursery, where, gradually, during the next week or so, it began to essay
small emergences of its limbs and head from their hiding places. Within
two or three weeks it was up on its feet and mobile, and was taken out of
the nursery to be put into what was apparently a school; where it began
to work, or perhaps play at working, almost immediately and almost
without instruction.

"...Natural selection on this planet, assuming that this is the only or
originating planet of the Laagi race," dictated Mary in one of her
reports, "seems to have specialized in communal life forms. If this turns
out to be so, it may well be that the Laagi are a communal life form that
evolved into an intelligence equal to humans and built a comparable
civilization, one adapted to their own special requirements and so
differing from our own."

"The result seems to be that while in many areas of activity they react
according to racial imperatives, in which the needs of the community are
all that is considered, in more modern and technological areas they react
as individuals. Although I've been unable to find any hard evidence of a
government and individuals acting as leaders, both I and James Wander
feet strongly that there must be such things somewhere in the social
machinery of the Laagi..."

The adult Laagi ate at whatever communal food source was handy and slept
at their work when they had reached the point where sleep was necessary.
The greatest concession they made to the need to rest was, like Squonk,
to get out of a general traffic area before going off to sleep. Also,
their sleep was at best a matter of an hour or two and was taken at no
set pattern of intervals.

One somewhat unpleasant discovery was that the Laagi also died at their
work. Occasionally one of them who had pulled in its limbs and head in
what seemed normal sleep simply never woke up again. Death was signaled,
apparently, by the fact that head, legs and arms emerged slightly from
the skin folds into which they had withdrawn themselves and showed a
limpness that was otherwise uncharacteristic.

When this happened, sometimes the dead Laagi's former coworkers would
carry it off. Sometimes its former coworkers ignored it and after a while
other Laagi came to remove it; and, then or shortly after, a living Laagi
took its place.

At Mary's insistence, they followed such a removal team and found that
the body was simply dumped onto the equivalent of the garbage pile from
the nearest food room, from which a squonk-operated mechanical trash
gatherer gathered it up along with the discarded food materials and took
it off to be disposed of elsewhere.

All this, Mary meticulously reported via Jim back to the memory banks of
AndFriend. Meanwhile, Jim himself was occupied in two other activities.

One of these was determining if it was possible, through Squonk, to get
access to tools and the assistance of other squonks on a joint project.
This particular research on his part came to Mary's attention when Jim
deliberately ordered Squonk to lift and move a piece of metal scaffolding
that was leaning against a wall in a building half-factory, half-offices
that they were in at the time. The scaffolding was far too heavy for
Squonk alone to lift. But Jim concentrated strongly on the image he
broadcast to Squonk of wanting the scaffolding moved, for its own length
down the wall against which it rested.

The results were an unqualified success. Squonk, ever-obliging, trotted
off and rounded up three other squonks who were either passing by or for
other reasons did not have their tentacles engaged at the moment. The
four of them returned to the piece of scaffolding, lifted it with the
strength of their combined tentacles and shifted it as Jim had
envisioned.

They made no objection at all to an order to immediately move it back
again, once the original move had been made. Then they dispersed.

"What's happening? What's Squonk doing now?" Mary's voice woke Jim out of
a self-congratulatory mood. "I wanted him to stand still so I could watch
the Laagi on this assembly line."

"Sorry," said Jim. "Just an experiment to see if I could get him to make
use of other squonks for us, if necessary. I'm trying out a few things in
the way of controlling him."

"Well, let me know beforehand, after this," said Mary. "It may not always
be the best time for you to pull him away from what I'm studying. Did you
think of that?"

"I didn't. Sorry," said Jim. "Back to the assembly line, Squonk."

And that was that. The other activity with which Jim was concerned was
studying Mary herself.

In the time since he had first met her he had gone from being irritated
with her to an active dislike, and from there to a tolerance during the
long period of getting him ready to become a part of AndFriend. From that
point he had developed into a cautious partnership that was beginning to
approach a genuine liking. But this had been swept away by his outright
fury on discovering how he had been tricked into his situation here on
the Laagi world. Now, however, he had made a step beyond that.

The fury in him had faded and with it, curiously, all the negative
feelings he had had at one time or another toward her. Somehow, working
deep within him and underneath the surface changes in his emotions,
something like a fondness and a genuine concern for her had developed.
She no longer had the power to make him seriously angry. He liked her and
he was worried about her; and, as the weeks grew into months on this
alien planet, that worry about her grew.

The Laagi, he and she had now pretty well established, lived to work-as
did the squonks and probably most of the other communal species of life
forms on this planet. They worked until they could work no longer, then
they died. It was a world in which work was everything. Nothing else had
any meaning.

And Mary, herself, was a worker. She lived to work, and as far as he had
learned, nothing else for her had any meaning. But what was natural for
the Laagi was not natural for her, a human. Still, she was now caught up
in an environment in which her ability to work no longer set her apart
from anyone else-anyone but Jim himself, whom she had long since
dismissed from any possible use as a yardstick. With most people such an
environment would not pose such a threat. But Mary, Jim had concluded,
had grown a protective shell about herself.

He had checked up on her claims regarding the small amounts of sleep she
needed. It was true to a certain extent that she was phenomenal at
keeping going on what would normally be a very few hours out of Earth's
twenty-four. But beyond that there were a few holes in what she had told
him about herself.

For one thing, she did not sleep only when he was sleeping. He had
watched the same things she had watched and later repeated for recording
the reports she made on them. There had been things done by the Laagi
that Jim had seen, things that he now knew her well enough to be sure she
would have made part of her report if she had seen, that she had not
reported.

If she could not tell the difference between the periods when he was
silent because he was asleep and those when he was silent because he was
thinking, neither could he tell that difference in her-except by this
sort of omission from her reports. The interesting question was whether
she could herself. He had not realized at first, after becoming part of
AndFriend, when he had been asleep. It might be Mary could not either.
She might quite honestly believe that she slept only when he did. Out of
the body as they both were, the physical signals customarily felt on
waking were mostly missing.

He concentrated on training himself to be aware of what small signs there
were in himself that would tell him he had just woken after a period of
sleep. Slowly, he began to identify them. There was a faint lassitude-not
the physical heaviness that the body normally reported after being slowed
down by the process of slumber, but a short space in which the mind had
to rouse itself to the different process of thinking consciously again,
after having abandoned the conscious for the unconsciousness of
dreamland.

There was also, as he came to recognize the existence of his sleep
periods, as sleep periods, an awareness that he had not realized he
possessed. It was an awareness of a period of inactivity, in the
conscious area of his mind, a blank stretch in the memory record. And
with his recognition of this, he began to remember the dreams he had
had-just as someone who makes a point of writing down his memory of
dreams on awakening becomes conscious of them.

Remembering the dreams, he became able, after a fashion, to measure the
length of his sleep period by the amount of his remembered dreams. It was
very imprecise, but it gave him something on which to estimate the length
of his sleep.

In the process of doing this, for the first time, he came to realize that
there had been a refreshment for him in having slept. His mental
machinery had gotten some relief that it needed from its constant
activity in the conscious state. This much realized, he made a final step
forward and began to be aware of the mental fatigue signs that signaled
him sleep was needed. It was a strange awareness, a feeling that was in
no way a bodily feeling-something like the tension of a stretched rubber
band and like that of the jittery nerves that in some people preceded a
headache. It was very faint, but it was there, when needed; and he found
that all that was necessary once he became aware of it was to look
away-remove his conscious attention from the scene he was watching or any
particular concern that had been occupying his mind-and he would fall
asleep immediately.

Finally, now that he had discovered this much about himself, he had a
rough system for measuring time under these abnormal conditions. He set
himself to seeing if he could further train himself to become aware of
signs in Mary's behavior that also signaled tiredness and the lassitude
of just awakening. If what he had begun to suspect was true, she was
killing herself.


Chapter 21.

...Although nothing much more than guesses are possible on the basis of
the small amount of observation we have been able to make of the Laagi in
this short time," dictated Mary, "some possibilities might be considered
as reasons for elements of Laagi behavior that have been unexplainable
until now.

"Such Laagi actions as those by some of their fighter spaceships on the
spatial Frontier they share with us. For example, the occasional but not
too infrequent situation of a large number of their space fighter craft
turning and retreating from a much smaller number of human ones;
or-conversely-a mere handful of their ships attacking a much larger
number of human ones they have just encountered, even when such attack
seems suicidal and therefore reasonless."

She stopped dictating, and there was a long moment in which Jim began to
wonder if she would begin again.

"Therefore... therefore," she went on again abruptly, "we may consider
as a possibility that the apparently unreasonable actions of the Laagi in
the fighter ships just referred to were examples of reactions governed by
a system of racial imperatives we humans do not have, and so do not
realize exists. In other words, what seems unreasonable to us humans is
reasonable to the Laagi, under certain special conditions.

"From what I've seen, and from what Jim Wander, who is with me on this
observational incursion into Laagi territory, has seen, the Laagi may be
more strongly influenced than we are by the inherited reactions that
promoted survival in their prehistoric forebears."

"The Laagi, as I've pointed out a number of times before this, seem to be
at base a communal race, in the sense that a hive of bees or a hill of
ants is a communal race. But for a communal race to develop a technology
comparable to our own requires that at some point it must have allowed
the development of a certain amount of individuality in its members.
Technology requires invention. Invention demands originality. Originality
is a faculty of the unique individual who is different from all his
fellow individuals. The Laagi, as I have mentioned before, have no
recreational areas or recreational activities. This is because their
work is their recreation. Even our host member, whom we have named Squonk
and who belongs to a local alien species of lesser intelligence than the
Laagi, is actively unhappy unless he is constantly working during the
hours he is awake. So with the Laagi themselves. They are born to work;
and they do work until they die at their job-just as the worker bee
literally works itself to death. I..."

Her words trailed off once more. After a few seconds, she went on.

"...I have made a number of attempts to determine whether at this time the
Laagi's occupation is still determined genetically, as that of the worker
bee is. But so far, I've been unable to gain any solid evidence, one way
or another. However, the impression both Jim Wander and I get is that the
present-day, civilized Laagi does not have his occupation genetically
selected for him at birth."

Squonk stumbled suddenly, backed up several steps and then began again
searching the same area of floor he had just gone over, in the room where
Mary and Jim were currently observing. The small alien was still
single-mindedly in search of the missing object that the invisible Laagi
within him would recognize when he, Squonk, found it. This was not the
first time Squonk had so stumbled and backed up to search again over an
area he had already examined. He had done it for the first time three
days before. Jim was concerned. Mary had not seemed to notice.

"...if we use as a model for a typical human being one who has a base of
instincts and reflexes based on those instincts, this overlaid by a
pattern of cultural reactions and behaviors acquired from the community
of humans surrounding the youngster as he grows up, and this in turn
overlaid by a set of habitual actions and decisions, plus current
decisions engendered by the conscious processing of previous experience
plus the influence of the two lower layers of reaction, we have a
three-layered structure for human action and response to a given
situation.

"By contrast, the Laagi appears to respond according to a two-layer
structure of which the older, instinctive one is dominant under some
conditions, but under others the newer, conscious layer can control. To
create a hypothetical example, suppose that if a Laagi encountered
another Laagi that showed a particular form of sickness, his older
instinct would force him to destroy the sick one, even if consciously he
did not wish to do so. But if the other Laagi showed some slight
difference in that form of sickness, then his newer, individual
consciousness would be allowed to use its discretion about killing the
other Laagi or taking him to one of their hospitals."

Mary stopped abruptly. It was marvelous, thought Jim admiringly, what she
had been able to deduce from observations alone of a totally alien race.
Sherlock Holmes would have been proud of her. When she went on, though,
her voice was ragged with fatigue.

"Note again that what I have just suggested is a purely imaginary model,
by way of example. We have not witnessed one Laagi killing another for
any reason at all. We have not seen a fight or even what we could be
absolutely sure was a serious disagreement between two or more Laagi..."

She ran down and this time did not resume talking, although her usual
pattern with reports was to wind them up with a clear statement that the
report was ended.

"Mary," said Jim, after she had been still for a long moment, "you're
worn out."

"I'm fine," she said.

"No, you aren't. I've been watching you get more and more exhausted. No
matter how much you think you can work steadily at something and just get
by with an occasional snatch of sleep, you're running downhill, and you
ought to recognize that yourself."

"What are you talking about?" demanded Mary. "We've got no bodies to run
downhill. That's a purely physical phenomenon. I can work as long as I
like. The mind doesn't get tired."

"Sorry. Yes, it does-evidently," said Jim.

"What would you know about it, anyway? You haven't had to do anything but
ride along and redictate my reports."

"And watch everything that goes on," said Jim, "with the result I see
some things you seem to be missing, lately. About Squonk, for one."

"What about Squonk?"

"You've been overworking yourself, so consequently you've been
overworking him; because he isn't built to know when to stop for his own
health and safety."

"You're insane!" But there was a note of concern for the first time in
Mary's voice. Concern-but disbelief as well. "He can take a nap anytime
he wants to, and we always let him."

"He doesn't want to nap," said Jim. "He wants to find that nonexistent
key we've had him hunting for for months. He's begrudging himself sleep
more and more because you're begrudging yourself sleep. He'll stop and
find a place to roll over and snooze, but only when we don't seem to be
in the middle of something-such as when we've just given him a new order
to search somewhere he hasn't searched before. Or when we're talking like
this."

"You think he can hear us?"

"He can hear me," said Jim. "At least the part of me that gives orders to
him; and for all I know he can feel my emotions as much as I can feel
his. If he can do that, too, he's been picking up the backwash of the
urgency I echo whenever you order a change in place or direction, or
anything like that."

"I don't believe he's being overworked. That's what you're saying, isn't
it, that I'm overworking him?"

"That's right. I know you aren't doing it deliberately; but all the same
you've been setting up a situation in which, to take a leaf out of your
own deductions, his racial imperative to work himself to death is
controlling him."

"I don't believe it. This is some plan of yours to wind up my work here,
so I'll turn you loose to get back to Earth."

"Sorry," said Jim. "If you won't believe me, you won't believe me; but I
think you've forgotten who controls Squonk. Me. He needs rest and he's
going to get it. Have you thought what kind of situation we'd be in if he
died? I don't know how we'd go about switching to another squonk or
getting back to AndFriend."

He broke off and spoke directly to Squonk through his usual Laagi image.

"Squonk, good Squonk, you can stop searching now. Time to sleep, Squonk,
then we'll go right back to finding that key. But for now, Squonk, time
to rest."

(?) said Squonk's emotions.

It was the first time the creature had done anything like trying to
communicate directly with the invisible Laagi he now obeyed, and Jim read
the unusual action as a sign of considerable confusion and upset in
Squonk.

"Sleep!" said Jim. "Squonk, go sleep!"

Squonk, who had stopped searching at Jim's first communication,
hesitated. He put his head down, backed up and began searching again over
the floor ahead of him, then stopped and stood uncertainly. He looked
over at the nearest wall of the room and back at the floor.

"Sleep!" ordered Jim.

Squonk turned toward the wall. He wavered a little on his feet as he
went, and as soon as he bumped into the wall itself, he pulled in his
head, legs and tentacles all at once and literally fell over backwards.
He rocked for a moment and then lay still.

"What are you doing?" Mary was storming at Jim. There was fury, pain and
outrage all at once radiating from her. "You're doing this deliberately
to slow me down. I don't believe a word of what you say-"

"Mary," said Jim. "Squonk's asleep. There's nothing more you can do until
he wakes up, except observe from against the wall, here; which you
already did, when we first came into this place. So why don't you sleep,
too?"

"Sleep? Why should I sleep? Who're you to tell me when I need or want to
go to sleep?" An explosion of mixed emotions was riding on her mental
voice.

"I'm sorry," said Jim, "but I'm not going to let you kill Squonk and I'm
not going to let you kill yourself. You've already done a mountain of
work here. Face it, it actually is time we headed back to Base and
Earth."

"That's what all this is about!" Mary's voice was raw with anger. "It's
all a ploy of yours to get me to turn you loose, so you can phase-shift
AndFriend out from under those metal arches they've got her pinned down
with. Well, it's not going to work. We're staying here until I decide my
work's done enough to leave. We'll stay years if we have to. We'll stay a
lifetime, if necessary."

"Don't say that," said Jim as gently as he could. "You'll force me to
find a way to get AndFriend loose and take her home without paying any
attention to what you still need or want to do."

"Don't try it!" Mary's mental voice was savage and a welter of emotions.
"Don't try to fight me, Jim, or you'll find you've bitten off more than
you can chew. I mean that! I was only six years old when I knew what I
wanted to do-and that was something that had some meaning to it. Can you
understand something like that?"

Jim decided not to answer but simply let her talk herself out. And in a
moment, sure enough, she went on without needing an answer from him.

"When I was six years old-the age for first grade-I was already beginning
to understand what my parents were. Do you know what they were-my mother
and father? My mother spent her time killing time with other women as
empty-headed as she was. My father was just as emptyheaded. He was a real
estate salesman, and made money at it-lots of money. And they put in
their lives trying to pretend that what they did was of some use, that it
made one damn bit of difference to the world. Actually, if they'd died at
birth the world would never have gained or lost a thing-except for the
fact they had a child."

She stopped.

"Why don't you say something?" she demanded. "All right, don't answer. I
know you're listening. You have to listen to me whether you want to or
not, so you might as well learn something. When I was six years old I'd
already made up my mind that whatever I did with my life, it'd add up to
something. It'd matter to the future of the world whether I lived or
died. I wasn't going to be a cipher like my parents. I was going to be
someone who did something."

She paused again. Jim still said nothing.

"And I've stuck to that decision ever since. And I've done what I said
I'd do. That's why I couldn't wait to get away from my family and begin
to build something on my own. I picked a work and I worked at it. And I
built it until it brought me here. And here is where I'm going to stay
until I've answered all the important questions about the Laagi. Do you
understand that? And you're going to stay with me, and so is Squonk,
because I need you both. So don't try to go against me, Jim. I've spent
my life taking care of whatever got in my way; and if you get in my way,
I'll take care of you. Think of that. And keep thinking about it!"

She stopped. This time it seemed for good. Because she said nothing more;
and, after a time, the sensitivity that Jim had been developing to her
sleep periods seemed to indicate to him that now, finally, she slept.

As for himself, he had had to take what she said at its face value. She
was determined to stay until she killed herself; and end by killing
herself, she certainly would, because the job of understanding the Laagi
was not something that could be done by a single human, or even by a
generation of humans, studying that race. It would take millennia,
perhaps, before humanity would finally be able to say that it understood
these people with whom it had been locked in battle for over a hundred
years. If Mary would only stop to recognize the fact, she would realize
that she had already left her mark on the history of the human race by
what she had done here so far on the Laagi world. It was not necessary
for her to try to do the impossible.

But, clearly, she was not about to recognize that; and she was not
willingly going to free him to take AndFriend home. That meant he must
decide himself what to do to get the ship loose and with both of them
aboard it, in spite of her and against her will. No more than she doubted
herself, did he doubt he could find a way to do that. But there was a lot
yet to be thought over and worked out.

Two days later, Laagi time, Squonk stumbled and fell in the process of
searching along the wall of one of those enclosures Mary and Jim had come
to call "discussion rooms" from the fact that they seemed to have no
other purpose than to provide a place for the Laagi to gather and
communicate. Such rooms had become favorite observation places for Mary.

Squonk immediately got back on his feet and resumed searching. But he
seemed confused; and, after a moment, he straightened, backed up several
times his own length and began to search again over the base of the wall
he had just covered. But before he could complete a second search of the
same area, he drifted away from the wall and began searching apparently
at random out into the open floor where the discussions were going on.

"Squonk!" ordered Jim sharply, "rest. Time to sleep. Stop!"

Squonk obediently rose, headed back toward the wall, pulled his limbs in
as he usually did when preparing to sleep, but checked himself before he
had rolled over on his back. He extended his limbs again and started
blindly searching the base of the wall beside him.

By this time, other squonks in the room were converging upon him. Jim
again ordered Squonk to sleep, but now Squonk did not seem to hear him. A
moment later, other squonks had surrounded Squonk and were feeling him
over with their tentacles.

Fumblingly, Squonk began to search them back, as if they were part of the
wall he had just been exploring. The surrounding squonks wrapped their
tentacles around his legs and head and tried to push them back into the
skin folds on his body from which they emerged. But Squonk struggled to
keep these body parts out where they were, his tentacles meanwhile
searching, searching, up and down the very tentacles that were trying to
compress his body together.

The cluster of squonks had finally attracted the attention of some of the
nearby Laagi. One of these left his discussion group and came over,
pushing his way among the squonks, who made room for him as soon as they
realized the superior life form was there. The Laagi stood over Squonk,
and from the waves of emotion Jim picked up from Squonk, he guessed that
the Laagi was giving Squonk orders. 

"What's the Laagi doing? What's happening?" Mary was asking in the
recesses of Jim's mind.

"Hold the questions for now, will you please?" said Jim irritably.
"Squonk is being ordered to sleep by the Laagi, but he's not responding,
any more than he was responding to me."

The Laagi turned and reached toward one of the nearby squonks, who
immediately stretched out his neck and held it there, while the Laagi
vibrated his arm above it, undoubtedly sending some kind of order in the
same sort of feather touches Jim had first believed were only a form of
praise, when on their first leaving the ship, Squonk had sought out a
particular Laagi for what Jim had then thought was only attention. Now
Jim suspected that the faint touches of the vibrating Laagi arm were used
far more to order than to praise. In fact, their most common use, he now
strongly suspected, was to make a major alteration in the current work
orders under which a squonk had been operating, and to put it on an
entirely new job.

The Laagi waded out of the crowd of squonks and returned to his group.
The squonk he had touched dashed off. The other squonks continued to
surround Squonk, although they had now ceased to try to push his legs and
head back into his body and simply contented themselves with stroking all
of his body that was not protected by the shell on his back.

This stroking seemed to have at least a partial calming effect on Squonk,
although he still tried, erratically and feebly, to search any surface
that came within reach of his tentacles. The squonk that had left
returned, riding a sort of flat-bed truck or raft which floated just
above the floor, held there by some force, perhaps antigravity, perhaps
something that merely repelled the floor's surface.

The other squonks coaxed and pushed Squonk up onto this raft and the
squonk which had brought it drove it off, with Squonk now trying to
search the bed of the raft.

They left the building, moved down one of the green pathways and through
a tangle of other, connecting paths into a hospital building. Here, the
raft was driven to a large, dormitory-like room Jim and Mary had not
found in other such hospitals they had visited, although they had never
really searched any of them in detail. Their destination now was a ward,
plainly, for squonks only. Long rows of rafts with unmoving squonks on
them, like the one on which Squonk was being carried, floated just above
the floor of the room; and the driver of their raft maneuvered it into
position on the end of one row. The driver then departed, leaving the
raft there, with Squonk still mindlessly searching the surface of the
vehicle's platform.

Almost immediately another squonk appeared, carrying what looked like a
large piece of mosquito netting, and threw it over both Squonk and the
raft. Looking out through the meshes, which were so large and flimsy they
barely obscured the view, Jim noticed what he had been too concerned with
Squonk to notice before; and that was that a good share of the other
vehicle-beds had their occupants enclosed by similar nettings.

Almost immediately, the netting began to radiate a mild heat, and this
seemed to have a calming effect on Squonk. He pulled in his extendible
body parts, stood for a little while unmoving, then rolled over on his
back and abandoned wakefulness.

"He's asleep?" asked Mary. It was the first word she had said since Jim
had peremptorily shut her up in the discussion room.

"Yes," said Jim. "Which means we're all right for the present."

"Why only for the present?" Mary echoed.

"Because Squonk'll either die or get well," said Jim. "If he dies, we're
stuck in a dead body-and we've seen what they do with dead bodies here.
We'll probably end up in some trash pit or incinerator.  I'll bet on the
incinerator rather than the pit."

"And if he lives?" Mary's voice was controlled and even.

"If he lives, I can imagine some Laagi checking up on what made him sick
enough to end up here. I've no idea how detailed the information might be
that a Laagi can get out of a squonk. Have you? But if the Laagi learns
that all this time, Squonk's been searching for something that's missing
from AndFriend, and that he's been getting his orders from a Laagi that's
not there in the flesh, what do you think's going to happen?"

I've no idea," said Mary, still levelly. "But I imagine nothing good-for
us. You were right and I was wrong about overworking Squonk. Aside from
that, everything I said earlier still goes. And now, since there's
nothing much for me to observe here, and because I really could use some
sleep right now, I'm going to fold up. Wake me if you need me."

She stopped talking, and a moment later Jim felt sure that he was once
more picking up the mental signals from her that indicated she was truly
slumbering.

He himself was wide awake with no desire to sleep at all. It was strange
to be so alert, while his two companions were out of it, so to speak.
They were asleep, around him all the other invalid squonks were asleep
and no squonk attendants were in the room. He was literally alone with
his thoughts.

He let them run free, accordingly. They flitted from speculation over how
long Squonk would take to get rested, and how long Mary would take to
rest up; and ended up speculating about things he and she had observed in
their exploration of this Laagi city. Eventually, they ended up in
speculation about the Laagi themselves.

There was something driving the Laagi, as a race, Jim thought. They were
concerned with something more than just survival and increasing their
population by settling more worlds. Perhaps, he thought, they had some
sort of racial vision, some sort of dream that was strong enough to drive
them all-perhaps strong enough to drive them forever.

They were too advanced, too civilized, not to be headed somewhere. The
war with the human race, the endless work, all that was a product of the
older part of their brains. But there was more to them than those obvious
things. Both he and Mary had come to feel that the rooms in which many
Laagi sat and observed one of their number apparently in conversation
with the picture of another Laagi on a screen, as well as the "clubs"
where they gathered and communicated in anything from pairs up to small
groups, had to do with learning and decision-making; and almost surely,
if those first two were present activities, with speculation as well.

Like humans they must wonder where it all led to, and what was the right
way to go. And if they attacked that question with the relentless effort
they brought to everything else they did, they could have made admirable
progress, even by this time, possibly in some ways humanity had not even
considered.

He found himself admitting to himself that he had come to admire the
Laagi in certain ways, just as he had come to admire Squonk in some of
the attitudes and efforts which that little creature showed. Mary was
right. He and she must observe and deduce and come to understand this
alien race. Just as technologically-advanced races on Earth had at first
been blind to what could be learned from races who appeared
technologically backward until they began to learn better in the
twentieth century, so it would be easy now to be blind to what the Laagi
must have discovered and put to use that humanity had not even imagined.

Whatever the Laagi were, they had things to teach us....

Somewhere along the way with that thought, Jim himself fell asleep. He
continued to sleep and think, alternately, as time passed and he waited
for Mary and Squonk to recover.

After all, there was nothing else he could do. There was no possibility
in any case of going anywhere without Squonk, and Squonk was clearly in
no shape to move. They all waited, therefore, for the better part of two
days.

Once a day, as closely as Jim could figure time here, one of the squonks
who acted as attendant in the ward would come around with a container
filled with pink cubes about the size of a child's toy block.

These looked rather as if they had been made out of strawberry jelly. The
attendant squonk gave one to each of the patients, including Squonk.
Squonk ate it with every appearance of appetite and seemed to be fully
satisfied as far as food was concerned until the attendant came around
with another cube the next day. Jim used the visits of the attendant with
food as one of the means to estimate the passage of time here indoors.

He remembered that it had been late afternoon, local time, when Squonk
had been carried to the hospital. Jim made his best estimate of the hours
that had gone by since then. In the situation they now found themselves,
if anything was to be done once Squonk was able to move, Jim wanted to do
it at night.

Twice-according to Jim's reckoning, it was during the early morning
hours-a Laagi came through the room and examined each squonk that was a
patient there. Most he merely glanced at. In about a dozen cases the
squonk he examined was able to stretch its neck out in the customary
action of one of its race waiting to accept orders. When this happened,
the visiting Laagi vibrated his arm above the proffered neck; and, in two
instances, the squonk so spoken to got to its feet, stepped down off the
raft that had been its hospital bed, and left the room. In all other
cases, the squonk touched went back to sleep.

There was one incident, however, that varied from this usual pattern.
During the second Laagi visit-Jim had no way to tell if it was the same
alien as the fast time-at one of the beds, as the Laagi stopped to look
at its occupant, but without extending his arm, the squonk lying there
began to struggle to move and managed to get up on its feet, although its
legs were still not extended. The squonk shakily stretched out his neck
toward the Laagi and reached out fumblingly with his tentacles to
encircle the Laagi's arm. Most of the tentacles slipped off, but two
managed to maintain their grasp on the Laagi's arm. Effortfully, the
squonk pulled the arm into position over his extended neck.

For a second the Laagi merely stood there. Something about the way he
stood seemed to signal to Jim-he did not know why-a feeling of sorrow or
sadness. Then he began to vibrate his held arm over the extended neck,
and as he did so the squonk shivered ecstatically and one of its legs
managed to extend itself slightly. It was only then that Jim saw that the
hand at the end of the other arm of the Laagi was stealthily approaching
the underside of the extended neck, dark thumb stiffly upraised like the
end of a blunt club. As the squonk seemed to bask under the vibrations of
the Laagi arm above him this thumb came to within inches of the underside
of the neck-and suddenly thrust upward.

The blow was a more violent one than Jim had expected, testifying to a
strength in the Laagi arm he had not suspected those aliens of
possessing. There was an audible crack, as of something breaking in the
squonk's neck, and it suddenly dropped, to lie still with its head at an
angle to its' neck.

Two of the attendant squonks that were presently in the ward had started
forward when the bedridden squonk had first started to struggle to its
feet, but halted when the Laagi extended his arm over the sick one's
neck. Now the Laagi turned away, and they came forward, lifted the
obviously dead body between them and carried it off.

The Laagi moved on to examine the next patient. It may have been Jim's
imagination, but it seemed to him the Laagi still radiated sadness, an
emotion Jim had never before seen in one of the aliens. He found himself
happy, for some obscure reason, that Squonk-their Squonk-had slept
through the whole incident. In fact, Squonk had been unhesitatingly
obedient in composing himself again for sleep whenever he woke up and Jim
urged him back into slumber.

Squonk had been awake when a visiting Laagi had entered the room the
first time, but Jim had urged him then to go back to sleep; and in docile
fashion, Squonk had. He was therefore still asleep when the visiting
Laagi got to him. The Laagi gave him a quick glance and went on. Jim had
not been holding his breath only because he had no breath to hold; but a
great relief washed over him as the Laagi moved on to the next patient.

For a second Jim was almost tempted to wake Mary-who had also slept
through it all-to share that relief and the story of how they had escaped
a closer examination of Squonk. But prudence held him back. He let Mary
sleep on.

The second day when the Laagi-or some Laagi; it was impossible to tell if
it was the same one that had come the day before-entered the ward, Mary
was awake and witnessed the death, and Jim was able to tell her how the
previous visit had gone. Once more he was successful in convincing Squonk
to be asleep when the visiting physician, veterinarian or whatever, came
by.

"...But that," said Jim to Mary after the Laagi had left them, "is
probably the last time I'll be able to make Squonk sleep when that
visitor comes. Squonk's definitely getting slept up and beginning to feel
restless. He may not be ready to go back to work, but he certainly feels
like it. That means we have to make a break for it tonight."

"Why tonight?" asked Mary. "Why not right now?"

"I want to be sure that Laagi who inspects here has left this part of the
hospital for the day. He just might be able to identify Squonk from other
squonks, and remember that our Squonk was supposed to be in this
hospital. At the same time I want us to have as much time as possible to
be free before he comes again and finds Squonk's bed empty."

"What're you planning to do once we get out of here?" Mary asked.

"Go back to AndFriend. Maybe we can get the Laagi to assume that Squonk's
been doing his regular duties if they come looking for him and find him
back, cleaning the ship or even trying to clean her. Or, once back at
AndFriend we might decide to leave Squonk to go his own way and rejoin
the ship itself-temporarily, at least."

"Why?"

"I'm not sure. We're going to have to make decisions as we go along.
Maybe the ship'll turn out to be safer for us. Maybe Squonk won't be able
to do any more than get us back to her before he dies. Maybe just about
anything. Don't ask me for answers now. Let's get out of here and then
see what the situation is."

"All right. Call me when time for decisions... " Mary's voice trailed
off, and within seconds Jim was sure she was asleep again.

From the first, since Squonk had been carted off to the hospital, she had
woken up suddenly, like someone startled out of a nightmare or roused by
the internal signal of some habitual duty clamoring against the need to
oversleep. Lately, the occasions of her waking had been less frequent;
and the time she was awake before sleep took her again, becoming shorter.
It would be too much to ask, thought Jim, but wouldn't it be wonderful if
she slept all the time it took to get them back to AndFriend?

He waited until he felt it must be dark outside the hospital building,
then roused Squonk, taking as much care as was possible to do that with
the image in the back of his mind and not think out loud, as it were,
which might rouse Mary.

He succeeded.

"Good Squonk," he mentally whispered at the awakened creature. "Is Squonk
able to get up from this place and go somewhere else?"

Squonk stretched his neck and flailed his tentacles about affirmatively.

"Good," said Jim. "Quietly, then, so that we don't disturb these poor,
sick squonks all around us. Get up off this thing you're lying on and
we'll leave the building. Oh, and pick up a container of those food cubes
on the way out."

He steered Squonk out of the room. They had to hunt around, but
eventually they found a room containing a number of empty baskets and a
machine ending in a large hopper that was filled with the pink cubes. At
Jim's order, Squonk filled a basket and, on his own initiative, balanced
the basket on his shell, holding it in place with three of his tentacles.
They left the room and went down the most deserted corridors they could
find until Jim saw a doorway that gave on to the outside of the building.
But he still did not let himself relax until they were safely out on one
of the green pathways and the hospital was being left behind among its
fellow structures.

He considered Squonk. As far as could be told from the way the other was
covering ground, the small alien was in as good shape as ever; but Jim
suspected that, like Mary, Squonk had recovered only a portion of his
normal energy and might easily collapse, once that was used up.

"We're going to the ship, Squonk," Jim said. "The ship needs cleaning
again. Go slow and if you start to feel tired, just stop. Do you
understand? Stop if you start to feel tired."

Squonk made affirmative physical signals and they proceeded. But he did
not stop, or perhaps he did not feel the need to stop, until they were
once more back inside AndFriend. Jim sighed mentally with relief as the
ship's port clanged shut behind them; and Mary woke.

"Where are we?" she asked.

"At the ship. Go back to sleep. Squonk's got to rest and so do I," said
Jim.

The last bit was a lie. He intended to do anything but rest.

"It'll be hours yet before anyone at the hospital notices Squonk is
missing," he said, "and I don't want to start him on the cleaning too
soon, even if he's physically up to it. It'll be best if anyone hunting
for him comes in and finds him actively at work here."

"Oh. All right...." Mary was off to slumberland again.

So was Squonk. The urge to wake the small alien was strong in Jim, but he
made himself hold off. There was no telling how the trip here had taken
it out of Squonk's recovered physical powers, and these would be needed,
later. He let the others sleep for half an hour by the ship's
time-keeping system.

His first act after waking the little alien was to have him store the
cubes of food where acceleration forces could not send them tumbling
around the interior of the ship. The second was to teach him how to use
the system installed aboard for the disposal of human waste. It was a
difficult and troublesome task to teach Squonk how to make use of what
was to him the unnatural apparatus, but it turned out not to be
impossible, which was a relief to Jim. He had been afraid that he might
not have time later on for giving such lessons, if they turned out to be
necessary.

With that much done, his neat move was to transfer his point of view back
into the structure of AndFriend. He had nothing to go on but guesses as
to how this might be done, and he had planned to have Squonk put his
tentacle back into the same hidden drawer in which it had picked up some
of AndFriend's substance, so that Jim and Mary could become part of the
small creature instead of the vessel. He had conceived of the switch back
as an all-out effort of will; and he had tried, without success, to come
up with some plan that would let him make such an effort without waking a
sleeping Mary, which he was sure it would.

To his surprise, however, there was nothing to it. Once back in the ship,
he found himself naturally wanting to be part of it again, and, having
wished, found himself where he wanted to be. It was so easy that he
decided to gamble on trying it again. He found it almost as easy to slip
back into Squonk and, having done so, to once more return to being part
of the ship.

It was so easy, he found himself being suspicious of it. The only reason
it could be so little trouble, he finally decided, was that, in effect,
he was actually in both places at once at all times, since the material
of AndFriend was both in the form of the spaceship and in the flesh of
Squonk; and it was merely a matter of his own internal point of view
which host body he looked out of.

Happily, he discarded the effortful plans he had thought might be
necessary to get back to Squonk long enough to give their companion his
final orders. While he was still part of the ship, he took his time, and
ran a complete check of the working equipment aboard. Only then did he
slip back into Squonk, who had fallen asleep once more as soon as Jim had
left him.

That slumber, in fact, suited Jim very well. He had planned to let Squonk
sleep until roughly three hours from daylight, but the little alien
surprised him by waking after only about a couple of hours' sleep and
immediately beginning to try to clean the interior of AndFriend.

"No, Squonk. Good Squonk, but there's something that needs to be done
first. Come outside with me."

Hoping that Mary would stay asleep, he led Squonk out into the night and
away from the ship until they could stand back and see it all clearly
under the moonless, but starbright, sky.

"The ship has to be moved forward about its own length, Squonk," said
Jim. "And to do that we've got to cut loose, temporarily, those arches
that hold it down. You'll need other squonks to help you, and tools. Can
you do that, Squonk, noble Squonk?"

Jim had no idea what kind of tools or methods would be used to unfasten
the base of the hold-down legs from the concrete-like surface underfoot,
so he simply envisioned a number of squonks clustered busily around each
arch-base for a moment or two, and then the base coming loose and rising
upward some two meters above the surface. Squonk turned and started
eagerly back toward the city.

Jim shifted his point of view back inside AndFriend. He watched the small
alien move away until the night made the bobbing backshell too hard to
separate from the surrounding dimness. Then, at last, Jim let himself
relax into just being AndFriend once more, although he was careful to
stay awake. Mary, thank God, had never stirred from her sleep even during
the shifts he had made from ship to alien and back again. There was
relief in knowing that, but right beside it a strong feeling of guilt.
The task he had sent Squonk on was one that only Squonk could do; but the
doing of it might prove too much for their faithful servant. He might
very well, Jim told himself grimly, have sent Squonk to his death.

But... he had not. He kept a watch through the outer surface of
AndFriend's hull, and less than an hour after he had watched Squonk
leave, the other returned, followed by either seven or eight other
squonks-it was difficult to count them accurately as they scuttled around
in the darkness.

This squonk team, including Squonk himself, went immediately to that base
of the front arch that was to the right of AndFriend's forward section.
What they were doing there, Jim could no more make out than he had been
able to imagine definitively how they would go about freeing the
connection of each base from the pavement beneath the ship.

But, one by one, the bases came free and floated up, each with a chunk of
pavement attached, to what would have been about the height of Jim's
head, if he had been out there in the body to use himself as a measuring
stick.

Jim shifted momentarily into Squonk.

"Good Squonk. Good squonks!" he projected. "All the others can go now,
Squonk. You tell them."

Squonk scurried around, touching tentacles with the other squonks, who
headed off and were swallowed up by the darkness.

"You come back on board with me," said Jim to Squonk, once the others
were gone. "Now you can start cleaning up in there."

He shifted back into AndFriend, opened the port and let Squonk in. Then,
using the same ability he had discovered in himself when he had awakened
in AndFriend back at Base, he lifted the ship lightly in the air and
pointed it at a slant upward toward the stars now hidden behind the cloud
bank that had since drifted in to further darken the night.

The moment he was back inside the ship with the entry port closed behind
him, Squonk had determinedly begun his postponed cleaning of the ship's
interior.


Chapter 22.

"What's going on?" Said Mary, waking up. "Jim, you've moved us back into
AndFriend. You should have checked with me before you did that."

"Why?" said Jim. "Since I was going to shift us over anyway? That's one
of the things you don't control-what body or thing we're in."

"You're right," said Mary. "I'm sorry. It's just habit speaking in me."

Jim was stunned by the mildness of her reaction. Suspicion woke in him.
Why, he asked himself, was she suddenly being so reasonable? Was the
reasonableness only a cover for some plan she had cooked up to catch him
unawares?

He was tempted to tell her that they had left the Laagi world. Her
reaction to that news should reveal how she was really feeling about what
he had done. They were, in fact, already almost into interstellar space.
He had been accelerating at a steadily increasing rate until that rate
was well beyond what a human body would have been comfortably able to
support. Then he had remembered Squonk and realized that while to him and
Mary in their present conditions such acceleration might not make any
difference, it was literally life-threatening to their small alien
companion. He looked for Squonk now, and saw him painfully trying to
continue work in spite of the effect of essentially having his weight
almost doubled. A little ashamed of himself, Jim backed off to an
acceleration only slightly greater than the gravity Squonk was used to
normally. Even at the lesser rate, they were putting distance between
themselves and the Laagi world in gratifying fashion.

It was not the distance-eating travel of phase-shifting. But they were
rapidly losing themselves in an increasing volume of space that was
already large enough to sorely trouble even the large number of ships the
Laagi could put into space in pursuit.

"Why exactly did you move us back into the ship from Squonk?" Mary asked.
The tone of her question was entirely reasonable. "I'd think we could
always have shifted over if the need arose-if some Laagi came out here to
AndFriend, or something like that."

Facing the fact of telling her, now, Jim found himself uncomfortable with
the need to do so, even though he was still sure inside himself that he
had done the right thing.

"I had to be in the ship so I could operate her," he said. "I got Squonk
to round up some of his friends and cut loose the arches that were
holding us down. Then I used my own, personal, nonship powers-the same
ones Raoul used to drive La Chasse Gallerie all the way through Laagi
territory to get home-to take us off. We've left the Laagi world."

She said nothing. He waited.

"I know," he said, "you're feeling I betrayed you. Well, maybe I did. But
you were working yourself to death and you'd already done anything anyone
could have expected you to do back there-and more."

"So we're in space now?"

Aside from an emptiness and a strange impression of distance, as if she
had physically withdrawn from him, her voice was calm and he could feel
no explosion kindling in her in reaction to what he had just said.

"That's right. On the equivalent of ordinary drive, which is all I can
manage on my own, but moving away steadily."

"I suppose we could go back if we tried?"

"Yes," said Jim. "But I won't. If you'll just cancel that hypnotic lock
you've got on me, so I can work the ship and phase-shift, we'll head out
around Laagi territory and go home."

"No," she said. "I'll never do that. Not as long as there's a chance of
our going back to the Laagi."

The continuing utter calmness of her voice and emotions held an
inflexibility that gave no hope of its being changed.

"Then we'll have to take our chances, this way," said Jim.

"The Laagi'll catch us long before we can reach the Frontier and any
human protection," said Mary.

"Maybe they could," said Jim, "maybe not. But I'm not headed up-galaxy
toward home. I'm headed down-galaxy toward the flyswatting territory. I
think it'll take the Laagi a little while to figure out AndFriend might
go in that direction; and any time gained is a plus for us, in this
case."

"I see," said Mary. "All right. Understand me. I've had a chance to get
some rest now. My head's clear. You were right. I'd worked myself to the
point where I wasn't thinking straight. But I'm thinking straight now;
and there's work back there I've left unfinished. If you'll turn back and
let the Laagi catch us again, I'll promise you we'll leave within a
quarter of a year, their local time."

"No," said Jim.

"Is a quarter of a year going to make that much difference to you after
the time we've spent there already?"

"It's not that," said Jim. "I'm afraid I don't trust you. If you could go
back there, a quarter of a year would become half a year, then a year. By
the end of a year you'd be back again in a condition where there'd be no
point in trying to talk sense to you about leaving, ever."

There was another extended silence from Mary. In the picture of her he
carried always in his mind now, put together from bits and pieces of
memory, he imagined her with the right corner of her lower lip caught
thoughtfully for a moment between her teeth as she searched for the words
most likely to move him from his position. It was a fetching, even in a
strange way an endearing, picture; but he could not afford to give in.

"So you're going to try taking us home in spite of the odds against it?"
she said at last.

"The odds wouldn't be so much against it if you gave me back the ability
to phase-shift AndFriend."

She ignored what he had just said.

"You realize," she said, "if the Laagi shoot us on sight, instead of
simply trying to capture us, you're risking the loss of everything
I-we've found out about them. That information will never get back to
Earth then; and it means everything to them, back there."

"Give me phase-shifting ability and there's a good chance the information
will get back."

"Good?" she said. "No. Only a little better. Let the Laagi capture us
again, let me work with them awhile longer; and maybe I can get to the
point where I can talk to them. You've been repeating every note I've
made but you don't seem to have understood what those notes meant. The
Laagi are only fighting us because we've triggered off a genetic,
territorial response in them. Their reflexive assumption is that the only
reason we could be in their territory-and they think of it as their
territory, not ours, where our ships first met in space-is that we mean
to move in and take their worlds from them. Their inborn reflexes can't
imagine any other reason for our' being there."

"So?" he said.

"So, their reflexive system can't-but maybe their upper, civilized minds
can-accept the fact we wouldn't want their worlds, even if we could have
them. Their atmosphere's unbreathable by us and there's probably a
limitless number of other things wrong. But we can't tell them that until
we can talk to them; and I have to stay there until I can talk to them."

"Or maybe we can send a whole expedition back, knowing what we know now,"
said Jim, "and they can find out how to talk to them."

"And meanwhile your friends on the Frontier are being killed daily; and
so are something like the same number of Laagi; and both races are going
broke building warships and defending their side of the Frontier."

Jim winced. She had hit him in one of his vulnerable areas. But the fact
remained he dared not trust her.

"You want to keep on gambling," he said. "I want to take the chips we've
won so far and run with them, to come back and try to break the bank
another day. I'm not going to change my mind."

"Neither am I," said Mary. There was sadness in her voice.

"So you'll have to do what you're trying to do without phaseshifts."

They drove on without talking for some time. There was no sign of pursuit
yet, as far as Jim could see. But that meant nothing, when a Laagi vessel
could phase-shift into existence within a thousand kilometers of them
without a moment's warning. More to the point, now that he was back on
board, he had access to time-keeping equipment. As best he could figure
by estimating the time left until dawn when they had taken off from the
Laagi world, the ship's clocks gave him as much as an hour yet before
AndFriend's absence would be visible to those traveling the green
pathways that gave a view of the place where she had been anchored down
on display.

How long after that it would take the Laagi to organize a pursuit and get
ships into space was something he could not guess. But on Earth, in a
parallel situation, it would be a matter of four to six hours at least,
and probably it could not be done much more speedily by the Laagi.

After a long time, Mary spoke again.

"Why did you take Squonk along?" she asked. "Wouldn't it have been kinder
to leave him back there? Or did you want to try to bring out a living
specimen?"

"No," said Jim. "But without us to give him orders he'd go immediately to
the first Laagi he saw who could give him some, and ask to be put to
work. Doesn't it seem to you that that Laagi would want to know what a
squonk had been doing up until then, and why he was free for other work
now? And what's your guess on the possibility of the Laagi being able to
find out from Squonk what he's been doing for us-and perhaps learning
that AndFriend had brought at least two invisible alien intelligences on
their world?"

"I see," said Mary. "It was self-protection you had in mind."

The words could have been said with her earlier sharpness. But, once
again, there was a sadness that seemed to be underlying them; it was as
if, thought Jim, in some way he had disappointed her.

"Yes," he said. "But there's a certain kindness involved in bringing him,
too, whether you believe that or not. He's been involved in everything
we've done. For months he's been hunting that nonexistent 'key.' You
might say it's become his lifework-like your own determination to make
yourself of use to our world."

The pause before Mary answered this time was shorter than the others had
been, but long enough for Jim to hear his own words echoing in his mind.

"That was a rather brutal thing to say," said Mary.

"Maybe it was," said Jim. "But Squonk's given us everything he had to
give; and what he'd tell you he wanted most, if he could tell you
anything, would be that his wish would be to die working. As soon as he
finishes cleaning the ship, which was the excuse I had to use to bring us
here, I'll let him go back to searching the ship for the key. I've even
had the ship's robot tuck a couple of dozen small objects in corners
about the ship for Squonk to find. Of course, when he does find them,
we'll tell him they aren't what we're looking for, but it'll keep the
hunt alive in his mind."

"Until we reach Earth. And if we don't, which is most likely, he won't
either."

"He won't reach Earth in any case," said Jim.

"Why not?" asked Mary, and then answered herself. "Are you planning on
putting him out the entry port while we're still in space-"

She broke off.

"You mean you don't think he'll live until then?"

"That's right," said Jim. "I don't think he will." "Why?"

"I don't know," said Jim. He searched for the words to describe what had
given him the impression. "It's just something I feel from him. He's been
very close to dying for some time, I think. He can't last much longer."

Neither one of them said anything more for a minute.

"Look at him," Mary said then; and Jim realized she must have been
spending the small interval watching Squonk. "He's working away just as
he always does. What makes you so sure of this feeling?"

"Only the fact I've got it," said Jim.

They drove steadily down-galaxy, not saying very much to each other. A
couple of days, Laagi-time, went by. Squonk finished cleaning the
interior of AndFriend and was set to work hunting for the nonexistent
key, ignoring the fact-which did not seem to bother Squonk either-that he
would be searching the very areas he had just finished going over so
meticulously in the process of cleaning them.

"The third day two Laagi fighter ships appeared off AndFriend's right bow
at a distance of about eight hundred kilometers. They moved in to within
less than a kilometer and one of them disappeared, phase-shifted off to
someplace else. The one that remained kept station beside AndFriend,
following her toward the Laagi down-galaxy frontier, simply paralleling
her course and waiting.

"I wonder why the other one left?" said Mary

"Why do you think?" Jim answered. "His friend here was left to keep an
eye on us while he went to get more ships. They'll be planning to do
exactly what we did with La Chasse Gallerie when we brought her home.
Lock on to AndFriend and phase-shift with her attached, so that she has
to come along with them."

"Take us back," said Mary.

"Yes."

"What are you going to do?" she asked.

"That depends on you," he answered. "I can let them take us, or if you
give me back the ability to run the ship, I can make a phase-shift
jump-one long enough and at an angle that'll confuse them until I can
make a few more and get beyond their frontier in this direction-into
fly-swatting territory. As much as they might want AndFriend back, I
don't think they'll follow her there."

"You know I won't give you back anything."

"Think about it," he said. "Think it through, what'll happen if they take
us back?"

"I have," she said. "I'll study them for another year, that's all. Then
I'll set you free and you can take us home. But I've got to have that
year back on the surface of that Laagi planet."

"You'll never get it," he said.

"Why? Because you'll start fighting with them some way using what mind
control you have over this ship; and they'll destroy AndFriend completely
when they find they can't stop her just by cutting her up?"

"No, there's no way I can fight with AndFriend unless you turn me loose.
But suppose we just do let them lock on and cart us away. Stop and think
of it. They'll never let you down on the surface of that world of theirs
again."

She did not speak for a second.

"You're crazy," she said finally. "You're so determined to get away,
you're imagining things."

"No," he said. "Think. Think it through."

"I have," she said. In his imaginary mental image of her, he watched her
eyes narrowing. "Why wouldn't they take AndFriend back down on the
surface of their world?"

"They've had two human ships," Jim said. "They've picked up and taken
home two human-made ships with no humans aboard them. The first one just
up and left on its own and made its way back to the human Frontier and
beyond. So they tied down the second one when they got it home, so that
it physically couldn't take off. But it's not only taken off, anyway, but
got some of their own squonks to cut it loose so that it could. And in
each case, as far as they could tell, there was no human on board. In the
case of AndFriend, at least, they'd even had the entry port open at one
time, so that there was no atmosphere inside to support Earth life."

"All right," she said. "I can see where they'd be puzzled."

"Puzzled isn't the word. Frightened, I think, would suit the way they
feel, better. Somehow, either human ships can operate without any living
thing aboard-and Laagi ships aren't able to do that. Or else humans have
some way of being invisible and undetectable inside their own ships. In
which case, who knows what's been done by whatever humans might have been
aboard La Chasse Gallerie and AndFriend?"

"Hmm," said Mary. "I see."

"In any case," went on Jim, "whatever harm's been done has been done. But
they're certainly not going to take the chance of any more human
intrusions on their home world, or one of their home worlds, whichever
the one we were on is. Once they lock onto us, they're going to take us
out into interstellar space, well inside their territory, but far, far
away from any of their worlds, and effectively nail us down out there.
They'll post guards on us to see we stay where we've been put, and kept
that way until they've figured out the answer to how we did what we
did, which may take them a few thousand years or more. Meanwhile, what
you've learned so far isn't going to be getting back to do any good on
Earth."

"It might be like that," said Mary thoughtfully. "All right, we'll just
see. We'll let them come and take us away; and if they put us out in
space somewhere the way you think they will, I'll set you free, and you
can take us home."

"Then'll be too late," said Jim.

He imagined her staring at him, the brown eyes wide now.

"Are you talking absolute nonsense?" she demanded. "Even if they've got
guards watching, once you're free you can phase-shift AndFriend up to ten
or fifteen light-years at least, in any direction, can't you?"

"I suppose," said Jim, "it's not your fault you don't think in terms of a
military action in space. You didn't think I meant they'd just put a
couple of ships beside us wherever they left us, and then the rest of
them would all go home? We wouldn't do anything as stupid as that if the
situation was reversed; and nothing on the Frontier's indicated the Laagi
are any more stupid than we are. There'd not only be guard ships beside
us, but we'd be boxed in for as far as we could jump in any direction by
sentinel ships with instruments tuned to track us if we suddenly went off
by phase-shift. And there'd be other spaceforces on call near enough to
keep us tracked, and close in on us within a day at the outside, no
matter which way we went or dodged about." He snorted. "For that matter,
they might just come on board and remove our phase-shift engines."

"Of course," said Mary slowly, "this is all just a theory of yours."

A two-person Laagi warship phased in not a hundred meters from
AndFriend's right side.

"Woops," said Jim. "That was close. A fortieth of a decimal point
farther, and he'd have been in AndFriend's space when he came out of
phase-and that'd be all there was! Bet you a snap of the fingers that
whoever commands his flight is jumping down his throat, right now."

"These are aliens. We can't be sure of how they think," said Mary.

The Laagi ship which had just appeared rolled over on its side, revealing
what appeared to be two long bars, like skis, attached to its hull by
struts several meters in length. Both struts and runners were thick and
heavy, firmly bonded to the body of the craft. As they watched, the
bottom surface of the runners that was facing toward AndFriend began to
turn pink, and the pink color darkened until it became obvious that the
surfaces were warming up toward a white-hot heat, at which temperature
they would weld themselves firmly to AndFriend's hull at a touch.

Another ship appeared on the other side of AndFriend, but in this case it
popped into existence a much safer four or five kilometers off. But it,
too, had attachment runners and the face of these, also, began to heat up
as they watched.

"Maybe two more ships yet to come, to cover us completely," said Jim.
"Time's getting short, honey."

"Clear all, Jim Wander! Clear all-go! Go!"

As the words erupted from Mary's mind, Jim felt control of AndFriend
return to him. Two other Laagi vessels with runners had appeared and the
first two were drifting in close. He had programmed the shift down-galaxy
in his mind long before. It was an automatic thing to feed it to the
phase-shift mechanism.

They shifted.

All at once they were alone in empty space with strange stars burning all
about them.

"How far did we come?" Mary asked.

"At least three light-years," said Jim grimly. "I think we've taken them
by surprise, and maybe we'll be able to make it to fly-swatter
territory."

He calculated and shifted; shifted again...

He was scanning space in all directions around them, gratefully once
again using the powerful distance vision of the ship's equipment. "Look
at that, I think we're beyond the fly-swatter range-there are those
GO-type stars we saw before. Maybe that's what Raoul meant by Paradise-"

He broke off. The interior of the ship was suddenly a swarm with
invisible life.


Chapter 23.

It was unbelievable.  Not only that, thought Jim, it was
just about indescribable.

He and Mary and Squonk were surrounded by what could only be described as
a host of innumerable invisible fireflies. To call them fireflies and at
the same time to say they were invisible was a contradiction in terms,
but it was the only way of describing them. They were invisible to any
physical sight, even AndFriend's instruments did not register their
presence. But his mind saw them very clearly indeed as multitudinous
living points of colored lights, lights whose colors changed constantly,
so that it was like standing in the midst of a rainbow in the process of
sorting itself out from an endless number of tiny component parts.

And they were constantly in motion.

Not only that, but they were not only in the ship but all around it. They
were in the interior space of the ship, they were partway through the
hull of the ship, they were outside the ship, swarming in space and
stretching off into the interstellar distance like the tail of a comet.

"They see us! Like the other one!"

"That one doesn't."

"But these two do. It's lovely to see and be seen by you."

Their voices rang in Jim's mind, each one different and memorable. Each
one audible separately for a moment before they were drowned by a perfect
roar of greetings from what sounded at the very least like hundreds of
thousands of such voices, all entirely individual.

"Who're you?" asked Jim.

"I'm me," said the chorusing host of different voices.

Jim shook his head, stunned.

"If you'd speak just one at a time," said Mary, "we could hear you
better."

"Of course, if you wish. But what kind of hearing is that?" said one
voice. "We loved your friend. We'll love you, I think. Why aren't more of
you lovable?"

"I don't know what you mean by what kind of hearing," said Mary. "In what
way are we lovable?"

"Are there different ways of being lovable?" asked a different voice.

"I asked you a question first," said Mary.

"No, you didn't," said the voice that had agreed to talk one at a time.
"I asked you a question first."

"Got you," murmured Jim to Mary.

"What is 'got'?"

"Look here," said Mary determinedly. "What do you mean, 'that kind of
hearing?' and in what way are Jim and I lovable?"

"There really is only one way to hear," said the most recent voice to
speak to them. "Just like there's only one way to see. The small hole
that's your other friend doesn't see or hear us."

"You mean Squonk?"

"There it is again," said the voice resignedly. "You're just like your
friend who could see and hear us. It's very painful for us when a person
won't, of course. That's why we told your other friends not to come any
nearer. We only let this one come with you because you two can see and
hear us, and we wanted to talk to you. But you're just like your other
friend we loved dearly, who was here before. He'd start to tell us
something and then he wouldn't say it. You just did that. You said 'you
mean... ' and then you stopped."

"I didn't stop," said Mary. "I said his name was Squonk."

"You're doing it again. You say 'I said his... was...'"

"I think," said Jim, "that we've got a communications problem. When we
say 'talk,' we're referring to what we usually make as physical sounds in
the air-'

"Of course!" said the speaker. Jim had privately named him ?1 and, seeing
there were so many more of them, had, privately decided to think of all
the others as simply ?plus. "Of course, you garble it up very much, but I
think I understand you now. You make changes in your hole in order to
converse. But why do that when you can talk?"

"I was starting out to say when you interrupted me-" began Jim.

"I'm sorry. I did interrupt you.'

"-Yes, he's very sorry."

"-Very sorry, indeed."

"-We're all sorry with him."

"-We would have interrupted, too, because we didn't know you couldn't
talk and listen at the same time."

A roar of apologies and explanations, all in different voices flooded in,
then was cut off abruptly as the single voice spoke again.

"From now on, I'll wait for you to tell me when you're through
speaking."

"That might get a little clumsy," put in Mary. "Why don't you just wait
until one of us pauses? We always pause when we're ready to listen."

"Good. I'll do that. So will everybody else. Did you ask me a question
last, or did I ask you one?"

"Don't you know?" asked Mary.

"Of course I know, but I'm being nice."

"Jim was trying to explain that what you call talking we call thinking-"

"There you are," said the voice sadly. "You were just about to tell me
what you called something when you said..."

"Go on," said Mary, after a moment of complete silence.

"I was not saying what you didn't say," said the voice of ?1. "What I
meant to say was that you said nothing, you said a blank."

"Let me suggest something," said Jim.

"By all means," said ?1.

"As I said, we're having a communications problem."

"You did say that," put in a ?plus. "There's really no need to say it
again."

"Sorry," said Jim. Now I'm doing it, he thought, a little crazily. "I've
got a suggestion to make that might give us all a solution to this
communication problem."

"Good," said ?1.

"It's this. I'll start to talk and explain as fully as I can about Mary
and myself. When I'm done, I'll tell you so. I'll say, 'I'm through.'
Then one of you will answer me, telling me how much of what I said was
heard by you and how much wasn't. That way we may be able to figure out
where the communication breaks down, and why. With your permission, I'll
now start talking. You'll all listen without saying a word until I say,
'I'm through.' Then one of you will answer me, and Mary and I will do
nothing but listen until that one of you says, 'I'm through.' Then I'll
speak again until I say, 'I'm through.' You answer under the same rule,
and so on. Agreed? I'm through."

"Agreed. I'm through," said ?l.

"Good for you, Jim," said Mary.

"Thanks," answered Jim. "Tell me that again, later, will you-when I've
got time to appreciate it?"

He turned his attention back to their invisible/visible audience.

"All right, then," he said. "I'll begin. We seem to be able to talk to
each other to a limited extent, but wherever the concept behind our
thought isn't known or understood by the listening party, nothing comes
across. Instead, the listener hears what seems to be a blank, just as
Question Mark One, as I've named the one of you who's done most of the
speaking to us, said."

"As a result, there are undoubtedly going to be a lot of blanks in what I
now say to you. Hopefully, finding out where these blanks are will help
us establish the areas in which one of us doesn't understand the other,
and we can try to fill those blanks with meaning by trying to describe
these unknowns."

"Just to give you something to start working with, I'm already aware that
you don't understand the difference between us and some of those you call
our friends. The third living thing aboard this ship, which you call a
hole for reasons I don't understand, is actually something different from
Mary and myself. Mary and I call ourselves humans. We have bodies with
two legs, two arms and a head. The individual we call Squonk, which is
the third living thing here, has two legs, a head and six tentacles, but
no arms."

"Mary and I come from a planet orbiting a sun a long way from here, on
the other side of the territory of the living things we call Laagi.
Squonk is a less intelligent, servant species used by the Laagi. The
Laagi are those you call our friends, but who can't see you and whom you
told not to come any farther, with the result that they sat in their
ships and died at the edge of your territory. Mary and I came here
without our bodies to study the Laagi. The Laagi don't know that we can
live outside of our bodies. Since you have no bodies most of what I have
just been saying probably made no sense to you. So I will stop here,
although there's a lot more I could say. I'm through."

He stopped. There was a prolonged silence.

"I will begin," said ?1, "since you mentioned me-why are you radiating
surprise? I'm through."

"I just thought the name I'd given you would be one of the things you
couldn't hear. I'm through," said Jim.

"I don't know what that blank is you said you just gave me, but you
identified me as you began speaking, so I'm answering. Shall I continue?
I'm through."

"Yes. I'm through," said Jim hastily.

"I'll continue, then. Speaking for all of us, I feel that our
responsibility in this case is greater than yours, since we had already
talked to your particular beloved friend who was here before you and
found his speech also full of blanks. Although I must say, regretfully,
that there seemed to be some problem about his thinking, as well. In
fact, forgive me for saying..."

?1's mental voice had sunk to a confidential whisper.

"... but he sometimes saw things that weren't there."

?1's voice went back to its normal tone and volume.

"However, we have had experience with a person such as you and clearly
you have had no experience with persons such as us. Therefore we...
and I most certainly... in any case, thank you. It is, as you
apparently understand, very hard to guess what might be found in the
blanks that occur in your talk when you speak to us. Let me try...
therefore to recapitulate what you told us.

"You said that the holes of some of your friends were different from the
holes of your other friends. Therefore there was some larger or general
difference between you and them. We were left with the possibility that
the friends who are holes different from you do not understand why you
sometimes do not take your personal holes with you when you go to visit
them-I refer strictly to your personal holes, not the somewhat larger
hole you and your nonseeing, nonhearing, speechless friend here, whose
hole is in some way different from yours, are currently wearing. The
question arises why do any of you, similar friends and different friends,
wear holes at all? I'm through."

"Fine," said Jim. "Already we're making some progress. When you talk
about holes, I think you're referring to what we call ships, or bodies.
Were there a couple of blanks in the last few words I said? I'm through."

"There were," said ?1. "Apparently you have a different conception of
holes than we do. I'm through."

"You tell me what you think holes are. I'm through."

"A hole is hard to define. A hole is a hole. It is a place that-isn't.
I'm through."

"Isn't what? I'm through," said Jim.

"Isn't the universe. A hole is any place where the universe ceases to be
because the hole's there. I'm through."

"When I say 'space' do your minds hear 'universe'? I'm through."

"In a way," said ?I cautiously. "There's both something extra and
something less in what you say when you say hole than when we say it. I'm
through."

"When I say 'think,' do you hear me saying 'say'? I'm through."

"Certainly. Did you intend to say something different? By the way, do you
suppose we could stop saying 'I'm through' so much, now? We believe we've
come to understand the rhythm of your end-of-speech pauses."

"Fine. I'll be glad to stop saying it. It was a clumsy way of taking
turns talking anyway."

"Very clumsy."

"All right," said Jim. "With that much out of the way, let's try this.
When I say man, woman, ship, Squonk, Laagi, Earth, moon, what do you hear
me saying?"

"You're just," said ?1 "repeating the word hole, over and over again."

"Aha!" said Mary.

"Yes," said Jim. "Aha, indeed. ?1, I think we've got a real problem here.
We aren't hearing what the other is saying at all. We're hearing the
closest thing to it that our minds can find in their own experience and
understanding."

"Then you don't really know what a hole is?" said ?1.

"We don't know what you mean when you think the concept that our minds
translate into the word 'hole.' On the other hand, you use 'hole' as a
sort of general term for a great number of things that our experience
teaches us are entirely different."

"I'm distressed!" said ?1. "How can this be? A hole is a hole!"

"A hole, if I understand you correctly," said Mary, "is any place space
isn't. You make the distinction, but apparently you can travel through
holes as easily as you can travel through space."

"Why not?" said ?1.

"I'll tell you why not. Because we can travel through space, but we can't
travel through what you call holes."

"I see. Well, that makes sense," said ?1. "A hole can't travel through a
hole without one absorbing the other. We've seen little holes run into
big holes and become part of them. Forgive me. There is an exception.
Sometimes, if the holes are about equal size, they both break up into a
lot of smaller holes which go off in all directions."

"Like two asteroids crashing together," said Jim.

"That's what I said-two holes hitting each other," replied ?1.

"The point is," said Jim, "that we all need to understand that what we're
doing is thinking at each other, not talking; and that what's received
may not really be what was sent.."

"No, that's not right, either," said Mary. "What you mean to say, Jim, is
that what ?1 thinks may appear to be something we understand, when
actually we aren't understanding it at all; and vice versa. The blanks in
speech are when a sent concept finds no common experience to relate to in
the receiver at all. So there's two problems. One, how to tell the other
side about something they've never known and have no word or description
for; and two, how to be aware that when the other side seems to
understand a thing you mention, they're not confusing it with something
else they know about, or see entirely differently."

"Good for you, Mary," said Jim.

"Well, I thought what you said could use a little straightening out."

"Er... yes. I suppose. Well, ?1, what do you say to what Mary said?"

"It had relatively few blanks. We appreciate it. But I will ask a
question of you both. Why do you keep identifying yourself, each other,
and even me?"

Jim found himself unexpectedly at a loss as to just how to answer that.

"I think he's referring to our using names Jim," said Mary. "We do it so
that everyone present will know which one of them is being spoken to."

"But isn't that obvious? You identify a person by speaking to her."

"You referred to me just now as 'her.' How would you refer to Jim, then?"
Mary asked.

"I would just refer to him as him," said ?1.

"Are you bisexual yourself, then?"

"I beg your pardon, but what you asked me if we were came through as a
blank."

"Why do you say him to Jim and her to me, if you have no concept of
sexual differences?"

"The kind of differences you referred to came out as a blank," said ?1.
"But to answer your question, I simply referred. I identified no
difference between you in referring."

"You see," said Jim, "that's exactly what I was talking about. They can
say something that comes through loud and clear but doesn't necessarily
mean what we think we hear-or receive, rather. ?1 just said whatever he
said, and when we thought he was talking to me we heard what he said as
'him'; and when we thought he was talking to you-"

"He was talking to me," said Mary.

"-we heard it as 'her.' ?1, what do you hear when I call you '?1'?"

"You say 'you,"' answered ?1. "I must say you seem moved to say it a lot
more often than is necessary."

"How many of your friends-I mean your own people-are listening to us talk
right now?"

"I would assume," said ?1, "as many as are interested."

"Sorry," said Jim. "I may have phrased that a little badly. Let me ask
you instead how many of your people are here, in and around the ship,
listening to us talk?"

"As many as want to be, I assume," said ?1. "I don't understand what
you're striving to elucidate."

"How many of your people are there, all together?"

"Many," said ?1.

"Can you count?"

"I'm sorry, but what you asked if we could do came out as a blank."

"Mathematics unknown. Do you know how what you call holes-large
holes-move about?"

"Certainly. The movement of hole material has always caused a web of
forces throughout the universe. By these forces are the holes moved, and
the forces generated by their movements move other holes. It is the
primary dance-not one of the prettiest, but quite wonderful in its own
way."

"When I say 'stars,' does the concept come out as a blank to you?"

"Oh, no. We understand you quite clearly when you say 'stars.' They are
individual holes of somewhat larger size."

"Also hot-I see what you're driving at, Jim," said Mary.

"Well, more hot than you are, or this larger hole you have around you.
Your holes would be changed on coming into contact with a star."

"They would indeed," said Jim. "Luckily, there's no star here. Do you
know if there ever will be-here, where we are now?"

"One will pass through this point in the universe in four million, five
hundred thousand, eight hundred and twenty-nine point four seven six six
two eight years," said ?1.

"There will, will there?" said Jim. "And that brings us back to what
we're driving at. If you don't recognize mathematics, how did you decide
exactly when a star would be here? And where did you learn the concept of
'years'?"

"The concept of what?" said ?1. "1 merely told you when the hole would
arrive where we are now."

"Oh," said Jim.

"Yes, it's dancing in this direction and therefore it'll be here then.
That's the way the dance works out. But of course you'll have moved in
four million, five hundred thousand, eight hundred and twenty-nine point
four seven six six two eight years, won't you?"

"You can count on it," said Jim.

"We suspected you would. By the way, we are enjoying talking to you very
much."

"We," said Jim, "are enjoying talking to you."

"In that case," said ?1, "may I suggest one thing? We have nothing
against holes, but they really are somewhat uncomfortable compared to the
universe itself. Would you be agreeable to moving outside this somewhat
larger-than-you hole of yours, so that we can talk under more natural
conditions?"

Jim hesitated. Mary evidently was also hesitating, for she said nothing
also for a moment.

"I beg your pardon?" said ?1 anxiously. "I haven't offended you by that
suggestion?"

"No, no," said Jim.

"It's just that I don't know if we're able to move outside the ship,"
said Mary.

"But I see nothing attaching you to this hole," said an obviously puzzled
?1.

"That's right," said Jim. "There isn't anything attaching us to this
ship. So, why not?"

"Squonk," he told the small alien, who had continued to work steadily all
this time-they had him searching for the bits and things Jim had caused
the ship's robot to hide about the vessel's interior so that Squonk could
continue his hunt for the "key" that he had been put on to begin
with- "I've got to go away for a little while. But keep searching until I
get back."

Squonk signaled an affirmative with his antennae, and broadcast an
eagerness to continue with his mind. Jim returned to the question of how
to leave the ship with these invisible mental entities.

He imagined himself-his mind only-stepping outside the hull of AndFriend,
free to roam the universe as a nonphysical thinking entity, alone.
Nothing happened. He got angry and tried again, forcing against whatever
held him back.

There was a strange sensation, a sensation that he thought later was what
it might have felt like to be a living cork and feel himself be pushed
out of the neck of a bottle of champagne, because the bottle had been
shaken and too much gas pressure, released from solution in the wine, had
built up beneath him. He found himself outside the ship.

"There we are. Nothing to it," he said. "How do you like it, Mary...
Mary? Mary, where are you?"

He had suddenly become conscious of a sense of loss, and that loss was of
the identity of Mary, which had been so close to him all this time.

"I'm right here, Jim. Jim, where did you go?" He heard her voice. "Jim,
I'm in the ship, but I'm not part of you anymore. Where are you?"

"I'm outside the ship now. Evidently when we travel as free spirits, we
travel on our own. Come on out, Mary. Just be determined to come out and
join ?1 and me and all the rest. You may have to push a little, I did,
but it can be done."

"Push? How? Jim, I don't know-"

"Ah, well," said Jim. "I guess it's just something you may not be able to
do. I didn't have any trouble, but maybe it just isn't possible for you.
Don't get yourself all worked up trying, if-"

"What do you mean?" snapped Mary. "If you can do it, of course I can do
it! I can do whatever... there! I'm out."

And she was, too. He could tell by her voice, somehow, that she now was
near to him, rather than apart, or inside him as he had grown so used to
her being. He was bothered by an odd sense of abandonment, and he
reassured himself by summoning up the picture of her in his mind. It
comforted him. There she was, as bright as ever.

"Quite a feeling, isn't it, Mary?" he asked.

"It is." Her voice was unexpectedly soft. "You're right beside me, aren't
you, Jim?"

"Absolutely right beside you," he said. "Invisible but present and able."

"That's good," she said.

"You find it strange not to be in a hole?" inquired the voice of ?1.

"Very strange," said Mary, still with that unusual softness in her voice.
"Very strange, but lovely."

"Do you, too, find it lovely?" said ?1, and Jim understood
without needing to be told that he was the one being addressed.

"You could put it that way, I suppose," he said.

"It is the natural way to be, of course," said ?1. "Sometime, when we can
understand each other better, you must explain to me why you chose to
live in holes in the first place."

"Where did you people come from?" asked Jim.

There was a strangely long pause before ?1 answered.

"We don't know," he said. "It never occurred to us to wonder about that
before. Do you suppose we started out in holes, too, and found our way
out?"

"Can you think of an alternative?" Jim countered.

"We could simply have sprung spontaneously into being.... No, that's
ridiculous," said ?1 thoughtfully. "No," he went on, obviously addressing
someone besides Jim and Mary, "and I find it hard to believe we existed
before the universe did, let alone created it. Of course, we might have
created it-until the facts are known, any hypothesis is possible, but
most of us don't believe that."

"You speak for yourself most of the time, but then you suddenly start
speaking for all the rest of your people-all that're here, anyway," said
Jim. "Are you just guessing how they feel or do you actually know?"

"I was not hypothesizing," said ?l. "Of course. Agreement or disagreement
is obvious. Can't you feel those reactions yourself?"

"Feel is not the way we generally communicate agreement or disagreement,
particularly when we're wearing our holes," said Jim.

"That's strange," said ?1. "This time you said 'hole,' but it had a
larger meaning."

"I actually said 'hole,' not one of my own words that you translate into
it," answered Jim. "I'm learning from you."

"How happy of you!"

"No need to get all excited," said Jim uncomfortably. "Learning's a
natural process for any thinking mind, isn't it?"

"Ah, but the will to learn! To exert that will is a compliment, in
addition to all else. I must exert myself to learn from you, in turn!"

"Well...," said Jim. "Thanks."

"There is no need to thank me for a pleasure which you make possible to
me," said ?1. "Now that we're all back in the universe again, would you
care to dance? Or is there something else you'd prefer to do?"

"Like what?" asked Jim.

"I've no idea," said ?1, "since I've no experience in what pleases you."

"Let's just go on talking," said Mary.

"No," said Jim. "We can always talk-am I right about that, ?1?"

"How could it be otherwise?"

"Then, for now can we go and visit some of those GO-type stars and land
on any planets they may have? I want to see if any of them live up to
what Raoul was talking about with those references of his to 'paradise."'

"Would this be pleasurable also to you?"

"Of course. I just said-"

"I think he was asking me, Jim," interrupted Mary. "Yes, thank you. Even
though Jim suggested it, I'd be interested to see any planets of those
nearby GO stars."

"What do you consider nearby?" queried ?l.

"Those we can see," said Mary.

"I can see six million, two hundred thousand and forty-nine holes of the
type you conceive, with planets orbiting them."

"Oh," said Jim. "Well, let's just start with the closest one to where we
are now and go on from there. All right, Mary?"

"Fine," she answered.

"Then we go," said ?1.


Chapter 24.

They went. It was a magnificent but surprisingly brief trip. Outside the
ship as they now were, they were at the head of the comet's tail of
invisible yet rainbow-colored fireflies that were those of 71 's race
which had chosen to come along. They went like a comet's tail to the
nearest yellow pinpoint in the firmament surrounding them-but not
directly.

For aesthetic reasons, Jim found himself understanding through some
wordless channel of communication, they approached the star of their
destination in a delicate curve. He was a little disappointed that they
arrived there almost as quickly as if the star in question had been no
farther away than the length of AndFriend.

A few minutes later, they were hovering just above the soil of a very
Earthlike world. One which looked as if, with no more than relatively
simple terraforming, it could be made habitable.

But the portion of it they could see, at least, was disappointingly far
from qualifying as a paradise in any human terms. They appeared to have
landed, if that word fitted the situation, on a dry, desert-like surface
of black sand with some awkward, green-brown growths poking up here and
there through the soil to no more than three or four meters in-

"-what a marvelous solution, just because we see the same things..."

"No, ?1," said Jim. "Forgive me for contradicting you-"

I'm picking up the way they talk now, he thought a little wildly, not for
the first time, "-but it's not that we see the same thing, it's that we
feel the same thing. Just as, right now, Mary and I were feeling for
Raoul, when he was here with you."

"Feel! Of course, feel! How obvious!" fizzed and crackled ?1. "A solution
to all incomprehension-to feel alike. How simple. How easy. How natural!
I'll learn to feel as you feel, dear friends-for you are dear friends,
obviously-and there'll be no end to the wonderful conversations between
you and us-"

"There'll have to be at some time in the future," said Jim. "Mary and I
are going to have to get back to our people, if we can make it safely
around the Laagi."

"The Laagi are your friends-I apologize, your not-quite-the-same
friends-the living holes we had to tell to not come any farther this way?
Why would they not want you to go to a place that moves you as deeply as
you and Raoul were moved? Surely they would be moved as well?"

"Almost certainly not," said Mary. "They live on a different world and
see things differently."

"But we live on no holes at all and see things very differently from you;
and we were all deeply moved just now that you should be so moved by what
you and Raoul saw."

"It's hard to explain," said Mary. "To begin with, Raoul did see what you
felt us reacting to. But we were just imagining what he saw, not really
seeing it. Also-"

"But you made us see it all over again, what we saw Raoul see that was
not there."

Mary hesitated and Jim stepped quickly into the moment of
nonconversation.

"At a guess," he said, "you either had what you'd seen through Raoul's
mind triggered again in your own by our feelings; or you took our
feelings and associated them with the picture you remembered picking up
from Raoul."

"Nonetheless, we do have a tool for understanding between us, do we not?
Isn't that true?"

"Yes," said Mary and Jim together.

"Marvelous!" said ?1. "That was very well answered. Are you beginning to
learn to talk and listen at the same time, then, as we do?"

"I doubt it," said Jim drily. "That was an accident. We just happened to
answer you at the same time. That sort of thing happens because we can't
read each other's mind, instead of the opposite."

"I'm so sorry."

"It's not your fault," said Jim.

"Nonetheless, we're sorry. We're all sorry you should be so crippled and
deprived."

"Thank you," said Mary. "But as it happens we humans prefer it this way."

"Prefer to be crippled!"

"We prefer the privacy of not having our fellow humans reading our mind
all the time."

"Another blank," said ?1 sadly, "just when I thought I was doing so well
in understanding you."

"I've no idea what blank you mean," said Mary.

"I think he's talking about 'privacy,'" said Jim.

"What is this concept, 'privacy'?"

"It's the pleasure of being alone, and the right to be so," said Mary.

"But you like being together! Just like we do!"

"That's true," said Jim, "but we also like being alone, sometimes."

"How can you have pleasure in company when you also have pleasure in
isolation? Doesn't one cancel out the other?"

"You see," said Jim, "we humans are individuals-"

"But so are we-I'm sorry, I interrupted."

"As a result," said Jim, "when we're alone we often want to be with
others and when we're with others, we can want very much to be alone."

"You baffle me completely," said ?1. "Such a mixed-up existence! However,
let's let the difficult question of how you enjoy two diametrically
opposed states wait until we understand each other better. I think I
understand 'Christmas tree' better now. But what is 'snow'...?"

So, for some little time Jim and Mary were busy trying to give meaning to
the vision ?1 and his people had picked up from the battered mind of
Raoul when he had been with them.

"Is the rest of this planet's surface all like this?" Jim asked ?1, once
they had done their best with explanations.

"By no means," said ?1. "Every part of it differs, of course."

"Why did you bring us here, then?" asked Mary.

"But I thought that was obvious. It was Raoul's favorite place."

"Did he have other favorite places?" asked Jim.

"Not on this planet. But many on other planets. Do you want to see them?"

"Yes," said Jim.

So ?1 and his friends took them to the other places Raoul had
cherished-the places he had referred to later as Paradise.

They were spots on some twelve different Earthlike worlds-and three of
them were indeed so Earthlike that if the atmosphere had been adequate
for humans and there were no unknown dangers hiding undiscovered there,
it was conceivable that humans might have landed on them the next day and
started building. The rest were such as to require terraforming-as much,
in some cases, as it might take to clear the cloud cover from Venus,
lower that world's temperatures and turn it into a green and fruitful
planet. Four of the worlds they visited were almost all ocean.

But each had at least one spot that had triggered off in Raoul a vision
of one of the fondly remembered scenes from the Canada of his youth. In
most cases his mind had had to play tricks with the local scenery to make
it into the place of his memory. But some came so close to being
Earthlike that only the imaginative equivalent of a squinting of the eyes
was necessary, even for Jim and Mary, to see it as a part of their home
world.

A tree-filled valley, a steep, bare cliffside, a riverside, a lake-even
one area of desert, filled with wind-sculpted rocks, which Raoul's
imagination had transformed into the appearance of the houses and
buildings of his own home town. All these were shown to Jim and Mary by
?1 and their innumerable escort of living minds. And as they went, Jim
found himself getting more and more able to see in the alien realities of
these locations the familiar shapes and outlines Raoul had imagined in
them.

In proportion, ?1's understanding of what went on in Jim and Mary's mind
improved with remarkable speed. Steadily, the immaterial alien found more
and more words with which to talk meaningfully to them and seemed to
grasp ever more quickly what they meant by the words they thought at him.
Privately, Jim was amazed at ?1's ability to learn. He was strongly
tempted to compliment the alien on it, calling on Mary to back him
up, except that Mary had grown more and more silent as they went along;
and, having had some experience with her now, Jim hesitated to draw her
into a conversation unless he knew certainly that she wished to be drawn.
On the other hand, he had become more and more convinced that there were
things he and she needed to discuss.

He decided to bull ahead.

"The subject of privacy and our human desire for it came up awhile back,"
he said to ?1. He was finally getting used to the idea that if he thought
of himself as speaking to ?1, that alien immediately realized he was
being spoken to. How this understanding was managed, Jim did not have the
slightest idea, but since it seemed to work there was no reason not to
use it. Accordingly, he had fallen into the habit of doing so, to the
extent that occasionally he forgot and thought at Mary, without
remembering to specify that it was her he was addressing.

"Yes, I remember, of course," said ?1.

"Tell me, would there be some way in which I could talk with Mary
privately? That is, without at the same time talking to you and your
'friends'. Maybe I'm not putting it clearly enough. What I'm trying to
say is that I want to talk to Mary, now, and not have anyone else hear
what we say."

"If you like, of course," said ?1, "none of us will listen. If you speak
to Mary, alone, it becomes obvious to the rest of us that it would be
very unkind-indeed, unthinkable-for one of us to listen."

"Oh... good," said Jim. "I'll just keep in mind, then, that I'm
talking to Mary alone, and you tell me that none of the rest of you will
hear what we say?"

"Naturally," said ?1.

"What is it, Jim?" asked Mary.

"Well, I... " Jim, would have liked some reaction, some signal from ?1
and the rest in the comet tail, that they were really not listening to
what he was about to say, but evidently that was so unnecessary that none
of them, including ?1, thought to make it. It was rather like the finding
that it was unnecessary to say "I'm through" when a speaker was finished
talking and ready to listen to an answer.

"Well," he said again. "About these worlds we've been looking at. They
aren't the paradise Raoul's mind made them out to be, of course; but they
could certainly be settled by humans, a few even without terraforming.
But with the same kind of thinking, it's easy to see that the Laagi could
settle them just as well with about an equivalent amount of terraforming
to make most of them habitable to their race."

"Yes," said Mary. "Of course. What of it?"

"Why, it brings up a question of our responsibility toward claiming these
worlds as soon as possible for our own race," said Jim. "I'm sorry-I don't
mean to sound pompous; but these are, literally, worlds that both we and
the Laagi can use; and we're presently on speaking terms with the race
that controls them, even if they don't have any use for them, themselves.
The question is what should we do about it?"

"If you want my opinion," said Mary, "I certainly think we ought to tell
our present friends we badly need the worlds and we'd like to settle on
them, and find out if our settling on them would disturb them. But that's
just my opinion. I'm going to leave all the dealing with ?1 and the rest
up to you."

"Me?"

"That's what I said."

"...Why me?"

"I'll tell you why you. Jim, I've had time to do a lot of resting and a
lot of thinking since we ended up in that Laagi hospital-"

"Yes, but what I'm talking about right now-"

"Let me finish. Be patient, it'll all tie together when I've had my say.
To begin with you were right. I'd been overworking."

"Well..."

"More than that," said Mary determinedly, "I'd lost my perspective. I've
learned a lot from you and Squonk-yes, from Squonk, too. You were right
when you compared me to him. Part of me was like him, and like the Laagi,
in general. That's why I did so much better a job of understanding them
from the first than you did."

Jim thought of saying something, then decided not to.

"You were right. I live to work, and they live to work; and I liked them
for that. I admired them for that. And, toward the end, this started to
affect my judgment. Unconsciously, I was out to prove that I and they
were on the right track and all the rest of the human race was wrong. I
began wanting to justify everything they did; and I began to
anthropomorphize. I began to find human reasons and emotions in them that
weren't there, just to prove how right their way of life was."

She paused.

"Do you remember that Laagi in the hospital who killed that squonk that
was asking to be put back to work, when it wasn't able to work and never
would be again?" she asked. "Remember the Laagi made the sort of gestures
for praising a squonk and giving it orders, then killed it at the very
moment when it was being most happy over being sent back to work after
all?"

"I remember," said Jim.

"Well, when he killed that squonk, part of me was shocked beyond words,
because he'd lied to the squonk by essentially promising it what it
wanted while all the time he was planning to kill it. But at the same
time another part of me was agreeing with him for putting out of the way
a worker that wasn't any use anymore. I missed the real meaning of what
was going on in his mind. He killed the squonk not because it couldn't
work anymore, but because it was in misery for that reason; and he
praised it and gave it a work order just before it died so it would be as
happy as possible at the moment he ended its life. So that it died happy.
Do you understand?"

"Yes," said Jim. "Yes, in fact, that part I understood then, when it
happened."

"All right. I didn't until later, when you told me our Squonk couldn't
live much longer and he'd be happiest hunting for that nonexistent key as
long as he lived. It was then I faced up to the fact that I could
approach an understanding of the Laagi and squonk reaction to work, but
I'd never really understand it, even if I worked myself to death, trying.
It's a different order of things. So I saw my limits."

"Limits got nothing to do with it," said Jim. "You did a magnificent job
there on the Laagi planet. I used to be amazed watching and listening and
seeing how you put things together and understood them."

"Limits have got everything to do with it. We've got to face the fact
that each of us, individuals that we are, can have a particular knack or
gift or ability for understanding a particular type of alien that other
humans don't have. I had it for the Laagi. You've got it for ?1 and his
little friends."

"Oh, I don't know that I'm any better at it than you are..."

"Let's not play polite games!" said Mary. "You're better here, and you
know it. I know it. I was the best one of the two of us to investigate
the Laagi and you're the best to investigate the... the mind-people. I
don't know why. Maybe the fact you've always been fascinated with space
gives you something in common with them I don't have; but I've been
listening to you and watching you; and I'm the one who's been amazed at
how quickly my partner is picking up information, putting two and two
together to get four where I can't."

"Hell!" said Jim.

"What's that supposed to mean?"

"It means I'm bowled over, if you want to know. I never thought... "
Jim ran out of words.

"You never thought to find me admitting somebody else was better at
something than I was, let alone you being that person."

"Er...yes."

"Well, now you have. And now, let me tell you something more about
talking to the mind-people about humans on these worlds of their
territory. What I dictated to notes through you, back on the Laagi
planet, were facts. I kept my conclusions to myself, partly because I
wanted to sneer at you for not being able to make them for yourself- I've
no direct evidence, but my own strong personal opinion is that the Laagi
live on only one home world, too-just like we do."

"You think so?" Jim waited for an explanation and when none was
forthcoming, prodded for it. "Why?"

"For a number of reasons. We're overpopulated on Earth to the breaking
point. People are cheap. But it takes all our people, working like
beavers, to keep enough manned fighting ships on the Frontier to match
the Laagi there. All the evidence that I could glean seemed to add up
that the Laagi have fewer cities on a much less rich world than Earth-but
their population per city is much, much higher than ours. And both they
and the squonks have a work ethic we can't match, plus not having the
internal dissensions that still go on, even in our present-day United
World, where no nation fights nation, or group fights group, anymore
because the battle with the Laagi comes first. But in spite of this the
battle on the Frontier hasn't resulted in their winning, any more than it
has in our winning. In short, the Laagi are only able to produce enough
ships and personnel to match our production. One planet's worth. So they
need to expand to other planets as badly as we do; and in fact that's why
they've been hammering so hard in our direction after finding they
couldn't come down-galaxy this way, because of the mind-people."

"Whoof!" said Jim, which in thought-language came out rather like an
invisible exclamation mark.

"So, I suggest-I only suggest, mind you; the actual decision's up to
you-that if the mind-people are willing to have these planets settled by
us, we might even suggest that one or more of them be opened to the
Laagi, too, provided we can reach an agreement with them. Then we could
go back to the Laagi, and after we'd found out how to talk to them, tell
them that through friendship with us, only, they had a chance to settle
on the new worlds they've always wanted, down-galaxy. There's no hurry
about getting all this done. The worlds for the Laagi are going to have
to be terraformed for them as much as most of the worlds we get are going
to need to be fixed up for us, so we've got plenty of time to hammer out
a way to talk to them. But if that idea works we'll have peace with them,
as well as new worlds for both our races. Plus, from our viewpoint, we'd
have two other intelligent races as friends and neighbors in case we run
into a really unfriendly one, later on."

Jim thought about it.

"What about this business of ?1 and his friends finding it painful the
way the Laagi can't see or hear them?" he asked.

"I don't know," said Mary cheerfully. "You're the expert in this area.
I'll leave it to you to come up with an answer to that problem."

"Thanks," said Jim.

"You're entirely welcome," answered Mary. "Now, hadn't we better be
getting back into contact with ?1 and the others?"

"I guess we should."

He paused for a second, puzzling over just how the getting back in
contact should be accomplished. Finally he decided it couldn't require
much more than simply announcing that he and Mary were once more ready to
engage in general conversation.

"?1," he said (or thought), "are you there?"

"Of course," said ?1. "Though I'm not sure I fully understand what you
mean by 'there."'

"Neither do I," said Jim. "So let's not get into that. The point is,
you're close enough so that we can talk, now that Mary and I are through
with our private conversation."

"You have completed your private conversation? Excellent. We welcome you
back into conversation with us. Happy! Happy!"

"We say 'hurrah'-or at least, some of us say 'hurrah!'"

"I fail to see the difference between that and 'happy!' However, if you
wish-'hurrah!"'

"Come to think of it, I guess there isn't any difference," said Jim.
"Happy! Happy!"

A general chorus of "Happies!" poured in on his mind.

"On this subject of 'there,"' said ?1, "you seem to relate it to being
physically close enough so that speech is possible. But speech is
possible at any distance in the universe. How otherwise could the large
holes, and the congregations of large holes, be able to tell each other
which way they were dancing?,

"Say that again?" asked Jim.

?1 good-naturedly said it again, word for word.

"To my way of thinking," said Jim, "you seem to be confusing physics with
communication."

"But isn't all dancing a form of communication?" said ?1. "Forgive me if
my limited capacity to understand confuses this subject between us."

"No, it's not you." Jim tried to think of ways of explaining what he
meant. Then he thought of human dancing, real dancing, and he had to
admit to himself that in essence, it was communication in a sense.

"But large holes have no minds," he said. "Therefore they don't
communicate the way we do. If I understand what you mean by their
dancing, it's simply that they're moving in response to the forces acting
on them from the rest of the solid matter in the universe. All the other
holes, I mean-from the very beginning when there was only one big hole
that's since broken up into all the other ones."

"Was there only one big hole in the beginning? How interesting," said ?1.

"Well, we think there was. You mean you people don't know? I was under
the impression you knew everything there was to know about the physical
universe, holes and space and all..,

"Oh, no!" said ?1. "We understand very little. That's why we're so eager
to indulge in the pleasure of learning from you."

"We're-well, I'm complimented," said Jim. "But I have to admit we don't
really know how the solid universe started, either. We only have
theories-hypotheses-like the one I just told you."

"A hypothesis, only?"

"I'm afraid so."

"I'm devastated. Nevermind, though. Perhaps it will prove to be a fact."

"Yes," said Jim, "and since we're on the subject of facts, I meant to ask
you about your stopping the Laagi-those you call our other friends-from
coming down into your space, here?"

"You'll remember I explained that," said ?1. 'They would not see or hear
us; and, this being very painful, we told them not to come any farther.'"

"You say it was painful," Jim said. "Let me suggest another concept that
might fit it better. 'Uncomfortable'?"

"No," said ?1, "that approaches the concept as we know it, but only
partially, as your concept 'painful' approaches it only partially.
Surely, you must know what we mean, though. Is it completely unknown to
you and your friends, the effect of being not-seen and not-heard?"

"Well, yes and no," said Jim. "It's been used as a sort of punishment by
social groups among us probably since we first began to band together in
social groups. To be ignored and cut off from all communication is
unpleasant for an individual. I think I know what you mean."

"Yes," said ?1, "to an extent I think you do know what we mean. We are
extremely sensitive to that sort of unpleasantness, ourselves. It
disturbs us all greatly when we must use it to discipline one of our own
members."

"You do that sort of thing to one of your own?"

"Alas," said ?1. "Every people must have their rules."

"What could one of you do to the others to require that kind of
reaction?" asked Jim.

There was a momentary hesitation on ?1's part.

"I don't think it can be explained to you," he said finally, "at your
present stage of understanding of us."

"I suppose," said Jim.

He thought he could imagine what it must be like for one of these eagerly
friendly little creatures to be suddenly treated by all the others as if
he or she or it did not exist. "How long a session of that does it take
to bring one of them back to proper behavior?"

"Oh, forever, of course," said ?1. "Once we have ceased to see or hear
them, they no longer exist for us. Even their memory is put away."

Jim felt the mental equivalent of an unexpected chill on the back of his
neck.

"You don't mean you shut them out permanently?" he said. "What do they
do? Where do they go?"

"Who knows?" said ?1. "Since they no longer exist, in fact, what does it
matter? But you wished to talk to me about these friends of yours called
Laagi?"

"Yes," said Jim. He was still shaken by the idea of some living thing
like ?1 being shut out from the society of its kind forever. There was
an indifference in the attitude of ?1 which reminded him forcibly,
suddenly, of how alien the other mind he spoke to was.

"You see," he went on, "like us the Laagi are holes who live on one of
the larger holes called a planet; and you have planets in your space on
which either they, or we, could live, after the world had been changed
some physically-they and we would change a world to suit ourselves in
different ways, you understand. So probably the reason they were headed
this way was to find other worlds on which they could live."

"You think so? How interesting! But it makes sense, being holes, all of
you seem to prefer holes as environment. I should say, being physical
beings, you seem to prefer physical environments. Did I get that right?"

"You did, indeed," said Jim. "Now, the question I wanted to ask was
whether, if they or we occupied the surface of some of these planets,
that would bother you, in this not-seeing, not-hearing way."

"I don't know," said ?1. "Possibly not... yes, we think possibly not,
since they and you would be part of the holes, but of course, you do see
and hear us, so the question doesn't arise."

"You're seeing Mary and me out of our bodies-out of our personal holes-"
said Jim. "The rest of our people are still in theirs. Maybe, as physical
entities, they won't be able to see or hear you either."

"No, no!" said ?1: "Your own ability to see and hear us reached out
through the hole where you were with your third friend who did not see or
hear us. You radiated to us, and of course we radiated back. As you are,
so must others like you be, I'm sure. If so, you wouldn't bother us at
all occupying any of the planets in this area of ours. But to answer your
question, even your Laagi friends might not bother us once they were a
part of a planet, since by definition, such a hole is outside our
universe. But why do you ask me this?"

"For a rather complicated set of reasons," said Jim. "You see, the Laagi
have been having a war with us-"

"A what? Even improving as I now am in experience with your way of
thinking, that last came across as a complete blank."

"Say, a serious disagreement," suggested Jim.

"Ah, a disagreement. Yes, and therefore--?"

"Well, therefore when we arrived here, the Laagi had just been chasing
us. Tell me, how did you get them to stop right at the border of your
space like that?"

"Oh, we simply told them to stop. You must remember, I've already given
you that information."

"And they just quit? Gave up coming any farther?"

"Oh, yes. Of course."

Jim thought that behavior of that sort did not seem to fit what he had
seen of the Laagi. He returned to the question.

"Just because you asked them to stop where they were?"

"Dear friend, I have told you twice now," said ?1, with distress rather
than anger, "we did not ask them to stop where they were. We told them to
stop there."

Suddenly, Jim understood. The chill that he had felt earlier when ?1 had
talked about his race refusing to see or hear one of their own kind who
had violated a law of their society should have prepared him for this,
but it had not. Now it was back-but a hundred times stronger.

"Jim, what is it?" said Mary.

"If I had a body to do it with," answered Jim greenly, "I think I'd be
sick."


Chapter 25.

"Why?  What is it?"  Mary asked.

"Our butterflies have fangs," said Jim.

"What do you mean... oh!" said Mary.

"?1," said Jim.

"Yes?" said ?1.

"Were you listening?"

"Of course not," said ?1. "It was determined, if you remember, that when
you and Mary exchange concepts we do not hear you."

"Good. Thanks. We've got a few more words to say to each other and then
we'll be back in conversation with you."

"I look forward to the prospect."

"Jim?" said Mary.

"Yes? "

"What is it about their stopping the Laagi that upsets you so much? It's
not just what you said. I can feel you're upset."

"I guess it's because I've been a fighter pilot," said Jim. "I can put
myself in their place."

"The place of the Laagi who were told to stop?"

"Yes. I've fought them; I've seen them fight when they hadn't a hope
until we killed them; and now I've seen them on their own world. I can
guess how they follow orders. I can imagine how it was for them, those
who got stopped."

"How was it, then?"

"You studied them. You know as well as I do. They live to work; and for a
Laagi fighter crewman what he does is his work. You can imagine for
yourself what it must have been like to have the combined minds of our
bodiless friends here tell them to stop."

"I'm sorry, Jim. Maybe it's because I never was a fighter pilot; but I
still don't see why hearing about this upsets you so much."

"Maybe you're right. Maybe it's just me. But picture it for yourself.
Those Laagi went out under orders to follow their version of the
centerline down-galaxy. They were under those orders when the contrary
order of the combined minds of these people told them to stop. And they
stopped. That's why I said these little friends of ours have unexpected
fangs. You remember how ?1 didn't seem to cane what happened to one of
their own people after that particular mind-person was cast out,
ignored?"

"Yes. How does that tie in?"

"Don't you see? Somehow these mind-people can set up a-they'd probably
call it a concept-that says any living being that can't see or hear them
has to stop at a certain point in space; and it's a concept that
overrides anything else that being's been told or wants to do. When they
say stop, they mean literally stop. And that's just what those Laagi
crewmen did."

"You mean that's why they halted their ships where they were, why they
didn't go back to their world to report what had happened?"

"I mean they couldn't go back. They couldn't do anything but what they'd
been overridingly ordered to do. So they did it. Think of them, driving
along. And an overriding order suddenly tells them to stop their
progress, shut off their power, do nothing more. So they do it. They
obeyed, because they weren't able to do anything else. They stopped...
and there they sat, in the case of those ships we looked into, until we
came to see what was going on. You've seen how the Laagi can't stand
being idle. But they had to sit there and die. And there they'll sit
until Judgement Day. them and all the rest who brought ships close enough
to this zone in space that our mind-people've taken over for their own.
You and I could see and hear them, so their order to stop didn't affect
us. But otherwise you and I, Mary-we, too, we'd have been sitting there
now, dead."

"I... see," said Mary.

"Think of those Laagi then, sitting there, not able to move, waiting to
die; and finally, dying. Sitting there dead, killed by these nice, fluffy
little friends of ours, here. No wonder they've been able to keep these
worlds and this part of space to themselves for however long they have.
And no wonder the Laagi are looking for other worlds to live on in any
direction but this one."

"Are you saying we shouldn't want the worlds that're here, either?" There
was a hardness in Mary's answer.

"I'm not sure what I'm saying. But we don't want to bring people in here
to live under the nonexistent noses of aliens who can suddenly just order
them to stop what they're doing until they die in place, do we?"

"No. You're right about that. But what can we do to make sure they'd be
safe, though?"

"I don't know. I've got to get more of a handle of ?1 and his friends.
Let's go back and talk to them some more. ?1?"

"Yes. Happily, you are with us once more, both of you."

"And we're very happy to be back."

"That makes us all happy together. What a fine thing."

"Yes. About the Laagi. I may have told you we were being chased by them
when we came here."

"Don't you recall telling me that?"

"I think so, but I'm not sure."

"How strange. You seem very forgetful."

"I guess I am."

"However, be assured you did tell us that."

"...thank you."

"It's a pleasure to assist your failing memory."

"It only fails in little things, as a matter of fact," said Jim. "As I
was saying, about the Laagi. Now, you were telling me they couldn't hear
or see you, but when your whole race spoke to them, telling them to stop
where they were and not come any farther, they stopped. So they actually
were able to hear and see you, after all."

"But my dear friend! I didn't say they couldn't see or hear us. Any other
intelligent mind should be able to do that. I said they wouldn't. They
refused to see or hear-which was very insulting and extremely painful.
There was no excuse for such behavior at all, since we'd never met them
before. So we shut them out; and they've stayed away even from the place
where we told them always to stop, ever since."

"I see," said Jim.

"We are glad you understand. But of course, we knew you would, being a
gentle, courteous being yourself."

"Thank you."

"We do not merely compliment you. It's the truth."

"Thank you, anyway," said Jim. "Now, before we escaped from the Laagi,
who had us as prisoners for a while, we learned something about them. I
don't wish to make you, my friends, at all uncomfortable, but from what I
know of the Laagi, it occurs to me there's a chance you might have
misjudged them."

"Oh, no. That's impossible," said ?1.

"It is?"

"Absolutely... What makes you think we misjudged them?"

"Tell me something first," said Jim. "When they intruded on you, why
didn't you just go away from them, instead of doing something to stop
them?"

"But this is the best spot for dancing in the galaxy. Beyond any question
the best spot! Should we give up the best spot of all to dance because
some impolite beings intrude on us, there? We were here first. We didn't
intrude on them-they intruded on us!"

"Just a minute," said Jim. "I'm afraid there's something I didn't
understand as well as I thought I did. You told me you didn't like holes,
and that the movement of the holes in relation to each other in the
universe was a dance. But since you didn't like holes, I assumed you had
no particular feeling for their dance, so--?"

"Oh, no! No, no, no, no! No such thing. The dance of the holes is not
something to be either liked or disliked-you're right. It merely is. But
by itself it has little to recommend it. A hole-forgive me, dear friend,
because I know you have a personal small one around, somewhere, though
you show your good taste by being out of it at the moment-is not a pretty
thing. However, we use the lines of force that is the dance of the holes
as threads upon which to weave our own beautiful dances. The
possibilities are limited only by creativity itself. That way, this web
of natural forces can be made into a beautiful, a shining thing; and
here, at this point, is where the possibilities for such creative effort
are greatest. We have always lived here because at some time our
ancestors found this the best place for dancing. We will allow no
intrusion upon it."

"But I mentioned my people might like to live on some of the holes in
this area

"Their being there would not affect the dance in any way. It is a small,
polite gesture on our part to allow such as you to do what you want on
and with the holes, themselves."

"The Laagi would not disturb the dance either by living on some of these
holes," said Jim.

"No, but they would disturb us greatly by coming through this space and
refusing to see or hear us."

"That's bad, I know," said Jim, "but was it sufficient provocation for
you to kill them?"

"Forgive me," said ?1. "I am baffled. We are baffled. You have come up
with a blank of which not even the edges of meaning am I able to grasp.
What was it you said we did to these intruders?"

"Kill. Make die. Cause to cease living," said Jim.

"None of this makes any sense at all. Forgive me, dew friend, but as I
said, we are baffled. Completely baffled."

"Tell me," said Jim. "Do you live forever?"

"Do we never cease to exist? Of course, any one of us could wish to cease
existence sometime. But none of us know when, just as we do not know how
we came to be as a people."

"No, I mean, do you, ?1, expect to never cease to exist?"

"Oh, I don't see how that would be possible. Even if I wished to exist
forever, I don't believe anything can do that. Of course, long before it
was forever, I'll probably get tired of living and go out."

"Out where?"

"Just out into the universe by myself. There've been speculations of a
different sort of existence once one has gone out, but such speculation
is generally considered idle among us. If one is tired of this existence,
why would one want more?"

"Does anyone ever put anyone else out?"

"How could they? But in any case, what an unthinkable concept! The
undiluted rudeness of putting another out of present existence!"

"You may have been responsible for the Laagi going out of present
existence-the ones you stopped, I mean."

"Oh, no," said ?1. "In the case of the ones we stopped, after a while
their minds left their holes and went off somewhere, back the way they
had come. Their minds were very much in existence when last seen..."

There was a pause.

"I am informed that we noticed that their minds when they left were
completely unformed. Like new minds, who have to learn everything. You
don't mean to suggest that our stopping them was responsible for their
minds to lose acquired form, that it was a kind of putting-out?"

"I'm suggesting," said Jim, "that possibility."

There was another pause before ?1 spoke again.

"If so," said ?1, "that was an unplanned result, which we regret.
Nonetheless, they brought it on themselves by stubbornly refusing to
answer us when we spoke to them in a polite and friendly manner."

"That may not have been their fault," said Jim. "You see, there are
drawbacks to being formed as a mind when that formation takes place
within a personal hole."

"What drawbacks could stand in the way of polite response?"

"The fact that they may not have believed you were there."

"Not there?"

"That's what I said," said Jim.

"But you can't be serious. As intelligent minds they had to perceive us,
let alone the fact that they became very disturbed after we had spoken to
them, which they had not been until that moment. Certainly that effect
augurs a cause which would be that they were aware of us."

"I'm sure they were," said Jim. "But you ran up against a particular sort
of conditioning imposed on them by the holes within which their mind had
been formed. Mary and I, now, grew up in personal holes that communicated
by causing vibrations in the gases of the large hole on which our
people lived. Our reception of these sound waves was what we call
'hearing'; and because of that early training, even though we know now
it's a case of our minds receiving the concepts your mind gives them, we
conceived of what you say to us as sound vibrations heard in a gas
medium, like that in which our minds were formed to adult intelligence.
The Laagi, on the other hand, were formed in personal holes that
communicated by distorting the shape of those personal holes in various
subtle ways to convey concepts to each other."

"This is strange and wonderful," said ?1. "But I fail to see where it
might be leading us."

"Hopefully, to a better understanding of the Laagi," said Jim. "You see,
when your people first spoke to the Laagi in the ships that approached
your territory, they confronted those Laagi with a situation that the
Laagi knew could not possibly be, but which was nonetheless undeniable."

"No such situation is possible!"

"I'm afraid it is possible. That was the trouble. The Laagi knew what
they were seeing-receiving from you in the way of a message could not
possibly be delivered as it was being delivered. At the same time their
mind gave them no choice but to believe it was being so delivered."

"I don't wish to offend you, dear friend," said ?1, "but you're the one
who's making no sense."

"Let me try to give you an example of what it must have been like for
them. Do you know what I mean when I mention the concept of carbon
dioxide gas?"

"You're speaking of a gas which is a familiar component in larger holes,
and even in some smaller holes."

"You're also familiar with it in its solid form?"

"Of course."

"What would you think if you saw a block of it in solid form floating in
the atmosphere of a very hot star?"

"It could not. It would take on its gas form, immediately."

"But what if you saw it as I said, in the heat of the star's gases but
itself still in solid form."

"I could not."

"Now," said Jim, "if I saw such a thing and knew the chunk of frozen
carbon. dioxide to be actually that, and the gases of the star to be
actually as hot as I've said they were, I'd consider that I was having
what my people call a hallucination."

"You are saying you would be less than healthy. You have not really
thought you saw such a thing, have you?"

"Rest easy," said Jim. "No. Of course not."

"I am so relieved. If you had, you would be sick and we would be forced
to shut you out. I should imagine your people would do likewise?"

"Not exactly. We've got other ways, ways of helping people with
hallucinations not to see them anymore rather than shutting them out."

"You must tell us sometime how to do this. But, I understand. You're
using this image of a block of carbon dioxide remaining in ice form
although in the midst of heat more than sufficient to change it into a
gas, as an example. We fail to see its application to our simply speaking
to these Laagi."

"I'll explain," said Jim. "Just as in order to make sense of your
thoughts, Mary and I must imagine we hear them as words, that is, as
sound waves through a conducting medium, under the same sort of
conditions one of the Laagi you spoke to could only conceive of receiving
your message as if it were visual signals from another Laagi."

"Visual signals?"

"Yes," said Jim, "distortions of the shape of another Laagi hole.
Specifically, the signals had to be given by some other Laagi, since
their signal system is built on the shape of their particular personal
holes and that form's unique capabilities for distortion. Therefore, what
the Laagi receiving you thought he saw was another Laagi-in a ship where
there was room for at most the two that were already there-saying
something to him he could not understand, because first, there were gaps
in what he heard-these being concepts the Laagi did not know-and second,
what did reach him implied a people and situation that were inconceivable
from his point of view. He could only conclude that he was doing the
Laagi equivalent of hallucinating. Naturally, since he thought the one of
you speaking to him was merely an aberration of his own mind, he did not
reply. He rejected the reality of the image-as you rejected the
possibility of a cake of carbon dioxide, ice-'dry ice,' we call it
ordinarily among our people-floating in a hole of high temperatures."

From ?1 there was an extended moment of silence.

"What you tell us is almost impossible to believe," he finally answered.

"Don't take my word for it," said Jim. "Some of you go to the large hole
the Laagi inhabit-it's just up-galaxy a handful of light-years from
here-and observe for yourself them talking to each other the way I've
described."

"It would be distasteful for any one of us to go to such a place and do
such a thing, so I will volunteer to do so," said ?1.

There was a silence following his last words that went on and on for
perhaps a minute and a half, at Jim's estimate. Then ?1's voice spoke
again.

"Yes, it's true," he said. "My friends are all astonished. If I had not
witnessed it myself, they would have been unable to conceive of such a
thing. Your insight in this case is worthy of the highest praise. But we
were certainly right to tell them never to intrude upon our space. How
could anyone ever communicate to any purpose with such creatures? And
what benefit could be gained by such communication?"

"Possibly, great benefits, the existence of which you don't even yet
suspect," said Jim.

"Come now, dear friend," said ?1. "The fact that you are ordinarily a
hole, yourself, has made you over-indulgent toward these Laagi. Say what
you will about our misunderstanding of their reaction when they came this
way first, the fact remains that they approached us in the persona of
their personal holes, which you and Mary had the politeness not to do;
and in any case, what could they have to tell us that we do not already
know?"

"We're to take it then that your people already know everything?" Mary
asked.

Since she had said nothing for a very long time indeed, her reappearance
in the conversation jolted Jim and seemed to throw even ?1 and his
friends momentarily for a loss. There was a perceptible pause before she
was answered.

"Not everything, of course," said ?1, "but anything that's at all
important."

"Important to you, that is?" demanded Mary.

"Of course, what is important to us... I see, you're implying that
there may be knowledge which is important, even though it doesn't concern
us directly. As a theoretical possibility, that could be true. But even
if it were true in any practical sense, why should we concern ourselves
with it if it's unimportant to us?"

"Because it may become important to you," she said.

"In the memory of our people, that has never happened."

"Doesn't mean it couldn't happen," said Mary.

"There is really nothing new anywhere-"

"Oh, you've encountered people like Jim and me before?"

"No. Of course not. But in the sense of something new and important-if we
should simply shut you and the Laagi out, how could our own way of life
in any sense be affected?"

"It might," said Jim, "if, after you had shut us out, you suddenly
discovered that one or more of the large holes in this area of the galaxy
that you like so much had been moved from its accustomed orbit, with the
result that the dance of the holes in this area as a unit had been
altered. Wouldn't that cause some alterations in your own dancing with
the local pattern of those forces?"

"WHAT?"

The voice was still the single voice of ?1, to Jim and Mary's
perceptions, but it was as if that voice had suddenly increased to
incredible proportions.

"I think we got the attention of all of them at once with that question,
Mary," Jim said.

"You can't move large holes from their orbits," said the voice of ?1,
back at ordinary volume.

"I'm not so sure," said Mary. "We're holes ourselves, remember. We know
things about holes that were unimportant to you and so you never learned
them, while we're learning more every day. I'd say it won't be too long
before we're able to move even the largest of holes from their orbits."

"You would have absolutely no right, no right at all to do such a thing!"
said ?1.

"Perhaps not. It depends on your definition of what's right and what
isn't," said Jim. "In any case I don't think a people like ours would
ever do such a thing. Mary just brought that up as an example of
information that you may have considered unimportant, but which might
turn out not to be so, after all."

"These Laagi," said ?1, "do you suppose they might eventually be able to
move large holes?"

"We'd only be guessing if we tried to answer that," said Jim. "But of
course they're holes, themselves, just as we are, so they'd be interested
in the same sort of information."

"We must find out this information at once," said ?1.

"Can you?" said Jim. "We holes don't actually have it, ourselves, yet, as
I say. But even if you did find out, it might be that being nonholes, you
might not be equipped to understand, let alone use, such knowledge."

"But this is terrible! Perhaps we should go to the world of these Laagi
right away and command them to never leave their planet again, just as we
commanded them never to come any closer to our area of space."

"Are you sure that would work with a whole race?" said Jim. "Forgive me.
I don't mean to trouble you with unpleasant possibilities, but when you
stopped them from coming any closer before, there were a lot of you
speaking to just a few of them. Would your command be so powerfully
effective, do you think, if you were speaking to just about as many minds
as you are, yourselves?"

"Oh, there's no doubt of it. None. I'm sure there couldn't be any doubt
of it. Not to be successful commanding them is practically unthinkable.
Practically... "

"Well, then, you can do that. I'm sure there wouldn't be any bad
consequences," said Jim.

"What bad consequences? How could there be any bad consequences from an
order given and obeyed?"

"None, of course. None I can think of anyway," said Jim. "Though the
Laagi are a little on the combative side, by nature. After all, they've
been fighting us for quite some time over a frontier situation rather
like the one you have with them. I was just thinking, if you commanded
them and it didn't work, and afterwards they found out how to shift the
larger holes... Well, of course at the moment they don't know you
exist, but if you commanded them not to leave their planet and it didn't
take, they'd know you were here and would probably come not only to get
at the empty planets in your area, but to find out more about you so they
could pay you back for what you did to them earlier."

"But we did nothing at all to them, but tell them to stay out of our
territory. They couldn't resent a small thing like that, surely? You,
dear friends, none of your race would let yourselves be bothered by a
little act like that?"

"If any did," said Jim, "I assure you, I'd be the first to put your view
of the situation most strongly to him or her."

"There. You see? And yet, it was these Laagi friends of yours you were
suggesting we allow in here to settle on some of the planets of our
space!"

"It just might be a good way to keep them under control," said Jim.

"Keep them under control? But how?"

"Well, of course," said Jim, "I'm assuming, as I said, that we also had
some of our own people also settling on planets here at the same time.
I'm not sure, mind you, that there are some of our people who'd be
willing to do this. But if there were, and once we got able to talk to
the Laagi, using the method they use to converse since they can't
converse our way, those of us who were here could watch the Laagi
settlers and point out to them that what they were doing was wrong, if it
turned out to be something that might be undesirable to you."

"You say," said ?1, "you don't know if your people might want to come
here? But as I remember, you earlier suggested that they would be eager
to settle on some of our planets."

"Did I use the concept 'eager'? Forgive me. I was actually just exploring
the possibility with you first, before we go back and suggest it to
them," said Jim. "I think you and I got off on other topics and I never
did get around to explaining that I'd have to ask them, first. You see,
the rest of our people don't know that we've found livable worlds here.
Oh, they know it's possible we might, and if by some strange chance we
never went back to them, they'd eventually get around to sending other
individuals to see what the situation is as regards livable holes, here;
but at the moment they don't know definitely about these planets, and
they most definitely do not know what a wonderful people you all are. I'm
sure they'll take to you at once, from what we'll be able to tell them,
and want to come. I just don't have the right to say certainly that they
will come when I haven't yet talked to them."

"But you would talk to them?"

"It'd be the first thing we'd do, on getting home."

There was a silence on ?1's part that extended for some seconds at least.

"Jim," said Mary softly, in this moment, "have you any idea what kind of
forces would need to be involved in moving a star out of its orbit?"

"Shh," said Jim. "Little pitchers... "

"What?"

"Small fireflies have long antennae."

"But he said they wouldn't... oh!"

"Exactly."

"I understand. A verbal promise only..." said Mary. "You're right. But,
by the way, you called them butterflies last time you described them."

"Did I? 'Fireflies' is better."

"Actually," said Mary, "I think you're right about that, too."

"We must, I believe," said ?1, breaking in on them, "think this matter
over. Meanwhile, will you dance with us?"

"Dance?" said Mary and Jim together.

"You hesitate? In all our memory, out of the millions of dances we have
done, there are five we remember as classic. We will do one of those,
together."

"Forgive us," said Jim. "But we aren't hesitating because we don't want
to dance with you. But you should be told that I, at least, don't really
know what you mean by 'dancing."'

"I'd realized there was somewhat of an ignorance on your part where
dancing was concerned," said ?1. "But I did not understand it could be so
complete. You really are not aware of what dancing is? I told you, it is
a weaving of patterns around the threads of force set up by holes in
their movements through the universe."

"Yes, but that only defines it," said Mary. "What Jim means is we've got
no conception of how you weave such patterns, let alone an appreciation
of them. We've never seen such things in all our experience."

"You really have not? It's incredible!" said ?1. "And yet you seem like
such dear friends and nice people. Tell me, aren't you aware at this
moment of the skein of developing and shifting forces about and through
us, at this moment?"

"No," said Mary. "Jim?"

"Neither am I," said Jim. "I'm sorry."

"Unbelievable! But it's so hard for me to grasp that you're basically
holes, in nature. You seem so rational, so intelligent, so nice, that I
fail to keep your limitations sharply in perspective. Do you really feel
nothing of the forces? Look at that white star over there. Don't you feel
the powerful, moving pull of it like a great arm sweeping through all of
the universe?"

"Hold on," said Jim. "Let me concentrate. Maybe I can feel it."

"I'll try, too," said Mary.

Jim honestly tried. He was a competitor by nature, and his first reaction
to this sort of situation was that if someone else could do something, he
could do it, too. Feel... he told himself, concentrating on the pinpoint
of light that was the white star, feel...

"Yes!" he said finally. "There's something there, a sort of soft
pressure-Mary, you know how it feels when you've been in the shadow of a
cloud and it passes away from the sun, and you feel the warmth of the
sunlight as it creeps across you?"

"Yes. I've got it myself, now," answered Mary. "Just a touch, though. And
if I tried to do anything else but concentrate on it, let alone whatever
you call dancing, ?1, I'd lose it."

"Quite incredible," said ?1. "It's obvious one of our great dances would
be entirely wasted on you. Five of them, can you understand that
tremendous fact? Five great dances winnowed out of millions, over a time
equal to all the memory we as a people share between us? These five great
patterns of movement that reflect the greatness of accomplishment of our
race! You must understand at least a little of what that means."

"I think we do," said Mary seriously.

"In any case, as I say," said ?1, "any of those five would be wasted on
you. But we can carry you, as we carried you to look at the places that
Raoul saw differently and loved, through one of our simple little dances
that we have for the new-budded minds among us that have everything yet
to learn. Will you come? Are you ready?"

"Why not?" said Jim to Mary. "Shall we dance?"

"I'd love to, thank you," said Mary.


Chapter 26.

"...But it's like skating!" said Mary," like skating at a billion miles a
second!"

"Like riding a bobsled down a bobsled run!" shouted Jim. He had no need
to shout. It was the excitement in him making him do it.

"Like skating down a bobsled run, then," Mary shouted back, "without
having to worry about hurting yourself!"

A yellow point of light in the far distance grew almost instantly into a
huge golden sun as they dived toward it, then swept past, with the galaxy
full of stars pinwheeling around them, toward a white giant of a sun past
which they curved in turn. It was indeed like traveling at unimaginable
speeds, for they were literally in motion. It was not like phase-shifting
where you ceased to be at one point, were spread out throughout the
universe and reassembled at a different place, all in literally no time
at all... but it was fast, faster than imagination could believe.

And it was in fact a dance, all graceful swirls and turns across enormous
spaces, as if they actually danced in a mighty ballroom where the stars
were lamps. But it was more than just a dance. The creativity of it
reached into Jim and woke all sorts of emotions and yearnings in him,
building him inwardly toward an understanding of he knew not what. Also,
he was actually beginning to feel the skeins of gravitic forces reaching
out through space, the natural forces about which the dance was woven;
like a piece of silk with threads so fine as to be invisible, woven on a
magical loom that could be known, but neither viewed nor touched.

I'm skating out here with the stars,

In space with the stars, with the stars... sang Mary.

"Jim!" she cried. "I'm making my own music to go with it. Are you doing
that, too?"

"I'm doing something-or it's doing something to me!" Jim shouted back.

The dance built to a climax; and in Jim's mind a realization broke like a
shower of colored lights from a skyrocket bursting far overhead. It came
to him suddenly that he had found his blue mountain. For a long time now
the Forever Road had been inclining upward; its steepness had increased
without his noticing that he was going uphill. But now he understood that
he had, and understood why. Because the road had brought him not only to
his mountain but to the very top of it.

For the blue mountain was the universe. Not just this one galaxy, but the
whole universe; and he stood at the highest point of it. From where he
was he looked out and down in all directions to the universe's end. He
was at the point he had searched and traveled to come to-and, then, just
as he was beginning to believe that he could see the shape of the dance
and the forces it was woven about, it crescendoed. It completed its
statement. It ended.

And they were back at the point where they had first started to dance.

"There you are," said ?1.

"?1, that was truly lovely," said Mary softly. "Thank you."

"It was indeed," said Jim. "Thanks."

"It was nothing. Or, actually, it was a dance so simple and small that if
I had not known how limited you were, I'd have been ashamed to show it to
you. But you did respond to it, didn't you?"

"Oh, yes," said Mary.

"Now you can understand, perhaps," said ?1, "why one of us would spend
all his available existence dreaming and working to create one really
great dance, if what you saw was only a small one; and why this space we
need in which to create is so precious to us and has to be protected at
all costs."

"Yes," said Jim. "I understand that a lot better, now."

"Meanwhile," said ?1, "we've thought it all over. We will help you if you
and your people will help us. We will both have to trust each other a
little, since we can never really know holes and you can never really
know us. But after thinking it over, we believe if we both try hard we
can work together. So we will let you bring your people in to live on the
planets of our stars, and we will also let the Laagi in, once you can
find some means to show us clearly that they understand enough about us
that they won't destroy this precious place or the labor we live to do.
Is this agreeable to both of you?"

"To me," said Jim.

"And to me," said Mary.

"Then we are agreed," said ?1.

"And in that case," said Jim, "we ought to be getting back into our hole
that we brought with us-the one we call our ship. If you'll show us where
that is."

"You are there," said ?1. And, instantaneously, they were. At it, but
just outside its hull.

"Hmm," said Jim, disgusted. "I could have found it, come to think of
it. All you had to do was think of it, to find it. Isn't that right?"

"Quite right," said ?1. "But, since you asked, it was no trouble to do it
for you."

"We're obliged," said Mary.

"I don't quite understand that concept, but I suppose you're expressing
some sort of appreciation for being brought back here. As Jim has pointed
out, you could have done it for yourselves, so appreciation is hardly
necessary. Farewell-"

"Wait a minute!" said Jim.

"Yes?" answered ?1.

"We've got to get back inside the ship so I can move it toward our home
planet. But I'd appreciate your help on the way. We need to find a Laagi
ship with at least one Laagi inside and take it back with us, with the
Laagi in it unharmed. You can help us with that, can't you?"

"You mean," said ?1, "by ordering those within it to make their ship
accompany your ship?"

"You understand exactly," said Jim.

"I suppose this is an undertaking that will help us all toward the
situation both our races most deeply desire?" said ?1.

"That's right," said Jim. "We've never been able to bring back a live
Laagi prisoner before, so that we could work out any method of
communicating with that race. If we can bring one home now, we can get to
work right away at solving the communication problem. Will you help?"

"Certainly. We've already established the fact our two races will help
each other. This merely executes that decision. Shall we go find what you
wish right now?"

"Give us a few minutes alone with each other and the ship here, first.
I'll call you when we're ready to go."

"Agreed," said ?1; and suddenly not only was he gone, but there were none
of the firefly colors of the mind-people anywhere around. They were alone
with AndFriend and the galaxy.

"I wish we had our bodies," said Mary dreamily.

"I know what you mean," answered Jim. "I do, too."

They were both silent for a long moment.

"But I can see you perfectly well, you know that?" said Jim. "Isn't it
funny? When I had you around in the body I never really looked at you;
and then, all this time, with no one to look at, got me started digging
out the old memories of you and putting you back together, piece by
piece, until I had you all complete in my mind's eye. So that now I can
see you as clearly as if you were standing in space, right here in front
of me, beside AndFriend."

"You can't. Not as if I was really here."

"Yes, I can. I tell you, I literally couldn't see you any clearer if you
were actually here in the body. I've got every part right, all built back
together, a bit of nose here, a touch of smile at the corners of your
mouth, there and there, all complete."

"Oh, Jim!" She laughed.

"It's sober fact," he said. "I don't know why I didn't have the sense to
take a good look at you when we were on the ground, back at Base. Because
you're beautiful. You've probably heard that so often it doesn't mean
anything to you. But you really are; and I just wanted you to know I've
finally realized it. I don't know why I didn't have the sense before.
Anyway, you understand, don't you, Mary?"

She did not answer.

"Mary?" he said. "You understand, don't you?"

Still, there was no answer.

"Mary?" he said. "Hey, Mary! Ahoy! Jim, here! Mary, do you read me?
Answer me, for anybody's sake!"

"Hadn't we better be getting back into the ship?" she said. Her voice was
utterly cold.

"Certainly. Right. But I was asking you if you could understand why it
took me so long to realize-"

"Why don't you shut up for once-just for once?" she said. "Everything has
to be a joke to you, doesn't it? A lovely moment like that dance and you
have to turn it into a clown act. Let's drop the subject, shall we, and
get back inside? The sooner we get back to Base the better I'm going to
like it!"

Jim felt as if he had been punched in the stomach. His mind whirled,
baffled.

"If you want to," he said at last.

"I do."

He thought of the inside of AndFriend-and they were within the ship.

"If we're going back into Laagi territory to look for one of their ships,
you'd better start charting a flight plan-" Mary broke off suddenly. "Oh,
no!"

Jim had already seen what she had seen; and the blow this time was in the
same category as the one of a moment before-which was still baffling
him.

Squonk half-lay, half-leaned against the com-seat of the pilot's
position. On the deck just before the seat and under the controls panel,
where the pilot's boots would normally rest, were lined up all of the
small objects Jim had caused the ship's robot to secret about AndFriend's
interior. All except one. That one, Squonk still held.

His legs were extended by slightly different amounts, but approximately
enough to raise him to the height necessary to let him rest his body's
weight on the edge of the seat; his neck was extended, his head rested on
its left jaw upon the seat and all of his tentacles but one lay loosely
about. He was unmoving and limp, except for that one tentacle. This also
rested on the seat by his head; and the end of it was tightly curled,
holding a large, shiny metal hex-nut, probably had been the last of the
objects he had found; and hopefully, Jim thought, the one that had
finally represented to him the long-sought "key," which he had located at
last.

Mary said nothing; but Jim could feel, as if it was something tangible,
the outpouring of emotion from her. The image of her in his mind was
crying; and all his upset over her reaction to him just now outside the
ship was swept away by the pain in him at her pain.

"Mary, don't," he said. "He didn't even know you or I existed. It didn't
matter from his point of view whether the 'key' was real or not. He
probably died happy, thinking he'd found it. In any case, he died the way
he wanted to, working."

"Leave me alone!" said Mary... and he could get no more from her than
that.

Yielding at last to things as they were, he turned back to the demands of
duty. Taking mental control of the ship, he ran an automatic check of
AndFriend's equipment, internal and motive, and laid out a series of
phase-shift jumps back into Laagi territory, close to the Laagi galactic
centerline, and did the calculations on the first shift.

Having done that, he put out a call.

"?1," he said. "Where are you? We're ready to travel now. Could you come
here, please?"

A single invisible firefly light showed up before his nose.

"You didn't specify where 'here' was to be," said ?1. "If you'll do so in
the future, I'll be, as Mary says, obliged-and I hope I was right in
guessing that it implied gratitude of one kind or another."

"It does; and you're welcome, which is one of our standard answers to
that polite phrase," said Jim. "Now, about what we're going to do: if you
can help me in finding a Laagi ship, it would help a lot. Also, how will
you be going about issuing your command to those aboard it to follow this
ship? Can you act as a speaker for a large number of your people, or do
they have to come with us, or can they just show up once we've found a
Laagi ship, or what?"

"Yes," said ?1, "I believe we can help you find one of those holes you
call Laagi ships. I will travel with you; and when needed, I can utter an
order with the full voice of my people. It's not necessary for them all
to be there, in person. To ask you a question in turn, how are you
planning to take this ship with you when you go?"

"It takes us," said Jim.

There followed a rather confused discussion between the two of them in
which Jim tried to explain both phase-shifting and ordinary drive to a
mind that was completely unused to thinking in physical terms at all.

"... Suppose we leave the matter at this," said ?1 at last. "You tell
this hole of yours to move to a certain place and it goes there. Can we
agree on that?"

"Yes, although-"

"Please!" said ?1 firmly, "no more explanations. Holes, particularly
holes without a spark of life or intelligence, are profoundly
uninteresting to me. Is my statement essentially correct?"

"It is," said Jim. "All right. We're going to make our first phaseshift
to approximately the area of your frontier with the Laagi, the area where
you first told them not to come any closer. From there, we can look
farther into Laagi territory and see if they've set up some kind of watch
to catch us, if we cross back more or less where we originally came in."

"Very well," said ?1.

"Right, then," said Jim, "here we go. Shift number one-"

He shifted.

?1 disappeared.

It was a full minute before he reappeared.

"I apologize!" he almost spluttered. "I most sincerely apologize. We all
apologize and confess. When you spoke about moving stars, we had some
doubts that you might have been talking of something you could never
really achieve. I will be absolutely truthful with you; we only
half-believed you'd ever be able to do any such thing, no matter how long
you tried. Not that the mere possibility alone wasn't reason enough for
us to take action. But when we see now that you've already achieved the
instantaneous repositioning of smaller holes... Well, we apologize for
our doubts, which you must have guessed we had. Believe that you can
count on our full cooperation from now on-in every possible way."

Jim was suddenly very grateful that he was not in his body at the moment
and that in any case ?1 would not have been able to read the expression
on his face. Mentally, he pounded his fist against his forehead. Of
course! Why couldn't the same mechanics founded on the Heisenberg
Uncertainty Principle, which had birthed the phaseshift technique, be
used to shift other, larger things-even stars? It would be a huge job to
find the proper means and be a tremendous undertaking to actually shift
something that large. But when he got back to Base, it would be well
worth suggesting just that as a line of research.

"Well, thank you," he said to ?1 now. "And think nothing of the fact you
were doubtful. We'd expect anyone to be."

"The Laagi also use this method to move their smaller holes-ships, I
mean?"

"I'm afraid they do," said Jim gravely.

"Let us hurry and find one of their ships to take back to your world so
that you can get started immediately discovering how to communicate with
them."

"Right away. Let's first see," said Jim, "if they've got any ships out
there, watching for us to come back from your side of the frontier."

"There are no ships there. None!" said ?1. "1! will let you know if any
concentration of their ships seems to be moving in your direction. Just a
little way off, there is a single ship of theirs. You can take that one."

"Farther off? Where?" asked Jim, for to the limit of the viewing of
AndFriend's instruments, no other vessel was being reported.

"Why, right there -nevermind!" said ?1.

Suddenly the space around AndFriend was filled with fireflies once more
and her screens, as well as Jim's view of the firmament from all sides of
the hull, showed the galaxy pinwheeling around them once again. Suddenly,
everything was stable once more.

"There!" said ?1.

And there, indeed, a two-person Laagi fighting ship was, fifty meters
away, completely within collision range, but floating as easily alongside
as if invisible bonds already bound it to AndFriend.

Jim's mind leaped at the controls and he put an instant, safe five
kilometers between his ship and the other one.

"What's wrong?" demanded ?1, puzzled.

"We might have collided!" said Jim. "It could have destroyed both ships."

"Naturally," said ?1 stiffly, "we would have seen that no such touching
occurred."

"No doubt," said Jim. "Let's just say that for the comfort of my own
personal sensibilities, I, prefer us at least this distance from them.
Now will you please tell them to follow us wherever we go?"

"We already have, naturally," said ?1. "We also ordered them not to do
anything unfriendly to your ship."

"Thank you," said Jim.

"You are, as you say, entirely welcome. Now, do you intend to make your
own way home with this companion ship, or shall we assist you in that
action, also?"

Jim thought. It had not occurred to him before, but getting safely out
around Laagi territory and back to Base might be greatly helped by having
?1 and his people along as guardians. On the other hand, sheer luck had
given him a considerable prize in the mind-people's reaction to seeing
the phase-shift in action. It might be better to act as if he did not
need any help. An idea occurred to him.

"What we're going to have to do," Jim said, "is go at right angles to the
direction by which we came here, until we're clear out of Laagi
territory. Then we'll turn and head straight out from the center of the
galaxy again until we get level with our area of space, which is beyond
the Laagi territory. If you and your friends would stay with us on the
first leg of the trip, at least until we were out of Laagi territory,
then if a number of their ships find us, you people could command them to
leave us alone."

There was a moment's pause, which Jim had come to understand indicated
that ?1's people were talking the matter over.

"Why don't you just reposition yourself directly at your home planet?" ?1
asked.

"Well," said Jim, "you see, there's a drawback to the phase-shifting
system, so far. Holes of all kinds have their limitations, as you know--

"Oh, yes indeed," said ?1.

"Yes. Well, one of the limitations in this instance is that the
mathematics required to figure out our destination point, even using the
best of hole-type means we can put in these ships to figure it out, has a
built-in percentage of error. The farther we have to go to a new position
in one shift, the greater that error becomes; until at a repositioning of
much over fifteen lightyears the possible error becomes as large as the
distance to the new position. That means, in practice, that if we shift a
distance of fifteen light-years in one jump, we could end up in a
position that would be as much as fifteen lightyears off from where we
want to be. The result is that we move in shifts, normally, of no more
than five light-years at a jump."

"It seems so clumsy and ridiculous," said ?1.

"It's both," put in Mary unexpectedly, "but there's nothing we can do
about it."

"I really don't understand. Why should there be error? If you can see
your destination out there, why not go straight to it?"

"Well, the fact is, we can't see it," said Jim. "We find it by using a
theoretical line running from our star to the center of the galaxy-'

Jim tried to explain human methods of navigation and found himself back
in the same tangle of misunderstandings and inability to understand on
?1's part that he had encountered in trying to explain phase-shifting.

"Nevermind!" said ?1 at last. "Just tell me this. You can't see your
star, you say?"

"See it? Of course not," said Jim. "It's somewhere between a hundred and
two hundred light-years from here."

"I can't believe such limitation in a people who can do what you do,"
said ?1. "I was simply going to ask you to point it out to me, and then
I'd tell you how to follow the pattern of forces that would lead you most
directly to it. But how do you intend to get to it if you can't see it?"

"That's what I was trying to explain to you just now," said Jim. "The
direct route would be up the line from our star to the center of the
galaxy-and the ship's instruments, which have kept track of each movement
and change of position it's made, can tell me where that is from here.
But if we find that and follow the direct line of it upgalaxy, we'll have
to run right through the center of Laagi space; and they'll be sure to
find us. So we want to go out and around."

"Please," said ?1, "take your ship to this centerline and I'll accompany
you."

"That's back to where we might nun into other Laagi ships," said Jim.

"If you do, we will protect you," said ?1. "Please, just take this hole
and your captive one to this line you talk about."

"All right," said Jim.

He made the calculations and the shift.

"Now," he said to ?1, when they had arrived, "we're on the line. Straight
out away from the galactic center, straight through the heart of Laagi
territory, brings us eventually to human space and about fifty
light-years farther on we come to our sun, a GO-type star."

"Can you indicate the line?"

"I can orient our ship along it."

Jim did.

"All right," said ?1, "looking out along the line the long axis of your
ship now indicates, I can see a GO-type star directly in line with it at
a distance of roughly-what is that barbarous form of measurement you
use-a hundred and twenty-three times the distance light travels in what
you concept as a 'year."'

"A year is the amount of time it takes for our planet to orbit its star."

"I see. That's a rather important planet you seem to inhabit if you're
planning on measuring the galaxy in terms of one motion of its local
dance-but, forgive me, as holes I mustn't hold you too accountable."

"We have other measurements. A parsec-"

"Please. One such clumsiness is enough. Moreover, it's beside the point.
Your ship is now pointed at your destination and you know how far away it
is. Make one shift to that destination. That will put you past and out of
Laagi space."

"And we'll probably," said Jim, "find ourselves a hundred and
twenty-three light-years away from that destination in some other
direction-or perhaps a multiple of a hundred and twenty-three
light-years-and possibly lost."

"If you do, I will direct you back to your star, helping you correct your
errors until you finally reach it. Do as I say. Shift a hundred and
twenty-three light-years."

"Too close," said Jim. "If by sheer bad luck we happen to end up right on
target, we could land in the center of the star itself."

"The center of a star has its interesting points. I have examined several
at odd times. You might find the center of this one worth looking at-this
once, anyway."

"No doubt," said Jim. "But our ship wouldn't; and the Laagi ship, to say
nothing of the Laagi inside her, wouldn't. I'll shift one hundred and
twenty-two light-years. Then we'll only run the random risk of error
putting us in the center of some other star."

He set the ship's equipment to calculating the jump.

"What are we waiting for?" asked ?1.

"The ship has to..." Jim found himself on the edge of another discussion
in which he would not possibly be able to explain mechanics to ?1.
"...get itself ready before it shifts. It just takes a matter of
minutes."

"I see. I am missing out on a considerable amount of dancing, with all
these delays. Forgive me. It's uncharitable of me to mention it."

"You're forgiven."

"Never in the history of our people has anything outside our own pursuits
been allowed to use up so much of our valuable time and attention."

"Sorry."

"One can hardly blame you. You're only holes after all; and your
understanding of the importance of dancing is limited-"

"We're ready to go," said Jim.

"Then by all means do so."

Jim shifted. This time ?1 stayed with him, but the Laagi ship
disappeared...

"We've lost them-" he was beginning, when they suddenly appeared
alongside.

"It slipped my mind to tell them where you were going, so they would go,
too," said ?1. "A minor oversight, which might have been complicated by
the fact that it was only I, speaking to them, alone. The error has now
been rectified."

Jim looked out from the hull. Sure enough, there-and larger to be seen on
his screens inside the ship-was a beautiful yellow sun.

"Home! And we hit it right on the nose!" he said happily. "I don't know
how to thank you, ?1."

"You can thank me and all of us by getting into communication with these
Laagi right away and explaining to them what they should do," said ?1.
"You've been... let us say, interesting-for two people who are
essentially no more than living holes. We may meet in the future.
Meanwhile, farewell!"

He disappeared.

"Jim!" It was Mary speaking urgently to him. "Look at the instruments!"

Jim looked. He stared.

"Laagi ships!" he said. "Two coming up at a hundred and forty by
thirty-two degrees from down-galaxy-and one coming from sixty-one by
ninety-seven degrees, from up-galaxy? How can that be, here in our own
territory? What's happened? Wait-"

He hastily checked the instruments.

"The spectrum's not right!" he burst out. "That's the wrong sun! And ?1's
already left us. ?1! ?1! Answer me, will you? Come back, ?1! You took us
to the wrong sun! ?1!!!"

An invisible firefly appeared in the center of AndFriend's cabin space.

"What do you mean, calling me back after all this?" demanded ?1. "And
what do you mean, I took you to the wrong star? I told you where the star
was on the line you gave me to look along, and that's the one you went
to."

"Well, it's not our sun. We had an error, just the way I warned you we
might!" said Jim. It just happened we landed near a sun that's almost a
duplicate of our own."

"Nonsense!" said ?1. "We went right out the line you indicated. I can
assure you of that, since, unlike you holes, I know where I am by
reference to the galactic pattern."

"Well, it's the wrong star, all the same," said Jim. "Not only that, but
there's three-no, there's four now, according to the instruments-Laagi
ships closing in on us fast. If you don't want to see all our plans
aborted, you'd better get your people here to command the Laagi aboard
those incoming ships to turn around and go away, before you do anything
else."

"Oh, my!" said ?1. "I can't, I absolutely can't intrude on the dance time
of so many of our people to help you again, after all the attention
they've already given you. Even if I did, most of them would probably
refuse to let themselves be interrupted like that once more."

"Then get us out of here, fast!"

"Why don't you just get out on your own?" demanded ?1.

"Because I don't know which way to go!" shouted Jim--or at least he would
have shouted, if he had had a voice to shout with. "All right, if you
won't help us, we'll simply make a blind jump away from here of at least
five light-years and try to figure how to get home after this. Obviously
your pattern-sensing can't be right, since this definitely is not Sol-our
star!"

"I tell you," said ?1 exasperatedly, "it's impossible for anyone not to
know where that person is by reference to the pattern. If you only had a
decent capability for sensing it, yourself, you'd see how ridiculous it
is to think you could get lost, anywhere in the galaxy-"

"No time to talk anymore," said Jim. "I'm programming the shift!"

"Very well. Act in a completely foolish manner-just a moment," said ?1,
"you did say your sun was a yellow GO-type star, on this line?"

"Yes! But so what, now? Those Laagi ships'll be in firing range in
seconds; and, judging by the way they're acting, whatever your people
told whoever's aboard our captive ship, it didn't stop them from letting
these others know they were being held prisoner, as soon as the others
got into instrument communication range. Those ships coming at us are out
for blood-"

"Ah, as it turns out," said ?1, "another sixty-one of your lightyears
farther out this line of yours there just happens to be another GO star
very much like this one..."

"What? Where? How far?"

"Sixty-'

"Nevermind. I heard you the first time. I'm setting up a shift for
another sixty light-year jump straight ahead, right now. In fact, we'll
jump it on rough calculations. Better to be in larger error at the far
end than take any more time-"

They shifted.

This time the Laagi ship that was their prisoner came with them. So did
?1. But this time Jim paid neither of them any attention. His view was on
the instruments panel, examining the spectra of the new yellow star that
now lay before them at a distance of less than a light year. ?1 had
evidently been rather cursory in his estimate of the distance; but once
again they had shifted to what, for practical purposes, was their exact
aiming point-which was something to think about when there should be time
to think about it. Two miracles of phase-shifting in a row became
suspiciously something more than miracles.

"It's all right," Jim announced. "Thank God. The spectrum checks. We're
home."


Chapter 27.

Jim spoke to an empty cabin. ?1 had not even stayed to say farewell, this
time, before departing.

Jim checked his instruments.

"There's Earth," he said. "Alarms'll be sounding all over the world right
now, seeing we've got a Laagi ship beside us. I'll give them a call."

Mary said nothing. Tine, what he had just said, himself, did not
particularly ask for comment, but he would have welcomed a word or two,
from which perhaps he might have judged how she was feeling. Evidently,
she was still angry with him for some reason-if angry was the word for
it. Oh, well...

"Base," he said through the ship's equipment in broadcast to that
location, "this is ship XN413, your lost baby from a far country. I'll
leave our location sounder on, so you can send out an escort to bring us
in. We've got a prisoner-he's harmless, so don't come loaded for bear-and
he'll need an escort. Also I need to talk to Louis One. Repeat... "

He ran through the broadcast several times. He had barely finished before
the first half-dozen fighter ships began to appear around him and began
to englobe AndFriend and her Laagi prisoner.

"Welcome home, XN413." A voice on the ship-to-ship circuit filled the
interior space of AndFriend. "Since we're being formal, this is XY1668,
Wing Cee for the pack you see around you. You want to slave to me and
we'll carry you in? How about your prisoner, is he slave to you-and is he
alive?"

"Very much alive. Handle with care," answered Jim. "Not, repeat not,
slaved to me, but will follow. I slave to you now. Give prisoner in
particular lots of room and drive regular. He'll follow. Land him, but do
not disturb further. Also do not disturb me after landing. You'll
probably get added orders on both of us from Base-but everything clear
for now?"

"Clear. Here we go."

The escort moved off, with AndFriend and the Laagi ship traveling as if
held in invisible bonds in the center of their formation.

"Mary?" said Jim softly, speaking mind to mind.

She did not answer.

"Mary?" he asked again, still softly.

"What is it?" Her voice was no longer cold, but neither was it warm. It
spoke to him with the remoteness of disinterest.

"We're home," said Jim. "This is your territory, again. How do we go
about getting back into our own bodies?"

"We'd better wait and see if they're ready to have us reenter, first.
Louis will be calling us, shortly, won't he?"

"I'd expect so," said Jim, knowing that short of death, nothing was going
to keep General Louis Mollen from being on the phone to them as soon as
he heard they were back.

"We'll have to ask him to check with wherever they've been maintaining
the bodies, and make sure the technicians there are ready for us to
reanimate them. When he gives us word they are, we can go ahead."

"How do we do it? I mean, how do we go about moving back into our
bodies?" Jim asked.

"When I was in Raoul's mind in La Chasse Gallerie," her voice still
sounded remote, disinterested, "after I found I couldn't move the ship by
myself and also I couldn't communicate with him any better, I finally
felt I was wasting my time there. Then I wanted to be back in my own
body, and as soon as I wanted to, I was. Evidence is that where you most
want to be, your identity is, remember how you got into AndFriend in the
first place? How you wanted to be with her, and so, you were."

"If you and I could just stay here in the ship, together, I'd want that,"
said Jim.

"Suit yourself," she said lightly. "As soon as we get word the bodies are
ready, I'll be leaving."

He did not try to say any more and she did not say anything. The
formation of ships proceeded Earthward at one gravity of acceleration,
reached midpoint, flipped end for end and decelerated, still at one
gravity. Time passed; and Earth became visible as a blue globe, though
still small, on AndFriend's close screen.

"-XN413, this is Louis One. XN413, This is Louis One. Are you hearing
me all right-"

"Hearing," said Jim. "Both of us."

"It's wonderful to hear you. Mary?"

"She's here, too," Jim said, since Mary could not talk aloud except
through him.

"Terrific! We'll save the talking until you're down. Anything you need
right away?"

"We've got some live Laagi in the other ship we brought in and the body
of a dead alien subspecies on board here. Be sure to note that the
atmosphere in both ships at landing will be that of the Laagi world."

"Right," said the general. "Anything else?"

"Tell Louis to have our bodies checked," said Mary. "Have the technicians
standing by for reentry."

Jim repeated her words aloud.

"Reentry when?"

"Tell him as soon as he can tell us they're ready for us, down there,"
said Mary clearly. "We don't have to wait until our transportation gets
there."

Jim repeated.

"Oh! I understand," Mollen said. "Hang on, then. I'll check on that and
be back to you as soon as I can. Shouldn't take more than a few minutes.
Hang on."

The voice of General Louis Mollen ceased.

"Mary?" said Jim.

She did not answer.

He dwelt in silence until Mollen's voice came back into
AndFriend.

"Ready at any time over in the body shop," said Mollen's voice.

"Thanks," said Mary.

"Thanks," said Jim.

"Mary," said Jim, on their private mind-to-mind level, "let me just tell
you something before you go. I just want to say I'll always remember this
crazy business of being just a couple of minds together all these months.
I learned a lot-"

He broke off. His words were sounding emptily to his own mind in the
hollowness of AndFriend's interior. Mary was already gone. Gone, he
realized now, from the moment she had answered Mollen's message that
their bodies were ready for reoccupancy. He had been talking to someone
who was no longer there.

Mentally, he shook his head. There was no reason for him to stay any
longer, either. He stepped out of AndFriend as he had stepped out of her
with ?1 and started toward the surface of Earth, and Base.

That face of Earth holding the North American continent was toward him
and the sensible thing was to go there in a direct line. But for some
reason, for old time's sake with the ?1 and his kind, Jim found himself
choosing to come in on his destination in a soft, looping curve. There
was no hurry in any case.

I must look like an invisible firefly myself, he thought, or would, if
there was another loose mind around to see me. It was a definite pleasure
to swoop along the curve he had chosen rather than go directly. He was
enjoying a last time of being out without a ship, without a body, without
anything but himself, alone with the stars.

He felt the pleasure of it... and, it came to him suddenly, after a
fashion he could actually feel the pattern of forces ?1 had talked so
much about. Certainly, he could feel the strong bar that was the pull
from the Sun; and, now that he was this close, the even stronger one from
Earth, like two threads of the celestial tapestry. It was strange,
although he could feel the one from the Earth to be stronger because he
was close to it, something in him recognized it as one of the most minor
of minor threads in the galactic warp; and he thought he could faintly
see some of the skeins from the other planets and even some from the
nearer stars.

And it was true what ?1 had said. It would be impossible to lose one's
way because even a piece of the warp implied the pattern of the whole.
Down-galaxy, the direction toward the mass of the galaxy's center was as
plain as if a street sign stood in the void, pointing to the midpoint of
all the great whirl of stars and dust and cosmic debris.

But, he was entering Earth's atmosphere now; and he said farewell-as ?1
had said it at least once-to the stars. Below was the continent he aimed
for, below were the mountains surrounding Base. Below was Base itself.

And then he was there. And the building, the room, the bed that held his
body, drew him to it, for-in another wayit, too, was part of a pattern.

It looked rather uncomfortable, his body, with all those tubes stuck into
it. But he would do something about that, just as soon as he was back
inside.

He slipped into it, and then he had moved the muscles that opened his
eyes and was looking up into the faces of people in white medical clothes
who stood staring down at him, as if he was some kind of Egyptian mummy
returned to life...

What followed turned out to be a long period of getting him and his body
back into operation together.

To begin with, although they had kept the body very carefully, and
cleaned it and fed it and turned it and even exercised it, it was out of
the habit of operating under its own power and it had lost not only
muscle strength, but the habit of use.

Added to that was the fact that, after having been a free mind with no
physical weight to clog his senses and weigh him down under gravity, he
had to learn to love his body all over again. That was not easy. His
first feeling, on finding himself in it, had been almost like that of a
child shut up in a closet.

He had felt trapped.

Grimly, he had fought that feeling down. A body was a great thing, he
told himself. Not only that, but it was a necessary thing. Stop. Think.
There were things possible to a body, smells and sights and touchings and
a whole host of others, of which the mind alone could not even conceive.

Also, although there might not be much importance to it now, somewhere
Mary was also back in her body; and only as another body could he ever
have anything to do with her again, however transiently.

So he told himself that his return to flesh was just what he wanted. He
did what the technicians told him, let himself be weaned from intravenous
feeding back through liquids to solid food, let himself be exercised
until he was able to take over the business of making his body exercise
by his own will. He worked his way up the long slope of effort against
the drag of gravity to being an ordinary human being again.

Just another hole-in top hole shape.

Mollen had been in to see him a number of times as he recovered; and of
course Jim had been debriefed by a large number of interviewers. These
had come, one at a time, of course, to stand at his bedside, or beside
his exercise bike, or walk and finally run beside him. They had emptied
him of every memory and thought he had had while he was gone, except
those he had kept private to himself; and he gathered, from Mollen as
well as from what reached him through the gossip channel of his attendant
technicians, that work was going busily forward with both the Laagi ship
and the two Laagi he and Mary had brought in. Squonk's body was never
mentioned, but he was sure that it, too, had been thoroughly investigated
with scalpel and microscope, by the time he was ready to walk out of the
building where they had kept his body.

By that time he was ready to accept Mollen's invitation to a full scale
wrap-up of the trip, in the general's office. It was to be a private
session with just Mollen-and, he hoped, Mary. He had not seen her since
he had reentered his own body, though when he asked about her he had been
told she had readjusted well. In fact, she had been up and around,
evidently, before he had been able to stand on his own feet. She was
someplace other than the rooms that they had him in. Naturally, they did
not tell him where.

The day finally came on which he left for good the building in which he
had regained his body, and headed for Mollen's office. It was one of
those sparkling clear mountain days in summer that he had used to love,
and now for the first time again he found himself appreciating the body
with which he responded to it. The major acting as receptionist in
Mollen's outer office was a trim, fortyish woman with light gray hair
whom he did not know.

"Colonel Jim Wander," he said. "The general's expecting me."

"Yes, Colonel. If you'll sit down for a moment..."

It turned out to be indeed only a moment. Which was just as well. The
receptionist's office, in a building that had not existed when Jim and
Mary had left the Base, was high-ceilinged but entirely within the
building and therefore without windows. Jim had become sensitive to being
enclosed since his return to his body. He got to his feet and put down
the magazine he had been holding open without really reading the print
before his eyes. He went into Mollen's private office.

Mollen's room had the same high ceiling but was easily four times as
large as the reception room. There was a floor-to-ceiling vision screen
on the wall to Jim's right. The other wall had a large painting which
made no sense to Jim but was probably something expensive for important
visitors to notice. Happily, however, the wall at the far end of the
room, opposite the door by which Jim had entered, was all one large
window with heavy floor-to-ceiling curtains drawn and tied back as far as
they would go on either side, taking away all of Jim's mild new
claustrophobia. In between him and the window was a lot of thick
carpeting, overstuffed chairs, bookcases, a bar, and a large desk a
couple of meters before the window and facing the room's entrance, a desk
behind which Mollen sat in another overstuffed chair.

Mary was there, too, but she was in one of the chairs that was to the
side of, but beyond Mollen's desk, closer to the window. She was in
civilian clothes, wearing a gray-green dress, and her chair was so angled
that she looked out of the window. Her face was turned away so that Jim,
after all these days, could not see it. Mollen had swiveled his own chair
around and was talking to her as Jim entered. He swiveled back to face
Jim; but Mary did not turn.

"Sit down, sit down, Jim!" said Mollen. He waved Jim to a chair in front
of and facing the desk. Jim sat, frustrated to be forced into a position
where Mary's face was still hidden from him.

"Well," said Mollen, "you're looking well. I hope you're feeling as
good."

"As holes go, I can't complain," said Jim.

Mollen laughed.

"Yes," he said, "I've read the results of your debriefings on the
mind-people. Sobers me up to realize all I am to them is a hole in the
continuum. Still, the human race has got on that way for millions of
years, so I suppose we'll continue to struggle along in the same fashion.
You two did a marvelous job out there. Better by a long shot than
anything we expected. You come back not only with new worlds for us and
the means to a way of dealing with the Laagi, but with news of another
race yet, and a couple of Laagi prisoners to work with."

"How're they doing?"

"Just fine," said Mollen. "We've got them in a separate building in
pretty much the same kind of set-up we had your ship and La Chasse
Gallerie in Mary's lab. We sweated a little over how to keep them fed.
But we made a guess they might be able to subsist on the same thing your
little friend Squonk was fed in that hospital. We built a special room
around the entry port of their ship, flooded it with the same sort of
atmosphere that was in your ship, and left a container with some of the
original cubes you'd brought along for Squonk, plus some we'd made up
after analyzing one of the cubes."

"You were able to duplicate them?" asked Jim.

"Oh, yes. Chemically, at least. Of course, God knows what our version
tastes like to a Laagi; but we knew the two in the ship were watching us
outside their hull with their ship's instruments; and, sure enough, after
we'd left them alone for a while with the extra room and the two
containers of cubes, one of them ventured out, picked up the container of
original cubes, plus one of the duplicates we'd made and took it all back
inside. Evidently our version went down all right; because they
eventually came out, got the rest of our cubes and ate them."

"Not a very happy life, being prisoners," said Jim. He looked over at the
back of Mary's head, but it did not move and she did not say a word.

"No. But then you can't expect it to be," answered Mollen. "We're making
good progress toward being able to talk with them, using that notion you
passed on in your debriefing, by the way, Jim. You know, the idea of one
of us with a picture box strapped to his chest showing the image of a
Laagi; and whoever it is speaks to a Laagi and the picture box translates
his words into the image in the box, making the body movements that
translate his words."

"And you're close to this, already?" asked Jim.

"Close, no," answered Mollen. "I said it was a final goal, and it is. But
right now we're still working to really grasp that body language of
theirs. You've heard of the 'third language' technique?"

"No," said Jim.

"Essentially, it means that if you've got two people, neither of whom can
possibly ever speak the other's language, you invent a third language
they can both speak. It's an outgrowth of the invented languages we were
teaching chimpanzees and other animals as far back as the twentieth
century, in order to communicate with them. There was a sign language,
and a language of symbols different researchers used with different
animals, and so forth.... Well, that's what we're trying to develop to
use with our two Laagi, a third language."

"And it can be done?" Jim asked.

"It can be done if both sides have enough elements in common. For
example, as I say, it worked with chimpanzees and dogs and elephants and
a few others, but they've never been able to make it work with cetaceans
like dolphins and killer whales. Too different environmentally. We're
just lucky that the Laagi've developed a technological civilization not
too different from ours. We may not think the way they do, but we've got
enough problems in common-like how to get from one star system to another
by spaceship."

"They're already talking about space flight with the Laagi?'

"Nowhere near that, yet, I'm afraid. First we had to build a sort of
Laagi-instrument, in line with your idea. The technicians came up with a
picture of a Laagi figure that could be made to make body movements the
way they do. The movements were made by punching specific keys on a
keyboard below the picture. Then we built a transparent section into the
wall of the room we'd added around the Laagi port; and set the instrument
up outside the window with a human operator seated at it, punching keys
and making the figure move. Meanwhile, we were trying to isolate from the
pictures you'd brought back of Laagi talking to each other at least a few
body-movement words that our prisoners would recognize as attempts by us
to talk to them."

"You're using pictures from whatever got stuck to Squonk's tentacle, I
suppose," said Jim. He glanced over at Mary. But she still had not moved.
Her face was still, hidden from where he sat, and there was no sign she
was even listening to the conversation.

"That's right," said Mollen, "we've got pictures of nearly every place
you went in that city. The first big step was breaking the arm and body
movements down into something roughly equivalent to action-units inside a
given three-dimensional space, action-units small enough so that we could
be sure each was all, or part of, no more than a single signal, you
follow me?"

"No," said Jim.

"The point was to get down to the basic building blocks of their body
language. Where there were simultaneous movements of more than one part
of the body, that was taken into account, too, but one way or another,
all recorded body signals were listed and compared-thank God for thinking
machines-then handed back to us in order of frequency, related to the
conditions and situations under which they were being used, and so
forth."

"I figured something like that would have to be done," said Jim. "It must
have been a big job."

"It was," said Mollen. "But, little by little, the technicians began to
pile up associations. You know-this movement goes with beginning to speak
to someone else, this one with ending a conversation with that person.
This one goes with greeting someone; this, with leaving an individual. Et
cetera. And from all this we put together what should have meant 'we want
to talk to you.' We gave the Laagi a screen and keyboard in their outside
room hooked to the screen and keyboard they could see through the window
of that room, then had a technician sit down at the keyboard and type out
'we want to talk to you'.

"Where were the Laagi at this time?" asked Jim.

"In their ship, of course," said Mollen. "Where they'd gone the minute we
sent men in space suits in to set up the screen and keyboard for them.
But we figured they'd be watching on their inside screens what went on in
the outer room we'd made for them. Anyway, the technician kept sending
the same message over and over."

"What finally happened, sir?"

"One of the Laagi came out to the keyboard and screen in their outer
room, spent several hours learning which keys to punch, and finally sent
back a message we couldn't understand."

"And the techs were stuck."

"No, because they figured on that happening. They sent another message.
This one said, 'we want to talk to you with these,' and the screen showed
some of the symbols for the artificial language they'd set up as the best
bet to try to bridge the communication gap between us and the Laagi. The
two of them took to the idea like ducks to water; and from there on it's
been like teaching an artificial language to an animal-but a very smart
one, of course."

"And this worked?" Jim said.

"After a fashion. The artificial language's very limited, of course you
could guess that much. But now the technicians've been able to begin
adding in movements of the Laagi figure where the symbols wouldn't convey
precisely what we wanted, or they thought they understood a Laagi
movement well enough to use it in something like the way it should be
used. The Laagi caught on, as you might expect, and started correcting
our errors; and from then on it's been progress."

"How much progress?" asked Jim.

"We're just beginning to learn to talk to them, still, of course," said
Mollen. "Nobody knows how long it'll take; but I must say those two Laagi
are cooperating. When one leaves the keyboard the other sits down at it."

"Of course," said Jim.

"Why 'of course'?" asked Mollen curiously.

"Because they live to work. I told the debriefer that and Mary must have
told hers the same thing. If you'd left them there much longer as simple
prisoners with nothing to do, they'd probably have died. Now you've given
them some reason to live."

"At any rate," said Mollen, "it's just a matter of time until we can
really talk with them. Then the big job starts."

"Getting them to understand that there's no point in both our races
exhausting themselves in a war that'll do neither of us any good?" asked
Jim.

Mollen looked him over.

"You've been thinking about this," he said.

"I've had months to do it in," said Jim. "Learning to communicate with
the Laagi is one thing. Getting them to see things the way we see things
is something that may never be done."

"You? Pessimistic?" said Mollen. "That's a change."

"I'm not pessimistic. Just realistic. We had trouble getting humans to
agree with humans before this war with the Laagi started and we all had
to work together. And the Laagi think a lot more differently from the way
we do than any fellow human ever did. Also, they're not likely to change
the way they think because of anything we can tell them. The most we can
hope to do is sell them something."

"Sell them something?" Mollen stared at him. "Jim, what makes you so sure
about all this?"

"?1 and his little friends," said Jim. "With one race of aliens to deal
with, it's possible to make a whole lot of false assumptions. With two,
it's possible to see from the bad guesses they make about each other
where we could be making a bad guess or two about either one of them."

"Those mind-people you ran into?" said Mollen. "Mary told us all about
them."

"With all due respect to Mary," said Jim, looking at the unmoving back of
her head, "I think she'll agree that while she's the expert with the
Laagi, I'm the expert with the mindpeople-in fact she said so once.
Didn't you, Mary?"

"He's right," said Mary, without moving. "You should listen to him,
Louis."

"I'll listen to anyone; but you'd be high on the list in any case," said
Mollen, throwing his heavy body back in his padded chair, so that the
chair creaked and tilted slightly away from the desk. "What're you
saying?"

"That I think the best we can hope to get out of being able to
communicate with the Laagi is to offer them a deal where we help them to
find the worlds they need so that they'll temporarily suspend trying to
take over our world."

"Oh-that," said Mollen. "The business of giving them worlds in the
mind-people's sector that you arranged with the mind-people."

"It's far from arranged," said Jim. "We can easily overlook the fact that
the Laagi aren't built to give up on trying to take our world for living
room for themselves; and we're just as likely to assume that what the
mind-people agree to today they'll still be in agreement with tomorrow.
Both those notions about another race can be traps because they're based
on the way we think ourselves, not the way the other race thinks."

"I don't think I follow you." Mollen's thick eyebrows came together.

"Remember how we used to wonder why a single Laagi ship would sometimes
attack a whole wing of our fighters when it ran into them; while at other
times a whole wing of them would turn and run from one ship of ours under
practically the same conditions?"

"Yes. What about it?"

"The answer was simple. I'll him, Mary."

Mary said nothing.

"All right," said Jim. "I'll tell you, then. In both cases the drivers of
the Laagi vessels were doing what they'd been told to do, not what reason
would dictate they do."

"But that's stupidity!" said Mollen. "They're too bright to be that
stupid."

"No, it's not stupidity. It's a whole world of difference in thinking. If
they'd been told to use their own judgment, they'd have done so. But in
the cases I'm talking about they'd simply been given a general order.
What they did was no different from a human following orders even when he
personally disagrees with them-with one exception. It's only under
certain conditions that a Laagi allows himself to disagree on any
subject; and one of those conditions isn't when he's at work. And what
holds true for a Laagi individual holds true for the whole race. What I'm
saying is that the Laagi could very well take a million habitable worlds,
if we had that many to give them and still keep on trying to conquer
humanity so they could have Earth."

"Why?" demanded Mollen.

"Because getting Earth was something they started out to do. It was a job
they started and haven't finished."

"You're telling me," said Mollen, "that even though events proved what
they'd been doing wasn't necessary, they'd. keep right on doing it?"

"That's what I'm saying, General. Finishing a job isn't something a Laagi
reasons about. It's something that's built into the primitive part of
their brains-just like a territorial response is built into us humans.
It's so deep in us, we react to it according to the patterns of our
various cultures, without even realizing why we stand a certain distance
apart when we talk, why we avoid looking or deliberately look into the
eyes of people when we talk to them. Built into the Laagi is the fact
that there's no reason for his existence unless it involves doing work of
one kind or another. And a job's not abandoned until it's finished. Any
unlimited number of Laagi may have to be used up finishing it; but
whatever the job needs to get it done, it's going to get. They're a race
that never quits and never backs up, because they can't."

"Man!" said Mollen, "you're telling me we can never make peace with
them."

"That's right," said Jim. "Never."

"All right," said Mollen. "Then you tell me. What're we supposed to do?"

"We can't make peace with them as they are now," said Jim. "But maybe we
can arrange an indefinite pause in hostilities that just happens to last
until they develop a different attitude-and that'll take generations.
We've got to use the fact that the mind-people are there as leverage on
the Laagi to keep the indefinite pause going, while at the same time we
use the presence of the Laagi to make the mindpeople keep their promises
to us and the Laagi."

"And how do you plan to do that?"

"Set ourselves up," said Jim, "to the Laagi as the only force that keeps
the mind-people from stopping them from working; and to the mind-people
as the only people who can talk to the Laagi and explain how they mustn't
get in the way of the art that the mindpeople are spending the lifetime
of their race developing-and it actually is one hell of an art, General.
It may turn out to be greater than all our arts put together."

"All right," said Mollen; and while there was nothing in the general's
tone to give it away, Jim had the uncomfortable feeling that Mollen was
humoring him. "You want to set up a sort of triangular, three-race
agreement that makes both the Laagi and the mind-people do what we want,
out of a combination of benefit and fear. Assuming you could show each of
those races reasons to act that way to each other, why would they want
humans in on the deal? What do they need us for, anyway?"

"As interpreters," said Jim.


Chapter 28.

"Interpreters?" Mollen was frowning, but Jim no longer seemed to read any
inclination to humor Jim in the general's voice.

"That's right," said Jim. "Stop and think about it. We can talk to the
Laagi-just barely, so far, but we can talk. And we can talk to the
mind-people, but as far as mutual understanding goes, what we have there
is just barely, too."

"Right. What about it?" asked Mollen.

"But the mind-people and the Laagi can't talk to each other at all. It's
worse for them-much worse than the problems you mentioned they had with
teaching artificial languages to dolphins. The Laagi and the mind-people
don't have anything in common-no common ground at all. The only way
they'll be able to communicate is through us humans."

"Go on," said Mollen.

"For example, we've got bodies and a technological civilization, at
least, in common with the Laagi. And now we've got the ability to move
around as free minds, thanks to Raoul Penard, in common with the
mind-people. There's other things on both sides. We've got a work
ethic-not one as basically ingrained as the Laagi have, but we've got one
in common with them. We've got a concept of art, which is expressed
entirely differently from what the mind-people express in their
'dancing,' but at least we can begin to understand how they could be that
attached to the dancing. What do you want to bet that one of the concepts
we'll never be able to get across to the Laagi, even when we come to be
able to talk with them pretty well, will be the concept of an art?"

"That's all well and good," grunted Mollen, "but what happens when the
Laagi learn to free their minds from their bodies the way Raoul, you and
Mary've done? Once they do that they can talk directly to the
mind-people. And since, according to your information on the debriefings,
the mind-people talk mind to mind directly and can be understood directly
that way, the Laagi'll be able to make their own agreements with them."

"Well, to begin with," said Jim, "I don't think, unless and until they
develop a much larger attitude toward existence than they have now, that
the Laagi are going to be able to get any of their minds free of their
bodies. Our experience is you have to want pretty badly to leave your
body before you can do it; and for a Laagi to do it, if one of them moved
his mind out of his body, on the instinctive level he'd be abandoning the
only tool with which he can do the work that justifies his existence."

"But suppose one of them did manage it?" said Mollen. "They could deal
directly with the mind-people then."

"I don't think so," answered Jim. "So many of their concepts would be
incomprehensible to the mind-people, and so many of the mind-people's
concepts would be incomprehensible to them, that both sides would be
hearing mainly blanks when they tried to talk to each other. Mary and I
just barely managed to establish an understanding with the mind-people
and they'd already had Raoul to practice on; plus, as I say, we've got a
lot in common with them that Laagi don't have, that the Laagi can't have,
without violating their own picture of the universe. Can you imagine
yourself trying to describe a symphony to a Laagi, as I say?"

"But what we call art isn't really what the mind-people are concerned
with," said Mollen.

"No. But it's close enough to their dancing so that it gave Mary and me a
concept in common with them, even if we both used it to mean largely
different things. It gave us something to build our communication on,"
said Jim. "Mat's the point I'm trying to make. We're like enough to the
mind-people so that there's something there for us to build on. And like
enough to the Laagi to have something to build on there, too. But I can't
see anything the Laagi or the mind-people have in common, enough so that
their two races could build a communication on it. But even assuming it
turns out I'm wrong and they can, they're still both going to communicate
better with us than they do to each other; which still gives us a chance
to mediate between them."

"Mary?" said Mollen, looking over at her.

"I'm sorry, Louis," her voice came back at him, "but I'm afraid he's
right, at least as far as the way the Laagi seem to look at things. Of
course, we've really only scratched the surface of getting to know about
them, so far. But if I had to go on what I know so far, I'd have to say
he's right."

"I see," said Mollen. His face had become thoughtful. "By God, if you
actually are right and the human race can act as a broker between two
other races like that... "

His eyes, which had been focusing thoughtfully on nothing, came suddenly
and sharply back on Jim.

"Even if it's possible, there's the question of how to do it, what to
offer who," he said. "Which brings me back to one point, Colonel. You
weren't sent out with any authority to go making treaties or arrangements
with races we'd never met before. What do you mean threatening these
mind-people with the possibility that the Laagi, or even we, could move
stars? That's the wildest piece of impossibility anybody ever offered
anybody else!"

"With due respect, sir," said Jim. "I was on my own out there and had to
do something right away. I had to play it by ear. Also, why don't we
check with some of the people who'd know about such things? We're an
engineering race; and so are the Laagi. Sooner or later, we've been able
to move anything we tried to move; and the Laagi've been comparable to us
in all sorts of other ways. You might just suggest to the people you talk
to on this that we look into the possibility of moving a star by using
phase-shift physics on it. You know it takes only as much energy to shift
a command ship as a fighter ship; and once the shift is set up and
activated, no more force is needed to move either one of them ten
light-years than ten inches, because in effect, in a physical sense, no
mass has been moved-it's just been defined as having a different position
in the universe. Why shouldn't we be able to do the same thing with a
star?"

Mollen looked fiercely at him.

"Do you know what a box of demons you're proposing to open?" he said. "If
it became possible to move a star-or a planet-any place you wanted it,
you'd have... I'm not even going to try to speculate on what you might
have!"

"Well, maybe it's not possible, particularly in practice. Or maybe
there'd be too high a price to pay for moving it. But I thought it was
something that could be mentioned to the experts as a possibility,
anyhow. Besides, we don't really want to move any suns about. In fact,
I've got a hunch that as we come to understand what the mind-people call
the dance of the holes in the galaxy, we may not want to disturb that
dance under any circumstances because of what might result. All we really
want to do is have the mind-people considering that we-or the Laagi-might
eventually be able to do such a thing."

"Oh, of course," said Mollen. "Well, now, if that winds up the
firecrackers you've got to set off under my nose today, let me give you
some idea of what you'll be doing from here on out. You and Mary are
going to be working separately from now on-"

"If you'll forgive me for interrupting, sir," said Jim, "just one more
firecracker."

"One more?" Mollen stared at him. "Nothing on the order of what you just
hit me with, I hope."

"It might be," said Jim apologetically. "In fact, it might be even
bigger."

"Holy Jerusalem!" Mollen threw himself back in his chair. "All right. Go
on!"

"The mind-people can't get lost anyplace in the galaxy, evidently," said
Jim. "Maybe they can't get lost anyplace in the universe, but I don't
really know about that. But they're definitely oriented anyplace in our
galaxy because they see what they call the 'pattern' of gravitic forces
set up around them, at least, by the larger bits of matter like stars and
planets, and maybe right on down to dust fragments. It's that pattern
they weave their 'dances' around and they can use it as well to find
their way from anywhere to anywhere. Also, they seem to be able to see
things of any size at light-years of distance, possibly across the whole
width of the galaxy."

"Can they?" said Mollen. He stared at Jim for a second. "That's
something, if true. All right, I'll give you credit for having had
another firecracker equally big up your sleeve. Now-"

"I'm not finished yet, sir," said Jim. "The firecracker's yet to come. I
think we can learn to see that same pattern, too. That means we could
give up this business of navigating by a theoretical line to the center
of the galaxy's mass, and phaseshift any distance in one jump, hitting
our target point right on the nose."

Mollen simply looked at him for a long moment.

"I'm afraid to ask," he said at last. "But I will. What makes you think
that if there actually is such a pattern, we can see and use it, too?"

"Because both when the mind-people took Mary and me dancing and when I
came in from AndFriend to Base, I thought I could see the pattern around
me. Particularly, coming in from AndFriend to my body, I could see or
feel-it's hard to describe what the perception of it's like-the threads
or skeins or whatevers from the Sun and Earth, in particular."

"I think," said Mollen, "I'm going to want to have the psych people look
you over and give me a certificate of sanity on you; not only for my own
use, but to have in hand before I pass along to anyone higher up these
things you've been suggesting. Mary, did you see anything like this
pattern he's talking about?"

"Not coming back into Base from AndFriend," she answered. "But during the
dance with ?1 and the others, I thought I did."

"So it could really exist. As to seeing it better, and maybe in the long
run using it to navigate the stars... "

Mollen threw up his hands in the air.

"Even if you've got something more up your sleeve," he said to Jim,
"don't tell me. Save it for the next time. Let's go on a little longer
pretending it's business as usual. What was I just about to tell you when
you sprang this last surprise package on me? Oh, yes. You and Mary are
going to have to work separately

"I don't think that'd be the wisest idea, General," said Jim. "I'd like
to have Mary with me."

"No," said Mary.

"You can't have her," said Mollen.

They had spoken almost in chorus, so promptly had the negative responses
come from both of them.

"You see, what needs to be done just as soon as one of those Laagi you're
teaching to communicate reaches the point where he can understand when we
tell him why we're doing something," said Jim, ignoring what both of them
had just said, "is for Mary and me to take him back into the territory of
the mind-people and introduce the two races to each other with us
translating. Start the ball rolling early, in effect."

"I told you if you had anything more up your sleeve to keep it there,"
said Mollen. "Not only that, but you just heard the answer to your
continuing to work with Mary. It was 'no.'"

"Let me talk to him, Louis," said Mary, still facing away from Jim. "Jim,
whatever you might come up with in the way of plans, I'm not going to be
part of them. That's because I don't want to be part of them, or
connected with you in any way."

"Come to think of it, I just thought of something I have to step out of
the office to take care of," said Mollen. "I'll be back in a minute."

"No, Louis. Please stay," said Mary. "I want you to hear this, too, even
though you know what I'm going to say. Jim-"

Jim half rose from his chair.

"Sit down, Colonel," said Mollen. "And listen."

Jim sat down.

"This isn't easy; but it has to be said." Mary's voice came to his ears
strangely from her turned-away face. Somehow the fact that she spoke with
the back of her head turned to him put an unnatural distance between
them. "Jim, listen to me. I've explained this to Louis and he
understands. I'm not a nice person. I never have been, and I never will
be. I felt for you when we had to put you through those months of hell to
get you to where you wanted AndFriend more than anything else on Earth;
and while we were out together in this last trip, I came as close to...
enjoying being close to another human being as I ever have with any other
person in my life. But it's no good."

"Mary," said Jim, "if you'll listen for a second-"

"No. It's your turn now to sit and listen to me," said Mary. "The trouble
is we're two different people. Worse than that, we're the wrong kinds of
two different people, too wrong to ever get along. I'm what I am, and
you-you're an idealist. You're even worse than that. You're an idealist
who insists on acting as if his ideals were reality. You're so caught up
in seeing the universe as if through rose-colored glasses that you're
going to change the universe's color to rose, if necessary, to make it
so. Well, that sort of thing doesn't work, particularly with people.
Sooner or later you'll run up against reality as it actually is: and
since you can't back down-in your own way you're as stiff-necked as I am,
or Squonk was, in his own fashion-you'll go right on refusing to believe;
and the reality'll kill you. If I let myself stay around you, what would
happen would kill me, too. And I don't want that."

"Mary... " Jim got to his feet again; and again Mollen rose from behind
his desk.

"Colonel," he said. "You stay where you are. The lady wants it that way."

"I'm sorry, Jim, but I do want it that way." The back of Mary's head was
immovable. "You don't believe me, do you?"

"No," said Jim. "Because it's not true."

"It is. Oh, it is." Mary's voice was bitter. "You don't see even what's
right under your nose. Instead, you shift it around until it suits you;
and you're so good at it you don't even know you're doing it, most of the
time."

"No," said Jim. "If anyone sees things to suit herself, it's you. You're
so determined to justify the shell you built up around you that you'll
cut off your nose to spite your face."

"Yes," said Mary, "that's the way you'd work it, wouldn't you? You'd
blame it on me, instead of yourself. Well, it doesn't matter. I've told
you what I set out to tell you. I won't work with you. I don't want to
see you again, and I don't want you to try to see me."

"You don't want me to try to see you-" Jim began to walk toward her and
Mollen moved to get in the way. But while the will to stop Jim physically
if necessary was there in the general, there was also the knowledge of
the twenty years between them that left no doubt that if Jim really
intended to force his way in to face Mary, the other man could not stop
him. And he did so intend-both he and Mollen knew it.

Mary saw Mollen moving to intercept Jim and knew it, too.

"All right," she said. "If you won't be warned, you'll have to find out
the hard way. Out in the ship you told me you'd put together an image of
my face in your mind. Let him come, Louis-was this the face, Jim?"

Mollen stood aside and Jim reached her, just as she rose and turned. He
looked down into her face, and there it was, with the same blue eyes, the
same reddish blond hair, the straight lines at the side of the face
coming in to the small, square jaw-just as it had been ever since he had
walked into Mollen's office and seen her there for the first time in
shipwear coveralls.

He frowned, letting out his breath in one great gush of relief.

"Thank God!" he said. "I thought something terrible must have happened to
your body while we were gone-not that that would make any difference now
that I know you mind to mind. But what're you talking about? You look the
same way you always have; even if I never really did get around to seeing
it properly until I had to put that picture of you back together in my
mind, out between the stars. You're still the most beautiful woman I've
ever seen."

She stared up at him. She stared for a long, long moment. Then, slowly,
her mouth crinkled at the corners, and the crinkles spread their way out
into a wide smile that made her look, Jim thought, even more lovely. She
threw back her head and began to laugh; and Jim found himself laughing
with her. They laughed together until, at last, still gazing into each
other's eyes, they gradually sobered.

"I am now," she said.

She put her arm through his, still smiling.

"Forgive me, Louis," she said. She turned, still arm in arm with Jim, and
they went out together.
